University of Kashmir

BOQ
For
CIVIL / STRUCTURE WORKS
At

UNIVERSITY OF KASHMIR

Architects:

ANA – Design Studio Pvt. Ltd.

3rd Floor, 26 C/1,Khizrabad
Opp. New Friends Colony,
New Delhi-110025
 No: - F(UCD-T.D.)KU/12
Dated:-____/_____/2013
Form No. ( )

Tender documents for:-

1) Construction of ______________________________________________________________
is hereby issued to
M/s___________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
R/o_________________________________________________________________________
having Reg. No. _____________________________ PAN __________________________ against
payment as document fee of Rs. /= (Non Refundable) deposited in Bank vide
G.R. No.__________________ Dated _______________. The date of receipt of tender document is
_________________ up to 2:00 p.m.

Sd/-
Executive Engineer

Executive Engineer,
Construction Division,
University of Kashmir,
Srinagar.

Tender for:-

_________________________________________________________________________________
Sir,
I M/s ____________________________________________________________________________ S/o /Prop.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
R/o ________________________________________________________________an approved registered authorized dealers/
manufactures bearing Registration No.____________________________ and PAN ________________________ do hereby
tender for the work. I have already read the Tender notification No. _____________________Dated __________________
and will abide by all rules and regulations well as for execution of works shall also be binding upon me with which I am fully
conversant.

CONTRACTOR
(With Seal and Signature)
Cell No.
 Appendix-I
REFERECE TO CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

Name of Work: Construction of Double Storied Arts Block at Leh

Campus, University of Kashmir

1. Accepting Authority The Vice-Chancellor

University of Kashmir

2. Completion cost of the civil work Rs. 548.00 Lacs (Five Hundred Forty
Eight Lacs)

3. Earnest Money Rs. 10.96 Lacs

(Ten Lacs and Ninety Six Thousand)

4. Bill Deposit 4.00 % of the Contract Value (2.00% of

CDR + 2.00% Bill Deposit).

5. Time allowed for execution of Twelve Working Months from the date of
work start as per letter of intent/allotment.

6. Penalty for delay caused by the Rs. 2000/- per day subject to the
contractor maximum of 5.00% of Contract Value

7. Defective Liability period One year from the date of actual

completion.

8. Interim bills Payments will be released only when

work done is more than 20.00 Lacs.

9. Court of Jurisdiction. Jammu and Kashmir.

 University of Kashmir

General Conditions of Contract

For
CIVIL / STRUCTURE WORKS
At

UNIVERSITY OF KASHMIR

Architects:

ANA – Design Studio Pvt. Ltd.

3rd Floor, 26 C/1,Khizrabad
Opp. New Friends Colony,
New Delhi-110025
 Section 01:
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS

1. Definitions

In the Contract following words and expressions shall have meanings hereby assigned to
them, except where the context otherwise requires

1.1 The Contract documents consist of the notice inviting tenders, the Agreement between the
Owner/Client and the Contractor, the General Conditions of Contract, Specifications, the
Drawings, Schedule of Quantities and relevant correspondence including all modifications
thereof incorporated in the documents before their execution.

1.2 "Owner/Client/Employer” means UNIVERSITY OF KASHMIR on whose behalf tenders are

invited and includes its successors, assigns and legal and authorized representatives.

1.3 "Contractor” means the person, firm or company whether incorporated or not, employed as
Contractor by the Employer for undertaking the works and shall include the Contractor's
legal and authorized representatives, successors and permitted assigns.

1.4 "Sub-Contractor" means the person, firm or company to whom any part of the Contract has
been sublet by the Contractor with the written consent of the Owner/Client/ Site Engineer
and includes the Sub-Contractor's legal and authorized representatives, successors and
permitted assigns.

1.5 "Nominated Sub-contractor" refers to those specialists, tradesmen and others, nominated by
the Architect or the Owner/Client/ Executive Engineer for executing special works or
supplying special equipment or materials, for which provisional sums are included in the
Contracts. Such agencies shall be deemed to have been employed by the Contractor.

1.6 "Architect" means the Architect named in the tender or in the event of his ceasing to be the
Architect for the purpose of this Contract, for whatever reasons, such other person, firm or
Company as the Owner/Client may nominate for the purpose.

1.7 "Executive Engineer” shall mean to include any person, agency or assigns who are appointed
by UNIVERSITY OF KASHMIR To work on their behalf to execute the subject work or in the
event of their ceasing to be the Executive Engineers for the purpose of this Contract, for
whatever reasons, such other person, firm or Company as the Owner/Client may nominate
for the purpose. "Owner/Clients Representative" means any person authorized by the
Owner/Client to act on his behalf.

1.8 Site Engineer is the designated representative of the Executive Engineers.

1.9 "Contract Sum" means

In the case of item rate contracts (as in this contract), the total cost
of the works arrived at after extension of the quantities shown in the Bills of
Quantities by the rates quoted by the bidders for the responsive items.

1.10 "Work" means the work to be executed in accordance with the Contract.

1.11 "Constructional Plant" means all plant, tools, tackles, appliances or equipment, implements,
scaffolding of whatever nature required for the execution of the works but does not include
materials, equipment or other things intended to form part of the works.

1.12 "Temporary Works" means all temporary works of every kind required for the execution of the
works by the Contractor.

1.13 "Specifications" means the specifications annexed to or issued with the tender and any
modifications thereof or additions there to as may from time to time be furnished or approved
in writing by the Site Engineer.

1
 1.14 "Drawings" means the drawings referred to in the specifications and any modifications
of such drawings or such other drawings as may be from time to time be furnished or
approved in writing by the Owner/Client/Executive Engineer.

1.15 "Site" means the lands and other places on, under, in or through which the works are to be
executed or carried out and any other lands or places provided by the Owner/Client or used
for the purpose of the Contract.

1.16 "Approved" means approved in writing including subsequent written confirmation of previous
verbal approval.

1.17 "Un-expected Risks" are risks due to riots (otherwise than among Contractor's employees) and
civil commotion (in so far as both these are uninsurable), war (whether declared or not),
invasion, act of foreign enemies, hostilities, civil war, rebellion, insurrection, military or
usurped power, an act of Government, an act of God, such as lightening, unprecedented
floods, tornado, and damage from aircraft.

1.18 "Writing" means any manuscripts, typewritten or printed statement under or over signature
and/ or seal as the case may be.

1.19 "Written Notice" shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the
individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is
intended, or if delivered at and a written delivery receipt obtained or sent by registered mail to
the last business known to him, who gives the notice.

1.20 "Month" means English Calendar month. "Day" shall mean a calendar day of 24 hours each.

1.21 "Working Day" shall mean any day from Monday to Saturday (both days inclusive) excluding
all Public Holidays as notified by the University of Kashmir.

1.22 "Completion" shall mean that the works have been completed in every respect in conformity
with the Contract Documents and are ready and fit for occupation/ commissioning

1.23 "Approved Equal" shall mean an alternative product/ service approved by the Architect
/Executive Engineer as equivalent to that specified in the Contract Documents.

1.24 Completion Date" means the scheduled date for completion of the Works as set forth in the
Agreement between the Owner/Client and Contractor, as the same may be extended pursuant
to the provisions under General Conditions of contract.

2.0 Singular and Plural

Words importing singular number shall also include plural and vice versa where the context
so requires.

3.0 Headings and Marginal Notes

The headings and marginal notes in these conditions are for the purpose of facilitating
reference and shall not be deemed to be part thereof or taken into consideration in the
interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.

4.0 Language

4.1 All documentation and correspondence in respect of this Contract shall be in the English
language.

5.0 Scope and Intent

5.1 The general character and the scope of work is illustrated and defined by the signed Contract
Documents herewith attached.

2
 5.2 The Contractor shall carry out and complete the said work in every respect in
accordance with the Contract, and with the directions of and to the satisfaction of the
Owner/Client/Executive Engineer.

5.3 The Contract documents are complimentary and cumulative, and what is called for by and
one shall be binding as if called for by all. The intention of the documents is to include all
labor and materials, equipment and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the
work (excepting those materials and equipment listed separately which are supplied by the
Owner/Client). Materials of Work described in words which so applied have well known
technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards as applicable.

5.4 The Owner/Client/Executive Engineer may, from time to time and through the appointed
Architect, issue further supplementary drawings and/or written instructions, details and
directions and explanations, which are collectively referred to as Executive Engineer’s
Instructions. The Contractor shall forthwith comply with and duly execute works comprised
in such Owner/Client/Executive Engineer ’s instructions provided always that verbal
instruction, directions and explanations given to the Contractor or his work’s representative
by the Owner/Client/Executive Engineer shall, if involving a variation, be confirmed in
writing.

5.5 The Owner/Client reserves the right to increase the scope of work on any or all items or
change the nature of work involved in any or all items of the contract. The Contractor shall
have no claim for loss of anticipated profits or for any other reason whatsoever on account of
these variations.

6.0 Site Engineer

The Site Engineer who will be responsible for the day-to-day supervision of the Contract shall
represent the Owner/Client / Executive Engineer at the site. He shall act under the
instructions of the Executive Engineer. The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities for
the performance of his duties.

7.0 Duties of Site Engineer

7.1 The Site Engineer shall carry out such duties in issuing decisions, certificates and orders as
are specified in the Contract and such additional functions as are delegated to him by the
Executive Engineer or the Owner/Client from time to time. The Site Engineer shall coordinate,
watch and supervise the works and examine and approve materials to be used or
workmanship employed in connection with the Works.

7.2 Provided always that

i) Failure of the Site Engineer or his representative to disapprove any work or materials
shall not prejudice the power of the Executive Engineer, thereafter to disapprove such
work or materials.

ii) Except as otherwise provided in these documents, if the Contractor shall be dissatisfied
by reason of any decision of the Site Engineer, he shall be entitled to refer the matter to
the Executive Engineer within 7 days of the receipt of such decision, who shall thereupon
confirm, reverse or vary such decision.

7.3 Subject as otherwise provided in this Contract, all notices to be given on behalf of the
Executive Engineer, and the Owner/Client and all other actions to be taken on their behalf
may be given or taken by the Site Engineer or any person for the time being entrusted with
the functions duties and powers of the Owner/Client's Representative.

8.0 Site Visit by contractor

Before tendering, the Contractor shall visit the site and satisfy himself about the site
conditions. He will examine the site and take note of existing conditions, the constraints of

3
 working within the premises, mode of transport and other means of communication, the
correct dimensions of the work and facilities for obtaining the special articles called for in the
contract documents and shall obtain his own information on all matters affecting the
continuation and progress of the works. No extra claim made in consequence of any
misunderstanding or incorrect information for any of these points or on the grounds of
insufficient description will be allowed. Should the Contractor, after visiting the site, find any
discrepancies, omissions, ambiguities or conflicts in or among the contract documents or to
be in doubt as to their meaning he shall bring the question to the Executive Engineer ’s
attention, before the opening date of the tender.

9.0 Assignment

The Contractor shall not assign the Contract or any part thereof, or any benefit or invest or
there under otherwise than by a charge in favor of Contractor's bankers of any monies due or
to become due under this Contract, without prior written consent of the Owner/Client/
Architect/ Executive Engineer .

10.0 Sub-letting

The Contractor shall not sublet any part of the works without the prior written consent of the
Owner/Client/Executive Engineer , except as provided for in these conditions, which shall not
be unreasonably, withheld. Such consent if given shall not relieve the Contractor from any
liability or obligation under the Contract and he shall be responsible for the acts, defaults and
neglects of any Sub-Contractor, his agents, servants or workmen as fully as if they were the
acts, defaults or neglects of the Contractor, his agents, servants or workmen. Provision of
labour on a piecework basis shall not be deemed to be sub-letting under this Clause.

11.0 Sub -Contractors

As soon as practicable and before awarding any sub-contract, the Contractor shall notify the
Executive Engineer in writing the names of the sub-contractors proposed for the principal
parts of the work as the Executive Engineer may direct for his approval. The Contractor shall
not employ any sub-contractor to whom the Architect/ Executive Engineer may object. In
particular, subcontractors for waterproofing, pest control, doors and windows, insulation and
other specialist items should be got approved well in advance.

12.0 Specialist Agencies

The Contractor may entrust specialist items of work to the agencies specialized in the
specified trade. The Contractor shall give the names and details of such firms whom he is
going to employ for approval off the Employer. These details shall include the expertise,
financial status, technical manpower, equipment, resources, and list of works executed and
on hand of the specialist agency.

13.0 Contractor's General Responsibilities

13.1 The Contractor shall execute and maintain the works with due care and diligence and shall
provide all materials, labour including supervision thereof, constructional plant, temporary
works, transport and all other things, whether of temporary or permanent nature, required for
the proper execution and maintenance of the works.

13.2 The Contractor shall execute the whole and every part of the Works in the most substantial
and workmanlike manner, both as regards materials and labour and otherwise in every
respect in strict accordance with the specifications. The Contractor shall conform exactly,
fully and faithfully to the designs, drawings and instructions relating to the work, in writing.

13.3 Before commencing any item of work, the Contractor shall co-relate all relevant drawings and
information and satisfy himself that the information available thereof is complete,
unambiguous and without any discrepancies. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
errors in the execution of the works and/or damage caused due to any discrepancy in the
Contract documents which was overlooked by the Contractor and/or his Sub-Contractor, and
is not brought to the notice of the Executive Engineer / Owner/Client.

4
 13.4 Levels, dimensions and other information shown on the drawings are believed to be
correct. The Contractor shall, however, verify them for him and no claim or allowance
whatsoever shall be entertained on account of any errors or omissions in the levels,
dimensions, etc. from those shown in the drawings.

DOCUMENTS

14.0 Documents Mutually Explanatory

The Contract documents are complimentary and cumulative and what is called for by any one
shall be binding as if called for by all. The intention of the documents is to include all labour
and materials, equipment and transportation (including reaching the material to site on the
5th floor) necessary for proper execution of the work (exempting those materials and
equipment listed separately which are to be supplied by the Owner/Client). Materials of work
described in words which so applied have a well known technical or trade meaning shall be
held to refer to such recognized standards as applicable.

15.0 Discrepancies and Adjustments of Errors

15.1 In the case of discrepancies between bill of quantities, specifications and/or drawings, the
following order of precedence shall be followed -

a. Drawings.
b. Particular Specifications.
c. General specifications - specifications given in CPWD Specifications.
d. Description in the Bills of Quantities.

15.2 In the event of ambiguities, discrepancies, and contradictions between the Bill of Quantities,
the drawings and/or specifications, the Site Engineer shall explain the same and shall in his
sole discretion, determine which of the requirements govern and/or clarify any such
ambiguity or discrepancy and the Contractor shall comply with such determination.

15.3 If there are discrepancies in the rates quoted by the Contractor in figures and in words, the
rates quoted in words shall prevail. All errors in extensions or computing the amounts and
totaling shall be corrected.

15.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of time or any compensation due to such
determination.

16.0 Drawings

16.1 The drawings shall remain in the sole custody of the Employer. Two (2) copies of the Drawings
shall be furnished to the Contractor, free of charge.

16.2 One copy of the Contract Documents including drawings furnished to the Contractor shall be
kept at the site and the same shall, at all reasonable times, be available for inspection.

16.3 The Contractor shall give written notice to the Site Engineer and inform the
Owner/Client/Architect/Executive Engineer, whenever planning or progress of the work is
likely to be delayed or disrupted, unless the required drawings or order including a direction,
instruction or approval is issued within reasonable time.

16.4 The Site Engineer shall have full power and authority to supply to the Contractor, from time
to time; during progress of the works such further drawings and instructions as shall be
necessary for proper and adequate execution of the works.

17.0 Type of Contract

5
 The Contract shall be an Item Rate Amount contract. The Contractor shall be paid at the
Contract Amount for the actual work carried by him as agreed, in accordance with the
Contract documents.

18.0 Schedule of Quantities

The quantities given in the Schedule of Quantities are provisional and are meant to indicate
the intent and provide a uniform basis for tendering. The Contractor shall be paid for the
work executed by him in accordance with the contract documents at the Contract Item Rate
Amount. The Owner/Client reserves the right to increase or decrease any of the scope of work
or to totally omit any items of work and the Contractor shall not claim any extra or damages
on these grounds, subject to the condition that the contract amount is not varied by more
than +/- 25% of a particular Item. Any error in description or in quantity or omission of item
in the Schedule of Quantities shall not vitiate this contract but shall be deemed to be a
variation required by the Owner/Client/Executive Engineer.

19.0 Licenses and Permits

License and permits for all materials under Government control shall be obtained by the
Contractor directly. The Owner/Client may assist the Contractor in this respect to the extent
possible. The Contractor shall include in his tender all transport charges and other expenses
that may be incurred in this connection

20.0 Royalties and Patent Rights

All royalties or other sums payable in respect of the supply and use in carrying out the works
as described by or referred to in the Contract drawings, the Contract Specifications and the
Contract Schedule of Quantities of any patented articles, processes or inventions shall be
deemed to have been included in the Contract sum, and the Contractor shall indemnify the
Owner/Client against all claims, proceedings, damages, costs and expenses which may be
brought or made against the Owner/Client or to which he may be put by reason of the
Contractor infringing or being held to have infringed any patent rights to any such articles,
processes and inventions. Provided that where, in compliance with Executive Engineer 's
instructions the Contractor shall supply and use, carrying out the works any patented
articles, processes or inventions, the Contractor shall not be liable in respect of any
infringement or alleged infringement of any patented rights in relation to such articles,
processes or inventions and all royalties, damages or other moneys which the Contractor may
be liable to pay to the persons entitled to such patent rights shall be added to the Contract
Sum.

21.0 Separate Contracts

21.1 The Owner/Client reserve the right to award other contracts in connection with the work. The
Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and
storage of their materials and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect and
coordinate his work and theirs. If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper
execution or results upon the work of any other contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and
promptly report to the Architect/ Executive Engineer for any defects in such work that render
it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. His failure to so inspect and report shall
constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and proper for the reception of
his work, except as to the defects which may develop in the other contractor's work after
execution of the work.

22.0 Contractor's Designs & Manufacturer's Catalogues – (DELETED)

22.1 DELETED

22.2 DELETED.

6
 23.0 Contractor to prepare ‘As Built’ Drawings

DELETED

24.0 Interest

No interest shall be payable on any money due to the Contractor against earnest money,
security deposit, interim or final bills or any other payments due under this contract.

25.0 Works to Satisfaction of Owner/Client/ Architect/ Executive Engineer

The Contractor shall execute and maintain the works in strict accordance with the Contract
to the satisfaction of the Architect/Executive Engineer and shall comply with and adhere
strictly to the Architect/Executive Engineer’s instructions and directions on any matter
whether mentioned in the Contract and not, touching or concerning the works. The
Employer's decision relating to the use and quality of materials and visual and aesthetic effect
shall be final and binding.

26.0 Program Evaluation and Review

26.1 Network based integrated time schedule shall be submitted by the Contractor. The time
schedule shall include details of mobilization of resources, materials, equipment and labour
along with the milestones for completion of different activities. After award of Contract, the
Site Engineer may require the Contractor to expand the information given in the program
until it is suitable for the effective review of progress during the execution of the works. The
critical path shall be determined. It is the Contractor's obligation to ensure that such a
program, duly approved by the Executive Engineer is available prior to the commencement of
work at site.

26.2 The Contractor shall, every fortnight, review and update this program and furnish for the
information of the Site Engineer, in writing, details of the Contractor's arrangements for
executing the works, materials procured, erected, balance at Site, and expected deliveries
during the next fortnight; skilled/ unskilled labour, foremen, supervisors working at Site and
steps proposed for speeding up progress of work.

26.3 If at anytime it should appear to the Owner/Client/ Executive Engineer or the Site Engineer
that the progress of the works does not conform to the approved program, the Contractor
shall furnish a revised program and take such steps at his cost, as are necessary to expedite
progress and ensure completion of the works within the completion period or extended date of
completion.

26.4 Approval by the Executive Engineer of such programs or the furnishing of such particulars
shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract.

26.5 The Contractor shall be called upon to attend co-ordination meetings with the Architect, Site
Engineer, Owner/Client/Executive Engineer and his Consultants and other Contractors and
shall fully cooperate with such persons and agencies involved in these discussions. The
Contractor shall take notes of the discussions during the meeting and shall strictly adhere to
the decisions of the Architect/ Executive Engineer / Owner/Client in performing the works

27 Period of Completion:

The entire Works covered in this Contract shall be completed by the Contractor within the
completion period set out in the tender documents.

28.0 Extension of Time:

28.1 If the Works are delayed by Force Majeure (as defined elsewhere), suspension of work by the
Owner/Client, serious loss or damage by fire, ordering of altered additional or substituted
work or other special circumstances other than through the default of the Contractor, as
would fairly entitle the Contractor to an extension of time and which in the discretion of the
Executive Engineer is beyond the control of the Contractor, then upon the happening of any
such event causing delay, the Contractor shall within 7 days of the happening of event give
notice thereof in writing to the Executive Engineer , stating the cause and the anticipated

7
 period of delay, in any such event the Owner//Client on the recommendations of the
Executive Engineer may give fair and reasonable extension of time for the completion of work.

28.2 Such extension shall be communicated to the Contractor by the Executive Engineer in
writing. The Contractor shall not be entitled to claim any compensation or over-run charges
whatsoever for any extension granted.

29.0 Delays:

If, in the opinion of the Executive Engineer, the Contractor shall be delayed or impeded in the
execution of the Works for reason of:
(a) Force Majeure: or
(b) By the works or delays of other contractors or tradesmen engaged or nominated by
the Owner/Client and not referred to in the Contract Documents: or
(c) The non-delivery or delay in delivery to the Contractor, of any materials and
equipment which under the Contract Documents the Owner/Client is to supply: or
(d) Any cause, whatever, arising out of the acts or defaults of the Owner/Client or the
Architect: or
(e) Any accident happening to the works during their progress not arising from neglect,
default or willful act of the Contractor or his workmen or Sub-Contractors: or
(f) Extras or variations being ordered by the Architect / Executive Engineer or
(g) Any other cause which the Executive Engineer certifies as beyond the control of the
Contractor, the Contractor may from time to time, within 10 working days of the
happening of any of the aforesaid, apply in writing to the Owner/Client/ Executive
Engineer for an extension of time on account thereof, setting forth the cause of such
delays, and the Executive Engineer may, with the prior written approval of the
Owner/Client, make a fair and reasonable extension of time for completion of the
Works.

30.0 Liquidated Damages for delay in completion:

30.1 If the contractor fails to fulfill his obligations under the contract as specified in the scope of
work in the defined and specified scheduled time period due to reasons attributable wholly
and solely to the contractor, he shall pay to the Owner/Client as liquidated damages, a sum
of Rs 5000 per day.

30.2.1 The total amount of liquidated damages for delay under the contract will be subject to
maximum of Five percent (5%) of the contract price.

30.2.2 The Owner/Client may without prejudice to any other method of recovery deduct the
amount of such damages from the moneys in his hands due to the contractor or
which may become due to the contractor. The payment or deduction of such damages
shall not relieve the contractor from his obligation to complete the supplies/works
and demonstrate the performance or from any of his other obligations and liabilities
under the contract.

30.3 In addition, such action by the Owner/Client as aforesaid shall not relieve the contractor
of his liability to pay the supply and performance guarantee liquidated damages for delay
in completion as defined in clause 27.0 of this section.

31.0 Contractor's Site Organization and Equipment

Site Engineer in Charge: The Contractor shall ensure continued effective supervision with the help of
a qualified, experienced Site Engineer assisted by adequate staff as ascertained by the Architect, for
the entire duration of the Works. The Site Engineer-in charge will be responsible for carrying out the
work to the true meaning of the Drawings, conditions of contract, Specifications, schedule of
quantities and Architect's Instructions and directions given to him in writing shall be held to have
been given to the Contractor officially. Attention is called to the importance of requesting written
instruction from the Architect before undertaking any work where Architect's directions or
instructions are required. Any such work done in advance of such instructions will be liable to be

8
 removed at the Contractor's cost. No staff from the Site Engineer and technical supervisory
staff shall be transferred from the work without the written prior permission from the Architect.

31.1 Equipment: The Contractor shall provide and install all necessary hoists, ladders, scaffolding,
tools, plants and all transport for labour, materials and plant necessary for the proper
execution and completion of the Works to the satisfaction of the Architect.

31.2 Security: The Contractor shall provide adequate number of watchmen to guard the site
premises, materials and equipment at all times at his expense.

31.3 Telephone: The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain at his expense a separate
telephone for the Site. He shall pay all charges in connection with the same till the completion
of the Works.

31.4 Work Sheds: The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain at the Site at his expense
proper waterproof shed for the storage and protection of construction materials, carpentry
and joinery workshop, equipment, both his own as well as those supplied by the
Owner//Client, if any from time to time.

31.5 Sanitary Convenience: The Contractor shall at his expense provide and erect at the Site all
necessary sanitary conveniences for the Site staff and the workmen, and shall maintain them
in a clean orderly condition and clean and de-odorize the ground after their removal.

31.6 Scaffolding, Staging, Guard Rails: The Contractor shall provide at his expense at the Site
scaffolding, staging, guard rails, temporary stairs and temporary measures required during
construction. The supports for scaffolding, staging, guard rails and temporary stairs shall be
strong, adequate for the particular situations, tied together with horizontal pieces and braced
properly. The temporary access to the various parts of the building under construction shall
be rigid and strong enough to avoid any chance of mishaps. The entire scaffolding
arrangements proposed shall be subject to the approval of the Architect but such approval
will not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under this clause.

31.7 Water and electricity charges should be included on the scope of work.

32.0 Contractor's Supervision

32.1 The Contractor shall provide all necessary supervision during the execution of the works and
guarantee period for the proper fulfilling of the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
The Contractor or a competent and authorized agent approved in writing by the Site Engineer,
which approval may at any time be withdrawn; is to be constantly on the works and shall give
his whole time to supervise the works. Such an authorized agent shall receive on behalf of the
Contractor, directions and instructions from the Site Engineer or the Owner/Client/Executive
Engineer

32.2 The Contractor shall employ for the execution of the Works a. Such technical persons as are
qualified and experienced and such representatives, foremen and supervisory staff as are
competent to give supervision to the work, and b. Such skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled
labour as is necessary for the proper and timely execution and maintenance of the works.

33.0 Setting Out

The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the works at his
expense in relation to reference points, lines, levels given in the drawing or furnished by the
Site Engineer in writing and for the correctness of the positions, levels, dimensions and
alignment of every part of the works. If any error in setting out is noticed at any stage, the
Contractor shall, at his own cost, rectify such errors to the satisfaction of the Site Engineer.

34.0 Nuisance
The Contractor shall not at any time do, cause or permit any nuisance on the site or do
anything which shall cause unnecessary disturbance or inconvenience to the others working
on or near the site and to the public generally.

35.0 Watching and Lighting

9
 The Contractor shall provide and maintain at his cost all lights, guards, fencing and
watchmen, when and where necessary or as directed by the Site Engineer, for the protection
of works, materials, plant, equipment etc.

36.0 Care of Works:

From the commencement of the Works until the date the Works are completed (as set forth in
the Completion Certificate) and handed over to the Owner/Client, the Contractor shall take
full responsibility for the care thereof. In case of any damage, loss or injury to the Works
executed by him or by other contractors or to any part thereof from any cause whatsoever, the
Contractor, shall at his own cost, repair and make good the same so that on completion, the
Works shall be in good condition and in conformity in every respect with the requirements of
the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall also be liable for any damage to the Works
occasioned by him in the course of any operations carried out by him for the purpose of
completing any outstanding work or rectification of defects during the Guarantee Period.

37.0 Co-operation with other Contractors

37.1 The Contractor shall co-operate with other Contractors and Consulting Site Engineers and
freely exchange with them such technical information as necessary for the proper execution of
the works.

37.2 The Contractor shall, in accordance with the directions of the Site Engineer, afford all
reasonable opportunities to other Contractors and their workmen and to the workmen of the
Owner/Client who may be employed in the execution of the works not included in the
Contract, for carrying out their work.

37.3 All operations necessary for the execution of works shall be carried out so as not to interfere
unnecessarily or improperly with the execution of works by other Contractors. Execution of
works under this Contract shall be co-ordinated with the work of other contractors where it
would interfere with their work or working. The Site Engineer and the concerned contractor
shall be informed well in time for effective coordination and proper execution of Works.

38.0 Contractor to Keep Site Clear

During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall keep the site reasonably free from all
necessary obstructions and shall store or dispose of any Constructional plant and surplus
materials, wreckage, rubbish or Temporary Works no longer required.

39.0 Coordination of Work

39.1 At the commencement of work, and from time to time, the Contractor shall confer with other
contractors, sub- contractors, and persons engaged on separate contracts in connection with
the work, and with the Architect, Executive Engineer, and Owner/Client for the purpose of
coordination and execution of the various phases of work. The Contractor shall ascertain from
the other contractors, sub-contractors and persons engaged in separate contracts, in
connection with the works, the extent of all chasing, cutting and forming of all opening, holes,
grooves etc. as may be required to accommodate the various services.

39.2 The Contractor shall ascertain the routes of all services and the position of all floor and wall
outlets, traps etc. in connection with the installation of plant, services and arrange for the
construction of work accordingly. The breaking and cutting of the completed work must not
be done unless specifically authorized in writing by the Owner/Client/ Architect/ Executive
Engineer. Generally, all breaking shall be by the Contractor and no work shall be done over
broken or patched work without first ascertaining that the broken surface is adequately
prepared and reinforced to receive and hold further work.

40.0 Clearance of Site on Completion

Before the Site Engineer issues the Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall clear away
and remove from the Site all constructional plant, surplus materials, rubbish and temporary
works of every kind and leave the whole of the Site and Works clean and in workman like
condition to the satisfaction of the Site Engineer.

41.0 Patent Rights

The Contractor shall fully indemnify the Owner/Client against any action, claim or proceeding
relating to any infringement of the use of any patent or design or any alleged patent or design
rights and shall pay royalties which may be payable in respect of any article or part thereof
included in the Contract.

10
 42.0 Fire Fighting Facilities:
The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate fire fighting facilities on the Site to the
approval of the Site Engineer and local Fire Authorities.

INSURANCE AND INDEMNITIES

43.0 Insurance of Works:

43.1 The Contractor shall ensure that his insurance covers entire project upto Rs. 60 Lacs of value
of work and beyond 60 Lacs the insurance includes for all liabilities which should cover
material and building damage, workmen’s compensation, third party liabilities etc. The
insurance shall initially be kept valid up to 60 days beyond the scheduled completion date
and may be extended, based on a written request from the Owner/Client / Executive
Engineer. The Contractor should produce evidence of insurance coverage for all above before
submitting invoices for payment.

43.2 Such insurance shall be affected with an insurer and in the terms approved by the
Owner/Client, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld.

43.3 Project Insurance is to be done by Client.

43.4 If the Contractor has a blanket insurance policy for all his works and the policy covers all the
items to be insured under this Contract, the Contractor may assign such policy/ policies in
favour of the Owner/Client, in lieu of taking out fresh policies in the joint names of the
Contractor and the Owner/Client.

44.0 Insurance against accident or injury to Workers:

44.1 The Owner/Client shall not be liable for or in respect of any damage or compensation payable
at law in respect or in consequence of any accident or injury to any workmen or other person
in the employment of the Contractor or any Sub-Contractor. The Contractor shall indemnify
and keep indemnified the Owner/Client against all such damages and compensation, and
against all liability, claims, proceedings, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect
thereof or in relation thereto.

44.2 The Contractor shall insure against such liability with an insurer approved by the
Owner/Client and shall continue such insurance during the whole of the time that any
persons are employed by him or the Sub-Contractors on the Works.

45.0 Third Party Insurance:

Before commencing the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall insure against his
liability for any materials or physical damage, loss or injury which may occur to any property
including that of the Owner/Client, and to any person including any employee of the
Owner/Client, Executive Engineer and the Architect, by or arising out of the execution of the
Works or in carrying out of the Contract.

46.0 Insurance Generally:

46.1 The terms of the insurance policies shall include a provision whereby, in the event of any
claim in respect of which the Contractor would be entitled to receive, indemnify under the
policy being brought or made against the Owner/Client, the insurer will indemnify the
Owner/Client against such claims and any costs, charges and expenses in respect thereof.

46.2 The Insurance policies shall provide that they shall not be cancelled until the Owner/Client
has agreed to their cancellation.

46.3 The Contractor shall provide the Owner/Client and the Executive Engineer with a copy of
each of the Insurance policies and documents taken out by him in pursuance of the Contract
immediately after such insurance coverage is affected.

46.4 If the Contractor shall fail to effect and keep in force insurance, as per the terms of Contract,
the Owner/Client may effect and keep in force any such insurance and pay such premium or
premiums as may be necessary for that purpose and from time to time deduct the amount so
paid by the Owner/Client as aforesaid from any monies due or which may become due to the
Contractor, or recover the same as a debit due from the Contractor.

11
 46.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing of all claims and from the
commencement of the Works until the date the Works are completed (as set forth in the
Completion Certificate) and handed over to the Owner/Client, the Contractor shall be
responsible for any damage or loss from any cause whatsoever to the Works or to materials
delivered to the Site but not yet incorporated into the Works. The Owner/Client's taking of
possession of the Works shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities
during the period of the Contract including during the Guarantee Period.

46.6 The Contractor shall comply in all respects with the insurance requirements set forth on
Schedule 1 attached hereto, the provisions of which are incorporated herein. In the event of
any inconsistency between the provisions of this Clause and those set forth in Schedule 1, the
provisions of Schedule 1 shall prevail.

LABOUR

47.0 Engagement of Labour:

47.1 The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the engagement of labour, local or
otherwise, and for their transport, housing and payment. All labour engaged by the
Contractor shall be and remain the employees of the Contractor and no claim shall lie against
the Owner/Client by them or Contractor and any person claiming on their behalf against the
Owner/Client in respect of any right or benefit due to them in their employment.

47.2 The Contractor shall obtain a valid license under the Contract Labour (Regulation and
Abolition) Act 1970, before the commencement of the work and continue to have a valid
license until the completion of work or expiry of guarantee period, if applicable.

47.3 The Contractor shall pay the labour employed by him directly or through Sub-Contractors,
wages not less than the minimum wages notified under the Minimum Wages Act.

47.4 The Contractor shall in respect of all labour employed by him either directly or through Sub-
Contractors comply with or cause to be complied with the provisions of the payment of Wages
Act, 1936, Minimum Wages Act 1948, Employers Liability Act, 1938, Workman's
Compensation Act 1923, ,Contract Labour (Regulations and Abolition) Act 1970, Employee's
Provident Fund Act, and any other Act, Rules or Regulations for the labour as may be enacted
by the Government or any modification thereof or any other law relating thereto and rules
made thereunder from time to time.

47.5 The Employer shall, on a report from the competent authority have the power to deduct from
the monies due to the Contractor any sum notified under the provisions of the relevant Act.

47.6 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner/Client and the Employer against all or any
payments to be made under and for the observance of any Act, Rules and Regulations
aforesaid without prejudice to his right to claim indemnity from his Sub-Contractors.

48.0 Model Rules

The Contractor shall at his own cost comply with or cause to be complied with Model Rules
for labour welfare framed by the Government or other local bodies from time to time for the
protection of health and for making sanitary arrangement for workers employed directly or
indirectly on the works and in the workers hutment area. In case the Contractor fails to make
arrangements as aforesaid, the Owner/Client shall be entitled to do so and recover the cost
thereof from the Contractor.

49.0 Safety Code:

The Contractor at his own cost arrange for the safety provisions stipulated by Government or
local authorities or as required by the Executive Engineer in respect of all labour directly or
indirectly employed for performance of the works and shall provide all facilities in connection
therewith. In case the Contractor fails to make arrangements and provide necessary facilities
as aforesaid, the Owner/Client shall be entitled to do so and recover the costs thereof from
the Contractor.

50.0 Child Labour:

12
 The Contractor shall not employ any labor less than 18 years of age on the job. This stipulation
is not negotiable and will attract penal action under the most stringent process of civil and
criminal procedure.

51.0 Returns of Labour

The Contractor shall furnish to the Executive Engineer a return every week in such detail and
form as the Executive Engineer may prescribe showing the supervisory staff and the number
of labour employed by the Contractor and Sub-Contractors on the Site separately for each
category of labour indicating their working hours.

52.0 ESI and PF Obligations

The Contractor shall include in his rates all expenses towards meeting obligations under the
Employees State Insurance Act and the Provident Fund Act. He shall follow all rules and
regulations required under the Act as may be in force from time to time. The Contractor shall
cover all his workmen working at the site, under the ESI scheme and PF Scheme, and directly
deposit the required amounts with the concerned authorities.

MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

53.0 Quality of Materials and Workmanship:

53.1 All Materials and workmanship shall be the best of the respective kinds described in the
Contract and in accordance with the instructions and directions of the Architect/Executive
Engineer and shall be subjected from time to time, to such tests as the Architect / Executive
Engineer may direct at the place of manufacture or fabrication or on the Site or at such other
places as may be directed by the Site Engineer. The Contractor shall execute the whole and
every part of the work in the most substantial and workman-like manner, both as regards to
materials and workmanship and in every respect in strict accordance with the specifications
etc. The Contractor shall also conform exactly and faithfully to the designs, drawings and
instructions in writing of the Architect / Executive Engineer.

54.0 Storage of Materials:

All materials and equipment brought on to the Site shall be stored by the Contractor only at
places approved by the Site Engineer. Storage and safe custody of materials and equipment
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

55.0 Approval of Materials:

55.1 The Contractor shall supply samples of all materials including those specified by brand
names for approval of the Site Engineer. The Site Engineer will approve the samples in writing
before the Contractor arranges bulk supplies. The cost of arranging/making of test samples
cost of their packing and forwarding and testing charges shall be borne by the Contractor.

55.2 The Owner/Client/Architect/Executive Engineer and the Site Engineer may at any time
during the execution of work call upon the Contractor to submit samples of any materials
used or to be used in the works for checking compliance with the Contract specifications or
approved samples. Should these samples fail to comply with the Contract specifications or not
conform to approved samples, then the materials from which the said samples were taken
shall be removed from the Site immediately and all work executed with such materials shall
be replaced and made good to the satisfaction of the Site Engineer, at the expense of the
Contractor.

56.0 Quality Control:

56.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Site Engineer a comprehensive quality approval plan for
all materials, equipment and things to be provided under the Contract. No material or
equipment shall be dispatched by the manufacturer or vendor or brought to Site by the
Contractor until the quality of the material or equipment has been established through
inspection and tests or through test certificates furnished by the manufacturer. In case the
Site Engineer accepts such tests certificates as sufficient proof that the material or equipment
conforms to the Contract Specifications, he shall accord his approval for the dispatch of
material or equipment

56.2 The Contractor shall set up a quality control laboratory at the Site of work for conducting field
tests on certain materials such as cement, aggregates, bricks, cement concrete or other
materials as may be directed by the Site Engineer or the Owner/Client/Architect/Executive
Engineer . The Contractor shall deploy a qualified Site Engineer to conduct the tests. If the

13
 setting up of such laboratory is not feasible on site, the necessary testing shall be
carried out by an accredited laboratory for all work samples and the reports shall be
submitted to the Owner/Site Engineer.

56.3 The owner/Site Engineer shall have access to all works and shall have the power to inspect
covered work by ordering its opening/exposure even after such works have been completed to
inspect quality and to satisfy themselves about the adherence to quality and workmanship.
The contractor shall have no claim in this regard.

57.0 Standard of Workmanship:

To determine the acceptable standard of workmanship, the
Owner/Client/Architect/Executive Engineer may require the Contractor to execute certain
proportions of works and services such as walls, flooring, joinery, finishes, sanitary
installation etc. under his close supervision. On approval such samples of work shall be
termed as guiding samples. Work shall be executed to conform to the standard of
workmanship of these samples.

For standards, the reference shall be:

CPWD

ISI/BIS

The contractor shall obtain at his own cost and provide on site copies of all relevant
standards.

58.0 Inspection of Works:

58.1 The Owner/Client/Executive Engineer, the Architect and any person authorized by them
shall at all times have access to the Works and to all workshops and places where work is
being prepared or from where materials, or equipment are being obtained for the Works and
the Contractor shall afford every facility and assistance in obtaining the right to access.

58.2 All work embracing more than one process shall be subject to examination and approval at
each stage thereof and the Contractor shall give due notice to the Architect / Executive
Engineer when each stage is ready.

58.3 Examination of Works:

No work shall be covered up or put out of view without the approval of the
Architect/Executive Engineer. The Contractor shall give due notice to the Site Engineer and
afford him full opportunity to examine any work, which is about to be covered up or put out
of view. The Contractor shall open any part or parts of the works as the
Owner/Client/Executive Engineer or the Architect may from time to time direct and shall
reinstate and make good such part or parts to the satisfaction of the Architect/Executive
Engineer.

59.0 Removal of Improper Work & Materials:

59.1 The Owner/Client/Architect/Executive Engineer shall have full powers to order in writing:

a. The removal from the Site, within such time as may be specified in the order, of any
materials which, in the opinion of the Architect/Executive Engineer are not in
accordance with the Contract,

b. The substitution of proper and suitable materials, and

c. The removal and proper re-execution notwithstanding any previous test thereof or
interim payment thereof, or any work which, in respect of materials or workmanship
is not in the opinion of the Executive Engineer or the Architect, in accordance with
the Contract.

59.2 In case the Contractor defaults in carrying out such order, the Owner/Client shall be entitled
to employ and pay other persons to carry out the same and all expenses consequent thereon
or incidental thereto shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Owner/Client, or may be
deducted by the Owner/Client from any monies due or which may become due to the
Contractor.

14
 CONSTRUCTIONAL PLANT, MACHINERY & TEMPORARY WORKS

60.0 Contractor to supply all Plant, Machinery, Scaffolding etc.

No plant, machinery, scaffolding and tools and tackles will be arranged or issued by the
Owner//Client.

61.0 Materials, Plants, etc. Exclusive Use for the Works:

61.1 All Constructional Plant, Temporary Works and materials when brought on to the Site shall
be deemed to be exclusively intended for the execution of the Works . The Contractor shall not
remove the same or any part thereof, without the consent, in writing, of the Executive
Engineer, which shall not be unreasonably withheld.

61.2 Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall remove from the Site all the said
Constructional Plant and Temporary Works remaining thereon and any unused materials
provided by the Contractor.

61.3 The Owner/Client shall not at any time be liable for the loss of or damage to any of the said
Constructional Plant, Temporary Works or materials. The storage and safe custody of all
materials, equipment, Constructional Plant and the Temporary Works executed shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.

62.0 Urgent Repairs:

If, by any reason of any accident, or failure, or other event occurring, either during the
execution of the works or during the Guarantee Period, any remedial or other work or repair
shall, in the opinion of the Executive Engineer , be urgently necessary for the safety of the
Works and the Contractor is unable or unwilling to do such work or repair, the Owner/Client
may employ and pay other persons to carry out such work or repair as the Executive Engineer
may consider necessary. If the work or repair is so done by the Owner/Client, is work which,
in the opinion of the Executive Engineer, the Contractor is liable to do at his own expense
under the Contract, all expenses properly incurred by the Owner/Client in so doing shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Owner/Client, or may be deducted from any monies
due or which may become due to the Contractor. The Executive Engineer shall, as soon after
the occurrence of any such emergency as may be reasonably practicable, notify the
Contractor thereof in writing.

63.0 Working at all heights:

Item rates quoted by the Contractor in the bills of quantities shall include allowance for
executing work at all heights above and at all depths below the ground level, except where
specific provision has been made to measure work separately at different heights. Method of
measurements given in the CPWD Specification 2012 and in the Indian Standard Method of
Measurement with latest amendments shall be deemed to be modified accordingly.

DEVIATIONS/ VARIATIONS

64.0 Extras and Variations

64.1 The Owner/Client shall have the power to make and order any variation of the form, quality of
the Works that may appear to him to be necessary during the progress of the Works with the
consent of the Architect/Executive Engineer and the Architect or any variation that the
Owner/Client may desire and the Contractor shall carry out the Works as directed.

64.2 Variations shall not in any way vitiate or invalidate the Contract.

64.3 No variations shall be made by the Contractor without an order in writing of the Architect or
Executive Engineer , provided always that no order in writing shall be required for any
increase or decrease in the quantities of any work if there is no change in the extent of work
ordered from that included in the Contract.

64.4 No verbal orders by the Architect/Executive Engineer /Owner/Client shall constitute an

authority for the Contractor to undertake any variations from the Contract, specifications. If
the Contractor, for any reason, has been given verbal orders it shall be his responsibility to
ask confirmation of the orders and shall proceed accordingly only after the orders are
confirmed in writing.

64.5 All altered, additional or substantiated items of work shall be priced as under

15
 a. An item of work included in the bills of quantities at the applicable rate in the
respective bill of quantities.

b. An item of work similar in character to the item included in the bill of quantities at
the prorated rate derived from the rate for a similar class of work in the bill of
quantities.

c. If the rate for an item of work cannot be determined in the manner at (a) and (b)
above, the rate shall be decided by the Architect on the basis of the cost to the
Contractor at Site i.e. cost of materials including taxes, duties, Octroi, packing and
forwarding charges, handling and insurance and cost of labour, both on actual: plus
15% (Fifteen Percent) to cover Contractor's profit and overheads, except on the cost of
any material or service supplied/provided by the Owner/Client.

d. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to inform the Architect, under advice to
the Owner/Client/Executive Engineer the rate which he proposes to claim for such
item of work, supported by analysis of the rate claimed. The Architect / Architect’s
Site Engineer shall, within two weeks thereafter, after verification of the market rates
and giving due consideration to the rate claimed by the Contractor fix the rate on the
basis of the market rates. In case it is not practical for the Contractor to furnish
vouchers in support of the cost of materials or such evidence as the Site Engineer
may ask, the Site Engineer shall fix only a provisional rate for the purpose of interim
payments. The Contractor shall have no right to suspend the work on the plea of no
settlement of the rates.

64.6 In the event of the Contractor's disagreement as to the reasonableness of the rates fixed by
the Site Engineer the decision of the Executive Engineer shall be final.

65.0 Deviation Limit:

As a result of variations ordered, the quantities of any individual items of work done, omitted,
altered and substituted could vary to any extent, without any price adjustment. However,
overall contract sum shall not be varied by more than plus or minus 25% (twenty five percent)
for that particular Item. In case the total amount of variations ordered exceeds 25% (Twenty
Five Percent) of the Contract sum, the work ordered in excess of the maximum deviation limit
shall be priced at mutually agreed rates having regard to the prevailing market rates and
other relevant factors.

66.0 Claims
66.1 The Contractor shall send to the Employer every month, an account giving full particulars, as
full and detailed as possible of all claims for any additional payments to which the Contractor
may consider himself entitled and of all extra work ordered in writing and which he has
executed during the preceding month.

66.2 No claim for payment for any extra work or expense will be considered which has not been
included in such particulars. The Owner/Client may consider payment for any such work or
expenses where admissible under the terms of the Contract, if the Contractor has at the
earliest practicable opportunity notified the Employer in writing that he intends to make a
claim for such work and expense and it is certified by the Employer's Representative that
such payment was due.

66.3 Any claim which is not notified in two consecutive monthly statements for two consecutive
months shall be deemed to have been waived and extinguished.

CERTIFICATES AND PAYMENTS

67.0 Quantities:
The quantities set out in the Bill of Quantities are to be estimated quantities of the work; they
are not to be taken as the actual or correct quantities of the Works to be executed by the
Contractor in fulfillment of his obligations under the Contract.

68.0 Valuation:
The Site Engineer shall except where otherwise stated, ascertain and determine the value of
work done by measurement in accordance with the Contract.

16
 69.0 Works to be measured:
69.1 The measurement of work done by the Contractor shall be recorded in the measurement
books/works register by the Site Engineer, from time to time, jointly with the Contractor.
Measurements of altered, additional or substituted items of work ordered shall be recorded as
and when these are executed even if the rates for these items have not been settled and shall
be kept available at site for necessary check for Executive Engineer.

69.2 The Architect or Executive Engineer shall, when he requires any part of the works to be
measured, give a reasonable notice to the Contractor who shall attend or send his
representative to assist the Architect/Executive Engineer or his representative in making
such measurements, and shall furnish all particulars required by him.

69.3 Measurements recorded on works register shall be signed and dated by both parties on the
completion of each set of measurements. If the Contractor objects to any of the measurements
recorded by the Architect/Site Engineer, the Contractors or their authorized representative
shall record a note to this effect in the Measurement Book against items objected to and such
a note shall be signed and dated by both the Contractor and the Site Engineer or their
Representatives.

69.4 If the Contractor fails to attend or neglects or omits to send his authorized representative,
then the measurements made by the Architect/Site Engineer or approved by him shall be
taken to be correct measurement of the work. If after examination of such record of
measurements, the Contractor does not agree with the same or does not sign the same as
agreed, these shall nevertheless be taken as correct, unless the Contractor shall have within
14 days of such examination, notifies the Architect/Executive Engineer in writing in which
respect the measurements recorded are claimed by him to be incorrect.

70.0 Method of Measurement:

The Works shall be measured net, notwithstanding any general or local custom, as per the
method of measurement set out in the CPWD Specifications - 2012 Volume I & II and items
not covered by the CPWD Specifications, shall be measured as per IS:1200 - Method of
Measurement of Building Works (respective part).

71.0 Interim Bills:

71.1 The Contractor shall, at monthly intervals, on the dates agreed between the Site Engineer and
the Contractor, submit interim bills in 4 copies showing the value of the work executed in
accordance with the Contract based on the measurements recorded in the measurement
books.

71.2 The Executive Engineer / Owner/Client shall approve the quality of materials, equipment and
workmanship and adherence to the details as per drawings, specifications and the Architect’s
instructions and render certificates accordingly before the Executive Engineer certifies to the
Owner/Client the interim bill for payment to the Contractor.

71.3 The Architect/Site Engineer shall check interim bills and the Contractor shall provide
necessary information and details which the Executive Engineer may request for proper
verification of the same. In the event of any discrepancy the Executive Engineer shall adjust
the value shown in the interim bills.

71.4 Payment for items of work, which is partly completed, shall be allowed at part rates derived
from the Contract rates. Payment for altered, additional or substituted items of work ordered
shall be allowed at provisional rates as may be fixed by the Executive Engineer till the rates
are finally fixed.

71.5 The contractor shall be paid for unfixed imperishable materials, that have been brought to
site and stored for incorporation in the work, to the extent of a fixed % (specified elsewhere in
the tender) of the cost of such materials as certified by the Site Engineer and recommended
by the Executive Engineer, provided claims for such payments are supported by all relevant
vouchers, measurement books, receipts and other documents as called for by the Architect /
Site Engineer. Only such materials as are brought to site in reasonable time for incorporation
in the work shall be recommended for payment under this sub-clause. The amount thus paid
shall be treated as advance and adjustable against progress payment covered under the
clause above. Such materials when paid for, become the exclusive property of the
Owner/Client and shall not be hypothecated to any party or removed from the site regardless

17
 of whether accepted or not. The quantities of materials to be brought to site shall be
properly worked out from approved construction drawings in consultation with the
Owner/Client/Executive Engineer. The said materials shall remain in the custody of the
Contractor until the work is completed and delivered to the Owner/Client, and any loss or
damage shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

71.6 All interim payments shall be treated as payments by way of advances against final payment
and not as payments for the work done or be considered as an admission of the due
performance of the Contract.

71.7 Inclusion of any supplies made or works executed in an interim bill and payment of such
interim bills shall not be deemed to constitute approval by the Owner/Client or the Executive
Engineer of any such supplies or works nor shall it in any way affect the rights of the
Owner/Client under the Contract.

71.8 From the amount of the interim bill certified, the Owner/Client shall deduct 10% of the value
of the work executed towards Security Deposit subject to a maximum amount specified in the
Schedule of Fiscal Aspects.

71.9 The Executive Engineer may by any certificate correct or modify any previous certificate and
shall have the power to withhold any certificate if, the Works or any part thereof have not
been carried out to his, Owner/Client/Executive Engineer ’s satisfaction.

72.0 Final Bill

Not later than 45 days after the Architect / Executive Engineer issues Completion Certificate,
the Contractor shall submit to the Owner/Client / Executive Engineer 4 (four) copies of final
bill with supporting documents showing in detail the value of work done in accordance with
the Contract, the payments received by him and other recoveries/ deductions to be effected
from the Contractor. Within two weeks of the receipt of final bill and all information
reasonably required for verification of the final bill, the Architect / Executive Engineer shall
approve and render a certificate to the Owner/Client that he has satisfied himself that the
work executed is as per Contract specifications and to his satisfaction.

73.0 Withholding of Payments

The Architect / Executive Engineer may withhold or on account of subsequently discovered
evidence, nullify the whole or a part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to
protect the Owner/Client from loss on account of:
a Defective work not remedied
b Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to subcontractors for materials
or labour or equipment
c Damage to works of another contractor or sub-contractor
d A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance unpaid
amount
e A reasonable doubt that the Contractor intends to leave work items incomplete.

74.0 Materials & Workmanship:

74.1 All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the works shall be new materials and
equipment and workmanship are to be of the best quality of the specified type and to his
entire satisfaction of the Owner/Client/Architect/Executive Engineer. The Contractor shall
immediately remove from the premises any materials, equipment and/ or workmanship which
in the opinion of the Owner/Client/Architect/Executive Engineer , are defective or unsuitable
and shall substitute proper materials, equipment and/ or workmanship at his own cost. The
term `approval’ used in connection with this Contract shall mean the approval of the
Owner/Client/Architect/Executive Engineer. The Contractor shall, if required, submit
satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.

74.2 Where special makes or brands are called for, they are mentioned as a standard. Others of
equivalent quality may be used, provided that the Architect/Executive Engineer considers the
substituted materials as equivalent to the brand specified and approval is first obtained in

18
 writing from the Owner/Client/Architect/Executive Engineer. Unless the substitutions
are approved by the Executive Engineer, no deviation from the specifications will be
permitted. The Contractor shall indicate and submit written evidence of those materials or
equipment called for in the specifications that are not obtainable for installation in the
building within the time limit of the Contract. Failure to indicate the above within 3 months
after signing of the Contract will be deemed sufficient cause for denial of request for the
extension of the Contract time because of the same.

74.3 All materials and equipment shall be delivered so as to ensure a speedy and uninterrupted
progress of the work. The same shall be stored so as to prevent overloading of any portion of
the structure and the Contractor shall be entirely responsible for damage or loss to the
materials, by weather or other causes.

74.4 Within the Contract, the Contractor shall submit for approval of a complete list of all
materials and equipment he and his sub-contractors propose to use in the work, or definite
brand or make, which differ in any respect from those specified; also the particular brand of
any article where more than one is specified as a standard. He shall also list items not
specifically mentioned in the specifications but which are reasonably inferred and are
necessary for the completion of the work.

74.5 The Contractor shall employ the right kind of workmen, jigs, tools and equipment to fabricate
all materials and equipment, whether locally purchased or imported and whether provided by
the Owner/Client himself. They shall be fabricated and installed without any damage and in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and manuals. Unless specifically shown
otherwise, all items such as doors/window frames suspended and other ceilings, equipment
etc. shall be securely fixed to their supports through expansion machine bolts or other
approved means. Securing any item through wooden plugs shall not be permitted.

74.6 All materials, equipment and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination and
test by the Owner/Client/Architect/Executive Engineer at any and all items during
manufacture and/ or construction. The Owner/Client/Architect/Executive Engineer shall
have the right to reject defective material, equipment and workmanship or require its
correction. Rejected workmanship shall be satisfactorily corrected and rejected materials and
equipment shall be satisfactorily replaced with proper material and equipment without charge
therefore, and the Contractor shall promptly segregate and remove the rejected materials and
equipment from the premises. No schedule extension shall be given for such rejection /
replacement of defective material, equipment and workmanship that requires correction If the
Contractor fails to proceed at once with the replacement of rejected materials and/or the
correction of defective workmanship, the Owner/Client may contract or otherwise, replace
such materials and equipment and/or correct such workmanship and charge the cost thereof
to the Contractor or may terminate the right of the Contractor to proceed further with the
work. The Contractor shall furnish promptly, without additional charge all reasonable
facilities, labour, materials and equipment necessary for the safe and convenient inspection
and test that may be required by the Owner/Client/Architect/Executive Engineer.

74.7 All tests on material, equipment and workmanship shall be carried out through an
organization selected by the Executive Engineer /Owner/Client/Architect. The Contractor
shall arrange for such tests and also bear all expenses in connection therewith.

75.0 Deductions for Uncorrected Work

If the Owner/Client/Executive Engineer deems it inexpedient to correct, work damaged or not
done in accordance with the contract, an equitable deduction from the Contract Price shall be
made therefore and the Owner/Client/Executive Engineer’s decision in this respect shall be
final.

76.0 Correction of Work before Completion of Work

The Architect/ Owner/Client/Executive Engineer shall conduct a final inspection just before
the completion of the work and prepare a list of materials, equipment, and items of work,
which fail to conform to the Contract’s Specifications. The Contractor shall promptly replace
and re-execute such items in accordance with the Contract and shall bear all expenses of
making good all work and cost of all work of other contractors destroyed or damaged by such
replacement or removal. If the Contractor fails to remove and replace above rejected materials,
equipment and/ or workmanship within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice, the
Owner/Client may employ and pay other persons to amend and make good such defects at
the expense of the Contractor. All expenses incurred by the Owner/Client in rectifying the

19
 defects including all damages, loss and expense consequent to the defects shall be recoverable
from any amount due or that may become due to the Contractor.

77.0 Completion
77.1 The work shall be considered as completed only upon fulfillment of procedure laid down in
clause above and when the Architect / Executive Engineer has certified in writing that the
work has been completed. The defect liability period shall commence from the date of such
certificate.

77.2 Should the Owner/Client decide to occupy any portion of the building or use any part of any
equipment, before the Contract is completed, same shall not constitute an acceptance of any
part of the work unless so stated in writing by the Executive Engineer.

GUARANTEES, MAINTENANCE & DEFECTS

78.0 Maintenance
The Contractor shall maintain the Works for a period of one year reckoned from the certified
date of completion of the Works, termed as Defect Liability Period or Guarantee; and in the
event of more than one certificate of completion, from the respective dates so certified by the
Site Engineer.

79.0 Defects
79.1 The Contractor shall make good, at his own cost, and to the satisfaction of the
Architect/Executive Engineer , all defects, shrinkage, settlement or other faults, arising in the
opinion of the Architect/Executive Engineer from work or materials not being in accordance
with the Drawings or Specifications or Schedule of Quantities or the instructions of the
Architect/Executive Engineer , which may appear within one year after completion of work,
excepting specialist items such as waterproofing, anti-termite treatment etc. which shall call
for longer guarantee periods.

79.2 Such defects, shrinkage, settlement and other faults shall, upon directions in writing of the
Architect/Executive Engineer and within such reasonable time as shall be specified therein,
be amended and made good by the Contractor at his own cost, and in case of default the
Owner/Client may employ and pay other persons to amend and make good such defects,
shrinkage, settlements or other faults and all costs, damages, loss and expenses consequent
thereon or incidental thereto shall be made good and borne by the Contractor and such cost,
damage, loss or expense shall be recoverable from him by the Owner/Client or may be
deducted by the Owner/Client upon the Executive Engineer’s Certificate in writing from any
amount due to the Contractor, or the Contractor deduct from any moneys due to the
Contractor, a sum to be determined by the Executive Engineer equivalent to the cost of
amending such work and in the event of the retention amount being insufficient to recover
the balance from the Contractor, together with any expenses the Owner/Client may have
incurred in connection therewith.

79.3 The Contractor may not maintain staff and labour at site throughout the defects liability
period. However, if any major defects are noted requiring his urgent attention, he shall attend
to the same immediately. Other defects, if any, may be attended to just before the expiry of
the defects liability period.

80.0 Rectification of Defects/ Repairs

80.1 Should the Executive Engineer /Architect consider, at any time during the construction or
reconstruction or prior to the expiration of the Guarantee Period, that any work has been
executed with unsound or imperfect materials or unskilled workmanship or is of a quality
inferior to the constructed for or not other wise in accordance with the Contract, in respect
where of the decision of the Employer's Representative shall be final, the Contractor shall, on
demand in writing from the Executive Engineer , specifying the fault, not withstanding that
the same may have been inadvertently passed, certified and paid for, rectify forth or remove
and reconstruct the defective work so specified, in whole or in part, as the case may require,
at his own expense: and in the event of his failing to do so within the period specified by the
Executive Engineer in his demand/direction, the Employer may carry out the work by other
means at the risk and expense, in all respects, of the Contractor.

20
 80.2 If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to replace or renew any defective portions of
the plant or installation under this clause, the provisions of this clause shall apply to the
portions of the plant/installation so replaced or renewed until the expiration of 12 months
from the date of such replacements or renewals.

81.0 Guarantee:
81.1 Besides guarantees required elsewhere, the Contractor shall guarantee the work in general for
one year as noted in the General Conditions.

81.2 All required guarantees shall be submitted to the Owner/Client/Executive Engineer

/Architect by the Contractor when requesting Certification of accounts for payment by the
Owner/Client.

81.3 All required guarantees shall be submitted to the Owner/Client/Executive Engineer in the
forms given as a pre-requisite to acceptance and payment.

82.0 Setting Out:

82.1 The Contractor shall establish, maintain and assume responsibility for the grades, lines,
levels and bench marks. He shall report any errors or inconsistencies regarding grades, lines,
levels and dimensions to the Architect/Executive Engineer before commencing work.
Commencement of work will be regarded as the Contractor’s acceptance of such grades, lines,
levels and dimensions and no claim will be entertained at a later date for any errors found. If
at any time, any error in such respect shall appear during the progress of the work, the
Contractor shall, at his own expense rectify such error if so required to the satisfaction of the
Architect/Executive Engineer.

82.2 Such surveys shall be carried out by a qualified Surveyor or all bench marks to be erected by
the Contractor in connection with the work shall be co-related to the permanent bench marks
established at the site.

83.0 Drawings, Specifications etc:

83.1 After the Contract is signed, the Contractor will be furnished with two copies of the drawings
and two copies each of the Conditions of Contract, Specifications and Schedule of Quantities
without cost to him for his use until the completion of the Contract. Additional copies of
drawings and other documents will be supplied on payment to the Architect at actual cost.

83.2 In general, the drawings shall indicate dimensions, positions and type of construction; the
specifications shall indicate the qualities and the methods; and the Schedule of Quantities
shall indicate the quantity and rate for each item of work. However, the above documents
being complementary, what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all.
In case of any discrepancies in or among the documents, the most stringent of all shall apply.

83.3 Any work indicated on the drawings and not mentioned in the Schedule of Quantities or
Specifications or vice versa, shall be deemed as though fully set forth in each. Work not
specifically detailed, called for, marked or specified, shall be the same as similar parts that
are detailed, marked or specified.

83.4 No deviations from the Drawings, Specifications and Schedule of Quantities shall be made.
The Owner/Client/Executive Engineer’s interpretation of these documents shall be final and
without appeal.

83.5 Errors or inconsistencies discovered in the Plans and Specifications shall be promptly called
to the attention of the Architect/Executive Engineer through the Site Engineer for
interpretation or correction. Local conditions which may affect the work shall likewise be
brought to the Owner/Client/Executive Engineer’s attention at once. If, at any time, it is
discovered that work being done which is not in accordance with the approved plans and
Specifications, the Contractor shall correct the work immediately. Correction of defective work
shall not be a basis for any claims for extension of time. The Contractor shall not carry on the
work except with the knowledge of the Site Engineer.

83.6 Figured dimensions on the scale drawings and large-scale details shall govern. Large scale
details take precedence over scale drawings. Any work done before receipt of such details if

21
 not in accordance with the same, shall be removed and replaced or adjusted as
directed, without expense to the Owner/Client.

83.7 All Drawings, Specifications and Schedule of Quantities and copies thereof furnished by the
Owner/Client/Executive Engineer are his property. They shall not be used on any other work
and shall be returned to him at his request or at the completion of the Contract.

84.0 Samples & Shop Drawings:

After the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish for the approval of the
Architect/Owner/Client/Executive Engineer, samples and shop drawings. Samples shall be
delivered as directed by the Owner/Client/Executive Engineer. No extra payment is due to the
Contractor for preparation of any samples. A schedule giving dates for the submission of
samples shall be included in the time schedule. Unless specifically authorized, all samples
must be submitted for approval at least ten days prior to commencement of work at site.

85.0 Guarantee Certificate

85.1 The Contract shall not be considered as completed until Guarantee period shall have expired.
The Guarantee Certificate stating that the works have been completed and maintained to
owner satisfaction and that all the defects notified had been rectified, shall be given by the
Executive Engineer within one month of the expiry of the Guarantee period, and if different
Guarantee periods shall become applicable to different parts of the works, the expiry of the
last such period; or as soon thereafter as any work ordered to be rectified during such period
shall have been completed to the satisfaction of the Executive Engineer .

85.2 Provided that in the case of fraud, concealment or fraudulent concealment relating to the
works or materials or to any matter dealt within any certificate, the Guarantee certificate shall
not be conclusive evidence as to its sufficiency.

86.0 Safety Procedures

86.1 The Contractor shall incorporate in his operation the requirements of all the "Safety Codes"
issued by the Bureau of Indian Standards, National Building Code 2002 and regulations of
local Authorities. Where the requirements of BIS Codes, National Building Code and
regulations are duplicated by local Authorities, the more stringent regulations shall be
deemed to apply. If the Contractor fails to take safety measures and provide facilities at the
Site of work to ensure safety of Works and injuries to workmen, the Owner/Client/Executive
Engineer shall have the powers to do so and recover the cost thereof from the Contractor.

86.2 The Contractor shall provide safe means of access to all working places.

86.3 The Contractor shall properly design scaffolding, temporary access, ladders, ramps and
hoisting arrangements, cranes etc. as applicable, to ensure safety of workmen as well as
Works. All scaffolds, ladders and other safety devices shall be maintained in safe conditions.

86.4 All necessary personal safety equipment shall be kept available for the use of the persons
employed on the Site and maintained in a condition for immediate use. The Contractor shall
take adequate steps to ensure proper use of equipment by those concerned.

86.5 Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent danger from electrical equipment.

86.6 No materials on the site of works shall be so stacked or placed as to cause danger or
inconvenience to any persons.

86.7 All consequences, damages or losses arising by reasons of any violation of the safety
requirement shall be met by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be bound to pay
compensation to the persons for the injuries sustained or death owing to neglect of the safety
precautions, should any claim proceedings be filed against the Owner/Client/Employer. The
Contractor hereby agrees to indemnify the Owner/Client and Employer against the same.

FORE-CLOSURE AND TERMINATION OF CONTRACT

87.0 Foreclosure of Contract

87.1 If at any time after the commencement of work, the Owner/Client shall, for any reason
whatsoever, not require the whole or part of the works specified, the Owner/Client shall give

22
 notice in writing of that to the Contractor who shall have no claim to any payment of
compensation whatsoever on account of any profit or advantage which he might have derived
from the execution of work in full but which he did not derive in consequence of the full
amount of work not having been carried out. The Contractor shall be paid at Contract rates
full amounts for the works executed at site and in addition a reasonable amount as certified
by the Architect/Executive Engineer for the following which could not be utilized on the work
to the full extent because of the foreclosure

a. The amount payable in respect of any preliminary items so far as the work or service
comprised therein has been carried out and a proper proportion, as certified by the
Site Engineer, of any such items, the work or service comprised, which has been
partially carried out or performed.

b. Cost of materials reasonably ordered for the works which shall have been delivered to
the Contractor or which the Contractor is legally liable to accept delivery. Such
material shall then become the property of the Owner.

c. A sum to be certified by the Architect being the amount of any expenditure

reasonably incurred by the Contractor in the expectation of completing the whole of
the works in so far as such expenditure shall not have been covered by the payments
made to the Contractor.

87.2 Provided that against any payments due from the Owner/Client under the clause, the
Owner/Client shall be entitled to be credited with any outstanding balances due from the
Contractor for any advances in respect of materials and otherwise and any other sum which
on the date of foreclosing was recoverable by the Owner/Client from the Contractor under the
terms of Contract.

88.0 Cancellation of Contract on Default of Contractor

88.1 If the Contractor shall become bankrupt, or being a corporation, shall go into liquidation
(other than a voluntary liquidation for the purpose of amalgamation or reconstruction), or if
the Contractor shall assign the Contract with out the consent in writing of the Employer first
obtained, or shall have an execution levied on his goods or if the Executive Engineer shall
certify in writing to the Employer that in his opinion the Contractor

a. has abandoned the Contract, or

b. without reasonable excuse has suspended the progress of the Works for 2 weeks after
receiving from the Executive Engineer written notice to proceed, or

c. despite previous warnings by the Executive Engineer, in writing, is not executing the
Works in accordance with the Contract, or is persistently or flagrantly neglecting to
carry out his obligation under the Contract, or

d. has in defiance of the Owner/Client's instructions to the contrary, sublet any part of
the Contract,

Then the Owner/Client may, after giving fourteen days notice in writing to the Contractor,
determine the Contract, and enter upon the Site and Works without releasing the Contractor
from any of his obligation or liabilities under the Contract, or affecting the rights and powers
conferred on the Owner/Client by the Contract and may either himself complete the Works or
may employ any other Contractor, to complete the Works. the Owner/Client may use for such
completion so much of the said Constructional Plant Temporary Works and materials, which
may have been deemed to be reserved exclusively for the execution of the Works under the
provisions of the Contract, as the Employer may think proper; and the Employer may at any
time sell any of the Construction Plant, Temporary Works and unused materials and apply
the proceeds of sale in or towards the satisfaction of any sums due or which may become due
to the Owner/Client from the Contractor under the Contract.

88.2 The Architect / Executive Engineer shall, as soon as may be practicable after any such
determination by the Owner/Client, fix and determine ex-part by or after reference to the
Contractor and shall certify what amount, if any, had at the time of such determination
reasonably accrued to the Contractor and the value of any of the said unused or partially
used materials, any Constructional Plant and any Temporary works.

23
 88.3 If Owner/Client determines the Contract under this clause, he shall not be liable to
pay the Contractor any money on account of the Contract until the expiration of the
Guarantee period and thereafter until the cost of execution and maintenance, rectification of
defects, damages for delay in completion, and all other expenses incurred by the
Owner/Client have been ascertained and the amount thereof certified by the Architect /
Executive Engineer. The Contractor shall then be entitled to receive only such sum or sums, if
any, as the Architect / Executive Engineer may certify would have been payable to him upon
due completion by him after deducting the said amounts. The Contractor shall be paid
accordingly.

89.0 Changes in Constitution

If, there is a change in the constitution of the Contractor firm, after or prior to the award of
the Contract and if prior approval is not obtained, the Contractor shall have been deemed to
have been assigned and the Owner/Client reserves the right to determine the Contract and
the same consequence shall follow as if the Contract was determined on the Contractor's
default.

90.0 Taxes and Duties

90.1 The Contract Sum/Rates shall be deemed to include all taxes applicable in State of JAMMU
AND KASHMIR by State /Central Govt.i.e. Excise duty, sales tax, octroi/entry tax, and all
other taxes, duties, levies and sales tax /Service Tax , cess tax on Works Contract. The
Owner/Client shall not entertain any claim whatsoever on this account. Owner shall make
necessary tax deductions from Contractor’s invoices as may be required by Law / Regulations
/ Statutory Authorities from time to time.

90.2 Sales Tax on Works Contract:

If Sales Tax on Works Contract is levied by the Government in the State of JAMMU AND
KASHMIR, then any Sales Tax in this regard will be deducted by the Owner/Client, from the
contractor’s bills.

91.0 Details of Construction Not Specifically Mentioned & Minor Changes

Rates quoted shall be deemed to allow for all constructional details which may not have been
specifically described in the Bill of Quantities, shown on the drawings or given in the
specifications and minor extras that are essential for the execution of the work and services in
a workman like manner, details of constructions not specifically shown in drawings/specified
shall be furnished to the Contractor or by the contractor during the execution of the work. In
case of any difference of opinion between the Contractor and the Owner/Client/Executive
Engineer shall determine as to whether or not the item involved constituted a constructional
detail or minor extra and his decision shall be final and binding.

92.0 Use of Completed Portions

The Owner/Client shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or
partially completed portion of the Work, notwithstanding that the time for completing the
entire work may not have expired. Taking such possession and use shall not be deemed
acceptance of any work completed in accordance with the terms of this Contract.

93.0 Force Majeure

If, at any time, during the continuance of this contract, the performance in whole or in the
part by either party of any obligation under this contract, shall be prevented or delayed by
reason of any war, hostility, acts of public enemy, civil commotion, sabotage, fires, floods,
explosions, epidemics, quarantine restrictions or other acts of God, strikes and lockouts
(hereinafter refereed to as ‘eventualities’) then provided notice of happening of any such
eventuality is given by the either party to the other within fifteen (15 ) days from the date of
occurrence thereof, neither party shall by reason of such eventuality be entitled to terminate
this contract nor shall either party have any claim for damages against the other in respect of
such nonperformance or delay in performance and work under this contract shall be resumed
as soon as practicable after such eventuality has come to an end or ceased to exist, and the
decision of the Owner/Client as to whether the work has been so resumed shall be final and
conclusive. The time of completion shall then be extended by a period equal to the period
during which the eventuality was prevailing.

94.0 Personal Liability

24
 Neither the Owner/Client nor the Executive Engineer nor the Architect nor their
Representatives shall be personally bound or liable for the acts or obligations or default or
omission in the observance of any of the acts, matters or things which are herein contained.

95.0 Non Waiver of Defaults

Failure of the Owner/Client/Executive Engineer to insist upon strict performance of any
terms and conditions of the Contract or condonation by them of any breach by the Contractor
or any Sub-Contractor of any stipulations and conditions of the Contract shall in no way
prejudice or affect or be construed as a waiver of any rights and remedies that the
Owner/Client may have and will not be deemed a waiver of any subsequent default under the
terms and conditions of the Contract.

96.0 Trial Operations, Handing Over, Completion Certificate

96.1 On completion of the installation and before its start up, each item of the equipment shall be
inspected by the Contractor and Architect / Consultants/ Executive Engineer jointly for the
correctness and completeness of the installation. Thereafter Contractor's
commissioning/start-up Site Engineer shall carry out all pre-commissioning tests as specified
in the relevant Indian Standards. Results of pre-commissioning tests shall be signed jointly by
the Contractor's Representative and the Consultants.

96.2 On conclusion of satisfactory pre-commissioning tests the installation shall be put on trial
operation during which period all necessary adjustments shall be made while operating over
the full load-range. The trial operation shall be considered successful if the installation is in
operation continuously on full load for a period mutually agreed, with all vital safety
operations maintained. The status of the installation during its trial operation shall be
recorded in the logbook, which shall be signed daily by the Representatives of the Architect
and the Contractor.

96.3 Should the continuous operation of the installation during the trial operation be interrupted
due to either difficulty with the installation, or otherwise then the trial operation shall run
again for the period agreed.

96.4 The readiness of the installation shall then be notified in writing, to the Local Authority
concerned, for their inspection and certification that the installation meets all the statutory
requirements and authorization for its commissioning and use. The Contractor shall obtain
all necessary approvals and/or certificates from the concerned local authorities before the
completion certificate is issued by the Architect /Executive Engineer.

96.5 The Contractor shall ensure that all technical requirements of installation inclusive of all sub-
systems are compiled well before performance tests are carried out.

97.0 Performance Tests

97.1 Performance tests shall be then conducted at Site, by the Architect /Site Engineer to
determine compliance of every equipment with the specified performance. The Contractor's
commissioning and start-up Site Engineers shall make the unit ready for such tests and
assist the Architect /Site Engineer in conducting the tests.

97.2 The guaranteed performance rating of each equipment shall be proved by the Contractor
during the performance tests. Should the results of these tests show any decrease/increase
from the guaranteed values, the Contractor shall modify the equipments as required to meet
the guarantees. In such cases, performance test shall be repeated within fifteen days from the
date the equipment is ready for re-test and all cost of modifications including labour,
materials and the cost of re-testing to prove that the equipment meets the guarantees, shall
be borne by the Contractor.

98.0 Final Acceptance/ Completion Certificate

98.1 Only after the demonstration of the integrated operation, trial run and approval by the Local
Authority, satisfactory performance tests and necessary documentation and information
furnished as per the Contract, shall the Architect /Executive Engineer issue the completion
certificate to the Contractor.

25
 98.2 Minor defects, which do not affect the safe operation of the equipment at the rated
capacity, if accepted by the Architect /Executive Engineer, shall not be considered as reason
for the installation being not ready for handing over. These defects will be notified to the
Contractor and will be rectified by the Contractor in a mutually agreed schedule.

98.3 All equipment, tools and tackles and any special instruments required, for conducting pre-
commissioning and performance tests shall be provided by the Contractor at his cost.

99.0 Use Before Completion Certificate

99.1 If by reason of any default on the part of the Contractor, a completion certificate has not been
issued in respect of every portion of the Works as mentioned within one month after the time
for completion or extended time as the case may be, the Owner/Client shall be at liberty to
use the Works or any portion thereof in respect, of which a completion certificate has not
been issued, provided that works or the portion so used as aforesaid shall be reasonably
capable of being used and that the Contractor shall be afforded the earliest opportunity of
taking such steps as may be necessary to permit the issue of the certificate of completion.

99.2 The Owner/Client shall be at liberty from time to time or at any time before the completion of
the Works to take possession of and use any part of the Site or uncompleted Works and in
such case the Contractor shall completely finish the said incomplete parts or a part of the
works as and when the Executive Engineer shall direct whether before or after the respective
prescribed time or extended time or times (if any) for the completion of the Works and if
required by the Executive Engineer while the Owner/Client is in possession of the said part or
parts of the Site or Works.

100.0 Price Escalation

Escalation as admissible will be allowed, calculated as per indian standard Formula

with respect to WPI but to the maximum of ten percentage of the total work done cost
after two year.

101.0 Price Adjustments

The rates quoted by the Contractor and accepted by the Owner/Client shall hold good till the
completion of the work and no additional claim will be admissible on account of statutory
increase in prices, fluctuation of market rates , except payment/ recovery shall be made as
price variation as per clause.

102.0 Performance & Guarantee Test

102.1 The final test, as the performance and guarantee test, shall be conducted at Site, by the
Owner/Client. The Contractor's commissioning and start-up Site Engineers shall make the
unit ready for such test and assist the Owner/Client in conducting such tests Such test will
be commenced within a period mutually agreed upon after the successful completion of trial
operations.

102.2 These tests shall be binding on both the parties of the Contract to determine compliance of
equipment with the performance guarantee.

102.3 All the special instruments which will require proper calibration before conducting such
performance and guarantee tests shall be provided by the Contractor and the same shall be
taken back after completion of these tests, with prior written approval of the Executive
Engineer.

102.4 Any special equipment, tools and tackles including special instruments required for the
successful performance and guarantee tests shall be provided by the Contractor, free of cost.

102.5 The guarantee performance figures of the equipment shall be proved by the Contractor during
these performances and guarantee test. Should the results of these tests show any decrease
for the guaranteed value the Contractor shall modify the equipments as required to enable it
to meet the guarantees. In such cases, performance and guarantee test shall be repeated

26
 within one month, from the date the equipment is ready for re-test and all costs for
modifications including labour, materials and the cost of additional testing to prove that the
equipment meets the guarantee, shall be borne by the Contractor.

103.0 Approval from Authorities

The Contractor shall assist the Owner/Client in obtaining the approvals/ certificates from the
various Local Authorities i.e. the Electrical Inspector, Lift Inspector, Fire Department etc.
before the works can be put in commercial use by the Owner/Client

104.0 Settlement of Disputes

All disputes and differences of any kind whatever arising out of or in connection with the
Contract or the carrying out of the works (whether during the progresses of the works or after
their completion, and whether before or after the determination, abandonment or breach of
the Contract) shall be referred to and settled by the Executive Engineer after hearing the
disputing parties. The Executive Engineer shall state his decisions with reasons therefore.
Such decisions may be in the form of a final Certificate or otherwise. The decision of the
Executive Engineer with respect to any or all of the following matters shall be final subject to
the Arbitration and Conciliation Act.

a) the variation or modifications of the design.

b) the quality or quantity of works or the addition or omission or substitution of any
work.
c) Any discrepancy in the Drawings and/or Specifications and Schedule of Quantities.
d) the removal and/or re-execution of any works executed by the Contractor.
e) the dismissal from the Works of any persons deployed thereupon.
f) The opening up for inspection of any works covered up.
g) The amending and making good of any defects under defects liability period.
h) Acceptability of materials, equipment and workmanship.
i) Materials, labor, tools, equipment and workmanship necessary for the proper
execution of work.
j) Assignment and sub-letting
k) Delay and extension of work
l) Termination of Contract by the Owner/Client.

105.0 Jurisdiction:
All matters arising out of or in any way connected with this Agreement shall be deemed to
have arisen in J&K State and only the Courts in SRINAGAR shall have Jurisdiction to
determine the same.

106.0 Arbitrator
All disputes and differences of any kind whatever arising out of or in connection with the
Contract or the carrying out of the Works (whether during the progress of the Works or after
their completion and whether before or after the determination, abandonment or breach of the
Contract) shall be referred to and settled by the Executive Engineer who shall state his
decision in writing. Such decision may be in the form of a Final Certificate or otherwise. If
either the Contractor or the Owner/Client be dissatisfied with the decision of the Executive
Engineer on any matter, question or dispute of any kind (except any of the excepted matters)
or as to the withholding by the Executive Engineer of any certificate to which the Contractor
may claim to be entitled then and in any such case either party (the Owner/Client or the
Contractor) may within 28 days after receiving notice of such decision give a written notice to
the other party through the Owner/Client/Executive Engineer requiring that such matters in
dispute be Arbitrated upon. Such written notice shall specify the matters which are in dispute
or difference of which such written notice given and no other shall be and is hereby referred
to the Arbitration and final decision of a Single Arbitrator of a technical background to be
agreed upon and appointed by both the parties or in case of disagreement as to the
appointment of a single Arbitrator to the Arbitration, of two Arbitrators of technical
background one to be appointed by each party and the Arbitrators shall, before taking upon
themselves the burden of reference, appoint an Umpire. The provision of the Arbitration and
Conciliation act 1996 for the time being enforced shall apply. The jurisdiction for all
disputes/disagreements arising out of this contract shall be vested with the courts of New
Delhi.

107.0 Protection and Cleaning:

107.1 Protection of Site

27
 The Contractor shall protect and preserve the Works from all damage or accident by providing
temporary roofs, windows and door coverings, boxing or other construction as required by the
Executive Engineer. This protection shall be provided for all property adjacent to the site as
well as on the site.

107.2 Cleaning of Site

The Contractor shall properly clean the Work as it progresses and shall remove all rubbish
and debris from the site from time to time as is necessary and as directed. On completion, the
Contractor shall ensure that the premises and/or site are cleaned, surplus materials, debris,
sheds etc removed, areas under floor cleared of rubbish, gutters, drains cleared, doors and
sashes eased, locks and fastenings oiled, keys clearly labeled and handed over to the Site
Manager so that the whole is left fit for immediate occupation or use and to the satisfaction of
the Executive Engineer.

108.0 Covering Up
The Contractor must give at least three working days clear notice to the Executive Engineer
and the Site Engineer before covering up any of the work in foundation and drains in order
that proper measurement may be taken of the work as executed and in the event of the
Contractor failing to provide such notice, he is, at his own expense, to uncover as required to
allow the measurements to be taken and afterwards to reinstate the work satisfactorily.

109.0 Methods of Measurement

For measuring all work, the standard method of measurement in accordance with the
standards laid down by the Bureau of Indian Standards shall be adopted unless otherwise
specified. In the Event of any dispute with regard to the mode of measurement of the work
executed, the decision of the Executive Engineer shall be final and binding.

110.0 Tolerance
The Contractor shall exercise every care to ensure that all structural members are sufficiently
plumb and true to dimensions called for on the drawings to receive prefabricated finishing
elements such as doors, windows, cabinet work, ceramic work, concrete, tiles etc. Any
variations may require rectification in the structural members or may involve remaking or
replacing the finishing elements, fabricated to fit into the openings or spaces, as called for on
the Drawings. In case of separate Contract, the Contractor whose work does not conform to
dimensions called for, shall be liable for all the expenses which have been incurred for
rectification or replacement as may be required by the Architect / Executive Engineer for the
proper installation of the finishing elements. The Executive Engineer’s decision in this respect
shall be final and binding on the parties concerned.

111.0 Indemnity
The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner/Client against all actions, suits, claims and
demands brought or made against the Owner/Client in respect of any matter or thing done or
omitted to be done by the Contractor in the execution of or in connection with the work of this
Contract and against any loss or damage to the Owner/Client in consequences of any action
of suit being brought against the Contractor for anything done or omitted to be done in the
execution of the work in this contract.

Schedule 1

INSURANCE AND INDEMNITY REQUIREMENTS

To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold
Owner//Client, and its officers, directors, agents, contractors and employees, harmless from
and against any and all claims, demands, liabilities, obligations, penalties, fines, actions,
causes of action, judgments, damages, losses, costs or expenses (including reasonable
attorneys' fees) with respect to, or directly or indirectly arising out of, resulting from or related
to (in whole or in part) the performance of the work (including, without limitation, all property
damage, bodily injury, death and personal injury arising therefrom). Contractor further
acknowledges and agrees that the foregoing obligations of Contractor shall extend to any
claims, demands, liabilities, obligations, penalties, fines, actions, causes of action, judgments,
damages, losses, costs or expenses (including attorneys' fees) related to any defects in or
nonconformance of the work or caused by any employee or Sub-Contractor of Contractor. The
obligations of Contractor under this Schedule 1 shall survive the expiration or earlier
termination of the Contract.

28
 Contractor shall purchase and maintain, at its sole cost and expense, for the benefit of
Owner/Client and Contractor, the following admitted insurance coverages during the
performance of the work and until completion thereof:

(a) Workmen’s compensation insurance. Contractor shall, at its expense, carry during the term of
this agreement Workmen’s compensation insurance as required under the Workmen’s
Compensation Act, 1923.

(b) All Risk Policy inclusive of Third party liability Immediately on signing of the contract, the
Contractor shall, at his own cost, shall carry during the term of this agreement, All Risk
Policy inclusive of Third party liability insurance against loss or damage by fire and/or
earthquake with any nationalized insurance company in the joint names of the
Owner//Client and the Contractor for the total contract value. The Contractor shall in the
joint names of the Owner//Client and Contractor insure against loss and damage by fire,
storm, lightning, flood, earthquake, aerial objects, riot, civil commotion or malicious acts for
the full value of all the work executed and all unfixed materials and goods intended for,
delivered to, and placed on or adjacent to the works, but excluding temporary buildings, plant
tools and equipment owned or hired by the contractor or any sub-contractor, and shall keep
such works, materials and goods so insured until virtual completion of the project; and Third
party liability insurance on an "occurrence" basis, providing coverage for bodily injury, death,
property damage, advertising injury and personal injury, including coverages for premises
and operations (including elevators, escalators and cranes, if applicable), independent
contractors, completed operations (for two (2) years after the date of acceptance of the work by
Owner//Client) and blanket contractual liability specifically covering the indemnification
provisions set forth above, of at least Rs 2,00,000 in primary coverage per occurrence and
location. If Contractor is required to perform any excavation, trenching or other underground
work in connection with the work, the foregoing insurance shall also provide coverage for
explosion, collapse and underground hazards with such coverage limits as may be requested
by Owner//Client. Any deductible amounts shall be subject to the prior approval of
Owner//Client. The Contractor shall deposit the policy and receipts for the premium with the
Owner//Client within one month of the date of commencement. The aforesaid insurance
policies shall not be cancelled till the architect has agreed to their cancellation. The
Contractor shall submit proof to the architect from time to time that he has taken out all the
insurance policies as stated above and has paid the necessary premium for keeping the
policies alive till the expiry of the guarantee period.

(c) Motor vehicle liability insurance Contractor shall, at its expense, carry during the term of this
agreement Motor vehicle liability insurance as required by Indian law.

Contractor shall cause each subcontractor to obtain and maintain, at no expense to Owner//Client,
the insurance coverages described above and shall be responsible for any claims or losses to the
Owner/Client resulting from their failure to obtain adequate insurance protection in connection
thereof.;

The insurance shall initially be kept valid up to 60 days beyond the scheduled completion date and
may be extended, based on a written request from the Owner/Client / Executive Engineer.

All such insurance coverages shall be admitted coverages purchased from an insurance company
permitted to do business in India. All policies shall be written in English. Contractor shall cause each
insurance company providing such insurance coverages to name Owner/Client and its directors,
employees, officers, agents and contractors, as named or additional insured’s thereunder, as
applicable, or provide such documentation as may be acceptable to Owner/Client and Executive
Engineer confirming that such coverages have been obtained for the benefit of Owner/Client and
Contractor in accordance with this Schedule 1. Such insurance policies shall be endorsed to stipulate
that the insurance afforded such additional insured’s shall apply as primary insurance and that any
other insurance carried by Owner/Client, its directors, employees, officers, agents and contractors,
shall be excess only and shall not contribute with the insurance required to be maintained by
Contractor hereunder. The foregoing limits of liability shall not in any manner affect or limit the
extent of Contractor's liability to Owner/Client under this Contract or at law. As evidence of the
insurance coverages described above, Contractor shall deliver to Owner/Client certificates of
insurance or such other documentation acceptable to Owner/Client and Executive Engineer
confirming that such coverages have been obtained in accordance with this Schedule 1. Each carrier
shall agree to furnish at least 30 days prior written notice of cancellation or material change in
coverage.

29
 Contractor hereby releases, and shall cause its subcontractors to release, Owner/Client and its
officers, directors, agents, employees and affiliates, from and against any and all claims or causes of
action whatsoever which Contractor or any subcontractor may otherwise have or possess in
connection with any loss covered or which should have been covered by the insurance required to be
maintained by Contractor or any subcontractor as provided herein. Contractor shall cause its
insurance companies to consent to the foregoing waiver and waive all subrogation rights against
Owner/Client regarding any such claims.

In the event of Contractor's failure to maintain any of the insurance coverages provided hereinabove,
Owner//Client may obtain such policies and deduct the cost thereof from any moneys due or which
may become due to Contractor.

In the event of any damage to the work, whether or not subject to the insurance coverages described
hereinabove, Contractor shall, at its sole cost and expense, proceed with due diligence to rebuild and
repair the work so damaged. If such damage was caused by casualty or other reason beyond the fault
or reasonable control of Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of time for
completion of the work as determined by Executive Engineer; provided, however, that in no event shall
Contractor be entitled to any additional compensation or moneys in connection therewith, including,
without limitation, any shortfall or deficiency in amounts finally paid by any insurer.

30
 Section 02:

SAFETY PROCEDURES

The contractor shall have a safety meeting every Monday morning to be attended by all
workers of the contractors. The person holding the meeting shall have a report stating the
names of all persons attending, and topics discussed. These reports would be submitted to the
Site Engineer every Monday evening.

1. General Safety Practices

1.1. Each Contractor shall appoint a safety monitor to monitor their work. The Contractor safety
monitors shall have a scheduled weekly meeting with Site Engineer /Owner’s safety Manager.

1.2. Contractors and Sub-Contractors shall submit a weekly report which shall include the report
from the sub-contractors also stating all accidents.

1.3. The Contractors must develop an emergency treatment and medical evaluation procedure. He
will set up a working arrangement with local medical doctor to handle injury cases, and
provide for treatment by a specialist or local hospital. Site Engineer and owner must be
notified immediately of all work injuries.

1.4. Visits are not allowed on the site of Work without a visitor’s badge, which the Contractor must
obtain, for security.

1.5. Site Engineer and or security are authorized to inspect all vehicles and personal lunch boxes,
packages and bundles entering or leaving the project.

1.6. Site Engineer shall have authority to shut a portion of the work in progress or all work of the
project whether they deem that the work is being carried out in an unsafe manner, safety
equipment is not being used and safety procedures are not followed.

1.7. Person working above 1.5 meter height shall wear full body safety belt and hooked the
lanyard to a higher lever point all the time. Full body harness is recommended even if a
person is working from a scaffold platform.

1.8. The contractor shall take prior approval before introducing any chemical to the site.
Contractor shall submit MSDS of such chemicals for review.

1.9. Naked flame policy: Open flame for any heating purpose shall not be carried out at site.Oxy-
Fuel gas cutting set is exempted. This set shall be used only for gas cutting work.

1.10. The contractor shall provide at his expense one room of reasonable dimensions plus toilet
facilities for the use of their workers as rest room. The room & toilet shall be well-lit and well-
ventilated.

1.11. If female labour is engaged , the contractor shall make necessary provisions at his own
expenses for safeguarding and care of their children and keeping them in crèche, which will
also maintained by the contractor.

1.12. The contractor shall provide at his expense safe drinking water provisions for all their
workers.

1.13. The contractor to provide adequate number of pedestal fans for proper ventilation to create
conducive working environment for labour engaged.

1.14. Provision for sufficient and workable fire extinguisher to be made in each zone of the site as
per directions of the Site Engineer.

1.15. Maintain and active list of all hazardous substance and be in possession of material safety
data sheets.

1.16. No kids/ children would be permitted within the project site.

31
 1.17. No minors (below the age of Eighteen years) would be permitted to work on the Project
Site.

1.18. Every opening in the floor/wall of a building or in a working platform be provided with
suitable means to prevent the full of persons or material by providing suitable fencing or
rating whose minimum height shall be 1.0 meter.

1.19. Safe means of access shall be provided to all working platform and other working places.

1.20. Contractor shall enforce fire protection methods and adherence to local fire regulations and
provisions approximately located approved fire extinguishers and other fire fighting services
and equipments.

1.21. Contactor shall provide temporary barricades and for fencing including working sights,
signals, notices and lights as appropriate to the particular situation and of sufficiency and
strength suitable for said situation same shall be maintained continuously until the
particular hazard is needed.

1.22. The safety provisions should be brought to the notice of all concerned by displaying on a
notice board at a prominent place at work spot. The person responsible for compliance of the
safety codes shall be named therein by the Contractor.

1.23. Ensure the effective enforcement of the rules and regulations relating to safety precautions
the arrangements made by the Contractor shall be open to inspection by the Labour Officer,
Engineer-in-Charge of the department or their representatives.

1.24. Any instruction / requirement of the Site Engineer / Architect with regards to safety shall not
relieve Contractor of his absolute responsibility under this or any other relevant contract
conditions or any act/rule in force in the Republic of India.

1.25. Contractor is deemed to have allowed for all direct or associated cost arising there from when
tendering for the works.

1.26. All Engineers, Foremen, Supervisors and other employees of Contractor shall observe and
every rule regulation and order as necessary for the safe conduct of work.

1.27. All workmen shall know how to do the job and shall be able to determine what the hazards
might be. They shall not take any chances or use unsafe methods tools or equipment. If they
do not know how to do the job safety they shall be engaged on the job after proper guidance.

1.28. Senior Engineers shall take interest in their co-workers. They shall explain or show them the
safe methods of doing the work and caution them about dangerous or unsafe acts.

1.29. Any workmen known to be under the influence of any intoxicating substance shall not be
allowed on the job. Drugs, pills, tranquilizers etc. are not be taken on the job unless written
permission is obtained from a doctor.

1.30. No workmen shall knowingly be permitted or required to work while his ability or alertness is
so impaired by fatigue, illness or other causes that might, unnecessarily expose him or others
to injury.

1.31. Fighting, quarrelling, being abusive etc. are forbidden on the job.

1.32. Firearms and ammunition are not to be brought to the job site at any time.

1.33. No materials or equipment shall be thrown of scaffolding. Some one who may be walking or
working below may be injured.

1.34. “Tool Box” safety meetings shall be conducted by officer of Contractor on a regular basis. All
workers on site shall be instructed on accident prevention.

32
 1.35. No one is to operate equipment or use tools which have been tagged “DO NOT
OPERATE” or “OUT OF ORDER” until required repairs have been made and sand tag has
been removed by an authorized person.

1.36. The Safety Officer of the Contractor shall regulate use and storage of chemicals.

1.37. Adequate precaution shall be taken by the Contractor to ensure no materials are stacked at a
place which may cause danger or inconvenience to any person or the Public. The Contractor
shall provide all necessary fencing and lights to protect public from accidents and shall be
bound to bear expenses of defence of every suite, action, other proceedings of law that may be
brought by any person for injury sustained owing to neglect of the above precautions to pay
any damages and costs which may be awarded in any such suit action or proceedings to any
such person of which may with the consent of the Contractor be paid to compromise any
claim by any such person.

2. Personal Protective Equipment

2.1. Whenever there is a possibility of exposure to hazardous material or operations, personal

protective equipment or devise shall be worn or used. These include (but are not limited to)
hard hats, safety shoes, safety glasses and goggles, gloves, face masks, protective suits,
hoods, respiratory equipment and proper hearing protection.

2.2. Hard Hats: All personnel working in areas where there is a danger of head injury from impact
or from falling objects shall be protected by protective helmets. This will be interpreted as all
areas within the site boundary except inside permanent or temporary structures not under
construction.

2.3. Helmets shall meet the specifications contained in the National Standards.

2.4. Employees of Contractors, who are found working on the construction site and are not in
possession of an approved hard hat, will be asked to leave the site and remain at security gate
until arrangements can be made by their supervisor to obtain an approved hard hat.

2.5. Eye Protection: Required when doing work that may cause possible injures to eyes from flying
particles, grinding, splashes or welding cutting dismantling stone breaking operations.

2.6. Safety Shoes: To be worn by all worker.

2.7. Clothing: To be suitable for the type of work in which engaged.

2.8. Gearing Protection: Shall be worn in any posted area and when operating Pneumatic
equipment.

2.9. Respirators: Whenever and wherever necessary to protect from dust, gases, hazardous
chemical and vapours.

2.10. Safety Belts: Required when working from high places.

2.11. Protective Gloves: To be worn as work activity may require.

2.12. Safety belts: Required when working at high places with a potential risk of falling.

2.13. Welding works wherever carried out should be undertaken using complete protection
equipment like, but not limited to glass cover for eye protection and should always be
accompanied by a fire extinguisher .Such works should only be undertaken by trained
technicians and should always be done in the presence of an extra person.

2.14. Welding machine shall be provided with a local isolator.

3. Housekeeping

3.1. Job Site must be kept free from scrap wood, Paper, Plastics garbage, loose and broken
materials. House keeping will be enforced and each contractor shall be responsible for their

33
 own work area. A housekeeping program shall be established and waste disposal will
conform to local legislation. Removal of debris and waste shall be carried out without fail
on a daily basis. The contractor would be required to depute a certain number of
workers (which would be communicated by the Site Engineer) to the general site
housekeeping team, which would comprise of workers of the various Contractors
working at site.

3.2. The Contractor shall ensure that all his workmen

3.2.1. Place debris, rubbish and waste in proper containers installed by the Contractor.

3.2.2. Place and store material and equipment in designated storage areas.

3.2.3. Working areas passageways, stairs and exists are kept free from all debris,
equipments, tolls, nails and other sharp objects.

3.2.4. Avoid spilling liquids and wipe off spills (if any) immediately.

3.2.5. Use safety cans to store flammable liquids.

3.2.6. Store oily/paint soaked rags in approved containers and empty on a daily basis.

3.2.7. Nails or other sharps objects protruding from timber from panels etc. are pulled or
bent over immediately.

3.2.8. Debris and combustible scarp shall be disposed off on a regular basis and not allowed
to accumulate. Special attention should be given to second floors and higher where
adequate means shall be provided to expedite removal of such material.

4. Ladders
4.1. The Contractor shall follow the direction as given below for selection and use of ladders.

4.2. All ladders will be factory or shop built. They shall be tied off and extended 1.0m above the
landing. Painted ladders are not allowed. Ladders of aluminum alloy would be permitted at
Site with adequate rubber bases. Wooden ladders would not be allowed.

4.3. Select the right ladders for the job. Do not use a too long or too short ladder. Do not splice
two ladders together. Do not use lightweight or household ladders in a heavy construction
job. Do not use metal ladders near electrical circuits, fixtures or power lines.

4.4. Check condition of ladder for cracked or split side rails: for missing or broken steps, cleats,
rungs, treads or U-shapes; for sharp edges or splinters; for general weakened condition. If any
of the above conditions exist, withdraw the ladder from use and fix it at once, if possible; if it
cannot be fixed, destroy it. Every ladder should have identification tags, records of
maintenance and inspection must be maintained.

4.5. Use ladder safety. Place it with care; do not lean it against a movable object. Make sure it is
not placed on a loose object or uneven footing. Do not place it too close to a wall. The
horizontal distance from wall to the foot of the ladder should never be less than 1.4 times the
length and it should extend at least 0.90 meters above the upper horizontal edge. The ladder
with rope or were if wire issued be careful to protect users from injury.

4.6. Only one person at a time shall be permitted on a ladder.

4.7. Always face the ladder and grasp the side rails or rungs with both hands when ascending or
descending.

4.8. Do not carry tools or material when going up or down ladders. Use a bucket or canvas bag on
a rope to haul or lower then.

4.9. Be sure the soles of your shoes are free from dirt, oil and mud before using ladder.

4.10. Never work above the second rung from the top of the ladder.

34
 4.11. Stepladders should not be over 3 meter long. Do not use a stepladder as a straight
ladder.

5. Scaffolding

All scaffolding erected at site shall meet the following requirements:

5.1. Scaffold should be tubular and designed for the loads it will carry. Bamboo shall not be used
as scaffold. Inspect the scaffold before use.

5.2. Scaffold planks must be tested carefully created and made secure to prevent slipping by using
cleats or tying.

5.3. Scaffold to be braced/tied to the permanent structure at suitable intervals to prevent

overturning.

5.4. All scaffolds shall have handrails and loc boards (minimum 4 inches height)

5.5. There is no such thing as a temporary scaffold.

5.6. Ladders should be attached for ascent and decent on scaffolds.

5.7. Any defects, loose knots or cracks in a scaffold plank will make that plank useless and shall
not be used.

5.8. Guard rails shall be two by four inches (50x100mm) or the equivalent, approximately 1.2
meters high with a midrail. Supports shall be at intervals not to exceed 2.5 meters.

5.9. Any scaffold including accessories such as braces, brackets, trusses, screw legs, ladders etc.
weakened from any cause shall be immediately repaired or replaced.

6. Machinery and Vehicles

The Contractor shall ensure that:

6.1. Equipment is build for safe, economical and long-life operation but is only as safe as the
operator or mechanic who is handling or manipulating, therefore the Contractor must ensure
that:

6.2. Only experienced and authorized persons shall operate power equipment. Before being
allowed to operate a particular piece of equipment, the employee must prove by actual
demonstration to the supervisor that he understands the operation.

6.3. Operators shall make careful inspection of their equipment at the start of each shift, before
operating required repairs shall be completed.

6.4. Cleaning, oiling, fuelling or repairing is not to be done on equipment while it is in operation.

6.5. The operator is to take only standard industry hands signals from only one designated
person.

6.6. Cranes or other equipments shall not lift loads in excess of the manufacturer’s maximum load
permissible on the equipment. Lifting equipment must be tested by a competent authority
and records of the same maintained.

6.7. Air hoses should not be disconnected at compressors until air pressure in the house line has
been released.

6.8. Electrical installations must conform to IE (Indian Electricity Rules) and BIS (Bureau of
Indian Standards).

6.9. Do not operate equipment with 3 meter of high voltage lines. For lines over 50000 volts,
increase operating clearance 0.4” for each additional 1,000 volts.

35
 6.10. Where it is difficult for the operator to see overhead high voltage lines or obstacles, a
person shall be designated to observe and give him warning required to maintain safe
clearance.

6.11. Do not work under vehicles supported by jacks or chain hoists without protective blocking
that will prevent injury if jacks or hoists should fail.

6.12. Examine excavation before backfilling to ensure that no one is in the pit.

6.13. Before operating excavating equipment near tops of cuts, banks and cliffs be sure no one is
below.

6.14. Tractors, bulldozers and carryalls should be operated with care where there is possibility of
overturning on dangerous area, such as edges of deep fills, cut banks and steep slopes.

6.15. No passengers are allowed to ride on or in equipment that does not have a designated seat for
each rider.

6.16. Vehicular and pedestrian paths and parking spaces should be clear of overhead operating
equipment.

6.17. All moving equipments protective guards shall be in place all the time. The guard shall cover
the rotating part completely to protect people. Where the manufacturer provided Guard not
meeting our requirement, same shall be modified by contractor.

6.18. All gas bottles shall be stored upright secured by chain and separated by type. Empty bottles
shall be stored in the same manner. Valve assembly caps shall be provided for all bottles.

6.19. No gas bottles shall be rolled or dragged on the ground or concrete .They must be kept
upright and moved on a cart and carried.

6.20. No hoses shall be connected to the oxygen or acetylene bottles without a proper working
gauges and flashback arrestor.

7. Electrical Installation for construction purposes:

7.1. All extension cords or electrical cable shall be free of cuts and scuffs. All cords shall be either
male or female 3-point sockets. Bare wire stuff into a receptacle will not be allowed. All sliced
wire shall be done with a splice kit, not just turned and taped. All portable electrical
equipment shall be inspected by a competent person. Only double insulated cables shall be
used. While laying the power cord at most care shall be exercised to lay over head or attached
to the wall. Laying cable on the floor shall be avoided.

7.2. Protective devices like ELCB & MCB, Earthing shall be in place at the source of supply. No
one is authorized to work on energized line. Only after proper isolation and lockout,
electrician shall perform work.

7.3. Portable equipments power cord shall be fitted with proper rated plugs. Under no
circumstances equipments shall be connected to a socket without plug.

7.4. All electrical equipment will be grounded.

7.5. All electrical hook ups and connections to power panels, step down transformers and
distribution boxes shall be done by a certified electrician.

8. Material Handling of Overhead Operating Equipment

For safe material handling, the Contractor must ensure that:

8.1. The contractor shall make job plan for heavy lifts and the same shall be submitted to the Site
Engineer for review and approval. No workman shall walk under a load being lifted.
Contractor shall produce test certificates for the lifting device like Chain pulleys blocks, Slings
and D-Shackles prior to use.

36
 8.2. Maximum load carrying capacity of cranes, hoisting machines, blocks or chains must
be displayed along with the last date tested and the next due date for testing.

8.3. Do not overload cranes, ropes, blocks or chains. If any such equipment has been damaged or
is found to be defective immediate action for repair is taken.

8.4. No one shall ride loads, concrete buckets or hooks.

8.5. Use a guide of “Tag Line” on loads

8.6. Stand clear of taut cables or hoists.

8.7. Keep hands and fingers away from blocks sheaves or winches.

8.8. Do not stand under overhead loads.

8.9. Stack materials neatly and safely as per established guidelines.

8.10. Keep all material 45 cm away from sprinkler heads.

8.11. All material handling equipment must be periodically checked by a competent authority and
maintained properly records of the same must also be maintained.

37
Technical Specifications
For
Civil Works

Architect:

ANA Design Studio Pvt. Ltd.

3rd Floor,26C/1 Khizrabad
Opp. New Friends Colony,
New Delhi-110025
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL
The detailed specifications given hereinafter are for the items of works described in
the schedule of quantities attached herein, and shall be guidance for proper
execution of work to the required standards. It may also be noted that the
specifications are of generalized nature and these shall be read in conjunction with
the description of item in schedule of quantities and drawings. The work also
includes all minor details of construction which are obviously and fairly intended and
which may not have been referred to in these documents but are essential for the
entire occupation in accordance with standard Engineering practice.

Unless specifically otherwise mentioned, all the applicable codes and standards
published by the Indian Standard Institution and all other standards which may be
published by them before the date of receipt of tenders, shall govern in all respects of
design, workmanship, quality and properties of materials and methods of testing,
methods of measurements etc. Wherever any reference to any Indian Standard
Specifications occurs in the documents relating to this contract, the same shall be
inclusive of all amendments issued thereto or revision thereof, if any, up to the date
of receipt of tenders. In case there is no I.S.I. specification for the particular work,
such work shall be carried out in accordance with the instructions in all respects,
and requirements of the Engineer-in-Charge. The work shall be carried out in a
manner complying in all respects with the requirements of relevant bye-laws of the
Municipal Committee/ Municipal Corporation/ Development Authority /
Improvement Trust under the jurisdiction of which the work is to be executed or as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and, unless otherwise mentioned, nothing extra
shall be paid on this account.

Samples of various materials, fittings, etc. proposed to be incorporated in eh work

shall be submitted by the contractor for approval of the Engineer-in-charge before
order for bulk supply in placed.

The contractor shall take instructions from the Engineer-in-charge regarding

collection and stacking of materials in any place. No excavated earth or building
materials shall be stacked on areas where buildings, roads, services, compound wails
etc. are to be constructed.

The contractor shall maintain in perfect condition all works executed till the
completion of the entire work allotted to him. Where phased delivery is contemplated,
this provision shall apply to each phase.

The contractor shall give a performance test of the entire installation(s) as per
standard specifications before the work is finally accepted and nothing extra
whatsoever shall be payable to the contractor for the test.

The contractor shall clear the site thoroughly of all scaffolding materials and rubbish
etc. left out of his work and dress the site around the building to the satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-charge before the work is considered as complete.

1
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF MATERIALS

1. Materials shall be of the approved quality best obtainable. A list of materials of

approved brand(s) and manufacturers(s) is indicated in the annexure. Testing of
materials of approved brand(s) may have to be done at the discretion of
Architect/Project Manager. The cost to be borne by the contractor.

In case, for some reason or other materials are required to be obtained from any
manufacturer other than those listed, then prior approval from Architects will be
necessary supported by a relevant test certificates qualifying the required standard.
Further tests as directed by the Architects shall also be carried out by the contractor
at their own cost, if required.

2. Samples of all materials including the sources shall be got approved before placing
order and the approved sample shall be carefully preserved in an appropriate manner
at the site office for verification from time to time.

3. For standard bought out items, the sizes manufactured by the firms listed, shall
prevail when there is discrepancy in the sizes mentioned in the schedule without any
financial adjustment.

4. Materials shall be tested in any approved Testing Laboratory conforming to the

requirements and frequency indicated in the list of Mandatory test. The test
certificate in original shall be submitted to the Architects and entire charges
connected with testing including charges for repeated tests if ordered, shall be borne
by the contractor.

5. It shall be obligatory for the contractor to furnish certificates(s), if demanded by the

Architects, from the manufacturer or the material supplier that the work has been
carried out by using their material and as per their recommendations.

6. All materials supplied by the Employer/ any other specialist firms shall be properly
stored and the contractor shall be responsible for its safe custody until they are
required on the works and till the completion of work.

7. The contractors without any extra cost shall provide all equipment and facilities for
carrying out field tests on materials.

8. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings or mentioned in the Schedule of quantities

or special specifications, the quality of materials, workmanship, dimensions etc. shall
be followed hereunder :

8.1 EARTH FILLING

Shall be selected earth suitable for filling as approved by the Architects and free from
building rubbish or organic decomposed materials. It shall be obtained either from
excavation or brought from outside as specified in the schedule of items. Black cotton
soil shall not be used for filling.

8.2 CEMENT

Cement of grade 43, 53 or higher grade shall be used and as specified by the
Consultants for all construction. Cement shall comply in every respect with the
requirements of the latest publication of IS 8112/IS 12269 The use of cement other
than ordinary Portland cement / Blast furnace slag cement may be allowed with prior
approval of Project Manager/Architect if not mentioned in the approved list of
materials.

The weight of cement shall be taken as 1440 kg. per cum (90 lbs per cft), Cement
shall be measured by weight and in whole bags, and each undisturbed and sealed 50
kg. bag being considered equivalent to 1.25 cft in volume. Care should be taken to see
that each bag contains full quantity of cement. When part bag is required cement
shall be taken by weight or measured in measuring boxes.

No other make of cement but that approved by the Architect once will be allowed on
works and the source of supply shall not be changed without approval of the

2
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Architects in writing. Test certificates to show that the cement is fully complying the
specifications shall be submitted by the contractors to the Architects.
Notwithstanding this, cement brought on site shall be re-tested in an approved
testing laboratory every 50.00 M.T. or part thereof. Cement ordered for re-testing
shall not be used for any work pending results of retest.

Cement shall be stored in order to prevent deterioration by dampness or intrusion of

foreign matter. It shall be stored in such a way as to allow the removal and use of
cement in chronological order of receipt i.e. first received being first used. Cement
deteriorated and or colored shall not be used on work but shall be removed at once
from the site. However, allowing use of warehouse set cement shall be determined by
the Architect whose decision in this regard shall be final and binding. Weekly record
of cement received and consumed shall be maintained by the Contractor in the
prescribed format at site and submitted to Project Manager, if called for. Theoretical
consumption vis-a-vis materials brought at site by the Contractor shall also be
submitted with proper documents with every bill for verification.

8.3 FINE AGGREGATE

Sand shall be from natural source or crushed stone screenings, if allowed, chemically
inert, clean, sharp, hard, durable and well graded and free from excessive deleterious
materials. The silt content shall be within 8%. If it is excess, washing shall be done in
an approved manner to bring it within allowable limit.

The fine aggregate for concrete shall be graded and the fineness modulus may range
between 2.60 to 3.20.

The fineness modulus of fine aggregate may range between 1.80 to 2.60 for
plasterwork and all other works.

It should confirm to IS 383/IS 2386

8.4 COARSE AGGREGATE

Shall consist of crushed or broken stone 95% of which shall be retained on 4.75 mm
IS test sieve. It shall be obtained from crushing Granite, Quartzite, Trap, basalt or
similar approved stones. Coarse aggregate shall be chemically inert when mixed with
cement and shall be roughly cubical in shape and free from soft friable, thin
laminated or flaky pieces.

8.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT TMT BARS

Fe 500 TMT reinforcement bars shall conform to Specification & Grade & Tolerance :
IS:1786 (equivalent to BS4449 -460 ) "Standard quality". Other qualities of steel shall
not be acceptable.

8.6 BRICKS

The bricks shall be first class kiln burnt bricks of regular and uniform size, shape
and colour, uniformly well burnt throughout but not over burnt. They shall be free
from cracks or other flaws.

They shall show a fine grained uniform homogeneous and dense texture on fracture
and be free from lumps of lime laminations, cracks, air holes, soluble salts causing
efflorescence or other defects which may in any way impair the purpose intended.
They shall not break even when thrown on the ground on their flat face in a saturated
condition from a height of 60.00 cm (About 2').

The size of brick shall be 230 mm x 115 mm x 75 mm only). Tolerance on dimensions

upto (+ or - ) shall be as per I.S. code.

After immersion in water, absorption by weight shall not exceed 20 percent of the dry
weight of the brick when tested according to I.S.S. No. 1077-1970. The brick shall
have a minimum average compressive strength of 35 to 50kg/ per cm2 as specified
on the nomenclature of the item.

3
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The bricks to be used for the work shall be approved by the Project Manager/
Consultants/ Architects before hand.

8.7 WATER

Water for mixing Cement mortar or concrete shall not be salty or brackish and shall
be clean, reasonably clean and free from objectionable quantities of silt and traces of
oil, acid and injurious alkali, salts organic matter and other deleterious materials
which will either weaken the mortar or concrete or cause effloresce or attack the steel
in reinforced cement concrete. Water shall be obtained from sources approved by the
Architect. Potable water is generally considered satisfactory for mixing and curing
concrete, mortar, masonry etc. Where water other than municipal source is used this
shall be tested in an approved testing laboratory to establish its suitability. All
charges connected therewith shall be borne by the contractor.

8.8 CEMENT MORTAR

Cement mortar shall be of proportions specified for each type of work in the schedule.
It shall be composed of Portland cement and sand.

The ingredients shall be accurately gauged by measure and shall be well & evenly
mixed together preferably in a mechanical pan mixture. Care beige taken not to add
more water than is required. No mortar that has begun to set shall be used.

If hand mixing is done, then it shall be done on pucca waterproof platform. The
gauged materials shall be put on the platform and mixed dry. Water will then be
added and the whole mixed again until it is homogeneous and of uniform colour.

8.9 TIMBER

The timber shall be type specified in item and of good quality and well seasoned. It
shall have uniform colour, straight grains and shall be free from dead Knots, Cracks
and sapwoods. The moisture content shall be within 12% for 50mm and above
thickness and 10% for thickness below 50mm.

8.10 ADMIXTURE

Project Manager may at his discussion instruct contractor to use any other admixture
in the concrete.

4
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION – I

EARTHWORK

1.0 EARTH WORK

1.1 CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS

1.1.0 The earthwork shall be classified under the following categories and measured
separately for each category:

(a) All kind of soils: Generally any strata, such as sand, gravel, loam,
clay, mud, black cotton murrum, shingle, river or nallah bed
boulders, siding of roads, paths etc. and hard core, macadam surface
of any description (water bound, grouted tarmac etc.), lime concrete
mud concrete and their mixtures which for excavation yields to
application of picks, showels, jumper, sacrifiers, ripper and other
manual digging implements.

(b) Ordinary rock: Generally any rock which can be excavated by

splitting with crow bars or picks and does not require blasting,
wedging or similar means for excavation such as lime stone, sand
stone, hard laterite, hard conglomerate and un-reinforced cement
concrete below ground level.

If required light blasting may be resorted to for loosening the

materials but this will not in any way entitle the material to be
classified as ‘Hard rock’.

(c) Hard rock: Generally any rock or boulder for the excavation of which
blasting is required such as quartzite, granite, basalt, reinforced
cement concrete (reinforcement to be cut through but not separated
from concrete) below ground level and the like.

(d) Hard rock (blasting prohibited): Hard rock requiring blasting as

described under (c) but where the blasting is prohibited for any
reason and excavation has to be carried out by chiseling, wedging,
use of rock hammers and cutters or any other agreed method.

1.2 ANTIQUITIES AND USEFUL MATERIALS

1.2.1 Any finds of archaeological interest such as relics of antiquity, coins, fossils or other
articles of value shall be delivered to the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be the
property of the Government.

1.2.2 Any material obtained from the excavation which in the opinion of the Engineer-in-
Charge is useful shall be stacked separately in regular stacks as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge and shall be the property of the Government.

1.3 PROTECTIONS

1.3.1 Excavation where directed by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be securely barricaded

and provided with proper caution signs, conspicuously displayed during the day and
properly illuminated with red lights and/or written using fluorescent reflective paint as
directed by engineer in charge during the night to avoid accident.

1.3.2 The Contractor shall take adequate protective measures to see that the excavation
operations do not damage the adjoining structures or dislocate the services. Water
supply pipes, sluice valve chambers, sewerage pipes, manholes, drainage pipes and
chambers, communication cables, power supply cables etc. met within the course of
excavation shall be properly supported and adequately protected, so that these
services remain functional. However, if any service is damaged during excavation
shall be restored in reasonable time.
1.3.3 Excavation shall not be carried out below the foundation level of the adjacent
buildings until under pinning, shoring etc. is done as per the directions of the
Engineer-in-Charge for which payment shall be made separately.

5
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.3.4 Any damages done by the contractor to any existing work shall be made good by him
at his own cost. Existing drains pipes, culverts, over head wires, water supply lines
and similar services encountered during the course of execution shall be protected
against damage by the contractor. The contractor shall not store material or
otherwise occupy any part of the site in manner likely to hinder the operations of
such services.

1.4 SITE CLEARANCE

1.4.1 Before the earth work is started, the area coming under cutting and filling shall be
cleared of shrubs, rank vegetation, grass, brushwood, trees and saplings of girth up
to 30cm measured at a height of one meter above ground level and rubbish removed
up to a distance of 50 meters outside the periphery of the area under clearance. The
roots of trees and saplings shall be removed to a depth of 60cm below ground level or
30 cm below formation level or 15 cm below sub grade level, whichever is lower, and
the holes or hollows filled up with the earth, rammed and leveled.

1.4.2 The trees of girth above 30 cm measured at a height of one meter above ground shall
be cut only after permission of the Engineer-in-Charge is obtained in writing. The
roots of trees shall also be removed as specified in 1.4.1. payment for cutting such
trees and removing the roots shall be made separately.

1.4.3 Existing structures and services such as old buildings, culverts, fencing, water supply
pipe lines, sewers, power cables, communication cables, drainage pipes etc. within or
adjacent to the area if required to be diverted/removed, shall be diverted/dismantled
as per directions of the Engineer-in- Charge and payment for such
diversion/dismantling works
shall be made separately.

1.4.4 In case of archaeological

monuments within or adjacent
to the area, the contractor shall
provide necessary fencing
alround such monuments as
per the directions of the
Engineer-in-Charge and protect
the same properly during
execution of works. Payment
for providing fencing shall be
made separately.

1.4.5 Lead of 50 m mentioned in the

‘Schedule Of Quantities’ is the
average lead for the disposal of
excavated earth within the site
of work. The actual lead for the
lead for the disposal of earth
may be more or less than the
50 m for which no cost
adjustment shall be made in
the rates.

1.4.6 Disposal of Earth shall be

disposed off at the specified
location or as decided by the
Engineer-in- Charge. The
contractor has to take written
permission about place of
disposal of earth before the
earth is disposed off, from
Engineer-in-Charge.

1.5 SETTING OUT AND MAKING

PROFILES

6
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.5.1 A masonry pillar to serve as a bench mark will be erected at a suitable point in the
area, which is visible from the largest area. This bench mark shall be constructed and
connected with the standard bench mark as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Necessary profiles with strings stretched on pegs, bamboos or ‘Burjis’ shall be made
to indicate the correct formation levels before the work is started. The contractor shall
supply labor and material for constructing bench mark, setting out and making
profiles and connecting bench mark with the standard bench mark at his own cost.
The pegs, bamboos or ‘Burjis’ and the bench mark shall be maintained by the
contractor at his own cost during the excavation to check the profiles.

1.5.2 The ground levels shall be taken at 5 to 15 meters intervals (as directed by the
Engineer-in- Charge) in uniformly sloping ground and at closer intervals where local
mounds, pits or undulations are met with. The ground levels shall be recorded in field
books and plotted on plans. The plans shall be drawn to a scale of 5 meters to one cm
or any other suitable scale decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.

North direction line and position of bench mark shall invariable be shown on the
plans. These plans shall be signed by the contractor and the Engineer-in-Charge or
their authorized representatives before the earth work is started. The labor required
for taking levels shall be supplied by the contractor at his own cost.

1.6 EXCAVATION IN ALL KINDS OF SOILS

1.6.1 All excavation operations manually or by mechanical means shall include excavation
and ‘getting out’ the excavated materials. In case of excavation for trenches,
basements, water tanks etc. ‘getting out’ shall include throwing the excavated
materials at a distance of at least one meter or half the depth of excavation,
whichever is more, clear off the edge of excavation. In all other cases ‘getting out’
shall include depositing the excavated materials as specified. The subsequent
disposal of the excavated material shall be either stated as a separate item or
included with the items of excavation stating lead.
1.6.2 During the excavation the natural drainage of the area shall be maintained.
Excavation shall be done from top to bottom. Undermining or undercutting shall not
be done.

1.6.3 In firm soils, the sides of the trenches shall be kept vertical up to a depth of 2 meters
from the bottom. For greater depths, the excavation profiles shall be widened by
allowing steps of 50 cms on either side after every 2 meters from the bottom.
Alternatively, the excavation can be done so as to give slope of 1:4 (1 horizontal : 4
vertical). Where the soil is soft, loose or slushy, the width of steps shall be suitably
increased or sides sloped or the soil shored up as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to take complete instructions in
writing from the Engineer-in-Charge regarding the stepping , sloping or shoring to be
done for excavation deeper than 2 meters.

1.6.4 The excavation shall be done true to levels, slope, shape and pattern indicated by the
Engineer-in- Charge. Only the excavation shown on the drawings with additional
allowances for centering and shuttering or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge
shall be measured and recorded for payment.

1.6.5 In case of excavation for foundation in trenches or over areas, the bed of excavation
shall be to the correct level or slope and consolidated by watering and ramming. If the
excavation for foundation is done to a depth greater than that shown in the drawings
or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge, the excess depth shall be made good by the
contractor at his own cost with the concrete of the mix used for leveling/ bed concrete
for foundations. Soft/defective spots at the bed of the foundations shall be dug out
and filled with concrete (to be paid separately) as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

1.6.6 While carrying out the excavation for drain work care shall be taken to cut the side
and bottom to the required shape, slope and gradient. The surface shall then be
properly dressed. If the excavation is done to a depth greater than that shown on the
drawing or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge, the excess depth shall be made
good by the contractor at his own cost with stiff clay puddle at places where the
drains are required to be pitched and with ordinary earth, properly watered and
rammed, where the drains are not required to be pitched. In case the drain is
required is to be pitched, the back filling with clay puddle, if required, shall be done

7
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

simultaneously as the pitching work proceeds. The brick pitched storm water drains
should be avoided as far as possible in filled-up areas and loose soils.

1.6.7 In all other cases where the excavation is taken deeper by the contractor, it shall be
brought to the required level by the contractor at his own cost by filling in with earth
duly watered, consolidated and rammed.

1.6.8 In case the excavation is done wider than that shown on the drawings or as required
by the Engineer-in-Charge, additional filling wherever required on the account shall
be done by the contractor at his own cost.

1.6.9 The excavation shall be done manually or by mechanical means as directed by

Engineer-in-charge considering feasibility, urgency of work, availability of labor
/mechanical equipments and other factors involved. Contractor shall ensure every
safety measures for the workers. Neither any deduction will be made nor any extra
payment will be made on this account.

1.7 EXCAVATION IN ORDINARY/HARD ROCK

1.7.1 All excavation operations shall include excavation and ‘getting out’ the excavated
matter. In case of excavation for trenches, basements, water tanks etc. ‘getting out’
shall include throwing the excavated materials at a distance of at least one meter or
half the depth of excavation, whichever is more, clear off the edge or excavation. In all
other cases ‘getting out’ shall include depositing the excavated materials as specified.
The subsequent disposal of the excavated material shall be either stated as a separate
item or included with the item of excavation stating lead.
1.7.2 During the excavation, the natural drainage of the area shall be maintained.
Excavation shall be done from top to bottom. Undermining or under cutting shall not
be done.

1.7.3 Where hard rock is met with and blasting operations are considered necessary, the
contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge in writing for resorting
to the blasting operations. Blasting operations shall be done as specified in para 2.6
and chiseling shall be done to obtain correct levels, slopes, shape and pattern of
excavation as per the drawings or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge and nothing
extra shall be payable for chiseling.

1.7.4 Where blasting operations are prohibited or are not practicable, excavation in hard
rock shall be done by chiseling.

1.7.5 In ordinary rock excavation shall be carried out by crowbars, pick axes or pneumatic
drills and blasting operation shall not be generally adopted. Where blasting
operations are not prohibited and it is practicable to resort to blasting for excavation
in ordinary rock, contractor may do so with the permission of the Engineer-in-Charge
in writing but nothing extra shall be paid for this blasting.

1.7.6 If the excavation for foundations or drains is done to a depth greater than that shown
in the drawings or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge. The excess depth shall be
made good by the contractor at his own cost with the concrete of the mix used for
leveling/ bed concrete for foundations.

Soft/ defective spots at the bed of foundations shall be dug out and filled with
concrete (to be paid separately) as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

1.7.7 In all other cases where the excavation is taken deeper by the contractor, it shall be
brought to the required level by the contractor at his own cost by filling with earth
duly watered, consolidated and rammed.

1.7.8 In case the excavation is done wider than that shown on the drawings or as required
by the Engineer-in-Charge, filling wherever required on this account shall be done by
the contractor at his own cost.

1.7.9 Only the excavation shown on the drawings or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge
shall be measured and recorded for payment except in case of hard rock, where
blasting operations have been resorted to, excavation shall be measured to the actual

8
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

levels, provided the Engineer-in-Charge is satisfied that the contractor has not gone
deeper than what was unavoidable.

1.7.10 The excavation shall be done manually or by mechanical means as desired by

Engineer-in- Charge considering feasibility, urgency of work, availability of labor
/mechanical equipments and other factors involved Contractor shall ensure every
safety measures for the workers. Neither any deduction will be made nor any extra
payment will be made on this account.

1.8 EARTH WORK BY MECHANICAL MEANS

Earth work by mechanical means involves careful planning keeping in view site
conditions i.e. type of soil, nature of excavation, distances through which excavated
soil is to be transported and working space available for employing these machines.
The earth moving equipment should be accordingly selected.

The earth moving equipment consists of excavating and transporting equipment.

Excavating equipments may be further classified as excavators and tractor based
equipments.

1.8.1 Excavators

Excavators generally used at site are as follows:

(i) Dipper–shovel : It is used for excavating against a face or bank consisting of

open-top bucket or dipper with a bottom opening door, fixed to an arm or
dipper stick which slides and pivots on the jib of the crane. It is suitable for
excavating all clay chalk and friable materials and for handling rock and
stone. However, it is not suitable for surface excavation for which a skimmer
is used.

(ii) Backhoe : It is similar to face shovel except that the dipper stick pivots on
the end of the jib and the dipper or bucket works towards the chassis and
normally has no bottom door but is emptied by swinging away from the
chassis to invert the bucket. It may be designed to carry both a front –
mounted bucket loading mechanism and a rear mounted backhoe. It is
mainly used to excavate trenches and occasionally used for the excavation of
open areas such as small basements.

In the backhoe mode the bucket lifts, swings and discharges materials while
the undercarriage is stationary. When used in the ‘loader’ mode, the machine
loads or excavated through forward motion of the machine, and lifts,
transports and discharges materials.

(iii) Skimmer : This arrangement is similar to the face shovel except that in this
case the bucket slides on rollers directly along the jib and thus has a more
restricted movement. It is used for surface excavation and leveling in
conjunction with transport to haul away the excavated material.

(iv) Dragline : It is usually fitted with a long slender boom or jib and the bucket,
which in operation faces towards the machine and has no door, is supported
by cable only as on a crane. It works from the side of the excavation at
normal ground level and is used for excavating large open excavations such
as basements when the depth is beyond the limit of the boom of a backhoe. It
is commonly used for open cast mining operations.

(v) Clamshell : It consists of two hinged half-buckets or jaws pivoted to a frame

which is suspended by cable from a long jib of an excavation. The grab is
used for deep excavations of limited area on all types of soil except rock.
Crane and Grab is a variant of this type of equipment.

1.8.2 Tractor–based Equipment

9
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

It is a self–propelled crawler or wheeled machine used to exert a push or pull force

through mounted equipment. It is designed either as attachments to normal tracked
or wheeled tractors or as machines in which the earth moving attachments and the
tractor are designed as a single integrated unit. A tractor, which is hydraulically
operated, can be rigged as :

(i) Loaders : It is used for loading, light dozing, scraping and grabbing
operations, lifting and transporting the materials (loose earth, rubble, sand,
gravel aggregate etc) at various sites through forward motion of the machine.

(ii) Tractor Shovel : This consists of a tipping bucket at the front attached by
strong pivoted arms or booms to the frame of the machine. It is used for
stripping top soil, excavating against a face, bulldozing and for loading spoil
or loose materials. It is similar to crawler dipper-shovel.

(iii) Trench Digger : It operates on the same principle as a backhoe excavator

except that the bucket is controlled by hydraulic rams instead of cables and
pulleys.

(iv) Scraper : Scrapers provide unique capability to excavate, load, haul and
dump materials. Scrapers are available in various capacities by a number of
manufacturers with options such as self – loading with elevators, twin
engines or push-pull capability. They are cost effective where the haul
distance is too long for bulldozers, yet too short for trucks. This distance
typically ranges from 120 m to 1200 m; however, the economics should be
evaluated for each project.

Scraper has an open bowl with a cutting edge positioned between the axles,
which cuts, loads, transports, discharges and spreads through forward
motion of the machine. Loading through forward motion of the machine can
be assisted by a powered mechanism (elevator) fixed to the scraper bowl.

(v) Bulldozer and Angle-dozer : The most common equipment used for clearing
and leveling activities is a bulldozer. The terms bulldozer is used to define a
tractor mounted with a dozing blade.

The bulldozer consists of a rectangular steel blade with renewable cutting

edge set at right angles (capable of only tilting but not angling) to the
direction of travel and attached by steel arms to the side frames of a crawler
tractor. It may be used for excavating natural soil or for moving loose soil or
debris, which is pushed forward as the tractor forces it ahead.

(vi) Angle dozer is capable of both tilting and angling

1.8.3 Transporting Equipment

This implies horizontal movement primarily but it can involve some vertical
movement too.

(i) Dumpers : These are self-propelled wheeled machines, having an open body.
It is designed for the transport of excavated materials and consists of a
shallow tipping hopper or skip mounted on a wheeled chassis, such as,
power barrow, dumper, multi-skip dumpers, high discharge dumpers, dump
truck, etc. These can be rear dump, side dump or bottom dump.

(ii) Vibratory Roller : It is a single Drum Vibratory Roller for compaction of

embankments, etc. The smooth drum version is for compaction of granular
and mixed soil. The sheep foot Roller consists of a hallow cylindrical steel
drum or drums on which projecting feet are mounted. These feet penetrate
into the fill as a roller moves forward and cause compaction. The geometry of
the foot may be sheep, club pyramid, cone or cylinder foot. Such rollers are
employed for compaction (densification) of cohesive and semi-cohesive soils.

10
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.9 FILLING

1.9.1 The earth used for filling shall be free from all roots, grass, shrubs, rank vegetation,
brushwood, tress, sapling and rubbish.

1.9.2 Filling with excavated earth shall be done in regular horizontal layers each not
exceeding 20 cm in depth. All lumps and clods exceeding 8 cm in any direction shall
be broken. Each layer shall be watered and consolidated with steel rammer or ½
tonne roller. Where specified, every third and top must layer shall also be
consolidated with power roller of minimum 8 tonnes. Wherever depth of filling
exceeds 1.5 meter vibratory power roller shall be used to consolidate the filing unless
otherwise directed by Engineer-in-charge. The top and sides of filling shall be neatly
dressed. The contractor shall make good all subsidence and shrinkage in earth
fillings, embankments, traverses etc. during execution and till the completion of work
unless otherwise specified.

1.10 MEASUREMENTS

1.10.1 The length and breadth of excavation should be as per PCC plan measurement and
filling shall be measured with a steel tape correct to the nearest cm. The depth of
cutting or height of filling shall be measured, correct to 5 mm, by recording levels
before the start of the work and after the completion of the work. The cubical
contents shall be worked out to the nearest two places of decimal in cubic meters.

1.10.1.1In case of open footings up to the depth of 1.5 meters, alround excavation of 30 cm.
beyond the outer dimension of footing shall be measured for payment to make
allowances for centering and shuttering. Any additional excavation beyond this limit
shall be at the risk and cost of the contractor and shall not be measured for payment.

1.10.1.2In case of open footings/Rafts at a depth of more than 1.5 meter, alround excavation
of 75 cm shall be measured for payment to make allowance for centering and
shuttering. Additional excavation beyond this limit shall be at the risk and cost of the
contractor and shall not be measured for payment.

1.10.2 In case the ground is fairly uniform and where the site is not required to be leveled,
the
Engineer-in-Charge may permit the measurements of depth of cutting or height of
filling with steel tape, correct to the nearest cm. In case of borrow pits, diagonal
ridges, cross ridges or dead-men, the position of which shall be fixed by the Engineer-
in-Charge, shall be left by the contractor to permit accurate measurements being
taken with steel tape on the completion of the work Deduction of such ridges and
dead men shall be made from the measurements unless the same are required to be
removed later on and the earth so removed is utilized in the work. In the latter case
nothing extra will be paid for their removal as subsequent operation.

1.10.3 Where ordinary rock and hard rock is mixed. The measurement of the excavation
shall be made as specified in 1.10.1 and 1.10.2 The two kinds of rock shall be
stacked separately and measured in stacks. The net quantity of the two kinds of
rocks shall be arrived at by applying deduction of 50% to allow for voids in stacks. If
the sum of net quantity of two kinds of rocks exceeds the total quantity of the
excavated material, then the quantity for each type of rock shall be worked out from
the total quantity in the ratio of net quantities in stack measurements of the two
types of rocks. If in the opinion of the Engineering-in-charge stacking is not feasible,
the quantity of ordinary and hard rock shall be worked out by means of cross-
sectional measurements.

1.10.4 Where soil, ordinary rock and hard rock are mixed, the measurements for the entire
excavation shall be made as specified in 1.10.1 and 1.10.2 Excavated materials
comprising hard rock and ordinary rock shall be stacked separately, measured, and
each reduced by 50% to allow for voids to arrive at the quantity payable under hard
rock and ordinary rock. The difference between the entire excavation and the sum of
the quantities payable under hard rock and ordinary rock shall be paid for as
excavation in ordinary soil or hard soil as the case may be.

1.10.5 Where it is not possible or convenient to measure the depth of cutting by recording
levels as specified in 1.10.1 quantity of excavation shall be worked out from filling.

11
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The actual measurements of the fill shall be calculated by taking levels of the original
ground before start of the work after site clearance and after compaction of the fill as
specified and the quantity of earth work so computed shall be reduced by 10% in
case of consolidated fills and by 5% in case the consolidation is done by heavy
mechanical machinery to arrive at the net quantity of excavation for payment. No
such deduction shall, however, be made in case of consolidation by heavy mechanical
machinery at optimum moisture content, or when the consolidated filling is in
confined situations such as under floors.

1.10.6. Recording Measurements for Earth Leveling Work

1.10.6.1Level Books: In case of leveling operations and earthwork, measurements are

required to be recorded in level books in addition to Measurement Books. The Level
Books should be numbered, accounted for and handled like Measurement Books.

1.10.6.2 Preparatory Works: Before starting the earth work, following steps should be taken
:

(1) Original ground levels should be recorded in the Level Book in the presence
of the contractor or his authorized representative, and should be signed by
him and the Project Manager/PMC who records the levels. All the local
mounds and depressions should be indicated clearly in the drawing and the
field Level Book and should be checked by the Clients representative /PMC
before the leveling work is started.

(2) A suitable baseline should be fixed with permanent masonry pillars at

distances not exceeding 150 meters to provide a permanent reference line for
facilitating check work. The base line (s) should be entered in the Level Book
with co-ordinates. These baselines should be maintained till the final
payment for the work has been made.

(3) While recording the levels, it should be ensured that the circuit is closed by
taking final levels of the starting point or any other point, the R.L. of which
was previously determined.

(4) Plans showing initial levels, location of bench marks and reduced levels,
should be prepared and signed by both the parties and attached to the
agreement before commencement of the work.

1.10.6.3 Test Check of the Levels

(1) The Clients representative /PMC should exercise test check at least to the
extent of 50%.

(2) The test check of the levels should be carried out independently by each
officer, and the readings should be recorded in the prescribed Level Book in
red ink against the old levels which should be neatly scored out wherever
necessary. If the test check carried out reveals serious mistakes in the
original levels, these should be taken or re-taken and re-checked.

(3) The test check carried out by an officer should be as representative as

possible for the entire work done.

(4) On completion of work, the levels should again be recorded in the Level Book
and the contractor’s signatures obtained. These levels should also be test
checked by the Clients representative /PMC to the same extent as indicated
in (1) within one month of the date of completion of the earth work, and
according to the procedure as laid down in the case of initial levels as
indicated above.

(5) The formation levels as per final execution of the work should be compared
with the proposed formation levels and the work got rectified within
permissible tolerance.

1.10.6.4 Payment of Leveling Work

12
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(1) Every fourth running bill and the final bill should be paid on the basis of
levels.

(2) Intermediate payments can, however, be made on the basis of borrow pit
measurements. The Clients representative /PMC should take care that the
quantities thus assessed are not in any case more than the actual work done.

1.10.6.5 Large Scale Leveling Work

(1) In case of large scale leveling work involving both cutting and filling, an
accurate site plan should be prepared before the work is commenced. The
portions requiring cutting and filling shall then be divided into squares and
corresponding squares into filling, which are complementary to the squares
in cutting given the same number.

(2) A table may be written upon the plan showing leads involved between the
various complementary squares. This would form a lead chart for the work to
be done.

(3) Before the work of leveling is commenced, the lead chart shall be checked by
the Clients representative /PMC in the presence of the contractor or his
authorized representative, and his signatures shall be obtained on the same.
This should form an integral part of the contract and should be duly signed
by both the integral parties before commencement of the work.

(4) The quantity payable for earthwork shall be lower of the quantity derived
from cutting or filling.

The payment for lead shall be based on lead chart prepared in the aforesaid
manner.

1.10.6.6Import of Earth: In case of earth to be imported, the area from where the earth is to
be imported, should be pre-determined wherever possible before the start of the work,
and wherever feasible, the average lead should be worked out and stipulated in the
tender. After this is determined, initial levels of the area to be filled should be
recorded. The levels should be properly checked during the progress of work and on
completion.

1.11 RATES

1.11.1 Rates for Earthwork shall include the following:

(a) Excavation and depositing excavated material as specified.

(b) Handing of antiquities and useful material as specified on 2.2.

(c) Protection as specified in 1.3.

(d) Site clearance as specified in 1.4.

(e) Setting out and making profiles as specified in 1.5.

(f) Forming (or leaving) dead – men or ‘Tell Tales’ in borrow pits and their
removal after measurements.

(g) Bailing out or pumping of rain water from excavations.

(h) Initial lead of 50 m and lift of 1.5 m.

1.11.2 No deduction shall be made from the rate if in the opinion of the Engineer- in-charge,
operations specified in 1.11.1 (b) to (h) are not required to be carried out on any
account whatsoever.

1.12 SURFACE EXCAVATION

13
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.12.1 Excavations exceeding 1.5 m in width and 10 sqm. on plan but not exceeding 30 cm.
in depth in all types of soils and rocks shall be described as surface excavation.

1.12.1 Measurements

The length and breadth shall be measured with a steel tape correct to the nearest cm.
and the area worked out to the nearest two places of decimal in square meters.

1.12.3 Rate shall be as specified in 1.11.

1.13 PLANKING AND STRUTTING

1.13.1 When the depth of trench in soft/loose soil exceeds 2 meters, stepping, sloping and/
or planking and strutting of sides shall be done. In case of loose and slushy soils, the
depths at which these precautions are to be taken, shall be determined by the
Engineer-in-Charge according to the nature of soil.

Planking and strutting shall be ‘close’ or ‘open’ depending on the nature of soil and
the depth of trench. The type of planking and strutting shall be determined by the
Engineer-in-Charge. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to take all
necessary steps to prevent the sides of trenches from collapse.

Engineer-in-Charge should take guidance from IS: 3764 for designing the shoring and
strutting arrangements and specifying the profile of excavation.

1.13.2 Close Planking and Strutting

Close planking and strutting shall be done by completely covering the sides of the
trench generally with short upright, members called ‘poling boards’. These shall be
250x38 mm in section or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

The boards shall generally be placed in position vertically in pairs. One boards on
either side of cutting.

These shall be kept apart by horizontal wallings of strong wood at a maximum

spacing of 1.2 meters cross strutted with ballies, or as directed by Engineer-in-
Charge. The length and diameter of the ballies strut shall depend upon the width of
the trench. Typical sketch of close timbering is given in side Fig. Where the soil is very
soft and loose, the boards shall be placed horizontally against the sides of the
excavation and supported by vertical ‘wallings’ which shall be strutted to similar
timber pieces on the opposite face of the trench. The lowest boards supporting the
sides shall be taken in the ground for a minimum depth of 75 mm. No portion of the
vertical side of the trench shall remain exposed.

14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The withdrawal of the timber members shall be done very carefully to prevent collapse
of the trench.

It shall be started at one end and proceeded systematically to the other end. Concrete
or masonry shall not be damaged while removing the planks. No claim shall be
entertained for any timber which cannot be withdrawn and is lost or buried, unless
required by the Engineer-in-Charge to be left permanently in position.

1.13.3 Open Planking and Strutting

In case of open planking and

strutting, the entire surface of the
side of the trench is not required to
be covered. The vertical boards 250
mm wide & 38 mm thick, shall be
spaced sufficiency apart to leave
unsupported strips of 50 cm average
width. The detailed arrangement,
sizes of the timber and the distance
apart shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
In all other respect, specifications for
close planking and strutting shall
apply to open planking and
strutting. Typical sketch of open
planking and strutting is given in side fig.

1.13.4 Measurements

The dimensions shall be measured correct to the nearest cm and the area of the face
supported shall be worked out in square meters correct to two places of decimal.

1.13.4.1 Works shall be grouped according to the following:

(a) Depth not exceeding 1.5 m.

(b) Depth exceeding 1.5m in stages of 1.5 m.

1.13.4.2 Planking and strutting to the following shall be measured separately:

(a) Trenches.

(b) Areas- The description shall include use and waste of raking shores.

(c) Shafts, walls, cesspits, manholes and the like

(d) Where tightly driven close but jointed sheeting is necessary as in case of
running sheeting is necessary as in case of running sand the item shall be
measured separately and packing of cavities behind sheeting with suitable
materials included with the item.

(e) Planking and strutting required to be left permanently in position shall be

measured separately.
1.13.5 Rates

Rates shall include use and waste of all necessary timber work as mentioned above
including fixing and subsequent removal.

1.14 EARTH WORK FOR MAJOR WORKS

1.14.1 Excavation shall be undertaken to the width of the Basement/Retaining wall footing
including necessary margins for construction operation as per drawing or directed
otherwise. Where the nature of soil or the depth of the trench and season of the year,
do not permit vertical sides, the contractor at his own expense shall put up the

15
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

necessary shoring, strutting and planking or cut slopes with or without steps, to a
safer angle or both with due regard to the safety of personnel and works and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Measurement of plan area of excavation for payment
shall be permitted only.

1.14.2 All the major excavation shall be carried out by mechanical excavator. No extra
payment shall be made for that.

1.14.3 The contractor shall make at his own cost all necessary arrangements for maintaining
water level, in the area where works are under execution low enough so as not to
cause any harm to the work shall be considered as inclusive of pumping out or
bailing out water, if required, for which no extra payment shall be made. This will
include water coming from any source, such as rains, accumulated rain water, floods,
leakages from sewer and water mains, subsoil water table being high or due to any
other cause whatsoever. The contractor shall make necessary provision of pumping,
dredging bailing out water coming from all above sources and excavation and other
works shall be kept free of water by providing suitable system approved by the
Engineer-in-charge.

The water level is likely to rise up to 1 to 2 m. during rainy season. In order to avoid
possibility of basement floor of main building being getting uplifted/damaged due to
water pressure, the contractor shall lower the ground water table below the proposed
foundation level by boring tube wells all around the proposed building using well
point sinking method or any suitable method as approved by Engineer-in-charge. Sub
soil water table shall be maintained at least 50 cm. below the P.C.C. level during
laying of P.C.C. water proofing treatment, laying of basement raft and beams
including filling of earth/sand under the basement floor. The water table shall not be
allowed to rise above base of raft level until completion of outer retaining walls
including water proofing of vertical surface of walls and back filling along the walls up
to ground level and until the structure attains such height to counter balance the
uplift pressure. However, the contractor should inspect the site and make his own
assessment about sub-soil water level likely to be encountered at the time of
execution and quote his rates accordingly. Rate of all items are inclusive of pumping
out or bailing out water, if required. Nothing extra on this account whatsoever shall
be paid to him. The sequence of construction shall be got approved by the Engineer-
in-charge.

1.14.4 The contractor shall take all necessary measures for the safety of traffic during
construction and provide, erect and maintain such barricades including signs,
markings, flags, lights and flagman, as necessary at either end of the
excavation/embankment and at such intermediate points as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge for the proper identification of construction area. He shall be
responsible for all damages and accidents caused due to negligence on his part.

1.14.5 The contractor shall provide suitable barricading with suitably painted single row of
G.I. Sheets about 3’- 0” wide (90 cms.) nailed or bolted with wooden poles spaced 2 to
3 meter apart and each pole 1.6 m to 2 m long 8 cm. to 10 cm. dia. The poles will be
embedded in mobile iron pedestal rings suitably framed for giving stable support as
per direction of the Engineer-in-charge. All management (including watch and ward)
of barricades shall be the full responsibility of the contractor. The barricades shall be
removed only after completion of the work or part of the work. The contractor’s rate
shall include all above items of work and nothing extra shall be paid to the contractor
over and above his quoted rates.

1.15 JUNGLE CLEARANCE

1.15.0 Jungle clearance shall comprise uprooting of rank vegetation, grass, brushwood,
shrubs, stumps, trees and saplings of girth up to 30 cm measured at a height of one
meter above the ground level. Where only clearance of grass is involved it shall be
measured and paid for separately.

1.15.1 Uprooting of Vegetations

The roots of trees and saplings shall be removed to a depth of 60 cm below ground
level or 30 cm below formation level or 15 cm below sub-grade level, whichever is
lower. All holes or hollows formed due to removal of roots shall be filled up with earth

16
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

rammed and leveled. Trees, shrubs, poles, fences, signs, monuments, pipe lines,
cable etc., within or adjacent to the area which are not required to be disturbed
during jungle clearance shall be properly protected by the contractor at his own cost
and nothing extra shall be payable.

1.15.2 Stacking and Disposal

All useful materials obtained from clearing and grubbing operation shall be stacked
in the manner as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Trunks and branches of trees
shall be cleared of limbs and tops and stacked neatly at places indicated by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The materials shall be the property of the Government. All
unserviceable materials which in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge cannot be
used or auctioned shall be removed up to a distance of 50 m outside the periphery of
the area under clearance. It shall be ensured by the contractor that unserviceable
materials are disposed off in such a manner that there is no likelihood of getting
mixed up with the materials meant for construction.

1.15.3 Clearance of Grass

Clearing and grubbing operation involving only the clearance of grass shall be
measured and paid for separately and shall include removal of rubbish up to a
distance of 50 m outside the periphery of the area under clearance.

1.15.4 Measurements

The length and breadth shall be measured correct to the nearest cm and area worked
out in square meters correct to two places of decimal.

1.15.5 Rates

The rate includes cost of all the operation described above.

1.16 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT

1.16.0 Sub-terranean termites are responsible for most of the termite damage in buildings.
Typically, they form nests or colonies underground. In the soil near ground level in a
stump or other suitable piece of timber in a conical or dome shaped mound. The
termites find access to the super-structure of the building either through the timber
buried in the ground or by means of mud shelter tubes constructed over unprotected
foundations.

Termite control in existing as well as new building structures is very important as the
damage likely to be caused by the termites to wooden members of building and other
household article like furniture, clothing, stationery etc. is considerable. Anti-termite
treatment can be either during the time of construction i.e. pre-constructional
chemical treatment or after the building has been constructed i.e. treatment for
existing building.

Prevention of the termite from reaching the super-structure of the building and its
contents can be achieved by creating a chemical barrier between the ground, from
where the termites come and other contents of the building which may form food for
the termites. This is achieved by treating the soil beneath the building and around
the foundation with a suitable insecticide.

1.16.1 Materials

1.16.1.0Chemicals: Any one of the following chemicals in water emulsion to achieve the
percentage concentration specified against each chemical shall be used:

(i) Chlorphriphos emulsifiable concentrate of 20%

(ii) Lindane emulsifiable concentrate of 20% Anti-termite treatment chemical is

available in concentrated form in the market and concentration is indicated
on the sealed containers. To achieve the specified percentage of
concentration, Chemical should be diluted with water in required quantity
before it is used. Graduated containers shall be used for dilution of chemical

17
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

with water in the required proportion to achieve the desired percentage of

concentration. For example, to dilute chemical of 20% concentration. 19
parts of water shall be added to one part of chemical for achieving 1%
concentration. Engineer-in-Charge shall procure the chemical of required
concentration in sealed original containers directly from the reputed and
authorized dealers, chemical shall be kept in the custody of the Engineer in-
Charge or his authorized representatives and issued for use to meet the day’s
requirements. Empty containers after washing and concentrated chemical left
unused at the end of the day’s work shall be returned to the Engineer-in-
Charge or his authorized representative.

1.16.1.1Measurements: Concentrated chemical in sealed containers shall be measured in

liters. Chemicals of different types and concentration shall be measured separately.

1.16.1.2Rate: The Rate for the concentrated chemical shall include the cost of material,
containers and all the operations involved in transportation and delivery at the place
specified.

1.16.2 Safety Precautions

Chemical used for anti-termite treatment are insecticides with a persistent action and
are highly poisonous. This chemical can have an adverse effect upon health when
absorbed through the skin, inhaled as vapors or spray mists or swallowed.

The containers having emulsifiable concentrates shall be clearly labeled and kept
securely closed in stores so that children or pet cannot get at them. Storage and
mixing of concentrates shall not be done near any fire source or flame. Persons using
these chemical shall be warned that absorption though skin is the most likely source
of accidental poisoning. Particular care shall be taken to prevent skin contact with
concentrates and prolonged exposure to dilute emulsion shall also be avoided. After
handling the concentrates or dilute emulsion. Workers shall wash themselves with
soap and water and wear clean clothing, especially before eating. In the event of
severe contamination, clothing shall be removed at once and the skin washed with
soap and water. If chemical has splashed into the eyes, they shall be flushed with
plenty of soap and water and immediate medical attention shall be sought.

Care should be taken in the application of chemicals to see that they are not allowed
to contaminate wells or springs which serve as source of drinking water.

1.16.3 Anti-Termite Treatment: Constructional Measures

The construction measures specified below should be adopted for protection against
subterranean termites originating both internally from within the plinth and
externally from the area surrounding the building.

(i) Earth free from

roots, dead leaves,
or other organic
matter shall be
placed and
compacted in
successive
horizontal layers of
loose material not
more than 200 mm
thick. Dry brick
shall be inserted at
last 50 mm in brick
masonry for
providing apron floor
around the periphery.
(ii) Brick on edge masonry in
cement mortar shall be laid
on the plinth wall. Dry
brick shall be placed on the
inner side of plinth wall for

18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

getting anticipated offset space for coarse sand and on the other side for
installing anti-termite masonry groove. In the case of intermediate walls, dry
bricks are placed on either side of the brick on edge masonry for getting offset
space for coarse sand layer.

(iii) The dry brick for the

anti-termite groove
shall be taken out
and dense cement
concrete 1:3:6 (1
cement : 3 sand : 6
coarse aggregate by
volume) sub-floor
carpet shall be laid
casting the anti-
termite groove in
position. In case of
internal partition
walls, the cement
concrete sub-floor
shall be laid on either
side over the dry
bricks to sufficient
extent for getting
staggered vertical joints over the joint of plinth wall and earth filling.

(iv) Superstructure masonry shall be

raised over the dense cement
concrete sub floor carpet and over-
head jobs completed.

(v) The dry brick for coarse sand

layer shall be removed and graded
sand (of size 3 to 5 mm) layer at
least 100 mm thick shall be
compacted over the earth filling
and underneath the partially laid
dense cement concrete sub-floor
carpe

19
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(vi) Dense cement concrete (1:3:6

mix.) sub-floor at least 75 mm
thick shall be laid over the sand
filling.

Necessary finish may be

provided to the cement concrete
sub-floor carpet.

(vii) Dry brick provided for apron

floor shall be taken out and 600
mm wide formation of earth in
1:30 slope shall be made. Over
the formation, 75 mm thick lime
concrete 1:3:6 (1 lime:3 sand: 6
coarse aggregate, by volume)
shall be laid.

(viii) Over the 75 mm thick like

concrete bed at least 25 mm
thick cement concrete topping
1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 sand: 4 fine
aggregate, by volume) shall be
laid and 12 mm thick cement
plaster shall be applied on
foundation and plinth.

20
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The final recommendations incorporating the constructional details given above (i to

viii) are shown in Side Fig.

2.28.4 Anti Termite Treatment : Treatment for Existing Building: Post Construction
Treatment

2.28.4.1 Material

(i) Chemicals : Any one of the following chemicals conforming to relevant Indian
Standards in water emulsion may be used for soil treatment in order
to protect a building from termite attack.

Chemical with Percent Relevant Indian Standards Concentration by weight

(Active ingredient)

Chlorpyrifos 20EC IS 8944 1.0

Lindane 20EC IS 632 1.0

These chemicals are available in concentrated form in the market and

concentration is indicated on the sealed containers. To achieve the specified
percentage of concentration, chemicals should be diluted with water in
required quantity before it is used. Graduated containers shall be used for
dilution of chemicals with water in the required proportion to achieve the
desired percentage of concentration. For example, to dilute chemical of 20%
concentration, 19 parts of water shall be added to one part of chemical for
achieving 1% concentration. Oil or kerosene based solution of chlorpyrifos 20
EC or Lindane 20 EC, 1.0 percent (by weight) concentration is useful for
treatment of wood. Engineer-in-charge shall procure the chemical of required
concentration in sealed original containers directly from the reputed and
authorized representative. Chemical shall be kept in the custody of the
Engineer-in-charge or his authorized representatives and issued for use to
meet the day’s requirements. Empty containers after washing and
concentrated chemical left unused at the end of the day’s work shall be
returned to the Engineer-in-charge or his authorized representative.

(ii) Measurements : Concentrated chemical in sealed containers shall be

measured in liters.

Chemicals of different types and concentration shall be measured separately.

(iii) Rate : The rate for the concentrated chemical shall include the cost of
material, containers and all the operations involved in transportation and
delivery at the place specified.

(iv) Safety Precautions : Chemical used for antitermite treatment are insecticides
with a persistent action and are highly poisonous. This chemical can have an
adverse effect upon health when absorbed through the skin, inhaled as
vapors or spray mists or swallowed.

The containers having emulsifiable concentrates shall be clearly labeled and

kept securely closed in stores so that children or pet cannot get at them.
Storage and mixing of concentrates shall not be done near any fire source or

21
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

flame. Persons carrying out chemical soil treatments should familiarize

themselves and exercise due care when handling the chemicals whether in
concentrated or in diluted form. After handling the concentrates or dilute
emulsion, worker shall wash themselves with soap and water and wear clean
clothing especially before eating and smoking. In the event of severe
contamination, clothing shall be removed at once and the skin washed with
soap and water. If chemical has splashed into the eyes, they shall be flushed
with plenty of soap and water and immediate medical attention shall be
sought.

The use of chemical shall be avoided where there is any risk of wells or other
water supplies becoming contaminated.

2.28.4.2 Treatment

(i) Once the termites have an ingress into the building, they keep on multiplying
and destroy the wooden and cellulosic materials, and as such it becomes
essential to take measures for protection against termites. Anti termite
measures described below are necessary for the eradication and control of
termites in existing building. To facilitate proper penetrations of chemical in
to the surface to be treated, hand operated pressure pump shall be used. To
have proper check for uniform penetration of chemical, graduated containers
shall be used. Proper check should be kept so that the specified quantity of
chemical is used for the required area during the operation. Chemical
treatment for the eradication and control of sub-terranean termites in
existing building shall be done as per IS 6313 (Part III). Treatment shall be
got done only from the approved specialized agencies using the chemical
procured directly by the Engineer-in-Charge from reputed and authorized
dealers.

(ii) Treatment along outside of foundations: The soil in contact with the
external wall of the building shall be treated with chemical emulsion at the
rate of 7.5 liters per square meter of vertical surface of the sub-structure to a
depth of 300 mm. To facilitate this treatment, a shallow channel shall be
excavated along and close to the wall face. The chemical emulsion shall be
directed towards the wall at 1.75 liters per running meter of the channel.
Rodding with 12 mm diameter mild steel rods at 150 mm apart shall be done
in the channel. If necessary, for uniform dispersal of the chemical to 300 mm
depth from the ground level. The balance chemical of 0.5 liter per running
meter shall then be used to treat the backfill earth as it is returned to the
channel directing the spray towards the wall surface.

If there is a concrete or masonry apron around the building, approximately

12 mm diameter holes shall be drilled as close as possible to the plinth wall
about 300 mm apart, deep enough to reach the soil below and the chemical
emulsion pumped into these holes to soak the soil below at the rate of 2.25
liters per linear meter.

In soils which do not allow percolation of chemicals to desired depth, the

uniform disposal of the chemical to a depth of 300 mm shall be obtained by
suitably modifying the mode of treatment depending on site condition.

In case of RCC foundations the soil (backfill) in contact with the column sides
and plinth beams along with external perimeter of the building shall be
treated with chemical emulsion at the rate of 7.5 liters/sqm. of the vertical
surface of the structure. To facilitate this treatment, trenches shall be
excavated equal to the width of the shovel exposing the sides of the column
and plinth beams up to a depth of 300 mm or up to the bottom of the plinth
beams, if this level is less than 300 mm.

The chemical emulsion shall be sprayed on the backfill earth as it is returned

into the trench directing the spray against the concrete surface of the beam
or column as the case may be.

(iii) Treatment of Soil under Floors : The points where the termites are likely to
seek entry through the floor are the cracks at the following locations:

22
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(a) At the junction of the floor and walls as result of shrinkage of the concrete;

(b) On the floor surface owing to construction defects;

(c) At construction joints in a concrete floor, cracks in sections; and
(d) Expansion joints in the floor.

Chemical treatment shall be provided in the plinth area of ground floor of the
structure, wherever such cracks are noticed by drilling 12 mm holes at the
junction of floor and walls along the cracks on the floor and along the
construction and expansion joints at the interval of 300 mm to reach the soil
below. Chemical emulsion shall be squirted into these holes using a hand
operated pressure pump to soak the soil below until refusal or up to a
maximum of one liter per hole. The holes shall then be sealed properly with
cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand) finished to match the existing
floors. The cement mortar applied shall be cured for at least 10 days as per
instruction of Engineer-in-charge.

(iv) Treatment of Voids in Masonry : The movement of termites through the

masonry wall may be arrested by drilling holes in masonry wall at plinth level
and squirting chemical emulsions into the holes to soak the masonry. The
holes shall be drilled at an angle of 45 degree from both sides of the plinth
wall at 300 mm intervals and emulsion squirted through these holes to soak
the masonry using a hand operated pump. This treatment shall also be
extended to internal walls having foundations in the soil. Holes shall also be
drilled at wall corners and where door and window frames are embedded in
the masonry or floor at ground. Emulsion shall be squirted through the holes
till refusal or to a maximum of one liter per hole. Care shall be taken to seal
the holes after the treatment.

(v) Treatment at Points of Contact of Wood Work : The wood work which has
already been damaged beyond repairs by termites shall be replaced. The new
timber shall be dipped or liberally brushed at least twice with chemical in oil
or kerosene. All existing wood work in the building which is in contact with
the floor or walls and which is infested by termites, shall be treated by
spraying at the points of contacts with the adjoining masonry with the
chemical emulsion by drilling 6 mm holes at a downward angle of about 45
degree at junction of wood work and masonry and squirting chemical
emulsion into these holes till refusal or to a maximum of half a liter per hole.
The treated holes shall then be sealed.

Infested wood work in chaukhats, shelves, joints, purlins etc., in contact with
the floor or the walls shall be provided with protective treatment by drilling
holes of about 3 mm diameter with a downward slant to the core of the wood
work on the inconspicuous surface of the frame. These holes should be at
least 150 mm centre to centre and should cover in entire frame work.

Chemicals shall be liberally infused in these holes. If the wood is not

protected by paint or varnish two coats of the chemicals shall be given on all
the surfaces and crevices adjoining the masonry.

2.28.4.3 Measurements : All dimensions shall be measured correct to a cm. The

measurements shall be made of the surface actually provided with anti termite
treatment. Measurements shall be done separately for treatment of foundations, soils
under floors, voids in masonry and wood work as detailed below:

(i) Treatment along outside of foundations : The measurements shall be made in

running meters taking length along the plinth of the building.

(ii) Treatment of soil under floors : The measurements shall be made in square
meters, inside clear dimensions of rooms, verandah etc. shall be
taken.
(iii) Treatment of voids in masonry : The measurements shall be made in running
meters along the plinth of the building.

23
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(iv) Treatment of wood work : The measurements shall be made in running

meters for chowkhats, joints, purlins, beams etc.

2.28.4.4 Rates

The rate shall include the cost of labor and all other inputs (except concentrated
chemical) involved in all the operations described above including drilling, refilling
and making good the holes.

2.28.4.5 Treatment of Electrical Fixtures

If infestation in electrical fixture (like switch boxes in the wall) is noticed, covers of
the switch boxes shall be removed and inside of such boxes shall be treated liberally
with 5 per cent Malathion dusting powder. The covers of the switch boxes shall be
refixed after dusting.

24
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION – II

PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK

2.1 Cement Concrete: For foundations shall be mixed in proportion and with ingredients
as specified in the schedule of quantities. The concrete shall be mixed in a
mechanical mixer. No more concrete shall be mixed than can be consumed within
half an hour. It shall be deposited gently in the trenches in horizontal layers not more
than 30 cm. thick and rammed and consolidated with steel rammers of 5 to 6 kg.
Weight. After laying and consolidation is completed watering twice a day for a week
from the next day shall be done.

2.2 Reinforced Cement Concrete Work:

2.2.1 General: It is intent of these specifications to insure that all concrete placed at
various locations shall be of M25 structural grade adhering to design Mix and Mix by
Weigh Batching on site, in the job should be durable, strong enough to carry the
design loads, it should wear well and be practically impervious to water. It should be
free from such defect as shrinkage, cracking, and honey combing and soiling of the
surface. Unless otherwise called for in these specifications as plain and reinforced
concrete shall confirm in all respect to IS 456:1978.

2.2.2 Proportions: The proportion by volume of the concrete in the various parts of the
work will be specified on the drawings and shall be accurately measured. The
quantity of water used shall be the minimum consistent with practical workability
and shall be varied as required to suit the moisture content of the aggregate and to
produce concrete having the specified slumps.

2.2.3 Mixing: The aggregate and sand shall be free from all list and earthy matter washed if
required by the Architects before using. The materials shall be accurately measured
in boxes and mixed in a machine. Water being added in required quantity only. The
mixture shall be semi-liquid mass with cement uniformly distributed.

2.2.4 Strength: Concrete mixed in the proportions desired should have compressive
strength at 7 and 28 days after placing not less than the above mentioned strengths.

The contractor shall as and when directed by the Architects cast 6 cubes of the
concrete being used in the work and after maturing shall get them tested. The cost of
all testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

2.2.5 Mixing: All concrete whether plain or reinforced, ordinary or controlled shall be
mixed in a full bag mechanical mixer, having a minimum drum speed of 60
revolutions per minute. The cement and aggregate shall be first mixed dry until all
particles of aggregate are coated with cement. Water shall be added and mixing
continued for one and a half to two minute time resulting a concrete of a uniform
color and consistency.

If there is segregation after unloading from the mixture the concrete should be
remixed.

25
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.2.6 Water Cement Ratio: The water cement ratio shall be carefully controlled throughout
the work, these calls for regular check on the equipment used measuring water. Only
graded liter cans shall be used for this purpose.

AS PER IS-456 table-5 , CEMENT CONTENT AND WATER CEMENT RATIO

Plain Concrete Reinforced Concrete

Sl
Minimum Maximum Minimum Minimum Maximum Minimum
Exposure Cement Free Grade of Cement Free Grade of
Content Water - Concrete Content Water Concrete
Kg/cum Cement Kg/cum Cement
Ratio Ratio
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i) Mild 220 0.6 - 300 0.55 M 20

ii) Moderate 240 0.6 M 15 300 0.5 M 25

iii) Severe 250 0.5 M 20 320 0.45 M 30

Very
iv) 260 0.45 M 20 340 0.45 M 35
Severe
v) Extreme 280 0.4 M 25 360 0.4 M 40

2.2.7 Concrete should not be dropped from height greater than 2 M. properly constructed
chutes shall be used in such cases where it is necessary to exceed this height.
Concrete must be thoroughly worked in to the forms so that they are entirely filled;
reinforcing bars adequately and tightly surrounded and entrapped air released from
the mass of concrete.

Placing shall be carried out by hand punning as well as vibrators. Concrete should
not be moved any considerable distance in the moulds, being consolidated as nearly
as possible in the place where it is dumped. In casting beams or other deep sections
concrete shall not be placed in layers.

2.2.8 Transportation: Concrete should be placed in its final position within 30 minute of
mixing. The contractor shall arrange the mixer position and adopt a method of
transportation so as to ensure that this period is not exceeded under any
circumstances. Transportation shall be smooth and free from jolting.

2.2.9 CONSOLIDATION: All plain and reinforced concrete shall be consolidated by means
of mechanical vibration. Adequate number of vibrators shall be used to ensure full
compaction of concrete in about 10 minutes of placing. If needle vibrators are used,
these shall be inserted at place not exceeding 0.5 M. apart until it is immersed to the
full depth of concrete. Where ever possible shutter vibrators shall be used and the
contractor shall design the shuttering so that this can withstand vibration. Care shall
be taken to ensure that concrete is not over vibrated so as to cause segregation. In
addition to mechanical vibration, sufficient hand tools must be used to ensure full
consolidation against reinforcement and at edges and corners.

2.2.10 Construction Joints: Construction joints shall be made only where shown on the
drawing or approved by the Architects. Such joints shall be kept to the minimum and
shall not be located in valleys. The joints shall be at right angles to the direction of
main reinforcement. In case of columns and walls the joint shall be horizontal and 2
to 5 cms. below the bottom of the beam or slab running into the column or wall head
or below the anchor reinforcement of beam and slab coming into the column and wall
and the portion of the column into wall between the stopping of level and the top on
the slab shall be concreted with the beam or slab.

2.2.11 Testing:

26
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Consistency : Only sufficient water shall be added to the cement and aggregate
during mixing to produce a consistency so that the concrete shall be sufficiently
workable to enable it to be well consolidated to be worked into the corners of the
shuttering and around the reinforcement and to give the specified strength. Slump
tests shall be carried out from time to time as directed by the Architects on concrete
actually being placed in the works at the commencement of each period of concrete
placing in accordance with the procedure laid down in the latest Indian Standards
specifications.

The slump shall not exceed in limits specified for different items of works as given
below or as directed.

a. Precast work - 1" (25mm) slump

b. Footing & roads - 3" (75mm) slump
c. Columns - 3" (75mm) slump
d. Walls - 3" (75mm) slump
e. Floor slabs - 3" (75mm) slump

2.2.12 Preliminary Test: The Contractor will be called upon to submit representative
samples of materials to be used for concrete so that preliminary tests in accordance
with I.S. 456-1978 may be carried out in a recognized laboratory to establish the
suitability of the materials and proportion of mix by weight proposed by the
Contractor.

The contractor shall have to bear all costs in connection with this test.

2.2.14 curing of Concrete: All exposed faces of concrete shall be covered with Hussein,
sand or similar material which shall be kept continuously wet for a period of at least
10 days after casting. After removal of Hussein or sand all concrete surfaces shall be
well wetted at intervals for a period of at least three weeks.

2.2.15 Protections of completed Works: The contractor shall take suitable precautionary
measures to prevent breaking and chipping of corners and edges of completed work.

2.2.16 Surface Finish of Concrete: All framework, centering and shuttering used for
concreting shall be rigid and straight so as to produce all concrete members true to
line and level with a tolerance of 1/8" (3mm).This shall be cast against an approved
pattern made up of new material such as timber/steel/ply to give neat and exposed
finish. No old shuttering material is allowed to site work.

2.3 FORM WORK

2.3.1 Form work shall be erected true to line and to the shapes required in the work and
shall carry without deformation the full weight of wet concrete, and other live loads. It
should also withstand the effect of vibration without deflection, bulging distortion or
loosening of its component parts. The contractor shall be responsible for the
sufficiency of the form work, centering and moulds. Form work shall be oiled
thoroughly before concreting.

Wire or similar ties shall not be left in concrete having face exposed to weather. Bolts
shall be permitted if they are greased to allow for easy withdrawal and the holes
subsequently made good.

The form work shall be designed so that the sufficient slabs and the side of beams
may be removed first bearing form work to the soffit of beams and their supports
inspection. Wedges shall be provided to allow accurate adjustment of form work and
its easy removal.

All joints shall be tongued and grooved and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of
grout. Chamfer fillets shall be provided at all corners wherever called for on the
drawings. The boards shall be planned and straightened in order that the surface
against the corner shall not be coated with approved oil before it is fixed in position.

Clean out holes shall be provided at the bottom of all columns and pier form work
and care shall be taken to remove any rubbish, wood shaving or any other foreign

27
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

material before concreting temporary supports shall be provided as required and/or

ordered by Architects. The contractor shall provide steel/plywood form work in place
of timber boarding wherever called for by the Architects.

2.3.2 Removal of Form work: All form work shall be kept in position until the expiry of a
minimum period after concreting as specified below:-

a. Forms supporting sides of beams, walls and columns. 16-24 hours

b. Bottoms of slabs upto 15ft. (4.50 M) span. 7 days

c. Bottoms of slabs above 15 ft. (4.50 M) span to 20 ft. (6 M) span 14 days

d. Bottoms of beams upto 20 ft. (6.00) 14 days

e. Bottoms of beams over 30 ft. (6.00) span 21 days

After removal of form adequate props shall be provided to support beams/slabs until
28 days after concreting.

2.3.3 Aggregates

(1) Fine Aggregate: Colour being an important consideration, for exposed concrete,
colour of sand used shall also be uniform throughout the entire construction.
Preferably total quantity required for the work shall be collected and well mixed
together to uniform shade.

(2) Coarse Aggregate: The colour of the aggregate shall be maintained the same
throughout. Unless otherwise specified, exposed concrete in walls parapets and
fascias, which are non load bearing and are less than 120 mm in thickness, the
maximum size of the coarse aggregate shall be limited to 12mm. for which nothing
extra shall be admissible. Flat or flaky pieces shall not be allowed.

2.3.4 Reinforcement & Cover of Concrete: Correct placing of the reinforcement with
proper cover is important in all exposed concrete work to avoid discoloration by
rusting. The minimum cover specified under specification for R.C.C. work shall be
maintained throughout. Concrete blocks or spacers shall be sparingly used at
exposed surfaces. When used such blocks shall preferably be cast on vibrating table
or in some other similar manner so that it may match the concrete surface in texture
and colour.

These shall be put at regular intervals. Cover blocks of materials other than cast
blocks shall not be allowed to be used.

28
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

29
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.3.5 Timber Shuttering

Form work for exposed concrete work shall be of seasoned wrought hard wood timber
planks, free from loose knots. The planks shall be 50 mm. thick, 100 to 125 mm.
wide with tongued and grooved joints assembled to pattern approved by the
Architects. The form work shall be so constructed, bracketed and stayed as to remain
absolutely rigid and true during and after pouring. The boards shall be planed to
thickness, so that the surface against the concrete shall not be broken at joint
between boards. Chamfers, groove, moldings, beveled edges etc. shall be made in the
form itself to the size, profiles and details called for on the drawings.

The Contractor shall provide 12 mm thick shuttering quality plywood of approved

make or equivalent approved by the Architect in place of 40 mm thick timber plate

30
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

shuttering mentioned above for such location as called for by the Architects. The
joints in the plywood shuttering shall be located as directed by the Architects.
Shuttering, centering and form work for all exposed concrete work like exposed
column, beams, ribs, coffer, slabs, chajjas, fascias, walls etc. shall be of such finish
and rigidity as to produce all faces fair smooth true to line, level and plumb. No
rendering or touching up shall be permitted on these faces.

2.3.6 Steel Shuttering

Steel shuttering for exposed concrete work shall be made of shuttering plates of
standard sizes and to suit the pattern of exposed concrete indicated in Architects
drawings. The shuttering plates used will be made of steel sheets strengthened at the
edges and in middle to prevent sagging or any deflection when concrete is laid. These
plates will be free from any deformity or dents and should fit with each properly
without any space or grooves being left between adjacent plates to avoid any leakage
of concrete slurry. If any concrete projects out between plates this will be neatly cut
away.

The contractor shall be required to produce working drawings showing the general
construction of form work and panels with details such as nail positions and holes for
supports that may be required. Nail head shall be positioned as instructed by the
Architects. Grooves and Chambers shall be formed as shown on the drawings without
any extra cost.

Any holes for the supports, which the Contractor may need, shall be approved by the
Architects. All such holes shall be subsequently filled in carefully so as to match with
the other surfaces. Walls, columns etc. Shall generally be cast to the full height in
more operation and the form work shall put in accordingly. If permitted by the
Architects, these may be completed in two or more heights when the form work shall
be carefully and correctly raised for further height so as to ensure a neat joint without
disturbing the pattern. Any groove required by the Architects at the joint shall be
provided by the contractor at no extra cost.

iii. Coating for Shuttering : Burma shell shuttering oil, colorless and emulsifiable in
water shall be used for oiling the wood work, when only thin film shall be neatly
applied avoiding collection at one place. Any mark left by the shuttering oil shall be
washed clean.

2.4 Measurements and Proportioning of Concrete materials :

This shall be as laid down generally for RCC work. In no case extra dust or sand or
additional quantity of water shall be allowed with the intention of getting better finish
which shall only be obtained by erecting centering as specified above and proper
vibrating of the mix after placing. In no case, the slump limit, specified under the
specification for RCC work shall be exceeded.

2.5 Mechanical vibration : All concrete for exposed concrete work shall be vibrated;
using needle vibrators 30/32 mm. Surface vibrators may be permitted to be used for
thin slabs. External vibrators for walls may be allowed but this shall be done carefully
to safeguard the displacement of the shuttering. Vibrators shall only be operated by
skilled labour over or under vibration shall not be permitted. Any spillage or leakage,
which is unavoidable and which flows down the exposed concrete surfaces shall be
immediately washed away with clean water and brushed before setting. All finishing
to the top surface of exposed concrete member shall be finished to desired surface
while the concrete is still green.

2.6 Finishing : Exposed concrete surface shall on no account be permitted to any sort of
repairs or patching after striking the form work. In the event of any portion not
coming upto standard, this shall be taken down by the Contractor at no extra cost.
Decision of the Architects as to the rejection of such work shall be final and binding
on the Contractor.

2.7 REINFORCEMENT

31
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.7.1 The steel used for reinforcement shall be any of the following types but as specified in
BOQ:

(a) Mild steel and medium tensile bars conforming to IS 432 (Part I)
(b) High strength deformed steel bars conforming to IS 1786
(c) Hard drawn steel wire fabric conforming to IS 1566
(d) Structural steel conforming to Grade A of IS 2062
(e) Thermo-mechanically treated (TMT) Bars.

Recommended Steel reinforcement is Fe 500 TMT reinforcement bars and shall

conform to Specification & Grade & Tolerance : IS:1786 (equivalent to BS4449 -460 )
"Standard quality square or round twisted steel or confirming to IS 1139-1966 as
called for on the drawings. ". Other qualities of steel shall not be acceptable. Fiber
reinforcement in flooring slab shall be of Dramix fiber or other equivalent as
approved. Bars shall be free from mill scale, excessive rust, oil or paint.

2.7.2 Elongation percent on gauge length is 5.65 A where A is the cross sectional areas of
the test piece.

2.7.3 Mild steel is not recommended for the use in structures located in earthquake zone
subjected to severe damage and for structures subjected to dynamic loading (other
than wind loading) such as railway and highway bridges.

2.7.4 Welding of reinforcement bars covered in this specification shall be done in

accordance with the requirements of IS 2751.

Nominal mass/weight : The tolerance on mass/ weight for round and square bars
shall be the percentage given in below mentioned Table of the mass/ weight
calculated on the basis that the masses of the bar/ wire of nominal diameter and of
density 7.85 kg/ cm3 or 0.00785 kg/mm3.

+ for individual sample plus tolerance is not specified

(x) for coil batch tolerance is not applicable

Tolerance shall be determined in accordance with method given in IS 1786.

2.7.5 High strength deformed bars & wires shall conform to IS 1786. The physical properties
for all sizes of steel bars are mentioned below in Table

32
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tests: Selection and preparation of Test sample. All the tests pieces shall be selected by the
Engineer in- Charge or his authorized representative either-

(a) From cutting of bars

Or
(b) If he so desires, from any bar after it has been cut to the required or specified
size and the test piece taken from and any part of it.

In neither case, the test pieces shall be detached from the bar or coil except
in the presence of the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative.

The test pieces obtained in accordance with as above shall be full sections of
the bars as rolled and subsequently cold worked and shall be subjected to
physical tests without any further modifications. No deduction in size by
machining or otherwise shall be permissible. No test piece shall be enacted or
otherwise subject to heat treatment. Any straightening which a test piece may
require shall be done cold.

Tensile Test: 0.2% proof stress and percentage elongation –

This shall be done as per IS 1608, read in conjunction with IS 226.

RE- test: This shall be done as per IS 1786.

Rebend test: This shall be done as per IS 1786.

2.7.6 Chemical composition of reinforcement bars shall be as per below mentioned Table:-

33
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.7.7 Thermo Mechanically treated reinforcement bars:

(a) There is no BIS code for TMT bars. The available code BIS 1786 pertains to
HSD Bars.

Therefore there should be no stipulation that TMT bars should conform to

relevant BIS code.

(b) The TMT bars are being produced under valid license from either of the firms
namely Tempcore, Thermex Evcon Turbo & Turbo Quench. These firms have
acquired patents and are giving licenses to various producers to produce TMT
Bars.

(c) The TMT bars shall conform to IS 1786 pertaining to Fe 415 D or Fe 500 D or
Fe grade of steel as specified.

(d) In design and construction of reinforced concrete building in seismic zone III
and above, steel reinforcement of Grade Fe 415 D shall be used. However,
high strength deformed steel bars, produced by thermo mechanical treatment
process of grade Fe 415, Fe 500 and Fe 550 having elongation more than
14.5. % and conform to other requirements of Fe 415 D, Fe 500 D and Fe 550
D respectively of IS 1786 may also be used for reinforcement. In future, latest
provision of IS 456 and IS 13920 or any other relevant code as modified from
time to time shall be applicable.

2.7.8 Stacking and Storage

Steel for reinforcement shall be stored in such a way as to prevent distorting and
corrosion. Care shall be taken to protect the reinforcement from exposure to saline
atmosphere during storage, fabrication and use. It may be achieved by treating the
surface of reinforcement with cement wash or by suitable methods. Bars of different
classifications, sizes and lengths shall be stored separately to facilitate issue in such
sizes and lengths to cause minimum wastage in cutting from standard length.

2.7.9 Identification

Care shall also be taken to properly identify these bars at site. The staff shall be
specially trained for looking for identification marks on these bars given by the
manufacturers which are generally given color code. It will be advisable to see that
only one type/grade of bars are brought to site and used in the project after
conducting tests for each lot.

The contractor shall submit bar bending schedules for the approval of the Architects
prior to commencement of fabrication. These will indicate the accurate dimensions
and bending of bar as required on the structural drawings. Fabrication shall be
accurately done to the dimensions, spacing and minimum cover as shown on
structural drawings. Fabrication shall be accurately done to the dimensions, spacing
and minimum cover as shown on structural drawings.

All steel shall be rigidly held in place with 18 gauge annealed steel wire.
Cement mortar (1:2) cubes, M.S. chairs and spacer bars shall be used in
order to ensure accurate positioning of reinforcement.

All joints in steel reinforcement up to and including 16 mm dia shall be over-

lapped. The lengths of overlap for tension and compression joints shall be in

34
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

accordance with the typical detail. Joints in mild steel reinforcement above
16 mm diameter may be welded if permitted by the Architects in writing. All
joints in to steel reinforcement shall be over lapped strictly in accordance
with typical drawing. The laps shall be as agreed in such a way that at one
particular section not more than 25% of the bars are lapped.

2.7.10 Measurements :

The length of bars shall be measured correct to cm. of reinforcement placed in

position as per drawings. only such laps, dowels, chairs, spacer pins, as approved by
the Architects or as shown on drawings shall be measured. All wastage such as cut
piece etc., shall be included in rates and no extra amount shall be paid. In case of
contractor's own supply, the weight of various diameter bars shall be as per standard
ISI weight. No allowance shall be made for rolling margins.

2.8 Cover to Reinforcement :

Cover shall be taken to maintain the correct cover to reinforcement. Unless otherwise
specified on the drawing the following minimum covers (exclusive of rendering or
other decorative finish) shall be provided in all reinforced concrete work.

2.9 Under water concreting :

For under water concreting, the methods, equipment, materials and proportions of
the mix to be used shall be submitted to and approved by the Project Manager before
the work is started. The concreting operation shall be done as per provisions of 1S
4560 : 1978 (clause 13.2) under other wise directed by the Project Manager.

2.10 All the reinforced cement concrete works shall be design mix concrete of grade as
specified in Tender. The contractor prior to commencement of concreting work and
get the same approved in writing from the Project Manager.

2.11 DAMP PROOF COURSE (D.P.C.)

D.P.C. shall be of thickness as shown in drawing or in the Bill of Quantities. Unless

otherwise mentioned, proportion shall be 1 part of cement, two parts of sand and four
parts of aggregate mixed with approved water proofing compound @ 3% by weight of
cement or as per manufacturer’s specification. Before laying the concrete, the top
surface of the wall shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt and loose particles, mortar
droppings and laitance if any, scrubbing with coin or steel wire brush or by hacking,
if necessary. The surface is then thoroughly wetted and the concrete is placed. The
concrete shall be laid in every case the full width of the plinth or as shown in
drawing. The top surface shall be kept rubbed or rough or double chequered for
adhesion of mortar for brickwork. Proper curing shall be done before starting the
brick work over D.P.C.

35
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION – III

MASONRY WORK

3A.1 BRICK WORK

3A.1.1 GENERAL

All brick work should be carried out as shown on the drawings with set backs,
projections, curvatures, cuttings, footings etc. No additional cost for use of cut bricks
shall be allowed. Wherever the proportion of cement mortar has not been specifically
mentioned, cement mortar in the proportion of 1:6 shall be used. Flat brick shall be
provided wherever required without any extra cost Brick work shall be kept wet while
in progress, till mortar has properly set. On holidays or when work is stopped, top of
all unfinished masonry shall be kept covered. Should the mortar become dry or
powdery, for want of curing, work shall be pulled down and rebuilt at the contractor's
expenses.

3A.1.2 INDIAN STANDARDS :

1. IS : 1077 – 1992 : Common burnt clay building bricks (5th Revision)

2. IS : 1200(Part III) – 1976 : Method of measurement of building and Civil

Engineering Works – Brick work (3rd Revision)

3. IS : 2212-1991 : Code of Practice for Brick Work. (1st Revision)

4. IS : 3102 – 1971 : Classifications of burnt clay solid bricks

5. IS : 3495 (Part I to IV 1992 : Methods of tests on burnt clay building Bricks

(3rd Revision)
6. IS : 6042 – 1969 : Code of practice for construction of light weight concrete
block masonry.

7. IS : 3466 – 1988 : Specification for masonry cement (2nd Revision

Amendment No.1)

The above mentioned IS Specifications and Codes of Practice have been indicated for
general guidance. However, these IS Specifications and Codes will be adopted only for
those particular items in the contract where either the mode of measurement or
detailed technical specifications are not laid down in the Tender.

3A.1.3 BRICKS :

Brick shall be locally available, fairly uniform in size, with plane rectangular faces,
shape and color. Brick shall be uniformly well burnt so as to give clear ringing sound
when struck and shall be free from cracks or other flaws which impair their strength.

They shall show a fine grained, uniform, homogeneous and dense texture on fracture
and shall be free from lumps of lime, laminations, cracks, air holes, soluble salts
causing efflorescence or other defects which may impair their strength, durability,
appearance or usefulness for the purpose intended. They shall have frog of 10 to 20
mm depth.

36
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Classification of Bricks :

The common burnt clay brick shall be classified on the basis of their
minimum compressive strength as given below :
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----
Avg. Compressive Strength (Kg /
sq.cm)
Class Designation -------------------------------------------------------
----
Not less than Not more
than
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----
100 100 125
75 75 100
50 50 75
35 35 50
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----

Sampling :

For carrying out compressive strength, water absorption, efflorescence and

dimensional test, the sample of the brick shall be taken at random as given
below:

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----
Class Designation Lot Size No. of
Samples
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----
100 More than 50,000 bks 20
Nos.
75
50 More than 1,00,000 bks 20
Nos.
35
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----

3A.1.3 TESTING OF BRICKS :

a) Dimensions : 20 bricks shall be selected at random from stacks per lakh of

bricks, cleaned of blisters, kiln, rubbish, and laid touching edge to edge for
measuring length, breadth and height. Dimension shall be measured with a
steel tape correct to 1mm, Dimension tolerance shall be ± 8% from the
standard dimension, which will be 10 mm less than the required dimension
to allow for mortar joints. Thus, a 230 mm brick may have an actual
standard dimension up to 220 mm x 105 mm x 65 mm. Tolerance on the
plus side is acceptable provided nothing extra shall be payable for thicker
masonry.

b) Compressive Strength : The sample of bricks shall be taken at random

according to their designation, numbers, lots and number of samples as per
the table given above.

The sample brick shall be thoroughly wetted, the frog filled with CM (1:3)
cured for 24 hours under wet gunny bags and 3 days under water; on
removal from water, the test sample shall be wiped dry. The test sample shall
be placed between plywood sheets of 3mm thick in such a way that frog
project upward and brick correctly center in the machine. The length,
breadth of each brick, shall be measured correct to one mm. The load shall
be applied at the rate of 140 kg / sq.m. per minute. The strength shall be
worked out in kg/ sq.m. as follows :

37
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Compressive strength in kg/ cm2 : Max. load at failure (in kg.)

Area of bricks (in sq.m.)

The average of the five test results shall be the compressive strength.

c) Water absorption : The sample of the bricks (5 Nos.) selected at random

shall be dried in a ventilated over for 48 hrs. at 1100C to 1150C, then allowed
to cool for at least 2 hours under fan at room temperature. Find out the
weight (W1) in kg. At room temperature. After weighing, the sample bricks
shall be kept under water for a period of 24 hours. The brick shall be
removed from water and wiped with a damp cloth and find out the weight
(W2) in kg. Calculate the absorption percentage of each sample as follows :

Absorption percentages = W2 – W1 x 100

W1

The average of five test of brick sample being taken as the

percentage.

The water absorption shall not exceed 20 %.

Testing :
One series of all the above tests shall be carried out for every lot of 50,000
bricks at an approved Laboratory at the cost of the contractor, including cost
of transporting the specimens to the Laboratory.

3A.1.4 SOAKING

All bricks shall be immersed in water for twenty four hours before being put into work
so that they will be saturated and will not absorb water from the mortar.

3A.1.5 BATS

No bats or cut bricks shall be used in the work unless absolutely necessary around
irregular openings or for adjusting the dimensions of different course and for
closures, in which case, full bricks shall be laid at corners, the bats being placed on
the middle of the courses.

3A.1.6 LAYING

The brick shall be laid in mortar to line, level & shapes shown on the plan, slightly
pressed and thoroughly bedded in mortar and all joints shall be properly flushed and
packed with mortar and not hollows left anywhere. Brick shall be handled carefully so
as not to damage their edges. They should not also be thrown from any height to the
ground, but should be put down gently. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and
all vertical joints made truly vertical. Vertical joints on one course and the next below
should not come over one another & shall not normally be nearer than quarter of a
brick length. For battered faces beading shall be at right angles to the face. Fixtures,
frames etc. if any, shall be built in at place shown in the plans while laying the
courses only and not later by removal of bricks already laid. Care shall be taken
during construction to see that edges of bricks at sills, heads etc. are not damaged.

The verticality of the walls and horizontally of the courses shall be checked very often
with plumb bob and spirit level respectively.

3A.1.7 JOINTS:

Joints shall not exceed 10 mm (about 3/8") in thickness & this thickness shall be
uniform throughout. The joints shall be raked out not less than 10 mm (about 3/8")
deep when the mortar is green where pointing is to be done. When the brick surface
is to be plastered, the joints shall be raked to a depth of 5mm when the mortar is
green so as to provide good key to plaster.

38
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3A.1.8 UNIFORM RAISING

Brick work shall be carried up regularly in all cases where the nature of work will
admit, not leaving any part 60 cm. lower than another but where building at different
levels is necessary, the bricks shall be stepped so as to give later an uniform level &
effective bond. Horizontal courses should be to line and level, and face plumb as
shown on the plan.

3A.1.9 CURING :

Brick work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering when the mortar is
green. Brick masonry in cement mortar shall be kept constantly moist on all faces, for
a minimum period of 7 days.

3A.1.10 SCAFFOLDING

The scaffolding must be strong and rigid stiffened with necessary cross bearers and
always decked and beared on the sills with closed board ceilings and swings to
prevent injury to persons or materials. The Contractor shall have to allow other
trades to make reasonable use of his scaffolding as directed by the Project
Manager/Architects. If for the interest of work the contractor have to erect scaffolding
in the other properties including local bodies or Corporation. The arrangement for
the same including the cost of licensing fees etc. shall to be borne by the Contractor
and the Owner should be kept free from any liability on this account.

Put-log holes shall be made good by bricks to match the face work when put logs are
removed after ensuring that the holes behind are solidly filled in the 1:4:6 cement
concrete.

All brick works shall be kept well watered for 14 days after laying. If white pozzolana
cement is used for mortar, the curing shall be extended by one week at contractor's
expenses.

3A.1.11 MEASUREMENT :

One brick thick masonry wall shall be measured in sq. meters, correct to two places
of decimal. All openings in brick masonry work for doors, windows, ventilators and
any other opening shall be deducted to get net quantity of actual brick work done. No
deduction is to be made for opening up to 0.1 m2. No separate payment shall be made
for extra work involved in making opening, chases in wall for electrical inserts,
conduits, etc.

Brick masonry exceeding 230 mm shall be measured in m3 correct to two places of

decimal. Other details of measurement remain unchanged as specified in the above
para.

3A.1.12 Rate :

The rate quoted for brick masonry work shall include the cost of material, wastage,
labor involved in all operations described above, including transportation, overheads,
profits, curing, tools, equipment, necessary scaffolding, raking out joints to receive
plaster, opening, cutting out chases in brick work for fixing doors, windows,
ventilators, switch boxes, conduits, etc. and making good, etc.

Rate is also inclusive of making pillars, pilasters, piers, coping, ledges, projections, if
any.

However, rate for works in foundations shall include all depth below plinth level, and
superstructure shall include all operations for all heights above plinth level.

39
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3A.2 HALF BRICK WORK

Half brick masonry shall be built by laying bricks with frog projecting at top in
stretcher courses only. The mortar for the brick masonry shall be as specified in
Schedule of Items. Cement, sand and water used in mortar shall conform to the
quality as described in Concrete. Other detailed specifications for masonry work shall
remain unchanged as described in Para 4.0 above. It is mandatory to provide 115 mm
x 115 mm horizontal R.C.C. stiffeners (Patli) at about 1\2.15 m from floor level or at
door top level. The R.C.C. and reinforcement shall be paid separately as mentioned in
the Schedule of Items. The deductions for stiffeners shall be made from brick
masonry.

3A.2.1 JOINTS:

Joints shall not exceed 10 mm (about 3/8") in thickness & this thickness shall be
uniform throughout. The joints shall be raked out not less than 10 mm (about 3/8")
deep when the mortar is green where pointing is to be done. When the brick surface
is to be plastered, the joints shall be raked to a depth of 5mm when the mortar is
green so as to provide good key to plaster.

3A.2.2 Measurements

The length and height of the wall shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be
calculated in sq.m. where half brick wall is joined to the main walls of one brick or
greater thickness and measurements for half brick wall shall be taken for its clear
length from the face of the thicker wall.

3A.2.3 Rate

The rate includes the cost of the materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above except reinforcement which is to be paid for separately.

40
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3A.3 CAVITY WALL

It is a wall comprising of two leaves,

each leaf being built of masonry units
and separated by a cavity so as to
provide an air space within the wall
and tied together with metal ties or
bonding units to ensure that two
leaves act as one structural unit. The
width of the cavity shall not be less
than 50 mm and not more than 115
mm. Each leaf of the cavity wall shall
not be less than 75 mm. The space
between the leaves being either left as
cavity or filled with non-load bearing
insulating and water proofing material.

3A.3.1 Metal Ties

These may be of galvanised iron,

wrought iron, gun metal, brass,
copper, stainless steel or any such
corrosion resistant metal, made of flats
20 x 5 mm cranked or twisted at their
mid point with ends split and fish
tailed. The ties shall be built into
horizontal bed joints during erection,
placed sloping towards the exterior
side to prevent water from flowing
along it from outer to inner leaf side

3A.3.2 Bonding Units

These shall be preferably precast

R.C.C. units having cross-section as
per Fig. No. 6.6.

Length of the Bonding units will be

sum of thickness of both leaves plus
width of cavity if the leaves are 75 mm
or 115 mm. If the leaves are more than
115 mm thick, then the length of
a unit will be 2 × 115 + width of
cavity as shown in Fig. 6 of
Chapter 6. Precast RCC units
shall be provided with 2 no., 6
mm mild steel reinforcement bars tied with 2 no. 3 mm. dia. M.S. wire/hard drawn
wire cross bars (As shown in Fig. 6 of Chapter 6) placed in the centre of units.

Cement concrete used in the bonding units shall not be leaner than 1:3:6 (1 cement :
3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size).

3A.3.3 Spacing

Metal ties/bonding units shall be spaced not more than 90 cm apart horizontally and
45 cm vertically and staggered in each course. Additional ties shall be used near
openings.

41
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3A.3.4 Restrictions

Cavity walls shall not normally be built more than 7.5 metres in height and 9 metres
in length.

42
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Where large lengths and heights are desired, the wall shall be divided into panels with
strengthening measures such as pillars etc. Cavity shall be covered at the top with at
least two courses of masonry unit and/or a coping over it.

Adoption of cavity walls is not recommended when heavy concentrated load from
beam etc. are to be supported by walls.

3A.3.5 Measurements and Rate

(a) Brick work in cavity walls shall be included and measured with general brick
work. The width of the cavity shall not be measured. Skin of cavity wall, half
brick thickness shall be measured as and paid as described in para 3A.1.11
and 3A.2.2

(b) The forming of the cavity shall be given in square metres stating the width of
the cavity and shall include the metal ties/bonding unit specifying the
numbers per square metre.

(c) Labour and material for closing cavities at the jambs, sills and heads of
opening shall be as described and measured separately in running metres.

(d) The item shall include use of device for keeping cavity clear and forming the
requisite weep and vent holes and nothing extra on this account shall be
payable.

43
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION – IV

WATER PROOFING

4.1 Water Proofing in Toilets, Pantries etc.

The work shall be carried out by an experienced specialist waterproofing contractor

who shall be appointed only after prior approval of the Project Manager.

4.1.1 Materials

4.1.1.1 Polymer

A. The polymer shall be Acrylic based Polymer Modified Cementitious Composite Coating
system, as manufactured by CICO Technologies India Ltd., under the brand name
'TAPECRETE P: 151 POLYMER' or approved equal.

B. The cement shall be 'white cement', conforming to IS : 8042

C. The Epoxy shall be "Techoxy" , a water thinnable epoxy manufactured by Choksey

Chemicals Ltd.

4.1.2 Execution

4.1.2.1 Surface Preparation

A. Clean all RCC surfaces to remove all dust, foreign matters, loose particles or any
deposits of contaminants which could affect the bond between the RCC surfaces and
waterproof coating.

B. Remove all sharp projections and make surface reasonably smooth.

C. Plaster all brick wall surfaces with 12mm thick 1 : 4 plaster (1 part cement : 4 parts
course sand) upto a height of 300mm above the proposed floor finish level.

D. Thoroughly pre-wet all surfaces at least one hour prior to application of tapecrete
coating.

E. Remove all water from surfaces prior to placing tapecrete coating so that the surface
is only damp or surface dry. Standing water or shiny water surface shall not to
present under any circumstances.

4.1.2.2 Application:-

A. For toilets and other such wet areas :

i) Apply a coat of neat cement slurry primer admixed with impermeable compound CH-
09 or approved equivalent.

ii) Apply first coat of tapecrete polymer admixed with white cement in the ratio 1 : 2 (one
part tapecrete : 2 parts white cement)

iii) Apply second coat of tapecrete polymer admixed with white cement in the ratio 1 : 2
(one part tapecrete : 2 parts white cement)

iv) Seal all corners of floor / walls, junctions of pipes / walls etc. with Epoxy putty.

v) Apply final coat of tapecrete polymer admixed with white cement in the ratio 1 : 2
(one part tapecrete : 2 parts white cement)

B. For water tanks and other water bodies:

44
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

i) In addition to the waterproofing treatment of the toilets, an extra putty coat of

tapecrete polymer admixed with white cement and silica powder shall be applied on
the entire surface to the water bodies.

4.1.2.3 Curing

A. After application of final coat of tapecrete, allow to air dry for 6-10 hours. Do not use
any water for curing during this time.

B. Moist cure for 24 hours by sprinkling water.

4.1.2.4 Testing

A. The treated area of water proofing shall be tested by allowing water to stand on the
treated areas for a minimum period of 72 hours.

4.1.2.5 Protection

A. Upon completion of the waterproofing application, the treated areas shall be protected
with 12mm thick cement plaster 1:5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand)mixed with water
proofing compound.

4.2 Water Proofing On Terrace

The work shall be carried out by an experienced specialist waterproofing contractor

who shall be appointed only after prior approval of the Project Manager.

4.2.1 Materials

4.2.1.1 Modified Bitumen sheet membrane shall be Atactic Polypropylene (APP), 1.5 m thick
and weighting 2.25 kgs / sqm, manufactured by M/s. Bengal Bitumen or
approved equivalent.

4.2.1.2 Bitumen / asphalt used shall be blown bitumen of grade 85/25 or 90/15 as per IS :
702.

4.2.1.3 Bituminous primer shall confirm to IS : 3384.

4.2.1.4 Fibre glass tissue shall be of nominal mass 45 gm/cm² manufactured by M/s. U.P.
Twiga fibre glass Ltd. or approved equivalent.

4.2.1.5 Hessian base bitumen felt shall be type 3 grade I confirming to IS : 1322.

4.2.2 Guarantee

A. The waterproofing work shall be guaranteed for 10 years after date of substantial
completion. Submit guarantee in manner and from acceptable to the Project
Manager.

4.2.3 Execution

4.2.3.1 Inspection of Substrate

A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive built up roofing system and associated

work and conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not proceed
with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Project Manager.

4.2.3.2 Surface Preparation

A. Clean surface to remove all foreign matters, loose particles, remove all sharp
projections and make surface reasonably smooth.

B. Make a gola (fillet) 50 mm x 50 mm at the junction of roof and parapets.

4.2.3.3 Roof membrane Installation

45
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Water proofing of horizontal surfaces :

The waterproofing shall be applied as follows :

1. A coat of bituminous primer.

2. A coat of blown bitumen 85/25 or 90/15 shall be applied @ 1.5 kg / sqm.
3. A roll of Modified Bituminous membrane shall be unrolled over the bitumen
surface and completely bonded to the substrate by pressing down evenly for
the full width of the roll.
4. The side overlaps shall be 75 mm whereas the end overlaps shall be 100 mm;
both shall be further sealed with hot bitumen.
5. Second coat of blown bitumen 85/25 or 90/15 shall be applied @ 1.5 kg /
sqm.
6. A roll of Modified Bituminous membrane shall be unrolled over the bitumen
surface and completely bonded to the substrate by pressing down evenly for
the full width of the roll.

The side overlaps shall be 75 mm whereas the end overlaps shall be 100 mm;
both shall be further sealed with hot bitumen.
7. Third coat of blown bitumen 85/25 or 90/15 shall be applied @ 1.5 kg / sqm.
8. A roll of Modified Bituminous membrane shall be unrolled over the bitumen
surface and completely bonded to the substrate by pressing down evenly for
the full width of the roll.

The side overlaps shall be 75 mm whereas the end overlaps shall be 100 mm;
both shall be further sealed with hot bitumen.
9. The joints in all the layers of Modified Bituminous Membrane are staggered.
10. The membrane shall be properly overlapped / terminated at all openings,
rainwater down takes etc. To ensure that such junctions do not become
sources of leakage.

B. Water proofing of Vertical surfaces at roof level :

The water proofing shall be applied as follows :

1. A chase min 50 mm deep shall be cut in the walls/ parapets at a height of

minimum 150mm above the proposed roof finishing level for tucking in of
vertical waterproofing treatment.
2. A coat of bituminous primer.
3. A coat of blown bitumen 85/25 or 90/15 shall be applied at the rate of 1.5 kg
./ sqm.
4. A layer of hessian based felt shall be laid and completely bonded to the
substrate by pressing down evenly for the full width of the roll.
5. Second coat of blown bitumen 85/25 or 90/15 shall be applied at the rate of
1.5 kg ./ sqm.
6. A layer of Modified Bituminous Membrane shall be laid and completely
bonded to the substrate by pressing down evenly.
7. Third coat of blown bitumen 85/25 or 90/15 shall be applied at the rate of
1.5 kg/ sqm.
8. A layer of Modified Bituminous Membrane shall be laid and completely
bonded to the substrate by pressing down evenly.
9. The joints of all the three layers shall be staggered with 75 mm side laps and
100mm end laps respectively.
10. All the three layers shall be overlapped with the treatment for the horizontal
surface by at least 100 mm and also tucked inside the chase.

4.2.4 Testing

A. The treated area of waterproofing shall be tested by allowing water to stand

on the treated areas to a depth of 100 mm for a minimum period of 72 hours.

4.2.5 Protection of Roofing

46
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Upon completion of roofing and testing, the roofing should be protected with
min 50mm thick screed 1:4:8 (with 12mm and down size stone aggregate)
laid to slope and finally tiles etc.

4.3 Brick Bat Coba Roof waterproofing

The work shall be carried out by an experienced specialist waterproofing contractor

who shall be appointed only after prior approval of the PM.

4.3.1 Materials

4.3.1.1 Brick Bat shall be of half brick or as approved by the PMC.

4.3.1.2 Water Proofing Compound shall be Cico No. 1 or approved equivalent.

4.3.1.3 Cement shall be 43 grade.

4.3.2 Guarantee

A. The waterproofing work shall be guaranteed for 10 years after date of

substantial completion. Submit guarantee in manner and from acceptable to
the PM.

4.3.3 Execution

4.3.3.1 Inspection of Substrate

A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive built up roofing system and associated

work and conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not proceed
with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the PM.
4.3.3.2 Surface Preparation

A. Clean surface to remove all foreign matters, loose particles, remove all sharp
projections and make surface reasonably smooth.

B. Make a gola (fillet) 50 mm x 50 mm at the junction of Vertical and horizontal

surfaces..

4.3.3.3 Brick Bat Installation

A. Water proofing of horizontal surfaces :

The waterproofing shall be applied as follows :

1. A layer of 20mm thick cement mortar 1:4( 1 cement : 4 coarse sand)

mix with acrylic based water proofing compound.

2. A layer of broken bricks (coba) with gaps of 15-20mm between

broken bricks including preparation of necessary gradient as required to
drain off the surface water.

3. Filling the joints of coba with cement mortar 1:4 ( 1 cement : 4 coarse
sand ) mixed with acrylic based water proofing compound.

4. Apply the above 1, 2 & 3 operation to achieve desired levels as per

drawing.

5. Apply a layer of 20mm thick cement mortar 1:4(1 cement: 4 coarse

sand) mix with acrylic based water proofing compound.

6. Cure and test the above treatment for 7 days by ponding.

B. Installation of Insulation

47
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

P-Quality Thermocole sheet of density 40kg/cum Insulation shall be laid directly on

top of the waterproofing treatment as follows :

1. A coat of blow bitumen shall be applied @ 1.5 kg /sqm on the

dried water proof surface.

2. P Quality thermocole sheet of 50 mm thickness (Density 40 kg / cum) shall

be pressed in the above layer of hot blown bitumen.

3. Two layer of alkanthene sheet 200microns shall be laid on thermocole spot

stuck with bitumen and joints overlapped and sealed with bitumen.

4.3.3.4 Protection of Roofing

A. Upon completion of roofing and testing, the roofing should be protected with
100mm (avg.) thick screed 1:2:4 (with 12mm and down size stone aggregate)
laid to slope and finally tiles etc

48
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - V

WOODWORK AND JOINERY

5.1 INDIAN STANDARDS :

1. IS : 287 - 1993 : Recommendation for maximum permissible moisture

contents for timber used for different purposes. (3rd Revision)

2. IS : 1141 – 1993 : Code of practice for seasoning of timber (2nd Revision)

3. IS : 1659 - 1990 : Blockboards (3rd Revision) (with Amendment No.1)

4. IS : 1708 – 1986 : Methods of testing of small, clear (Part 1 to 18 ) specimens

of timber.

5. IS : 2202(part I)-1991 : Plywood face panels for wooden flush door, shutters
(solid core type) (5th Revision) (with Amendment No.1)

6. IS : 2202(part II)-1983 : Particle board face panels for wooden flush door
shutters (solid core types). (3rd Revision)

7. IS : 4021 – 1983 : Timber door, window and ventilator frames (2nd Revision)
(with Amendment No.1)

8. IS : 401 – 1982 : Code of practice for preservation of timber. (3rd Revision)

(with Amendment No.2)

The above mentioned IS Specifications and Codes of Practice have been indicated for
general guidance.

However, these IS Specifications and Codes will be adopted only for those particular
items in the contract where either the mode of measurement or detailed technical
specifications are not laid down in the Tender documents.

5.2 TIMBER :

Timber used under this section shall be (1) Teak wood (2) Hard wood of approved
species (3) Sal wood (only where specified).

Moisture Content :

The maximum permissible limits of moisture content shall be from 10 to 16 percent

for timber 50 mm and above in thickness, and 8 to 14 percent for timber less than 50
mm, for different regions as specified in IS : 287 – 1973.

As per IS: 287 – 1973, the country has been broadly divided into Four Zones, based
on humidity variations, as follows :

Zone I : Average annual relative humidity less than 40 %

Zone II : Average annual relative humidity 40 to 50 %

Zone III : Average annual relative humidity 50 to 67 %

Zone IV : Average annual relative humidity more than 67 %

The maximum moisture contents of timber for various zones are as follows :

Climate Zones as per IS : 287 - 1973 :

Zone-I Zone-II Zone-III Zone-

IV

49
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Moisture content percent of oven dry weight of

timber.

a) For joinery including

frames, staircases,
mouldings and other
joiner’s work, 50mm
and above in thickness 10 12 14 16

b) Ditto, thinner than

50 mm. 08 10 12 14

A relaxation of 3 to 5% may be allowed upon local conditions, at the discretion of the

Engineer-in-Charge. Where joints are strengthened by steel straps, bolts, etc.,
relaxation up to 7 ½% may be permitted.

Seasoning and Treatment :

All timber shall be well seasoned by a suitable process confirming to IS:1141 – 1973,
before being planed to the required sizes. Sap wood, where permitted, and hard wood
shall be treated with suitable preservatives as specified in IS:401 – 1982, Code of
practice for preservation of timber (3rd revision). The finished components shall be
given suitable treatment.

Defects Prohibited :

Timber shall be free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch pockets or streaks
on exposed edges, bore holes, splits and cracks.

Permissible Defects :

Second Class Individual sound knot and hard knot shall not be more than 40 mm dia
and the knots shall not be more than 1.5% of the area of piece.

Pitch pockets or streaks are permissible except on exposed edges provided that they
are clean and filled up with suitable putty or filler. When pitch pockets or streaks are
located on the exposed edges of the core, they shall be cut out and filled with pieces
of wood of similar species with grain running in the same direction. The piece shall be
well glued.

It shall be generally free from sap wood but traces of sap wood shall be permitted.
Pint holes shall be permitted, provided they are filled.

Wormholes shall be permitted, provided they are not more than 10 mm in diameter
and not more than one per member and provided such worm holes are plugged with
similar timber in such a manner that the plugging merges with the surrounding area
both as to color and grain.

5.3 WORKMANSHIP FOR DOOR, WINDOW & VENTILATOR FRAMES

All members of frames of doors, windows and ventilators, etc. shall be at right angles,
checked from the inside surfaces of the respective members.

All members of frames shall be straight without any warp or bow and shall have three
exposed sides smooth and well planed and shall be at right angles to each other. The
surface touching the walls may not be planed unless it is required in order to
straighten up the member or to obtain the overall sizes within the tolerances referred
to hereafter.
The frames shall be wrought, framed and fixed in position as per detailed drawings.
Specified timber shall be used and it shall be sawn in the direction of the grains.
Sawing shall be truly straight and square. The scantlings shall be planed smooth and
accurate to the full dimensions, rebates, roundings and mouldings as per detailed
drawings.

50
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Joinery :

Frames of timber doors, windows and ventilators shall have dove-tailed joints.

The jamb post shall be through and tenoned into the mortices of the transome to the
full width t\of the transome and the thickness of tenon shall be closely fitted into the
mortices and pinned with corrosion resisting metal pins, not less than 8 mm diameter
or with hard wood or bamboo dowels not less than 10 mm dia. For
internal/unexposed joinery work, the joints shall be glued and similarly pinned. The
depth of rebate in frames for housing the shutters shall be 15 mm.

Surface Treatment :

Woodwork shall not be painted, oiled or otherwise treated before it has been approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge. All portions of timber abutting against masonry or
concrete or embedded in ground and all joints shall be painted with approved wood
primer, boiling coal tar, creosote, solignum or equivalent approved anti-termite
solution as directed by the EIC.

Gluing of Joints :

The contact surfaces of tenon and mortice joints shall be treated before putting
together with an adhesive of make approved by the EIC.

Dimensions of Frames – Tolerances for :

The finished dimensions of timber sections in frames for doors, windows, and
ventilators shall be as specified in description of items and shall be subject to a
general tolerance of (+) 3mm or (-) 2 mm.

Holdfast :

Holdfast shall be made from M.S. flat of size 225 mm x 40 mm x 3 mm unless

otherwise specified. Length of 5 cm at one end shall be bent at right angles and this
portion will have two holes for fixing the same to the door frame and with screws. The
hold-fast at its other end, shall be forked, bent, if required and embedded in cement
concrete block of specified size or 75 mm x 115 mm x 230 mm size, if not specified.

A minimum number of 3 holdfasts shall be fixed on each side of door and window
frames, where height of frame is one meter and above; one at the center point and
other two at 30 cms from the top and bottom of frames. In case of window and
ventilator frames whose height is less than one meter, two holdfasts on each side
shall be fixed at quarter points of the frame.

Sampling :

All frames selected in the sample shall be inspected for material dimensions,
tolerances, workmanship and finish as per IS : 4021-1983.

Finish :

All surfaces of door, window and ventilator frames which are required to be painted
ultimately shall be covered evenly by brush painting with a priming coat of a wood
primer, or as specified.

Fixing in Position :

No frame shall be fixed in position unless it is inspected and approved by the EIC or
his representative at site. The frame shall be secured to alls or columns, as the case
may be, with metallic fasteners or M.S. holdfasts.

The vertical members of door frames shall be embedded in the flooring to its full
depth. The door frames, while being placed in position, shall be suitably strutted and
wedged to prevent warping during construction.

51
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

In case of wooden scantling for posts, trusses, rafters, purlins, etc. the fixing shall be
done by clamps, bolts and nuts, spikes, as directed by EIC. In case of the last
alternative, the large nail with a cap shall be driven through about 40 mm beyond the
wooden members, to be fixed together and the end of the nail turned back so as to
ensure proper fastening. Wherever making up the length is necessary, it may be done
by half lap joints secured together with 50 mmx 6 mm M.S. clamps of suitable length
and shape fixed with bolts and nuts.

T.W. work in framing of false ceiling, roofing, wall paneling or any other location, not
directly exposed shall be done as mentioned above, except that the scantlings need
not be planed.

5.3.1 Measurements :

Wrought (planed) and framed woodwork shall be measured for finished dimensions.
No allowance shall be made for wastage and for dimension supplied beyond those
specified. Length of each piece shall be measured overall to the nearest centimeter, so
as to include projections for tenons, scarves and miters.

Width and thickness shall be measured to the nearest millimeter. Cubical contents
shall be worked out in cu.m. correct to three places of decimal.

In case of mouldings, roundings, rebates, circular and varying sections, the sectional
area of the piece shall be taken as the area of the least square or rectangle from
which such a section can be cut.

The rate includes the cost of materials, labor involved in all the operations for
complete work as described and specified and shall be inclusive of preservatives
applied, hinges, holdfasts and concrete block embedding them, in case frames of
door, window, ventilator, etc.

In case of wooden scantlings in posts, trusses, rafters, purlins, etc. the rate shall be
inclusive of half lap joints with 50 mm x 6mm M.S. clamps, bolts, nuts, nails, spikes,
etc.

5.4 PANELLED, GLAZED OR PANELLED AND GLAZED SHUTTERS :

The work shall be carried out as per detailed drawing. The wooden members shall be
planed smooth and accurate. They shall be cut be the exact shape and size without
patching or plugging of any kind. Mouldings, rebates, roundings, etc. shall be done as
shown in the drawing, before the pieces are assembled into the shutter.

Joinery Work :

The thickness of the stiles and rails shall be specified for the shutters.

The minimum thickness of the panels shall normally be 15 mm where the clear
width of panel is not more than 300 mm and 20 mm where the clear width of the
panel is more than 300 mm. Solid wood panel for door and window shutters shall
be made out of one or more strips of timber planks of not less than 125 mm
width. Strips of not more than 200 mm width will be used to reduce chances of
warping, splitting or other defects. The timber strips shall be joined together with
continuous tongue and grooved joints, glued together and reinforced with metal
dowels. The groovings of the solid panel shall normally run along the longer
dimensions of the panel unless otherwise directed. The corners and edges of
panels shall be finished as shown in the drawing and these shall be further
tongued into stiles and rails. Sash bars shall have mitred joints with the stiles.

Stiles and rails of shutters shall be made out of single piece. Lock and
intermediate rails exceeding 200 mm in width may be made out of one or more
pieces of timber, but the width of each piece shall not be less than 75 mm. Where
more than one piece of timber is used, they shall be jointed with a continuous
tongue and grooved joint glued together and reinforced with metal dowels (rust
proof) at regular intervals of 20 cm or pinned with not less than three 40 mm rust
proof pins of the lost head type. The tenons shall pass clear through stiles at least
3/4th of the width of stile. The stiles and rails shall have a 12mm groove to

52
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

receive the panel. In case of the double shutters, the rebate at the closing
junction of the two shutters shall be of depth not less than 2 cm.

Tolerance :

The finished work, with a tolerance of ± 1mm n thickness and +3 mm and –2 mm

in width of stiles and rails shall be acceptable. The rates for shutters are based
on the dimensions of various components or parts, as furnished below, unless
otherwise mentioned.

a) Framed & Paneled Shutters :

1. Bottom and middle or lock rail : 160 to 250 mm wide

2. Other stiles and rails : 100 to 120 mm wide

3. Mullions : 100 mm wide

4. Panels, flat on both sides : 12 mm thick

5. Panels raised on one side : 20 mm thick

6. Panels raised on both sides : 25 mm thick

b) Fully glazed shutters for windows, ventilators, etc :

1. Stiles and rails : 60 to 80 mm wide

2. Mullions : 60 mm wide

3. Glazing bars : 30 to 40 mm wide

4. Rebates for glazing : 10 to 15 mm x 5 to 10 mm.

c) Partly glazed shutters :

1. Stiles and rails, etc.

d) Louvered Shutters :

1. Stiles and rails etc. : as per (a) above

2. Louvers : 10 to 15 mm thick

Beading :

Timber, plywood, hardboard and particle board panels shall be fixed only with
grooves. In the case of glass, asbestos, mesh panels, beading shall always be
provided without groves, the beading being on one side, the other side being
supported by rebate from stiles. For external doors/windows, shutters, beading
shall be fixed from the inside.

Fittings :

The cost of providing and fixing shutters shall include the cost of hinges, screws
as specified in item/ standard drawing. All other fittings shall be measured and
paid as specified or described elsewhere.

5.4.1 Measurements :

Wood work and joinery work shall be measured in square meters. Length and width
of unfinished opening shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 m.

53
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Areas shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 m2. All work shall be measured net as
fixed, that is, no extra allowance in measurement shall be made for shape, joints, etc.
However, where the dimension as fixed exceeds the specified dimensions only, the
specified dimension(s) shall be measured if within tolerance limits permitted; and
where one or more dimension(s) of the piece, as fixed, is less than the specified
dimensions and is accepted by the EIC, then the actual dimensions will be measured.

Items shall include:

(1) Supply of specified species of timer, sawn to requisite sizes without

any defects, wrought, framed and fixed in position with the required
standard of workmanship including supply and fixing of fixtures,
straps, bolts, holdfasts, spikes, nails, screws, etc. applying glue or
other jointing materials, coal-tarring or any other methods;
embedded parts, glazing and supplying and fixing of all specified
fittings.

2) All materials, labor, scaffolding, use of equipment, etc. for framing

and fixing and completing the items as specified.

5.4.2 Rate :

Rate shall include the cost of materials and labor involved in all the operations
described above for complete work.

5.5 WOODEN FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS : (SOLID CORE TYPE)

Types :

Solid core flush door shutters may be of the decorative type or no decorative paintable
type.

Nature of Construction :

CORE TYPE

i) Blockboard a) Decorative
b) Non-decorative

ii) Particle board with or a) Decorative

without blockboard b) Non-decorative

The Specification in general shall conform to IS:2202 (Part-I) – 1983.

Nominal thickness of shutters shall be 25, 30, 35 mm or 40 mm as specified.

Tolerances :

Tolerances on nominal width and height shall be ± 3 mm and tolerance on nominal

thickness shall be ± 1.2 mm. The thickness of the door shutters shall be uniform
throughout with a permissible variation of not more than 0.8 mm when measured at
any two points.

For stiles, rails and lipping, only non-coniferous timber (hardwood) specified in Group
2 of Appendix ‘A’ of IS : 2202 (Part I) – 1983 shall be used.

The moisture content in timbers used in the manufacture of flush door shutters shall
not be more than 12%, tested according to IS : 1708 – 1986.

Adhesives :

Adhesive used for bonding cross- band and plywood to core and face veneers to cross
band, shall be phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin conforming to B.W.P. type
specified in IS : 848 – 1974. Specification for synthetic resin adhesives for plywood
(Phenolic & Aminoplastic (First Revision) ).

Construction :

54
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Blockboard core shall conform to the requirements of IS : 1659-1979.

A wooden frame constructed of stiles and rails of well seasoned and treated wood
shall be provided for holding the core. The width of the members shall not be less
than 50 mm and not more than 100 mm. Alternatively, the core shall be of solid
board with slots extending for about two third depth and at approximately 20 mm
spacings. The slots shall be made alternatively on two faces of board.

Particle board core with or without Blockboard : The core shall be either particle
board or a combination of blockboard and particle board. In a combined construction,
the width of blockboard construction shall extend at least 150 mm from inner edge of
the stile, on the rest shall be particle board. The particle board shall be either of flat
pattern pressed type or extrusion type.

Particle board core : the particle board core shall be either of flat pattern pressed type
or extrusion type. The frame for holding the core shall be as specified above.

Lipping :

Lipping shall be provided internally as specified. Lipping when provided, may be

internal and designated as edge-band or external as specified. Joints shall not be
permitted in the lipping.

Edge-band i.e. internal lipping shall have a total depth of not less than 25 mm. Edge
band may be provided separately, when its species is different from that of backing or
as one piece with the stile, designated as frame-cum-lipping, when edge-band and
backing are of the same species.

External lipping, where provided, shall be solid and shall measure at least 6 mm on
the face of the door.

Rebating :

In case of double leaved shutters, the meeting of the stiles shall be rebated by one
third the thickness of shutters. The rebating shall be either splayed or square type.
Where lipping is provided, the depth of lipping at the meeting of stiles shall not be
less than 35 mm.
Face Panel :

The face panel shall be formed by gluing, by the hot press process, on both faces of
the core, either plywood or cross bands or face veneers. The thickness of the cross
bands or of the plywood shall be between 1 mm and 3 mm.

The thickness of the face veneer or of the plywood shall be between 0.5 mm and 1.5
mm for commercial veneers and between 0.5 mm and 1.0 mm for decorative veneers.
The combined thickness of cross bands and face veneer shall not be less than 2.5
mm. The plywood conforming to these requirements shall be glued under pressure on
both of the core. When the panel consists of cross bands and face veneers glued
separately, the cross bands shall be laid with their grains at right angles to those of
the core and glued to both its faces. Face veneer shall then be laid with their grains at
right angles to those of the cross bands. Application of a decorative face veneer on a
finished face panel, having veneer in the same direction as the proposed veneer shall
be avoided.

Opening of Glazing :

Where specified or otherwise shown in the drawing, opening for glazing shall be
provided. The opening shall be 25 cm in height and 20 cm. in width, unless otherwise
directed. The bottom of the opening shall be at a height of 140 cm. from the bottom of
the shutter. Opening for glazing shall be lipped internally with solid timber.

Opening of Louvres :

55
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Where specified, or otherwise shown in the drawing, opening for louvre shall be
provided. The height of the opening shall be 30 cm from the top of the bottom rail
unless otherwise directed.

The width of the opening shall be as directed, but in no case this shall extend beyond
vertical stiles of the shutter.

Provision for fixing locks :

Shutters shall be shop prepared for taking mortice locks or latches as may be
specified or directed. Suitable blocks of wood may be provided for fixing the hardware.
The sizes of blocks shall preferably correspond to the maximum size of lock.

Workmanship & Finish :

All the four edges of the door shutter shall be square. The shutter shall be free from
twist or warp in its plane.

Both faces of the door shutter shall be sanded to a smooth even texture.

Workmanship and the finish of the face panels shall be in conformity with those
specified in IS : 303 – 1975 for non-decorative type and IS : 1328-1979 for decorative
type.

Tests :

End immersion Test :

Door shutters shall be tested for resistance of their base to immersion in

water as follows :

The door shutter shall be immersed vertically to a height of 30 cm in

water at room temperature for 24 hours and then allowed to dry for
24 hours at 27oC + 2oC and relative humidity of 65 ± 5 percent. The
cycle shall be repeated eight times. There shall be no de-lamination
at the end of the test.

Sample Size & Criteria for Conformity :

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------
No. of shutters No. of Shutters Permissible No. of
shutters
In a lot to be tested no. of defective tested for
end
Shutters immersion
test
& glue
adhesion
test
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------
11 to 25 4 0 1
26 to 50 8 0 2
51 to 100 13 1 2
101 to 150 20 1 3
151 to 300 32 2 5
301 to 500 50 3 8
501 & above 80 5 13
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------
For a lot of 10 shutters and less, no testing is required.

Fittings :

56
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The coat of providing and fixing shutters shall include the cost of brass oxidized
hinges and necessary M.S. screws for fixing the same. All other fittings shall be
measured and paid for separately, unless specified or described.

5.5.1 Measurements :

a) Length and width of the shutters shall be measured to the nearest centimeter
in closed position, covering the rebates of the frame but excluding the gap
between the shutter and the frame. Overlap of two shutters shall not be
measured. All work shall be measured net as fixed.

b) Length and width of the vision panel and louvre panel shall be measured
inside of lipping correct to a cm. and area in sq.m. correct to two places of
decimal.

c) No deduction in the measurement of shutters will be made for the openings

made in the shutter for fixing vision panel or louvre panel.

5.5.2 Rate :

Rate shall include the cost of materials and labor involved in all the operations for
complete work. For vision panel and louvred panel, where provided, it shall also
include the cost of lipping.

5.6.0 CELLULAR & HOLLOW CORE TYPE – DECORATIVE, COMMERCIAL :

These shall generally confirm to Indian Standard Specifications IS : 2191 (Part I) -

1973 and IS : 2191 (Part II) – 1966 and the core shall be cellular or hollow, bound by
timber frame.

Core :

The core shall be one of the following types :

a) Cellular Core : shall be any of the following types :

Type A : Particle board conforming to IS:3087-1965, hardboard conforming to

IS:1658-1966. Wooden or plywood battens, tubular strips of blocks or batten
strips of not less than 25mm width, so fixed that each of the voids formed,
does not exceed 25 cm2 in area and volumetric contents of the voids do not
exceed more than 50 percent of the total core volume i.e. when measured
from edge to edge.

b) Hollow Core :

Timber frame of well seasoned and treated good quality wood shall be
constructed from stiles and top, bottom and two intermediate rails, each not
less than 75 mm wide. In each segment , battens not less than 25mm wide
shall be fixed in such a way that the voids are equally distributed and the
void area in any segment is less than 500cm2 .

Battens may be replaced by suitable rolls or strips or strips of veneers.

Stiles and rails of shutters shall be made out of one piece or alternatively, two
or more pieces suitably fastened together.

Face Panel :

The plywood, forming the face panel, shall not be less than 3 mm in thickness in the
case of cellular core shutter and not less than 6mm in thickness in case of hollow
core shutters, except for 25mm thick door in which case 4mm thickness may be
permitted. Two ply face skin construction in a combination of cross-band and face
veneers may also be adopted in which case, the combined thickness shall not be less
than 4mm. The thickness of face veneers in the plywood shall be between 0.5mm and
1.5 mm for commercial veneers and between 0.5 mm to 1.00 mm for Decorative

57
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

veneers. The plywood face skin assembly conforming to these requirements shall be
glued under pressure on both faces of the core.

5.7 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT

A. Fire retardant treatment of wood shall be by means of an approved

proprietary product, proven to have outstanding durability under any
conditions of exposure, to provide effective retardant treatment against fire.
The material shall react chemically at temperatures below the ignition point
of untreated wood to reduce flammable vapors emitted by wood and form a
protective char while retaining the wood underneath structurally sound.

B. The material used for treatment shall be clean, oil-free, odorless and
harmless to people, plants and animals, even when exposed to fire.

C. The materials shall be pressure impregnated for deep-penetration, fiber-fixed

to prevent leaching. The treated wood shall be capable of being subsequently
painted or stained without being discolored.

D. The material used for fire retardant treatment shall be compatible with the
material used for preservative treatment.

E. Surface spread of flame classification of IS : 476 Part 7.

F. The Contractor shall be submit for the effectiveness of the treatment over a
minimum period of 5 (live) years from the date of final completion.

G. All wood covered by this specification shall be treated.

5.8 GLASS

A. Glass : All glass shall be float glass of glazing quality conforming to BS:952,
Part 1 or other acceptable standard.

B. Glass and sizes and thickness shall be as shown on the Drawings.

C. All glass shall bear the label of its manufacturer and the standard to which it
is manufactured.

D Glazing components: These shall be clear silicone sealant.

5.9 WEATHER STRIPS

A. The weather strips to seal the perimeter gaps between sashes and frames
shall be flexible vinyl or synthetic rubber suitable for heavy duty application.

B. Sealant caulk for sealing joints between frames and structural openings shall
be a one-part polysulphide sealant suitable for application by a caulk…. gun.

5.10 EXECUTION

5.15.1 GENERAL

A. The fire retardant and preservative treatment of wood shall be performed

after conversion of lumber to the required sizes in construction, so as to keep
subsequent working on them to a minimum. Brush apply two heavy coats of
the same wood preservative and fire retardant chemical to any surfaces
which were exposed by cutting, sawing, drilling etc.

B. Set out all doors and window accurately in accordance with the Contract
Drawings or approved shop drawings, true to location, dimensions, line and
plumb.

C. Ensure that dimensions of rough openings provided in walls and partitions

are correct for the jamb, head and sill detail build-up including sub-frames,
finished frame thickness and working tolerance, in order to install the

58
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

required size of sashes. Make corrections in rough openings as required prior

to installation of sub-frames and frames.

D. All members shall be in continuous lengths between supports without any

intermediate joints or splices unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

E. All sizes shown on the drawings are the finished dimensions and shall be
within the tolerance given below :

1. For measurement upto and including 100mm in width or

thickness - ± 0.5mm.

2. For measurement above 100mm in width and thickness - ±

mm.

F. Generally, the finished door and window frames are designed to be installed
after the completion of wet trades such as masonry and plastering. Rough
frames shall be installed with masonry and fixed in placed by means of mild
steel hold fasts, at least four to each side.

5.15.2. SUB FRAMES

A. Sub Frames shall be of the size shown on drawings and shall be securely
fixed to the wall and partition masonry or framing studs as applicable true to
lime, plumb and alignment. Ensure that adequate working tolerance is
provided for the installation of door and frames.

5.15.3 DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES

A. Door and window frames shall be of the sizes and sections shown on the
contract drawings.

B. Frames shall be fixed in place after the completion of all wet trades such as
masonry plastering and filling in order to avoid wetting and damage of frames
by plaster dropping etc. Frames shall be square and fully framed and joined
and provided with temporary bracing to prevent distortion during direction.
Secure frames to sub-frames by screws penetrating at least three fourth the
thickness of sub-frames at 500 mm centre all round. Counter – sink the
head screws neatly at least 3 mm below the wood surface. Install the frames
accurately with reference to finished wall surfaces as shown in the detail,
true to line, plumb and alignment.

C. The panel frames shall be jointed by “all wood” joints without metal fasteners
by means of the most appropriate glued mortise and tenoned joints and wood
pins, Mortises and tenons shall be tooled to obtain intimate contact between
their surfaces and shall be fully glued with glue. Joints shall be tightened
with vice, clamps, draw straps or other means to obtain tight, indiscernible
joints, the grain of wood pins shall match the surface grain of the frames.

D. After assembly the joints shall be tooled and sanded to remove minor
unevenness at joints.

E. Planted moldings and architraves shall be fixed by means of headless-nails,

neatly punched below the surface of wood.

5.15.4 FIXTURES & FASTENINGS:

Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of Quantities, each shutter shall be hung
with four brushed steel or other metal but hinges of approved quality size and make
with brushed steel or other metal screws and the Contractor’s shall cover for
providing and fixing hinges to the shutters.

5.15.5 FITTINGS:

59
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

All hardware fittings and fixtures shall be as per schedule of fittings and of heavy
quality as approved by the Architects.

60
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION-VI

FLOORING & DADO WORKS

6.1 IPS FLOORING LAID IN SITU

6.1.1 General: The total thickness of floor shall be 40 mm. Thickness of the under layer
shall be 30mm mm and shall be measured correct to a mm. Thickness of the top
layer shall be 10 mm, and not be less than specified.

6.1.2 Fixing Dividing Strips: The divider strips as specified in the item shall be fixed on the
base to the surface level of floors so as to form panels of required size and pattern.
The panels shall be of uniform size not exceeding 2 sqm in area and 2m in length for
inside situations. In exposed situations the length of any side of the panel shall not
be more than 1.25 meters.

6.1.3 Laying: Cement concrete shall be placed in the panels and be leveled with the help of
straight edge and trowel and beaten with a wooden ‘Thapy’ or mason’s trowel. The
blows shall be fairly heavy in the beginning but as consolidation takes place, light
rapid strokes shall be given. Beating shall cease as soon as the surface is found
covered with a thin layer of cream of mortar. The evenness of the surface shall be
tested with straight edge and made true to required slopes. While laying concrete,
care shall be taken to see that the strips are not damaged / disturbed by the laborers.
The tops of strips shall be visible clearly after finishing with cement slurry.

The finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the cessation of beating.
The surface shall be left for some time, till moisture disappears from it or surplus
water can be mopped up. Use of dry cement or cement and sand mixture sprinkled
on the surface to stiffen the concrete or absorb excessive moisture shall not be
permitted. Excessive trawling shall be avoided.

Fresh cement shall be mixed with water to form thick slurry and spread at the rate of
2 kg of cement over an area of one sqm of flooring while the flooring concrete is still
green. The cement slurry shall then be properly processed and finished smooth.

The edges of sunk floors shall be finished and rounded with cement mortar 1:2 ( 1
cement : 2 coarse sand) and finished with a floating coat of neat cement.

The junction of floor with wall plaster, dado or skirting shall be rounded off where so
specified.

6.1.4 Curing: The entire surface is to be cured by means of wet bar lap or by covering with
curing compound. Curing shall start after five hours and continued up to 24 hours.

6.1.5 Cement Plaster Skirting In-situ: The height of skirting shall be as specified in the
drawings and shall be recessed from the surface of plaster by 2 mm. The work shall
be carried out simultaneously with the laying of floor. The junction of skirting with
the floor shall be neatly rounded to a radius of 15 mm unless specified otherwise.

6.1.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

When all construction and finishing work, including painting, joinery, electrical and
plumbing works etc. are completed and just before the area is handed over, the floor
shall be worked clean with water and dried.

6.2 TILES IN FLOORING AND DADO

6.2.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

The joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15 mm in masonry walls, while the
masonry is being laid. In case of concrete walls, the surfaces shall be chipped and
roughened with wire brushes. The surface shall be cleaned thoroughly, washed with
water and kept wet before skirting work is commenced.

6.2 LAYING

61
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

12mm thick plaster of cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) of mix or as
specified shall be applied and allowed to harden. The plaster shall be roughened with
wire brushes, or by scratching.

The tiles should be soaked in water, washed clean & a coat of cement slurry applied
liberally at the back of tiles & set in the bedding mortar. The tiles shall be tampered &
corrected to proper plane & lines. The tiles shall be set in the required pattern and
butt jointed. The joints shall be as fine as possible. Top of skirting or dado shall be
truly horizontal and joints truly vertical except where otherwise indicated.

Skirting & dado shall rest on the top of the flooring. Where full size tiles cannot be
fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size and their edges rubbed smooth.

6.2.3 CURING AND FINISHING

The joints shall be cleaned of the grey cement grout with wire brush or trowel to a
depth of 2 mm to 3 mm & all dust & loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush
pointed with white cement added with pigments if required to match the colour of
tiles. The surfaces shall then be kept wet for seven days.

After curing the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished work shall
not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.

6.2.4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IS 13755 Requirements/Characteristics CEN specifications EN 177B11a

1. DIMENSIONS & SURFACE QUALITY

a) Deviation in length + 0.5%

b) Deviation in thickness + 5.0%
c) Squareness + 0.5%
d) Straightness of sides + 0.5%
e) Surface flatness + 0.5%
f) Surface quality Min. 95% of tiles
should be free from defects

2. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
a) %Water Absorption 3-6%
b) Bending Strength > 220kg/cm2
c) Scratch Resistance (Mohr’s Scale) Min. 5
d) Resistance of surface To be specified by the
Abrasion manufacturer
e) Crazing Resistance Min. 2 cycles

3. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
a) Resistance to staining Min. class-2
b) Resistance to household Min. class-B
Chemicals

4. THERMAL SPECIFICATIONS
a) Thermal Shock Resistance Resistance to 10 cycles
b) Thermal Expansion Max 9x10-6K-1 at 1000C

6.3 MARBLE STONE FLOORING

6.3.1 DRESSING OF SLABS

Every stone shall be hand/machine cut to the required size and shape, fine chisel
dressed on all sides to the full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the
stone shall be fully in contact with it. The top surface shall also be fine chisel
dressed to remove all waviness. The sides and top surface of slabs shall be machine
rubbed or table rubbed with coarse sand before paving. All angles and edges of the

62
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

marble slabs shall be true, square and from chippings and the surface shall be true
and plane.

The thickness of the slabs shall be as specified in the description of the item.
Tolerance of ± 2mm shall be allowed. In respect of length and breadth of slabs a
tolerance of ± 3mm will be allowed.

6.3.2 LAYING

Sub-grade concrete or the RCC slab on which the slabs are to be laid shall be
cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding for the slabs shall be with cement mortar
1:4 (1 cement:4 coarse sand) or with lime mortar (1 lime putty: 1 surkhi:1 coarse
sand) as given in the description of the item.

The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the slab shall not be less than
12mm preferable 20mm

The slabs shall be laid in the following manner:-

Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of each slab, roughly to the
average thickness specified in the item. The slab shall be washed clean before laying.
It shall be laid on top, pressed, tapped with wooden matted and brought to level with
adjoining slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top surface of the mortar shall
then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar is allowed to harden
a bit and cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread over the same at the
rate of 4.4kg of cement per sqm. The edges of the slab already paved shall be
buttered with grey or white cement with or without admixture of pigment to match
the shade of the paved slab. It shall then be lowered gently back in position and
tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly bedded in level with and close to the
adjoining slab with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent slabs shall be laid in the
same manner. After each slab has been laid, surplus cement on the surface of the
slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven
days. The surface of the flooring as laid shall be true to levels and slopes as
instructed by the Architect / Project Manager.

The slabs shall be matched as shown in drawings or as instructed by the

Architects/Owner. Slabs which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter
not less than 12mm under the plaster, skirting or dado. The junction between wall
plaster & floor shall be finished neatly and without variation.

6.3.3 POLISHING AND FINISHING

Slight unevenness at the meeting edges of slabs than be removed by fine chiseling
and finished in the same manner as specified above.

6.4 MARBLE STONE IN SKIRTING, DADO, RISERS, STEPS ETC.

6.4.1 STONE :

The stone shall be cut into slabs of the specified thickness along the planes parallel to
the natural bed of granite.

6.4.2 Cramps :

Cramps shall be 25x6mm and length as per requirement made out of stainless steel,
gun metal or any other metal specified. Cramps shall be spaced not more than
600mm apart horizontally.

The adjoining stones shall be secured to each other by means of copper pins 75mm
long and 6 mm diameter or as specified.

The facings shall be provided with a continuous support on which the stones rest at
the ground level and other storied levels, the support being in the form of projection

63
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

from or recess into the concrete floor slab or a beam between the columns or a metal
angle attached to the floor slab or beams. These supports shall preferably be at
vertical intervals not more than 3.5m apart and also the heads of all openings.

6.4.3 LAYING :

The stone shall be wetted before laying. They shall be then fixed with mortar in
position without the use of chips or underpinning of any sort.

The walls shall be carried up truly plumb. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal
and vertical joints truly vertical. The stone shall break joints on the face for atleast
half of the height of the course, unless otherwise shown in the drawings.

The backing shall be carried up simultaneously with the face of work. In case of
reinforced cement concrete backing, the lining shall be secured to the backing after it
has set and got cured. The cramps shall be fixed in concrete at the required positions,
while laying.

The risers of steps and skirting shall be set in grey or white cement admixed with or
without pigment to match the shade of the stone.

6.5 KOTA STONE FLOORING

6.5.1 DRESSING

Every slab 25 mm thick shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel
dressed on the sides to the full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the
stone shall be in full contact with it. The sides (edges) shall be table rubbed with
coarse sand or machine rubbed before paving. All angles and edges of the tiles shall
be true, square and free from chipping and the surface shall be true and plane.

6.5.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE AND LAYING

The sub-grade concrete or the R.C.C. slab on which the slabs are to be laid shall be
cleaned, wetted & mopped. The bedding for the slabs shall be with 20 mm cement
mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) or with lime mortar (1 lime putty : 1 surkhi : 1
coarse sand) as given in the description of the item except that the edges of the slabs
to be jointed shall be buttered with grey cement, with admixture of pigment to match
the shade of the slab.

6.5.3 POLISHING AND FINISHING

The day after the slabs are laid all joints shall be cleaned of the grey cement grout
with a wire brush or trowel to a depth of 5 mm and all dust & loose mortar removed
and cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted with grey or white cement mixed with or
without pigment to match the shade of the stone slabs. The flooring thus laid shall be
grounded evenly with machine.

6.6 FLAMING OF STONES – Granite / Sandstone:

Flaming or applying a high heat at high pressure causes small bits of the stone to
flake off, erasing the cut marks.

To flame, a water-cooled propane torch will be needed. Use a water-cooled propane

torch on granite, quartzite, sandstone and bluestone but not on marble, cement,
artificial stones or some limestones.

INSTRUCTIONS

1. Workmen should secure the stone to be flamed so that it sits firmly on the
work surface or the ground and won't create a falling hazard if it cracks
apart. The work surface must be nonflammable.

64
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2. Work men to follow the instructions for the water-cooled propane torch,
including all warnings, carefully before starting.

3. Propane and oxygen tanks are to be chained to an immovable object such as

a tree to prevent the tanks from toppling or taking off like a jet. Chain is then
to be wrapped around the middle of one tank and the tree or other secure
object. Second chain is repeated around the other tank.

4. All hoses are to be attached tightly to the water-cooled propane torch

including the water hose, the propane line and the oxygen line.

5. Water supply is turned on ensuring water is flowing freely. The propane

regulator is then turned on to 40 psig and the oxygen regulator to 70 psig.
These settings may vary depending on the manufacturer of your water-cooled
propane torch; follow manufacturer's instructions.

6. Water-cooled propane torch is then to be ignited. Dial is to be placed in the

start position, the mouth of the torch is to be turned away from anyone or
anything flammable and the flint striker is to be squeezed near the mouth of
the torch.

7. Workmen should firmly grip the torch and brace himself for the push-back
that the torch exerts when running in wide-open mode; turn the dial to run.

8. Tip of the flame is to be brushed against the stone edge at 10 degree to 25

degree angle while the water cools the stone. The flame is then moved forward
across the rough edge of the stone at 1/2 foot per minute for a 6-inch stone
edge, or faster for thinner pieces, to reduce the risk of the stone heating and
cracking. The angle that the stone is to be flamed may vary depending on
who made your water-cooled propane torch; always the manufacturer's
recommendations are to be followed.

TIPS AND WARNINGS

• Workmen should test the flaming process on broken or scrap bits of stone
before using it on the finished stone product.

• Most city water sources, such as a garden hose faucet, will have sufficient
force to reach 40 psig. If sufficient force is not acieved, but still have some
water flow, there will not be a safety hazard as water-cooled propane torches
have a pressure sensor which will turn off the torch.

• Proper safety equipment are to be used when working with torches, including
goggles, earplugs, fireproof gloves, steel-toe shoes and a respirator.

• Clothing and hair are to be tied back before working with a torch.

• Torch is to be turned off if the cooling water flow stops.

• Work in an area where the cooling water will flow away safely.

• Beware of hot stone chip projectiles that can burn you or begin a fire. Remove
flammable objects from the work area.

6.6 SAND BLASTING OF STONES – Granite / Sandstone/ Kota:

Sandblasting uses sand carried by a blast of air or steam at a high speed. Stones can
be cleaned by sandblasting. Sandblasting can also be used to revive or clean old
stone surfaces like a fireplace surround or mantle made of stone or an exterior
surface of the house made with stone material.

A. Material Needed
• Sandblaster: hand sandblaster for smaller projects or power sandblaster for
bigger home improvement projects.

65
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

• Blasting abrasive

• Air

B. Instructions

1. How to Sandblast a Stone

a. Choose a stone. Make sure that the stone chosen has no cracks so
that the stone does not break when sandblasted. Flat stone should
be chosen as opposed to a stone with too much bumps so that a
smooth edge can be achieved.

b. Workmen should make sure to place the stone on a stable surface.

Anchoring of the stone will be needed so it doesn't move if it is a
small one. For bigger stones, put it on the ground.

c. Design is to be selected as per the instructions of Engineer in

charge/ specifications. Draw or trace the design on lucite paper or
directly on the rubber stencil for doing it directly without too much
mistakes. The sandblasting rubber is to be used as a stencil is to be
made of silicon. This comes as a self adhesive stencil for regular and
strong sandblast applications (3mm-5mm thickness).

d. The design is to be cut.

e. Rubber stencil is to be glued on the surface of the stone. Or the

adhesive is peeled of, then the stencil is to be attached to the piece to
be sandblasted and the cover sheet is to be removed.

f. Workmen to use a handy sandblaster to engrave the design. A small

or handy sandblaster is ideal for small projects such as this.
Workmen should wear eye protection and face mask to protect his
eyes and so that he do not inhale the sand.

g. Workmen should fill up the cup that comes with handy sandblaster
then the sandblaster is to be hooked to the air supply then start
blasting away. The abrasive is then sucked back into a little bag,
most of the sand can still be reused for future projects.

h. Paint is to be applied to the design. Lighter color is to be chosen for

darker stones so that it shows, likewise, darker colors are to be used
for lighter colored stones. Allow paint to dry, then clean up the
surface for a good clean finish.

C. Tips and Warnings

• Workmen should wash his eyes or his entire face immediately if his face gets
covered with sand or if he inhaled sand or dust. Remove the particles
immediately.

66
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

6.8 LASER SCREED FLOORING

WORK: - LAYING OF FLOORING USING COPPERHEAD XD 3.0 MACHINE

1. SCOPE OF WORK: -

The scope comprises of Providing and laying design mix good quality concrete of M30
Grade with OPC of 43/53 grade with NO Fly ash , laying in panels of approved size
including compaction and finishing using laser Copperhead XD 3.0 screed floor laying
technique. Floor specification should confirm to DIN15 185. Tolerance level in floor
will be as per Super Flat Floor, including wet curing, conforming to IS standards of
concrete floor etc. complete as approved and as directed by the Engineer in charge.

2. REFERENCES:

A. IS -12268-1987

B. IS – 9103

C. THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Technical Report 34, Third edition. Concrete

industrial ground floors – a guide to their design and construction. Camberley,
2003. 105pp.

D. HULETT, T. Surface regularity of industrial floors – a review of TR34 – 2003,

CONCRETE, Vol. 39, No 1, Jan 2005, pp.34–35.

E. THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Technical Report 34, Second edition. Concrete

industrial ground floors – a guide to their design and construction. Camberley,
1994. 170pp.

3. BATCH MIX:

Concrete mix to be used will be M30 Grade Design Mix Concrete.

SUPER FLAT FLOOR :

Superflat = Fmin 100

The word Superflat describes the flatness/levelness required to support full-speed,

trouble-free operation of Very Narrow Aisle (VNA) lift trucks.

In order to achieve this high degree of flatness/levelness,

1. Laying of flooring is to be done in long strips.

2. The forms for Superflat placements must be set with great precision. Specialized
finishing techniques and continuous quality control measurement are also
required as described in this document.

Super flatness should be achieved as per the tables given in Section 9 of this
document.

4. TECHNIQUE:

Laser Screeding technique will be used to lay above mentioned concrete floor. The Laser
Screed machines enable large areas of concrete floor to be placed with few construction
joints and high levels of surface tolerance.
Following are some of the uses of Laser Screeding:

1. It reduces the time.

67
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2. It reduces the numbers of construction joints.

3. It improves the flatness of floors.

4. It reduces the number of labors on site.

5. It eliminates the need of fixing guide rails to every four meters.

The Laser Screed machine is a fully automatic and 100 percent remote controlled
machine that comes with a telescopic boom extension arm to achieve best in class
FF-50 grade flatness or higher (also known as category 1 of TR34 specification).
Copperhead XD Laser Screed machine is used to carry out Laser Screeding, which
simultaneously cuts, vibrates, & levels, the concrete in a single pass.

All above operations are controlled by laser transmitter, receivers & computer. So,
Manual errors are eliminated. Copperhead XD machine can lay floors on doubly
reinforced slabs, Metal decks, Grade slabs with duel slopes, Very large factory floors
in few days. With Copperhead XD it is possible to lay concrete floors up to 2000
Sq.mtrs. Per day.

Copperhead XD is a petrol operated machine, hence there is no need of power, except

for area illumination.

WORKING OF COPPER HEAD MACHINE:

Instead of working from a fixed base of stabilizers, a fixed boom, and reaching "down"
to the concrete, the CopperHead vibrating plate actually "floats" on the surface of the
concrete.

In order to hold grade over the uneven sub-grade

that represents the placement area, the wheels are
designed to move separately from the screed head
as shown in picture.

• The pivot-attachment isolates the

movements of the lower and upper frame

• The laser control system allows the plow to

continually cut the concrete to grade even
with variations in subgrade

• The vibrator plate rests on and is actually stabilized by the concrete (i.e. it
"floats" on grade)
CopperHead Specifications
Overall Width 123 " - Head (312 cm)
36" - Standard Tires (91 cm)

68
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

48" - ATV Tires (122 cm)

Overall Length 9' (274 cm)
Overall Height 43 1/2" - without masts (110.5 cm)
Ground Clearance 11" - under frame (28 cm)
Weight 865 lbs (386 kg) with 10' Head Assembly
Fuel Tank 3.6 gallons (13.25 l)
Engine Type 4 stroke with 1 cylinder, air cooled
Power 13.5 HP @ 3600 rpm (10.1 kW)
Battery 12 volt, with 200 watt alternator (16.6 amps)
Control Manual throttle with electric shut-off
Drive Train Hydraulic drive motors with 5.25 :1 gear ratio for each wheel
Propel Control Hand controls - mechanical, proportional hydraulic valves
Wheels – Standard 21" motorcycle custom aluminum weldment
Tires – Standard 80/100 x 21" (53.3 cm) motorcycle tires with aggressive treads
Wheels – Optional Custom 12 x 7 ATV rim (30.5 cm x 25.4 cm)
Tires – Optional 28 x 10 - 12 ATV tires with aggressive treads (71.1 cm x 25.4 cm)
Vibrator Head Hydraulic vibrator, 3000-5500 rpm
Plow Elevation Control Electric Linear actuators with 4" (10.2 cm) stroke, laser controlled
Head Lift 2.0" (5.1 cm) Hydraulic cylinder, manual switch & machine auto
level, 6" (15.2 cm) stroke

5. WORKING MECHANISM OF THE LASER SCREED MACHINE:

The Screed machine has an automatic laser control system that ensures an accurate
level finish (exceeding F50 grade) through the use of electronic remote controlled
hydraulics. Laser transmitters mounted at the screed head are connected to main
transmitters which exchange signals multiple times per second providing totally
automatic control to finished floor level. It has the ability to control levels within the
range of 50 meters, with a tolerance variation of not more than 2mm.

6. APPLICATION PROCEDURE:

The concrete is poured in bays, in accordance with width of machine's screed head,
usually little higher than the required level/ grade. The laser screed vibrating head is
then lowered to the grade established by the laser-level transmitter.

69
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The Laser Screed then pulls the concrete and at the same time levels it flat in a single
pass through its telescopic boom extension arm.

Once a pass is completed, the machine is repositioned in the adjacent bay while
slightly overlapping previously screeded concrete. The application is then repeated to
ensure best finished levels. It is also ensured that tolerances are achieved throughout
the floor area.

7. CONCRETE FINISHING USING RIDE ON TROVEL SYSTEM:

After screed is completed, the surface is then trowelled for perfect smoothness using
ride on trowel machines with different kind of blades to ensure top surface free of pot
holes and other abnormalities. It also helps in compressing the dry shake hardener
evenly, using floating disc to ensure consistency over the entire surface.

8. MEASURING FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS OF FLOOR :

A. Defined movement – measurement techniques:

The Face Floor Profileograph is devised to replicate the wheel configuration and
movement of MHE. as shown in Figure below and is also described in Appendix C
of TR34 -2003.

70
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A profileograph is a motorized level sensing instrument. As it traverses the floor

surface, differential measurements are taken between predetermined pairs of
points.

Differential graphs are produced, which can then be further differentiated with
respect to forward movement to determine rates of change. The profileograph
has two sensors measuring transverse and longitudinal elevational
differences. This configuration replicates a truck wheel configuration
precisely.

It should be emphasized that profileographs do not produce a true profile of the floor
and the data can be accumulated to create a true profile and some equipment
is apparently supplied with software for this purpose.

B. Defined movement – classifications:

The classifications for MHE lift heights for TR34 Appendix C and the basic TR34 are
given in Table below.

CLASSIFICATION FOR MHE LIFT HEIGHTS

APPENDIX -C ORIGINAL
MHE LIFT HEIGHT CLASSIFICA CLASSIFICA
TION TION
Over 13m DM 1 Superflat
8 to 13m DM 2 Category 1
Up to 8m DM 3 Category 2

There is the additional requirement to control the contours of the floor along the
aisles, typically over distances of 2m. The tolerances for this additional
measurement are less onerous than the transverse measurements.

TABLE OF LEVELNESS AND FLATNESS:

As per Concrete Society Technical Report 34 (2003)

71
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

NDUSTRIAL FLOORS
C. TR34 Appendix C:

In terms of classifications, floors are complying to the suggested requirements of

Appendix C in the same way as for the original TR34 specification. Thus:

1. DM 1 (Superflat) floors is to be constructed using long strip methods.

2. DM 2 (Category 1) and DM 3 (Category 2) floors are built using large area pour
techniques.

D. USING F- NUMBERS :

The F-Number System is the new American Concrete Institute and Canadian
Standards Association standard for the specification and measurement of
concrete floor flatness and levelness.

The new standards include two F-Numbers: FF for flatness and FL for levelness

Flatness relates to the bumpiness of the floor, while levelness describes the tilt or
pitch of the slab. The higher the F-Number is, the better is the characteristic of
the floor.

F-Numbers are linear, so an FF 20 is twice as flat as an FF 10, but only half as flat as
an FF 40.

Slabs-on-grade are usually specified with an FF number and an FL number (the FF is

always listed first), such as :

FF 25 / FL20
Because of deflection, elevated slabs are usually specified using only FF.

When a floor is described as an "F 25", it usually means "FF 25".

72
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The ACI/CSA F-Number System applies to 99% of all floor slabs - all floors that
support random traffic, be it vehicular or pedestrian traffic.

In the tiny percentage of floors that have defined traffic, where vehicles are restricted
in their movement by wire or rail guidance, a different F-Number - Fmin - is used.
This System is used in conjunction with consultation services provided by The Face
Companies.

Most Superflat floors should use the Fmin System, since most of these slabs support
defined traffic.

A. EQUIVALENTS OF FF NUMBERS :

1. An FF 25 is roughly equivalent to a single ± 1/4" defect in 10'

2. An FF 50 is roughly equivalent to a single ± 1/8" defect in 10'

3. An FF 100 is roughly equivalent to a single ± 1/16" defect in 10'

B. MEASURING F- NUMBERS:

1. F-Numbers are derived from a statistical analysis of the floor's

elevation measured at one-foot intervals. The elevation differences
over two feet are used to determine FF , while the differences over ten
feet are used to determine FL.

2. Measurement lines are laid out on the floor, and elevation

measurements are taken every one foot down the line. Each
measurement line should be at least 11 feet long, and at least 34
individual elevation measurements should be taken for each 1,000
square feet of floor area. Detailed rules for performing F-Number
tests are set forth in ASTM E 1155.

3. After collection, the elevation readings are put into standard

mathematical formulae to calculate the floor's F-Numbers. The
devices should be approved by ASTM for F-Number measurement,
e.g. Dipstick Floor Profiler.

9. RECTIFICATION FOR FLATNESS BY GRINDING :

Grinding is to be done for the least amount of concrete that is required to achieve the
required flatness. As a minimum requirement any remedial grinding for a three-
wheeled VNA forklift truck should be done to upgrade the floor to the specified
tolerances in the front (left and right) load wheel tracks.

Laser Grinding for a 3 Wheel VNA Truck

Grinding all 3 wheel paths ensures that each wheel of the VNA truck follows a similar
profile, allowing faster operations and high-level pallet movements to be carried out
safely.

The specific grinder is adapted to grind 2 or 3 wheel paths to any required flatness
tolerance. The left and right tracks are performed simultaneously, in one pass along
an aisle, and the centre track can be added by making a second pass.

73
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

If the left, right or centre wheel paths have only short isolated problems areas, there
may be no need to grind the full length of each.

This will ensure that the side to side, or transverse, tilt of the truck is minimized, as
well as longitudinal gradients are reduced (along each wheel track) to flatter and safer
tolerances.

There should be the option of grinding the centre wheel track to ensure that the rear
drive wheel of the VNA truck follows a similar profile to the front load wheels.
Grinding ALL THREE wheel tracks will minimize the effect that a floor has on a VNA
truck, allowing it to travel faster and higher - in safety.

10. BENIFITS OF LASER SCREED TECHNOLOGY:

A. Accurate level / grade: Unlike

conventional screed VDF system,
where there is no control over level
once the screed procedure is started,
the of use laser transmitting
technology guides the hydraulic
screed to achieve best possible
flatness and has no chance of error
right from the beginning to the end of
job, according to the company. The
superior finish of the flat concrete
floors ensures smooth movement of
trolleys, forklifts and other vehicles
within factory premises, warehouses,
roads, pavements, etc.
B. Wide Panel width: There is no limitation of panel's length / width and bay can
be as large as 500 ft x 500 ft without even a single joint (however saw cuts are
recommended) unlike conventional VDF system where width cannot be more than
14 ft at most of the times. This enables large, seamless floors.

C. High production rate: The laser screed machine is capable of doing 40,000 sq ft
per day in 10 hours of operation with one single team unlike conventional VDF
system which are only capable of doing about 3000 sq ft at the most. This
results in saving of time and sticking to tight project deadlines.

D. Reduced form work: Since laser screed does not requires guide rails to screed
concrete, it eliminates the need of having form work at regular intervals except at
day joint. Project developers can continue with other scope of works in the

74
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

absence of unnecessary form work or guide rails which otherwise are a

hindrance.

E. No Curl joints: Since the concrete is not placed in bays and is continued over
larger areas, the method results in the reduction of construction joints which are
usually seen after every 14 ft in conventional VDF system. The surface is saw cut
within 24 hrs of placing the concrete in order to prevent cracking. Apart from
adding a cleaner look to the floor, the method also ensures shrinkage control,
while requiring lesser amount of sealant to fill controlled joints.

F. High strength: The strength of floor is much higher than conventional system as
there are larger panels of concrete floor unlike small panels created using
conventional system. It also allows the use of re-bar without any joints to the
maximum extent making floor even more reinforced. This ensures extended life
for the floor, low cost of maintenance in the long run and reliability.

75
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - VII

FINISHING WORKS

7.1 PLASTERING AND POINTING

7.1.1 INDIAN STANDARS :

1. IS : 712 – 1984 : Specification for Building limes.

2. IS : 1200(Part 12) – 1976 : Method of measurement of

Plastering and Pointing.

The above mentioned IS Specifications and Codes of Practice have been indicated for
general guidance.

However, these IS Specifications and Codes will be adopted only for those particular
items in the contract where either the mode of measurement or detailed technical
specifications are not laid down in the tender.

7.1.2 SCAFFOLDING

Scaffolding shall be either double or single as required. The scaffolding shall be

erected with steel sections or pipes, bullies or bamboos, of adequate strength for safe
operations.

The Contractor shall take all measured to ensure the safety of the structure and his
workers. The scaffolding shall be got approved by the EIC. The contractor shall be
responsible for any damages caused to the structures and injury to the persons due
to faulty erection and scaffolding, defective ladders, and materials, etc. The
scaffolding shall be so erected that every part of the work is easily approachable.

After the work is completed and the scaffolding is being removing, leaving behind ‘Log
holes’: these ‘Log Holes’ shall be simultaneously filled up, made good and finished to
match the surrounding surface. Contractor shall ensure that no long holes are left
unattended before removing the next stage of scaffolding.

7.1.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

All putlog holes in brick work and junction between concrete & brick work shall be
properly filled in advance. Joints in brick work shall be racked about 10 mm and
concrete surface hacked to provide the grip to the plaster. Projecting burns of mortar
formed due to gaps at joints in shuttering shall be removed.

The surface shall be scrubbed clean with wire brush/coir brush to remove dirt, dust
etc. and the surface thoroughly washed with clean water to remove efflorescence
grease and oil etc. and shall be kept wet for a minimum of six hours before
application of plaster.

7.1.4 ORDINARY CEMENT PLASTER

The preparation of surface shall be as stated above. The thickness and preparation of
plaster shall be as specified in the schedule of items.

The mortar shall be applied evenly with force on the surface to be plastered. The
mortar surface shall be finished at once by rubbed over with a trowel till the cement
appears on the surface. All corners, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical &
horizontal as the case may be neatly finished. Rounding of corners and junctions
where required shall be done without extra charge. The mortar shall adhere to the
surface intimately when set and there should not be hollow sound when struck.

7.1.5 SAND FACED PLASTER

The surface shall be prepared as above.

76
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The cast of cement mortar in proportion of 1:4 or as specified shall be applied

uniformly all over the surface to the specified thickness and finished to level and line
and keys shall be formed on the surface. The surface shall be kept moist till the
finishing coat is applied.

The finishing coat shall be applied a day to two after. The proportion of mortar for
finishing coat shall be one part of cement and three parts of selected, well graded and
washed sand & it shall be applied in a uniform thickness of 8 mm. The surface shall
be tapped to uniform grained texture by using sponge pads as directed. Curing shall
start after 24 hours and the surface kept wet for seven days.

Application :

The plaster shall be applied in two coats. The base coat or under coat shall be 12mm
thick and finished sand faced coat shall be 8mm thick.

a) Base Coat : The cement mortar mix used in base coat shall be as
specified in Schedule of Items. The approved water proofing
compound such as Acroproof, Impermo, or any other standard
waterproofing compound approved by EIC shall be mixed in mortar
at the rate of 1 kg. Per 50 kg. Of cement. The mixing shall be done as
per manufacturer’s specification or as directed by EIC.

The plaster 12mm thick shall be laid over the surface and brought to a true
line and level with wooden straight edge.

The key shall be formed on plastered surface with the help of scratching tool
when plaster is green. The key shall be 3mm deep and about 12mm apart.

b) Sand faced Coat : The mortar used for finished sand faced cost, 8mm
thick, shall be as specified in Schedule of Items.

The finished coat shall be applied after the base coat has sufficiently set but
not earlier than 48 hours of application of the base coat. After the application
of the finishing coat, the surface shall be finished with a wooden straight
edge, or float in true line and level. Finally, the surface shall be finished with
sponge-pad by gently tapping the plaster surface to retain a coarse surface
texture. When final coat sufficiently hardens, the surface shall be kept moist
continuously for a period of seven days.

7.4 ROUGH CAST PLASTER

Except for the finishing coat the surface shall be prepared and base coat of plaster
applied.

Finishing coat of mortar shall be in proportion of one part of cement and one part of
specially selected and graded sand and one part of gravel of 3 to 6 mm size. It shall be
flung upon the first coat with large trowel size to form an even and decorative coat.
The work shall generally conform to clause 16.5 of I.S. 1661-1960. The thickness of
the coat shall be about 12mm (1/2"). It shall be cured for seven days.

Application :

The rough cast plaster shall be applied in two coats. The base coat shall be 15mm
thick and finished rough cast shall be 10mm thick.

a) Base Coat : The plaster of specified mix and thickness shall be

applied as described in sand faced plaster except that the surface
shall not be beaten with wooden straight edge.

b) Finished Coat : The finished coat shall be applied over the base coat
after a day or two. The mortar used in top coat shall be or richer mix
of 1:3 or as specified with aggregate of varying size from 3mm to 12.5
mm . The proportion of cement, sand and aggregate shall be in
proportion of 1:1 ½:3. The mortar thus prepared shall be flung over

77
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

the base coat with large trowel to form an even coat of required
thickness. The finish coat shall be applied within a day or two only.

7.5 CEMENT PAINT

7.5.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

For new work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mortar dropping, dirt,
dust, algae, grease and the foreign matter by brushing & washing. The surface shall
be thoroughly wetted with clean water before the cement paint is applied.

In the case of old work, all loose pieces and scales shall be cleaned of all dirt, dust,
algae, oil etc. by brushing & washing. Pitting in plaster shall be made good and a
coat of water proof cement paint shall be applied over patches after wetting them
thoroughly.

7.5.2 PREPARATION OF MIX

Cement paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used up within a hour of its
mixing as otherwise the mixture will set & thicken, affecting flow & finish.

Cement paint shall be mixed with water in two stages. The first stage comprise of 2
parts of cement paint and one part of water stirred thoroughly & allowed to stand for
five minutes. Care shall be taken to add the cement paint gradually to the water and
not vice-versa. The second stage shall comprise of adding further one part of water to
the mix and stirring thoroughly to obtain a liquid of workable and uniform
consistency. In all cases the manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed meticu-
lously.

The lids of cement paint drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in use, as by
exposure to atmosphere the cement paint rapidly becomes air set due to its
hygroscopic qualities.

7.5.3 APPLICATION

The solution shall be applied on the clean and wetted surface above 1 coat of grey
cement wash with brushes or spraying machine. The solution shall be kept well
stirred during the period of application. It shall be applied on the surface which is on
the shady side of the building so that the direct heat of the sun on the surface is
avoided. The method of application of cement paint shall be as per manufacturer’s
specification. The completed surface shall be watered after the day’s work.

The second coat shall be applied after the first coat has been set for at least 24 hours
before application of the second or subsequent coats, the surface of the previous coat
shall not be wetted.

For new work, the surface shall be treated with three or more coats of water proof
cement paint as found necessary to get a uniform shade.

7.5.4 PRECAUTION

Water proof cement paint shall not be applied on surfaces already treated with white
wash, colour wash, distemper dry or oil bound, varnishes, paints etc. It shall not be
applied on gypsum, wood and metal surfaces.

The specifications in respect in respect of scaffolding, protective measures,

measurements and rate shall be as described under white washing with lime.

7.6 PRIMING COAT ON WOOD, IRON OR PLASTERED SURFACE

7.6.1 WOODEN SURFACE

78
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The wood work to be painted shall be dry and free from moisture.

The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned. All unevenness shall rubbed down smooth
with sand paper. Knots, if any, shall be covered with preparation of red lead made by
grinding red lead in water and mixing with strong glue sized and used hot.
Appropriate filler material with same shade as paint shall be used where specified.

The surface treated for knotting shall be dry before painting is applied. After the
priming coat is applied, the holes and indentations on the surface shall be stopped
with grazer’s putty or wood putty. The primer shall be prepared on site or shall be of
approved brand and manufacturer as specified in the item. Paint shall be anti-
corrosive bitumastic paint, aluminium paint or other types of paint as specified in the
description of the item. Stopping shall not be done before the priming coat is applied
as the wood will absorb the oil in the stopping and the later is therefore liable to
crack.

IRON AND STEEL SURFACE

All rust and scales shall be removed by scarping or by brushing with steel wire
brushes. Hard skin of oxide formed on the surface of wrought iron during rolling
which become loose by rusting, shall be removed. All dust and dirt shall be
thoroughly wiped away from the surface. If the surface is wet, it shall be dried before
priming coat is undertaken.

PLASTERED SURFACE

The surface shall ordinarily not be painted until it has dried completely. Trial patches
of primer shall be laid at intervals and where drying is satisfactory, painting shall
then be taken in hand. Before primer is applied, holes and undulations, shall be filled
up with plaster of paris and rubbed

7.6.2 APPLICATION

The primer shall be applied with brushes, worked well in to the surface and spread
even and smooth. The painting shall be done by brushing and laying off as described
in cement paint above.

7.7 PAINTING WITH READY MIXED /SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINT

7.7.1 PAINTING ON NEW SURFACE

The surface which has not been painted earlier, or the paint has been removed by
paint remover, burning, caustic soda etc. shall be considered to be new surface.

7.7.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

WOOD WORK

The surface shall be cleaned and all unevenness removed as specified in wooden
surface. Knots, if visible, shall be covered with a preparation of red lead. Holes and
indentations on the surface shall be filled in with glazier’s putty or wood putty and
rubbed smooth before painting is done. The surface should be thoroughly dry before
painting.

IRON AND STEEL WORK

The priming coat shall have dried up completely before removed by scrapping or by
brushing with steel wire brushes. All dust and dirt shall be carefully & thoroughly
wiped away.

PLASTERED SURFACE

The priming coat shall have dried up completely before painting is started. All dust or
dirt that has settled on the priming coat shall be thoroughly wiped away before
painting is started.

79
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

7.7.3 APPLICATION

The specification described in Cement Paint shall be hold good as far as applicable.
The number of coats to be applied will be as stipulated in the item. The painted
surface shall present a uniform appearance and glossy/matt finish described in
Schedule of Quantities free from streaks, blisters etc.

7.8 DISTEMPERING WITH OIL BOUND DISTEMPER

Distempering with oil bound distemper shall be provided in accordance with CPWD
Specifications 1992 and relevant standards applicable to this work. Paint shall be of
approved brand and manufacture. One base coat of primer shall be applied on
surfaces after preparing surfaces for distempering.

7.9 TEXTURED COATINGS:

The Material used shall be Acrylic Quartz Plaster. The Acrylic will be a 100% pure
Acrylic and not Acrylic Copolymer. The Acrylic shall be combined with the series of
additives.

7.9.1 APPLICATION:

Providing and applying crack free, flexible decorative, textured acrylic plaster
consisting of Natural Stone, Quartz, Granules applied in the following manner:-

a) First coat acrylic quartz pigmented finish applied by acrylic Wool Roller. In the colour
of the finish is same as that of the second coat.

Second coat and Final coat spray applied stone synthetic plaster. The final
appearance and texture will be similar to natural stone.

Thickness of synthetic plaster: 2.5mm to 3.00mm.

b) Providing and applying crack free, flexible decorative, textured acrylic plaster
consisting of Natural Stone, Quartz, Granules applied in the following manner:--

First coat acrylic quartz pigmented finish applied by acrylic wool Roller. In the colour
of the finish is same as that of the second coat.

Second coat and final coat Trowel applied stone synthetic plaster. The final
appearance and texture will be similar to natural stone.

Thickness of synthetic plaster: 2.5mm to 3.00mm.

80
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - VIII

IRON, STEEL AND ALUMINIUM WORK

8.1.0 INDIAN STANDARDS :

1. IS : 1038 – 1983 : Steel Doors, windows and ventilators.

2. IS : 1948 – 1961 : Aluminium doors, windows and ventilators.

3. IS : 1200 (Part VIII) : Method of measurement of building - 1993 and Civil

Engineering Works – Steel Work and Iron Work.

The above mentioned I.S. Specifications and Codes of Practice have been indicated for
general guidance.

However, these I.S. Specifications and Codes will be adopted only for those particular
items in the contract, where either the mode of measurement or detailed technical
specifications are not laid down in the tender documents.

8.2.0 COLLAPSIBLE STEEL SHUTTERS/ GATES :

These shall be double or single shutters depending upon the openings.

These shall be made out of vertical double channels 20 mm x 10mm x2mm or 18mm
x 8mm x 3mm at maximum 125 mm apart when fully stretched as specified, braced
with flat iron diagonals 20mm x 5mm or 18 mm x 5 mm as specified in the item. The
top and bottom rails shall be of M.S. section 40mm x 40mm x 6mm with 38 mm dia
rollers in every fourth double channels.

Where collapsible gate is to be fixed within the opening but is fixed along the outer
surface of opening; the M.S. section at top shall be replaced by M.S. flat 40mm x
10mm.

The necessary fittings such as bolts, nuts, locking arrangements, stoppers, handles,
etc. shall be provided. The gates shall open and close smoothly and easily.

T-iron rails shall be fixed to the lintel and floor with masonry nails embedded in
cement concrete of lintel and floors at suitable spacing. The bottom runner shall be
embedded with floor and proper groove formed and the floor shall be made good to
match the rest of the flooring.

At the sides, the end double channels shall be fixed with T-iron rails and also by
holdfasts 200mm x 40mm x 4 mm bolted at one end to the end double channels and
in the masonry in cement concrete 1:2:4 (nominal mix) blocks of size 115 mm x 75
mm x 230 mm, 3 nos. each side.

The side masonry shall be made good to match the rest of the masonry finish.

8.2.1 Painting :

One coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of
approved make, quality, color and shade as approved by the EIC, shall be applied to
all steel work as per specifications in relevant section under subhead Structural
Steel.

8.2.2 Measurements :

The height of the gate shall be the height of the double channels and breadth from
out to out of the end fixed double channel in open position of the gate.

The height and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. and the area worked out
in sq.m. correct to two places of decimal.

8.2.3 Rate :

81
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labor involved in all operations
including providing and fixing holdfasts, cement concrete 1:2:4 (nominal mix) blocks,
cutting in wall and floor, providing groove in floor, making good to match wall, floor
and painting etc.

8.3.0 ROLLING SHUTTERS :

Rolling shutters shall be obtained from manufacturers such as Swastik, Shubhdwar,

Sentinel or other equivalent quality and approved by the EIC. Shutters up to 12 sq.m.
shall be push and pull type. Shutters exceeding 12 sq.m. shall be provided with gears
operated by mechanical devices with chain and/or handle or shall have electrically
operated arrangement as specified. Rolling shutters of 8 sq.m. or beyond shall be
provided with ball bearings. The width and thickness of M.S. lath shall be 80 mm and
1.25 mm.

The shutters shall be of length and width as specified. The spring shall be preferably
of coiled type and shall be manufactured from high tensile spring steel wire or strip of
adequate strength to balance the shutters in all positions. The spring pipe shaft etc.
shall be supported on strong mild steel brackets.

Guide channels shall be of mild steel deep channel section and of rolled, pressed or
built-up construction. The thickness of sheet shall not be less than 3.15 mm (10
gauge). The thickness of sheet shall not be less than 3.15 mm (10 gauge). The depth
of side channels shall be 60 mm for clear shutter with width up to 3.0 m and 75 mm
for width 3.0 m and above. The gap between two legs of guide channel shall be close
enough to prevent rattling due to wind and wide enough for free movement of
shutters.

Guide channels, each shall have 3 fixing cleats spaced at not more than 0.75 m.
Cleats shall be fixed to walls or RCC work with bolts or screws. The guide channels
shall be fixed to the jambs either (a) embedded in grooves (b) projecting or (c)
overlapping, as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Any cutting to side walls shall be
made good after fixing of cleats/lugs.

The cover of shaft etc. shall be of the same gauge material as laths.

8.3.1 Measurements :

The clear width and clear height of the opening (on which rolling shutter is fixed)
shall be measured to a mm. The clear distance between the jambs of the opening
shall be the clear width, and the clear distance between finished floor or sill, to the
bottom of lintel shall be the clear height. The area shall be worked out in sq.m,
correct to two places of decimals.

The electrically operated arrangement carried out as per the item description shall be
measured in numbers.

8.3.2 Rate :

The rate shall include the cost of material and labor involved in all the operations
described, including the cost of top cover and spring, one coat of primer and two
coats of synthetic enamel paint. It shall also include the cost of providing and fixing
ball bearings and mechanical devices of gear/ chain and crank operations, electrically
operated arrangements where specified in the items.

8.4.0 M.S.SHEET SLIDING SHUTTERS :

These shall be fabricated from M.S. sheets of 18 gauge and manufactured as per
drawings, of sizes as required.

The shutters shall be single leaf or double leaf shutters as specified or as per
drawings.

The shutters shall have M.S. angle frame and diagonals out of 40mm x40 mm x 6
mm angles or as specified, welded with 10 gauge gusset plates at junctions to form a

82
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

rigid frame. M.S. sheet of 18 gauge or as specified shall be fixed to the frame with
rivets.

Top and bottom guide rails shall be out of M.S. Angle or T-iron 40mm x40 mm x 6
mm angles or as specified and 25mm dia. pulleys or 25 mm dia. Ball bearings at
bottom and guide block with steel pulleys at top. Guide rails shall be continued along
walls on both ends to enable the shutters to give full openings. The necessary fittings,
locking arrangements, handles, stoppers, holdfasts, concrete blocks for embedding
holdfasts, etc. shall be provided.

The floor shall be cut and a uniform groove of required size shall be formed and guide
rails fixed with Anchor bolts, and the floor along the groove made good to match the
rest of the floor. The top steel section shall be fixed with suitable supports from the
walls. Channel sections shall be fixed at the end to stop the sliding shutter at the
extreme end. Any damage to walls, sides, etc. shall be made good at no extra cost to
match the existing finish.

All members shall be cleaned of rust, scales, grease, etc. and one coat of red oxide
zinc chromate primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint applied as per the
specifications.

8.4.1 Measurements :

The height shall be measured out to out of guide rails correct to a cm. and width out
to out of shutter and the area shall be worked out in sq.metre correct to two places of
decimal.

8.4.2 Rate :

The rate shall include the cost of all material including cement and labor involved in
all operations described, including the cost of full length of guide rails, fixtures and
fittings, welding, painting, making good flooring, side walls, etc.

8.5.0 M.S. SHEET DOOR :

These shall be manufactured as per the drawings and specifications and fabricated
out of M.S. Sheet and angle iron.

The door shall be of required sizes and double leaved as shown in drawing or as
directed. The size of frame members, diagonal supports and gauges of sheet and
gusset plates shall be as specified or as shown in the drawing. The frame shall be
welded at junctions.

Cleats out of 40 mm x 10 mm flat shall have vertical leg of 150 mm fixed with frame
and horizontal leg 50mm provided with a hole of 24 mm dia. And fixed in the
projected pin clamp. Two cleats per shutter up to 2.4 m height shall be provided.

The shutter shall be fixed to masonry with four pin clamp per shutter of height
exceeding 2.4 m. Pin clamps shall be out of 50 mm x 6 mm x 450 mm long.

One end shall be embedded in block of 40 cm x 20 cm x 20 cm of cement concrete

1:2:4.

The shutter shall be provided with locking arrangements, two handles of shape and
pattern approved by the EIC, hooks and eyes 45 cm long 10 mm dia.

A cement concrete 1:2:4 block of 15 cm x 10 cm x 20 cm shall be provided in the floor

where the two shutters meet to stop the shutters opening inside, all as directed by
the EIC.

8.5.1 Painting of surface :

Painting with one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer and two coats of synthetic
enamel paint shall be carried out as per the specifications.

83
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

8.5.2 Measurements :

The height and width shall be measured correct to a cm. out to out of shutter and
area shall be worked out in sq.metre correct to two places of decimal.

8.5.3 Rate :

The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labor involved in all operations
including the concrete blocks for cleats in masonry and in floor blocks, hooks and
eyes, making good masonry and floor, painting, etc.

8.6.0 HOLLOW METAL PRESSED STEEL (HMPS) DOORS

8.6.1 Scope

The work covered under this specification consists of fabricating, supplying and
installing in position steel doors in strict accordance with these specifications and
drawings.

8.6.2 Applicable Codes & Specifications

The relevant I.S. Specifications, standards and codes given below are made a part of
this specification. All standards, specifications, code of practices referred to herein
shall be the latest edition including all amendments, revisions and additional
publications.

All applicable standards, acts and codes of practice referred to shall be the latest
editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions.

In case of conflict between this specification and those (IS Standards, Codes etc.)
referred to, the former shall prevail.

Some of the applicable Indian standards, Codes, etc. are referred to here below:

No. I.S. No. I.S. Particulars

1. I.S. 1081-1960 Code of practice for fixing and glazing of steel
and aluminum doors, windows and
ventilators.
2. IS: 1477 (Part 1)-1971 Code of practice for painting ferrous metals
in
buildings – Pretreatment
3. IS: 1477 (Part 2)-1971 Code of practice for painting ferrous metals
in
buildings -Painting
4. IS: 513:-1994 Cold rolled low carbon steel sheets & strips
5. IS: 1079:-1994 Hot Rolled carbon steel sheets & strips

8.6.3 General

8.6.3.1 Generally all steel doors shall be standardized flush type or as specified and
shall be supplied by the approved steel manufacturers, properly machine
welded, adequately stiffened and prepared for all hardware attachments
including fixing, fixtures, and fittings as specified in the drawing.

8.6.3.2 The contractor shall submit shop drawings for all types of steel doors, for
approval of Engineer-In-charge.

8.6.3.3 Fabrication of door shall be commenced only after the drawings are approved.

8.6.3.4 The shop drawing shall indicate all dimensions, details of fabrication, the
gauge of the sheets, stiffeners, reinforcing anchorages, installation and other
works required for complete installation.

8.6.3.5 The contractor should note that he has to get the fabrication work from some
established and reputed good fabricator firm and shall inform the name of
the firm immediately to Engineer-In-charge for his concurrences.

84
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

8.6.3.6 A sample of each type of finished door complete with fittings and fixtures
shall be submitted for approval of PMC/ Engineer-In-charge. Sample shall be
the property of the contractor. The comments from PMC / Engineer-In-
Charge if any shall be incorporated in drawings as well as in mass
fabrication.

8.6.3.7 The contractor shall submit 6 copies of shop drawing covering all types of
work under this specification before manufacture. The drawing shall show all
dimensions, details of construction, installation, relating to adjoining and
related work etc.

8.6.4 Fabrication

8.6.4.1 The pressed steel frames and shutter shall be fabricated with CRCA steel
sheets of different gauges as indicated in relevant drawings and as specified
in the item of schedule.

8.6.4.2 The shutter frame and stiffeners shall be fabricated with standard M. S.
sections. The rebates in the door frames shall have sharp right angle corners.

8.6.4.3 All the joints shall be continuously reinforced at the back, fitted and
continuously welded along the abutting edges.

8.6.4.4 For installing the pressed steel frames against the concrete like R.C.C.
columns, lintels, walls etc. the hold fasts shall be welded to reinforcements or
anchor plates provided in the concrete members and the pockets shall be
grouted with cement concrete of strength specified for the concrete member.
The anchor plates shall be paid separately.

8.6.4.5 The pressed sheet of steel frames for opening wider then one metre shall be
properly reinforced to prevent sagging. Necessary reinforcement for attaching
different hardwares shall be provided and frames and shutters shall be cut
and suitably stiffened with steel plates to suit the hardware templated for
securing butts, strikes checks and other hardware.

8.6.4.6 Necessary hardware fittings and fixtures such as butt hinges mortice lock
with handles, tower bolts, etc. will not be supplied by the Client.

8.6.4.7 All hardware items shall be fixed in a good workmanlike manner with
requisite galvanized M. S. counter sunk machine screws or as specified and
directed by the Engineer –In- charge.

8.6.4.8 The contractor shall also see properly that the stains, grease, rust etc. is
thoroughly removed before application of one coat of steel primer.

8.6.4.9 All the steel doors shall be approved by the PMC / Engineer-In-charge before
shop painting work is undertaken by the contractor or manufacturer
regarding the quality of work.

8.6.4.10 Suitable neoprene linings shall be provided around the frames as well as on
intermediate hinge lines and meeting styles as shown in the drawings to
make the doors perfectly airtight.

8.6.5 Mode of Measurement

8.6.5.1 The length and breadth of the doors in complete finished position shall be
measured for outside dimensions of the frame.

8.6.5.2 The rate shall include for all materials, labour for fabrication and erection, all
fittings and fixtures including locks, door closers, neoprene lining, T.W. fillers
for the frames and a coat of approved steel primer.

85
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

8.6.5.3 Where there are no thresholds the height shall be measured from the finished
floor levels.

8.6.6 Materials

The Mild Steel sheets for frames, shutters, etc. shall be of approved quality and of
gauge mentioned in this specification. Hardware and fixtures of the best quality from
approved manufacturers shall only be used. The Contractor shall specifically state
the particular manufacturer’s materials he proposes to use. All hardware and fixtures
shall be able to withstand repeated use.

The Contractor shall submit samples of each type of hardware to the Engineer In
Charge.

The approved samples shall be retained by the Engineer In Charge for comparison
with bulk supply. The mastic for caulking shall be of best quality from a
manufacturer approved by the Engineer- In- Charge..

8.6.7 Shop Coat of Paint

8.6.7.1 All surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, grease, loose mill scales and
foreign matter as per lS:1477 Part-I, and given one coat of shop paint.
Portions like mullions, transom etc. which will be inaccessible after assembly
of units shall be given an extra coat of paint before assembly.

8.6.7.2 Wherever required, all steel doors shall be hot dip galvanized to give a coating
weight of 460 gms to 610 gms per sq.m. One coat zinc chromate primer coat
shall then be applied as shop paint.

8.6.8 Handling and Storage

All metal doors shall be packed and crated properly before despatch, to ensure that
there will be no damage to the fabricated materials. Loading into wagons and trucks
shall be done with all care to ensure safe arrival of materials at site in undamaged
condition. All metal doors shall be stored under cover in a way to prevent damage or
distortion.

8.6.9 Assembly and Erection

8.6.9.1 In general, the fixing of metal doors shall conform to IS:1081. The Contractor
shall assemble and install all steel doors including transoms and mullions for
composite units in respective places keeping proper lines and levels, and in
approved workmanlike manner, to give trouble free and leak-proof
installation. If required by the PMC / Engineer- In- Charge, the installation
shall have to be carried out under the supervision of the manufacturer’s staff.
The contractor shall take every precaution against damage of the components
during installation.

Necessary holes chases etc. required for fixing shall be made by the
contractor and made good again as per original, after installation.

8.6.9.2 After installation of metal doors all abrasions to shop-coat of paint shall be
retouched and made good with the same quality of paint used in shop-coat.

8.6.9.3 All coupling mullions, transoms, frames. etc. in contact with unpainted steel
and other members, shall be well embedded in mastic. The contractor shall
bring to the site the mastic cement in original sealed containers of
manufacturer and shall apply it as per the instructions.

8.6.9.4 Door shutters, partitions, hardware fixtures etc. shall be fixed only after
major equipments have been installed in rooms. Wherever required, nylon
cords of approved quality shall be supplied along with pivoted sashes and
shall be of adequate length to terminate one meter from the floor.

Loose ends of cords shall end in metal or plastic pull as approved by the
Engineer- In- Charge.

86
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

8.6.10 Acceptance Criteria for Installed Items

a) Installations shall be at correct location, elevation and in general, on a true

vertical plane.

b) Fixing details shall be strictly as shown on drawings.

c) Assembly of composite units shall be strictly as per the drawings with mastic
caulking at transoms and mullions, gaskets, weather strips etc. complete.

d) All frames on external walls shall be mastic caulked to prevent leakage

through joint between frames and masonry.

e) All openable sections shall operate smoothly without jamming.

f) Locks, fasteners etc. shall engage positively. Key shall be non-

interchangeable.

g) Cutting to concrete or masonry shall be made good and all abrasions to shop
paint shall be touched up with paint of same quality as shop paint.

8.7.0 M.S. GRILL WORK IN ROLLING SHUTTERS :

These shall be manufactured with grill made out of 8mm dia M.S. rounds bent to
required shape and connected by means of flat iron 20mm x 6mm as shown on the
drawings and fixed in the rolling shutter. The painting shall be carried out with one
coat of Red Oxide zinc chromate primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of
approved quality, make, color and shade.

8.7.1 Measurements :

Measurements shall be in sq.metres correct to two places of decimal.

The height and width shall be measured to the outside of grill bar correct to a cm.

7.2 Rate :

The rate shall include the cost of materials and labor for all the operations involved,
including where required, cutting, opening in rolling shutters, painting, etc.

8.8 STEEL DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS AND COMPOSITE UNITS :

Steel doors, windows, ventilators and composite units shall be manufactured as per
IS : 1038-1983 using rolled steel sections of the weights specified in IS: 7452-1982. It
shall be fixed side hung, top hung, bottom hung or center hung as specified and/or
shown on drawings. The steel shall be of S.T. 32- 0 grade, conforming to IS : 1977-
1969.

SIZE :

The sizes, types, position of steel doors, windows and ventilators shall be as shown on
drawing and/or as directed by the EIC. External doors shall have thresholds. The
actual size of doors, windows, ventilators shall not vary by more than 1.5 mm from
those given in the drawings.
The various sections to be used shall have the weights as specified in the relevant
Indian Standard Code IS : 7452-1982. Generally the weight shall not be less than :

Glazing bars : a) 0.306 kg/m

b) 0.334 kg/m
c) 0.363 kg/m

Mullion bar : 2.280 kg/m

Ventilator bar : 1.800 kg/m

87
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Outer bar for ventilators : 2.300 kg/m

Frame bar ventilator : 1.419 kg/m

Inside Frame : 1.550 kg/m

Outside Frame : 1.920 kg/m

Mullion coupling bar : 2.300 kg/m

Transome coupling bar : 1.800 kg/m

Fabricated weather bar : 1.600 kg/m

Fabrication :

Fixed and opening frames shall be cut to the length and mitred.

Corners of the frames shall be welded properly. Frames shall be rectangular and in
one plane.

Doors :

The hinges shall be of 50mm projecting type or non-projecting type as approved by

the EIC. The hinge pin shall be of electro galvanized steel. Door handles shall be of
type and size as approved by the EIC.

A latch lock openable from both sides shall be provided. In case of double doors, the
first closing shutter shall have a steel bolt at top and bottom of approved type.

Windows :

a) For fixed windows, the frame shall be fabricated as above.

b) Side hung and top hung windows and ventilators: slots shall be cut
in the fixed frames and hinges inserted and welded. Hinges shall be
projecting type 25mm to 65mm wide. Hinge pin shall be of galvanizes
steel. Hinges for shutter frame shall be fixed in the same way or
hinges riveted in the holes made in shutter frames. Friction hinges of
approved type shall be provided if specified. For side hung window,
the brass oxidized fastener shall be used and shall be mounted on
steel plates. The handle plate shall be fixed by riveting or screwing
before the glazing work is done and should not be easily removable
after glazing. The handle shall have arrangement to keep the shutter
fully closed or slightly open. The rotation of handle should not cause
the unscrewing of the pin. If friction hinge is not provided, brass
oxidized peg stays of approved type shall be provided with holes in
three positions.

c) Centre hung windows/ ventilators: These shall have two pairs of

brass cup pivots riveted to shutter frame and ventilator/ window
frame for swing of about 85o with necessary fixture and fittings. An
oxidized steel spring catch shall be provided for operation of the
ventilator shutter, with a pulley and chord.

Composite Unit :

These are combination of units of doors, windows, ventilators, coupled with coupling
sections, manufactured from 16.mm thick M.S. plate, all as per drawings and as
directed. Mastic shall be provided between the junction of the framed and couplings
to make the composite unit waterproof.

Finishing :

All steel surfaces shall be cleaned of rust, scale, dirt, grease, oil, etc.

88
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

They shall be treated with rust proofing by hot dip, zinc spray or electro galvanized
process and priming coat of approved red oxide zinc chromate primer as specified or
directed. After the doors, windows, ventilators, composite units, etc. are fixed in
position, two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved make, quality, color and
shade shall be applied.

Fixing :

Necessary openings in the masonry with minimum specified clearance between

openings and units frame shall be provided and frames fitted afterwards.

Necessary number of holes shall be made in the masonry and lugs of sizes 15mm x
3mm x 100 mm long shall be fixed in cement concrete block 1:2:4 (nominal mix) ( 1
cement : 2 sand : 4 metal aggregate of 20mm nominal size)75mm x 115mm x 200mm.
The necessary cutting in masonry shall be made and concrete block cast.

The masonry surface shall be made good to match the rest of the masonry finish.

The frames shall be fixed to the lugs with 20mm long x 6.3 mm dia. G.I. counter sunk
machine screw and nuts. The cozing mastic shall be cleaned and flush pointed and
the filled up gap shall be rendered waterproof.

When fixing with R.C.C. work opening where lungs cannot be provided, approved
metallic fasteners shall be fixed and frame fixed with 60mm galvanized screws of
designation 10.

When fixing in wood work opening, approved mastic or rubber lining shall be applied
be jambs, sill and channel, before fixing in position. The frame shall be fixed to the
openings with 60mm galvanizes screws of designation 10. The gap between opening
and frame shall be covered with timber fillet of hardwood around the frame.

When fixing in steel work opening, metallic mastic shall be applied as per clause
above, before fixing the frame in position and M.S. or hardwood fillet all around the
frame. The frames or composite unit is fixed to the opening with fixing clips or with
nuts and bolts as shown on drawings or as directed by the EIC.

For composite units, the mullions and transoms shall be bedded in mastic which
shall be applied liberally to the channels or frames before assembly and after
coupling.

Precaution should be taken to ensure that the steel doors, windows, etc. are not
deformed during the construction and no scaffolding shall be tied or rest on their
members.

All fittings and projecting hinges shall be protected from damage during construction.

8.8.1 Measurements :

The length and breadth of doors, windows, ventilators and composite unit shall be
measured as fixed out to out of the unit correct to a cm. The area worked out in sq.m.
correct to two places of decimal.

8.8.2 Rate :

The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labor involved in all operations
described above, including overheads and profits, cutting, glazing, painting, mastic,
lugs/holdfasts, cement concrete 1:2:4 (nominal mix), in masonry and making good,
peg stays, hinges, pivots, handles, etc. complete as required, shown on drawings or
as directed. The rates shall also include the metal or wood beading round the frame
work.

8.9.0 M.S. BARS AND M.S. GRILLS IN WOODEN FRAMES :

M.S. bars and M.S. grills with round, square bars and with flat shall be cut and/or
fabricated and fixed as per drawing and/or welded all as directed by EIC.

89
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fixing M.S. Round or Square bars to windows :

M.S. round or square bars of required sizes shall be fixed in window frames by
providing through hole on one side of the frame and a hole 50mm deep in other and
the bars should be exact length to reach 50mm in one and flush with outside of the
frame on the other side of the frame. On steel windows, the round or square bars
shall be welded on the frame with good workmanship.

M.S. grills shall be fabricated and fixed to frames by screws. The welding, cutting
holes through flats, bending etc. shall be carried out to required length and design
and precision and the complete work shall give neat appearance.

All the excess welding sports, etc. shall be properly ground and finished smooth.

All the steel concealed or exposed shall receive one coat of red oxide zinc chromate
primer. All exposed steel work shall be given further two coats of synthetic enamel
paint of approved make, quality, color and shade. The grill when directed shall be
fixed in the masonry, jambs with screws fixed on wooden gutties embedded in
masonry all as directed.

The grill shall be true to pattern in form and dimensions. Gills shall not be painted
until they have been inspected and approved by the EIC.

8.9.1 Measurements :

M.S. bars and M.S. grills shall be measured in kgs.

The length of bars going into the wooden window frames shall not be measured.
Measurements shall be length of bars between the window frames. For steel windows,
the length of bars and flats will be measured as provided and fixed.

For grill work, the complete length of M.S. bars and flats as fixed as per drawing shall
be measured separately correct to a cm.

The exact weight in kg. Correct to two places of decimals shall be calculated from
standard tables. No allowance shall be made for wastage, welding, nuts, bolts,
screws, holdfasts, if any. No deduction shall be made for holes in flats, etc.

8.9.2 Rate :

The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labor required for all the
operations described including overheads and profits, painting, cutting into masonry
and R.C.C. work and making good etc.

8.10. M.S. LADDERS :

M.S. ladders shall be fabricated out of M.S. rounds, squares, flats, etc. as described,
as per the drawing or as directed. The work shall include cutting to required sizes,
welding, fixing in position, bending and curving the flat iron stringer at top to form
handles, embedding the bottom of ladders, providing and casting foundation block in
cement concrete 1:2:4 (nominal mix) ( 1 cement : 2 sand: 4 stone aggregate 20mm
nominal size) of 60mm x 30mm x 150 mm. All the work shall receive on coat of red
oxide zinc chromate primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved
make, quality and shade.

The width of the ladder shall be 450 mm in between stringers made out of 40mmx
5mm x 6mm flats as specified and 16mm dia. M.S. round at maximum 30 cm
centers, notched and welded to stringer flats. The ladder shall be fixed at top with
welding or with nuts and bolts as required.

8.10.1 Measurements :

The length of ladder shall be measured in Rmt. From above the foundation block to
150 mm above the top most rung.

90
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

8.10.2 Rate :

The rate shall include all the materials and labor required in all the operations
described including wastage, overheads and profits, cement concrete foundation
block, painting, etc.

8.11.0 STAIRCASE RAILING :

The work shall be carried out as described and as per the drawing.

The M.S. plate 225 mm x 150 mm x 6mm with two anchor/ holdfast 200 mm x
40mm x 6mm shall be fixed in R.C.C. steps at the time of casting. The M.S. verticals
out of 20mm square bars shall have two lugs 20mm x 20mm and minimum 25mm
long welded near the bottom of verticals and to the M.S. plate fixed. At top 20 mm x
20mm horizontal lug 50mm long shall be welded to verticals and to 75mm dia 6mm
thick plate. This plate shall have 4 screw holes for fixed this to the wooden railing out
of 65mm x 150 mm. The height of T.W. hand rail shall be 900 mm above the finished
nosing. There shall be one vertical per step fixed along the edge of the stair. The
excess welding shall be properly smoothened and burrs removed. The whole railing
shall be finished and fixed in true line and level. The finished work shall have one
coat of zinc chromate primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of quality,
manufacture, color and shade as approved by the EIC.

8.11.1 Measurements :

The measurements will be in running meter correct to a cm.

8.11.2 Rate :

The rate shall include all materials and labor involved in all the operations described
and specified, including fixing in R.C.C., painting, polishing, etc. complete.

8.12.0 M.S. PIPE RAILING :

The M.S. pipe railing shall be fabricated as per drawings and instructions of EIC, out
of 40 mm dia. or 50 mm dia. nominal bore. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings
or as directed, the top horizontal or inclined pipe shall be at a height of 0.5 meter.
The top pipes will be bent at ends and form into vertical support. The vertical
supports shall consist of 40mm to 50mm pipe as shown on the drawing or as
directed/ specified, at not more than 1.5 meter centers. All vertical pipes shall be
embedded in floor to a depth of 250 mm in foundation block of 300mm x 300mm x
300 mm in cement concrete 1:2:4 (nominal mix) (1 cement: 2 sand: 4 stone aggregate
20mm nominal size). Alternatively, if directed, the pipes shall be welded to M.S. plate
225 mm x 150mm x 6mm fixed flush in cement concrete block as above with
holdfasts welded to the three sides of M.S. plate anchored in cement concrete. The
floor shall be cut to required size and depth and after casting the foundation blocks,
made good to match with the rest of the floor. The vertical pipes shall be full from
foundation to the top horizontal, which shall be continuous without any break. The
middle horizontal pipe shall be continuous between vertical supports. The joints shall
be properly made and welded and the welding finished to give a smooth surface. The
railing shall be fixed truly vertical and shall have a neat appearance. The railing shall
receive one coat of zinc chromate primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint.

8.12.1 Measurements :

The measurements shall be in sq.metres, correct to two places of decimal, length

being measured from the center lines of end supports and height above finished floor
up to the center line of the top pipe line measured vertically correct to a centimeter
for horizontal pipe railing and at right angles to the top pipe, if inclined.

8.12.2 Rate :

The rate shall include the materials and labor required in all the operations described
above, including cement concrete in all foundation blocks, making good floor,
painting, etc.

91
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

8.13.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL

8.13.1 Scope of Work :

The work covered by this specification consists of furnishing ad erecting of structural

steel complete in strict accordance with this specifications and the applicable
drawings.

8.13.2 Materials :

All structural steel shall be of standard sections as marked on the drawings ad shall
be free of scale, blisters, laminations, cracked edges ad defects of any sort. If the
structural steel is not supplied by the Department and the Contractor is required to
bring such steel, the Contractor shall furnish duplicate copies of all mill orders and /
or also the test report received from the mills, to satisfy the Engineer-in-charge.

All structural steel and electrodes shall comply in all respects with relevant I.S.S. for
structural steel.

8.13.3 Workmanship :

All workmanship shall be of first class quality in every respect to get greatest
accuracy to ensure that all parts will fit together properly on erection.

All ends shall be cut true to planes. They must fit the abutting surfaces closely.

All stiffeners shall fit tightly at both ends.

All holes in plates and section between 12mm and 20 mm thick shall be punched to
such diameter that 3mm of metal is left all around the hole to be cleaned out to
correct size by reamer.

The base connection shall be provided as shown on drawings and the greatest
accuracy of workmanship shall be ensured to provide the best connections.

Figured dimensions on the drawings shall be taken.

8.13.4 Erection and Marking :

Erection ad fabrication shall be according to IS 800-1984 section –11. During

erection, the work shall be securely braced and fastened temporarily to provide safety
for all erection stresses etc. No permanent welding shall be done until proper
alignment has been obtained.

Any part which do not fit accurately or which are not in accordance with the drawings
and specifications shall be liable to rejection and if rejected, shall be at once be made
good.

Engineer-in-charge shall have full liberty at all reasonable times to enter the
contractors premises for the purpose of inspecting the work and no work shall be
taken down, painted or dispatched until it has been inspected and passed. The
contractor shall supply free of charge all labor and tools required for testing of work.

8.13.5 Delivery at Site :

The contractor shall deliver the component parts of the steel work in an undamaged state at
the site of the works and the Engineer-in-charge shall be entitled to refuse acceptance of any
portion which has been bent or otherwise damaged before actual delivery on work.

8.13.6 Shop Drawing :

The shop drawings of structural steel based on contract drawings hall be submitted to the
Engineer-in-charge.

92
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The necessary information for fabrication, erection, painting of structure etc. must be
furnished immediately after acceptance of the leader.

8.13.7 Painting :

Painting should be strictly according to IS. 1477-1971 (Part-I-Pretreatment) and IS

1477-1971 (part-II painting).

Painting should be carried out on dry surfaces free from dust, scale etc. The paint
shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Once coat of shop paint (red lead) shall
be applied on steel, except where it is to be encased in concrete or where surfaces are
to be field welded.

8.13.8 Welding :

Welding shall be in accordance with IS. 816-1969,IS819-1957, IS 1024-1979,

IS1261-1959, IS 1323-1982 and IS 9595-1980 as appropriate. For welding of any
particular type of joint, welders shall give evidence of having satisfactory completed
appropriate test as described in ay of IS 817-1966, IS 1393-1961, IS 7307 (part-I) –
1974, IS 7310 (part-I) 1974 and IS 7318 (part-I) 1974 as relevant.

8.13.9 Welding Consumables :

Covered electrodes shall conform to IS 814 (part-I) – 1974 and IS814 (part-II)- 1974 or
IS 1395-1982 as appropriate.
Filler rods and wires for gas welding shall conform to IS 1278-1972.

The bar wire electrodes for submerged are welding shall conform t IS 7280-1974.

The combination of are and flash shall satisfy the requirements of IS 3613-1974.

The filler rods ad bare electrodes for gas shielded metal, are welding shall conform to
IS 6419-1971 and IS 6560-1972 as appropriate.

8.13.10Type of Welding :

Are welding (direct or alternating current) or Oxyacetylene welding may used. Field
welding may be used. Field welding shall be by D.C.

8.13.11Size of Electrode Runs :

The maximum gauge of the electrodes for welding any work and the size of run shall
be based on the following tables :

Maximum gauge or diameter

Average thickness of plate or section
of electrodes to be used
Less than 3/16" 10 S.W.G
3/16" and above but less than 5/16" 8 S.W.G
5/16" and above but less than 3/8" 6 S.W.G
3/8" ad above but less than 5/8" 4 S.W.G
5/8" and above but less than 1" 5/16" dia
1" and above thick section 3/8" dia

Note : On any straight weld the first run shall not ordinarily be deposited with a
larger gauge electrode than No.8 S.W.G. For subsequent runs the electrode shall not
be increased by more than two electrode size between consecutive runs.

8.13.12Welding contractors:

The contractor shall ensure that each welding operator employed on fabrication or
erection is an efficient and dependable welder, who has passed qualifying tests on the

93
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

type of welds which will be called upon to make, sample test shall have to be given by
the contractor to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

8.13.13Welding Procedure :

Welding should be done with the structural steel in flat position in a down hand
manner wherever possible. Adequate steps shall be taken to maintain the correct are
length, rate of travel, current and polarity for the type of electrode and nature of
work. Welding plant capacity means of measuring the current shall be available either
as a part of the welding plant or by the provision of a portable ammeter. In checking
the welding current, a tolerance of 10% or 30 amperes from the specified value
whichever is less shall be permitted.

The welding procedure shall be such as to ensure that the weld metal can be fully
and satisfactory deposited through the length and thickness of all joints so that
distortion and shrinkage stresses are reduced to the minimum and thickness of welds
meet the requirements of quality specified.

8.13.14Workmanship :

a) Preparation of Fusion Faces :

Fusion faces shall be cut by staring machine or gas cutting and later dressed
by filling or grinding so that they shall be free from irregularities such as
would interfere with the deposition of the specified size of weld to cause the
defects. Fusion faces and the surrounding surfaces shall be free from heavy
slag, oil paint or any substance which might affect the quality of the weld or
impede the progress of welding. The welding face shall be free of rust an shall
have metal shine surfaces.

The parts to be welded shall be brought into as close contact as possible and
the gap due to faulty workmanship or incorrect fit up shall not exceed 1/16".
If separation of 1/16" or more occurs locally, the size of the fillet weld shall be
increased at such position by an amount of equal to the width of the gap.

The parts to be welded shall be maintained to their correct poison during

welding.

They shall be securely held in position by means of tack welds, service bolts,
clamps or rings before commencing welding so as to prevent and relative
movement due to distortion, wind or any other cause.

b) Step Back Method should be used to avoid Distortion :

The minimum leg length of a fillet weld as deposited should not be less than
the specified size and the throat thickness as deposited should be not less
than that tabulated below :

Throat Thickness of Fillet :

Angle between
60o – 90o 91o – 100o 101o – 106o 107o – 113o 114o – 120o
fusion faces
Throat thickness in
0.7 0.65 0.6 0.55 0.5
cms.

In no case should a concave weld be deposited without the specific approval of the
Engineer-in-charge unless the leg length is increased above the specified length so
the resultant throat thickness is as great as would have been obtained by the
deposition of a flat.

All welds shall be deposited in a pre-arranged order ad sequence taking due account
of the effects of distortion ad shrinkage stresses.

94
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

After making each run of welding, all slag shall be removed ad final run shall be
protected by clean boiled linseed oil till approved.

The weld metal, as deposited, shall be free from crack, slag, excessive porosity,
cavities and other faults.

The weld metal shall be properly fused with the parent metal without overlapping or
serious undercutting at the toes of the weld.

The surfaces of the weld shall have a uniform and consistent contour ad regular
appearance.

In welds containing crack, porosity or cavities in which the weld metal tends to
overlap on the parent metal without proper fusion, the defective portions of the welds
shall be out cut and re-welded.

Where serious under cutting occurs, additional weld metal shall be deposited to make
good reduction.

8.13.15Mode of Measurement :

All structural steel shall be measured on weight basis in metric tones or quintals or
kgs. as mentioned in the schedule of quantities. The length or areas of various
members including gusset plates shall be measured correct to two places of decimals
as the net weight worked out from the standard steel tables approved by Indian
Standard Institution.

No separate measurements shall be taken for welding, riveting, bolting, field

connections etc. The rate shall include cost at of all labor, materials, scaffolding,
transport and also cost of welding, riveting ad bolting, field connections if any all to
complete the job as per specifications.

8.14.0 ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS, CURTAIN WALLS

The contractor shall be given drawings showing the size of various doors, windows,
ventilators, composite units, curtain walls, etc. and weights and sizes of various
members of doors, windows, etc.

The contractor shall along with the quotation submit three sets of shop drawings
covering items of work of these specifications. The drawing shall show details of the
extruded section, all dimensioned details of construction and installation, weathering
strip arrangements, holdfasts and fixing arrangements, joint details, position of all
fittings and fixtures, mullions, transome details, glazing arrangements, locking
arrangements, the weight of various sections per running meter etc. The various units
shall be properly marked and then correct position shall be indicated.

Single Glazed Window : (Weights indicated shall be aluminium)

a) Openable

1) Outer Frame : Weight 0.70 kg/Rmt

2) Shutter Frame : “ 0.97 kg/Rmt

3) Intermediate mullion/T : “ 0.97 kg/Rmt

4) Beading : “ 0.31 kg/Rmt

Fixing louvers window/ventilators :

Outer frame : Weight 0.46 kg/Rmt

Double Glazed Window : (weight indicated shall be minimum)

95
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1) Outer Frame : Weight 0.72 kg/Rmt

2) Shutter Frame : “ 0.97 kg/Rmt

3) Intermediate mullion : “ 0.98 kg/Rmt

4) Beading : “ 0.31 kg/Rmt

Aluminium Door : (Weights indicated shall be minimum)

1) Outer door Frame : Weight 2.508 kg/Rmt

2) Shutter Frame : “ 0.92 kg/Rmt

3) Bottom Stile : “ 2.508 kg/Rmt

Window shall be made out of extruded aluminium tubular hollow sections. Openable
windows shall be double weather stripped, one in the outer frame and the other strip
in the shutter frame. The weather strip shall be extruded neoprene and of a size to
make window weather tight. The hinges of openable window shall be of stainless steel
friction hinges sufficiently strong. The pins of hinges shall be of non-corrosive
material preferably nylon. In case the windows are top or side hung, they shall be
provided with brass pivots, sliding on stainless steel guides fixed to frame, thus
allowing cleaning, fixing and replacing of glasses from inside and outside. The
windows shall be provided with handles for single/double point locking as required.
The handles shall be made out of high quality chrome plated brass. Aluminium
sections shall be anodized in natural matt/ stain finish and the anodic film shall be
minimum 15 micron. All joints shall be mitred. Window shutters shall be provided
with special locking arrangements. 5.2mm to 5.5 mm thick glasses shall be fixed in
shutters by means of a rubber gasket. Each shutter shall be provided with HDP anti-
ratting pieces at top and bottom to control vibrations due to wind.

8.14.1 SLIDING WINDOWS :

The two track outer frame top sill and bottom sill shall be minimum weight of 0.580
kg/m.

Outer frame verticals shall be of minimum weight of 0.526 kg/m.

Shutter frame vertical shall be of minimum weight of 0.431 kg/m.

Shutter frame interlocking sections shall be minimum weight of 0.414 kg/m.

All aluminium work shall be anodized.

The aluminium work carried out shall have perfect waterproofing arrangement
between various aluminium members.

Each sliding shutter shall be provided with two ball hearings rollers, two anti-rattling
pieces/ guides, one each at top and bottom, weather strip all around.

No work shall be undertaken till the shop drawings are approved by the Engineer-in-
Charge.

8.14.2 Measurements :

The measurements shall be in sq.mtr. The length and breadth being measured
correct to a cm., out to out of the frame work.

8.14.3 Rate :

The rate shall include the cost of materials and labor required for all the operations
required to complete the work, including overheads, profits, cutting, jointing,
waterproofing gaps with approved rubber lining or mastic or neoprene, all fittings,

96
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

friction hinges wherever directed, anodizing, glazing, preparing, submitting and

getting approval to the detailed working drawings.

97
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - IX

STONE MASONRY WORK

9.1 RANDOM RUBBLE STONE MASONRY

9.1.0 Material

9.1.1 Stone

The stone shall be of the type specified such as granite, trap, limestone, sand stone,
quartzite, etc. and shall be obtained from the quarries, approved by the Engineer-in-
Charge. Stone shall be hard, sound, durable and free from weathering decay and
defects like cavities, cracks, flaws, sand holes, injurious veins, patches of loose or soft
materials and other similar defects that may adversely affect its strength and
appearance. As far as possible stones shall be of uniform colour, quality or texture.

Generally stone shall not contain crypst crystalline silica or chart, mica and other
deleterious materials like iron-oxide organic impurities etc.

Stones with round surface shall not be used.

The compressive strength of common types of stones shall be as per Table and the
percentage of water absorption shall generally not exceed 5% for stones other than
specified in Table. For laterite this percentage is 12%.

9.1.2 Size of Stones

Normally stones used should be small enough to be lifted and placed by hand. Unless
otherwise indicated, the length of stones for stone masonry shall not exceed three
times the height and the breadth on base shall not be greater than three-fourth of the
thickness of wall, or not less than 150 mm. The height of stone for rubble masonry
may be upto 300 mm.

The selection and grading of stones for rubble masonry is largely done at site and the
smaller stones are used in the hearting of wall.

9.1.3 Random Rubble Masonry shall be uncoursed or brought to courses as specified

Uncoursed random rubble masonry shall be constructed with stones of sizes as
referred to in para 9.0 and shapes picked up random from the stones brought from
the approved quarry. Stones having sharp corners or round surfaces shall, however,
not be used.

9.1.4 Random rubble masonry brought to the course is similar to uncoursed random
rubble masonry except that the courses are roughly levelled at intervals varying from
300 mm to 900 mm in height according to the size of stones used.

9.1.5 Dressing

Each stone shall be hammer dressed on the face, the sides and the beds. Hammer
dressing shall enable the stones to be laid close to neighbouring stones such that the
bushing in the face shall not project more than 40 mm on the exposed face.

(i) Face stone: At least 25% stones shall be headers tailing into the work at
least 2/3rd the thickness of wall in super structure masonry. Such stones
shall not be less than 200 sq. cm in cross sections.

(ii) Hearting Stones: The hearting or interior filling of a wall face shall consist of
rubble stones not less than 150 mm in any direction, carefully laid,
hammered down with a wooden mallet into position and solidly bedded in
mortar. The hearting should be laid nearly level with facing and backing.

(iii) Quoin Stone: Quoin stone shall be less than 0.03 cum in volume.

98
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(iv) Jamb stones: The jambs shall not be made with stones specified for quoins
except that the stones which were required to be provided at 1 metre centre
to centre on both the exposed faces shall here be provided only on the jamb
and the length shall be equal to the thickness of the wall for wall upto 60 cm
and a line of headers shall be provided for walls thicker than 60 cm as
specified for bond.

9.1.5 (A) Courses

The masonry shall be carried out in regular courses of height not exceeding 50 cm
and masonry on any day will not be raised more than 60 cm in height when using
mortars having compressive strength less than 20 kg./sq. cm at 28 days and 100 cm
when using mortars exceeding this strength.

9.1.5 (B) Thickness of Joints

The joint thickness shall not exceed 30 mm at any point on the face. Chips of the
stone and spalls shall be wedged into seating bed of face stones to avoid excessive
bed thickness. No pinning shall be allowed to avoid excessive joint thickness.

9.1.6 Mortar

The mortar used for joining shall be as specified.

9.1.7 Laying

Stone shall be laid on their natural bed and shall be solidly bedded full in mortar with
close joints, chips of stone spalls be wedged into the work wherever necessary. No dry
work or hollow spaces shall be allowed and every stone whether large or small shall
be carefully selected to fit snugly the interstices between the large stones. Masonry
shall be built breaking joints in all the three directions.

Bond stone and headers shall be properly laid into the work and shall be marked by
the contractor with white lead paint. The bond stones shall be provided as specified in
para 9.1.8.

99
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The masonry work in wall shall

be carried up true to plumb or to
specified batter.

Random rubble masonry shall be

brought to the level courses at
plinth, window sills, lintel and
roof levels. Levelling shall be
done with concrete comprising of
one part of the mortar as used
for masonry and two parts of
graded stone aggregate of 20 mm
nominal size.

The masonry in structure shall

be carried uniformly. Where the
masonry of one part is to be
delayed, the work shall be raked
back at an angle not steeper
than 45°.

9.1.7 (A) Raking out joints

All the joints on the faces to be pointed or plastered shall be racked out with racking
tool to a depth of 20mm while the mortar is still green.

9.1.8 Bond Stones

Though bond stones shall be provided in walls upto 600 mm thickness, a set of two
or more bond stones overlapping each other by at least 150 mm shall be provided in a
line from face to back. In case of highly absorbent types of stones (porous lime stone
and sand stone etc.) the bond stone shall extend about two-third into the wall, as
through stones in such walls a set of two or more bond stones overlapping each other
by at least 150 mm shall be provided. Each bond stone or a set of bond stones shall
be provided for every 0.5 m2 of the wall surface and shall be provided at 1.5 m to 1.8
m apart clear in every course.

In case of highly absorbent types of stones (porous lime stone and sand stone etc.)
single piece bond stones may give rise to dampness. For all thicknesses of such walls
a set of two or more bond stones overlapping each other by at least 15 cm shall be
provided. Length of each such bond stone shall not be less than two-third of the
thickness of the wall.

Where bond stones of suitable lengths are not available pre-cast cement concrete
block of 1:3:6 mix (1 cement : 3 coarse sand: 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm
nominal size) of cross section not less than 225 square centimeters and length equal
to the thickness.

At least one bond stone or a set of bond stones shall be provided at 1.5 m to 1.8 m
apart clear in every course. (Bond stones shall be marked suitably with paint as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge).

9.1.9 Quoin and Jamb Stones

The quoin and jamb stones shall be of selected stones neatly dressed with hammer or
chisel to form the required angle. Quoin stones shall not be less than 0.01 cum in
volume. Height of quoins and jamb stones shall not be less than 15 cm. Quoins shall
be laid header and stretcher alternatively.

9.1.10 Joints

Stones shall be so laid that all joints are fully packed with mortar and chips. Face
joints shall not be more than 20 mm thick.

100
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying when plastering or
pointing is not to be done. For the surfaces to be plastered or pointed, the joints shall
be raked to a minimum depth of 20 mm when the mortar is still green.

9.1.11 Scaffolding

Single scaffolding having one set of vertical support shall be allowed. The supports
shall be sound and strong, tied together by horizontal pieces, over which the
scaffolding planks shall be fixed. The inner end of the horizontal scaffolding member
may rest in a hole provided in the masonry. Such holes, however, shall not be allowed
in pillars under one metre in width or near the skew back of arches. The holes left in
masonry work for supporting scaffolding shall be filled and made good with cement
concrete 1 : 3 : 6 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size).

9.1.12 Curing

Masonry work in cement or composite mortar shall be kept constantly moist on all
faces for a minimum period of seven days. In case of masonry with fat lime mortar
curing shall commence two days after laying of masonry and shall continue for at
least seven days thereafter.

9.1.13 Protection

Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. The work shall also be
suitably protected from damage, mortar dropping and rain during construction.

9.1.14 Measurements

9.1.14.1 The length, height and thickness shall be measured correct to a cm. The thickness
of wall shall be measured at joints excluding the bushing. Only specified dimensions
shall be allowed; anything extra shall be ignored. The quantity shall be calculated in
cubic metre nearest to two places of decimal.

9.1.14.2 The work under the following categories shall be measured separately.

(i) From foundation to plinth level (level one) :

(a) work in or under water and or liquid mud,

(b) work in or under foul positions.

(ii) Above plinth level and upto floor five level.

(iii) Above floor five level to every floor/floors or part thereof.

(iv) Stone masonry in parapet shall be measured together with the

corresponding item in the wall of the storey next below.

9.1.14.3 No deduction shall be made nor extra payment made for the following :

(i) Ends of dissimilar materials (that is joists, beams, lintels, posts, girders,
rafters purlins, trusses, corbels, steps etc.) upto 0.1 sqm in section.

(ii) Openings each upto 0.1 sqm in area. In calculating the area of openings, any
separate lintels or sills shall be included alongwith the size of opening but the
end portions of the lintels shall be excluded and the extra width of rebated
reveals, if any, shall also be excluded.

(iii) Wall plates and bed plates, and bearing of chajjas and the like, where the
thickness does not exceed 10 cm and the bearing does not extend over the
full thickness of the wall.

Note: The bearing of floor and roof shall be deducted from wall masonry.

(iv) Drain holes and recesses for cement concrete blocks to embed hold fasts for
doors, windows etc.

101
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(v) Building in masonry, iron fixture, pipes upto 300 mm dia, hold fasts of doors
and windows etc.

(vi) Forming chases in masonry each upto section of 350 sq cm.

Masonry (excluding fixing brick work) in chimney breasts with smoke of air
flues not exceeding 20 sq dm (0.20 sq m) in sectional area shall be measured
as solid and no extra payment shall be made for pargetting and coring such
flues. Where flues exceed 20 sq dm (0.20 sq m) sectional area, deduction
shall be made for the same and pargetting and coring flues shall be measured
in running metres stating size of flues and paid for separately. Aperture for
fire place shall not be deducted and no extra payment made for splaying of
jambs and throating.

9.1.14.5 Apertures for fire places shall not be deducted and extra labour shall not be
measured for splaying of jambs, throating and making arch to support the
opening.

9.1.14.6 Square or Rectangular Pillars: These shall be measured as walls, but extra
payment shall be allowed for stone work in square or rectangular pillars over
the rate for stone work in walls. Rectangular pillar shall mean a detached
masonry support rectangular in section, such that its breadth does not
exceed two and a half times the thickness.

9.1.14.7 Circular Pillars (Columns): These shall be measured as per actual

dimensions, but extra payment shall be allowed for stone work in circular
pillars over the rate for stone work in walls. The diameter as well as length
shall be measured correct to a cm.

9.1.14.8 Tapered walls shall be measured net, as per actual dimensions and paid for
as other walls.

9.1.14.9 Curved Masonry: Stone masonry curved on plan to a mean radius exceeding
6 metres shall be measured and included with general stone work. Stone
work circular on plan to a mean radius not exceeding 6 metres shall be
measured separately and shall include all cuttings and waste and templates.
It shall be measured as the mean length of the wall.

9.1.15 Rate

The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour required for all the
operations described above and shall include the following :

(a) Raking out joints for plastering or pointing done as a separate item,
or finishing flush as the work proceeds.

(b) Preparing tops and sides of existing walls for raising and extending.

(c) Rough cutting and waste for forming gables cores, skew backs or
spandrels of arches, splays at eaves and all rough cutting in the body
of walling unless otherwise specified.

(d) Bond stones or cement concrete bond blocks.

(e) Leading and making holes for pipes etc.

(f) Bedding and pointing wall plates, lintels, sills etc. in or on walls,
bedding roof tiles and corrugated sheets in or on walls.

(g) Building in ends of joists, beams, lintels etc.

COURSED RUBBLE MASONRY

102
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.2 COURSED RUBBLE MASONRY - FIRST SORT

9.2.1 Stone: Shall be as specified in 9.1.1.

9.2.2 Size of Stone: Shall be as specified in 9.1.2.

9.2.3 Dressing

Face stones shall be hammer dressed on all beds, and joints so as to give them
approximately rectangular block shape. These shall be squared on all joints and beds.
The bed joint shall be rough chisel dressed for at least 80 mm back from the face, and
side joints for at least 40 mm such that no portion of the dressed surface is more
than 6 mm from a straight edge placed on it The remaining unexposed portion of the
stone shall not project beyond the surface of bed and side joint. The bushing on the
face shall not project more than 40 mm as an exposed face and 10 mm on a face to
be plastered.

The hammer dressed stone shall also have a rough tooling for minimum width of 25
mm along the four edges of the face of the stone, when stone work is exposed.

103
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.2.4 Mortar

The mortar for jointing shall be as specified.

9.2.5 Laying`

All stones shall be wetted before use.

The walls shall be carried up truly
plumb or to specified batter.

All courses shall be laid truly

horizontal and all vertical joints shall
be truly vertical. The height of each
course shall not be less than 15 cm
nor more than 30 cm.

Face stones shall be laid alternate

headers and stretchers. No pinning
shall be allowed on the face.

No face stone shall be less in breadth than its height and at least one third of the
stones shall tail into the work for length not less than twice their height.

The hearting or the interior filling of the wall shall consist of stones carefully laid on
their proper beds in mortar; chips and spalls of stone being used where necessary to
avoid thick beds of joints of mortar and at the same time ensuring that no hollow
spaces are left anywhere in the masonry. The chips shall not be used below the
hearting stone to bring these upto the level of face stones. The use of chips shall be
restricted to the filling of interstices between the adjacent stones in hearting and
these shall not exceed 10% of the quantity of stone masonry.

The masonry in a structure shall be carried up uniformly but where breaks are
unavoidable, the joints shall be raked back at angle not steeper than 45°. Toothing
shall not be allowed.

9.2.6 Bond Stones

Shall be as specified in 9.1.8 except that a bond stone or a set of bond stones shall be
inserted 1.5 to 1.8 metres apart, in every course.

9.2.7 Quoins

The quoins shall be of the same height as the course in which these occur. These
shall be at least 450 mm long and shall be laid stretchers and headers alternatively.
These shall be laid square on the beds, which shall be rough-chisel dressed to a
depth of at least 100 mm. In case of exposed work, these stones shall have a
minimum of 25 mm wide chisel drafts at four edges, all the edges being in the same
plane.

9.2.8 Joints

All bed joints shall be horizontal and all side joints vertical. All joints shall be fully
packed with mortar, face joints shall not be more than one cm thick.

When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be struck
flush and finished at the time of laying. Otherwise, joints shall be raked to a
minimum depth of 20 mm by raking tool during the progress of work, when the
mortar is still green.

9.2.9 Curing, Scaffolding, Measurements and Rates. Shall be as specified under 9.1.

9.3 COURSED RUBBLE MASONRY - SECOND SORT

104
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.3.1 Stone : Shall be as specified in 9.1.1.

9.3.2 Size of Stone : Shall be as specified in 9.1.2.

9.3.3 Dressing: Shall be as specified in 9.2.3 except that no portion of dressed surface of
joints shall show a depth of gap more than 10 mm from a straight edge placed on it
and use of chips shall not exceed 15 per cent of the quantity of stone masonry.

9.3.4 Mortar

The mortar for jointing shall be as specified.

9.3.5 Laying: Shall be as specified in 9.2.5 except

that the use of chips shall not exceed 15% of
the quantity of stone masonry and stone, in
each course need not be of the same height but
not more than two stones shall be used in the
height of a course.

9.3.6 Bond Stone, Quoins: Shall be as specified in

9.2.6 and 9.2.7 respectively.

9.3.7 Joints

All bed joints shall be horizontal and all side vertical. All joints shall be fully packed
with mortar, face joints shall not be more than 20 mm thick.

When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be struck
flush and finished at the time of laying. Otherwise, the joints shall be raked to a
minimum depth of 20 mm by raking tool during progress of work, where the mortar is
still green.

9.3.8 Curing, Scaffolding, Measurement and Rates. Shall be as specified under 9.1.

9.4 STONE MASONRY WORK

9.4.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The work of this section includes all exterior and interior stonework on the building
including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Masonry work for walls

2. Cladding of vertical walls
3. Copings

9.4.2 INTENT

A major intent of the work of this section is to provide stone masonry in retention wall
which can withstand constant exposure to the environment without deterioration or
failure of any component of the entire assembly of stone and supporting elements.

A major intent of the work of this section is to provide a single source responsibility
for stone, shop fabrication, and engineering of anchors and connections.

Stone on curved walls shall be fabricated to a curved surface.

Joints between stones shall be exactly coordinated and align as shown in drawing

Stone pattern shall be random within limits of stone sizes.

105
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.4.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Installer/Fabricator: A firm which has at least five years experience in work of the
type required by this section and which has a proven history of providing work
similar to the work required by this project and is equipped to provide the quantities
shown.

B Source: Obtain stone from one quarry and provide consistent color range throughout
the work. Provide secondary materials such as sealants and anchors, which are
acceptable to the stone installer / Project Manager / Architect

C Single Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of

uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for
each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate.

D Mock-ups: Before beginning primary work of this section, provide full size mock-ups
of each type of stonework at locations acceptable to Architect and obtain Architect’s
acceptance of visual qualities. Protect and maintain acceptable mock-ups throughout
the work of this section to serve as criteria for acceptance of this work. Mock-up
shall be used for required field testing. Mockup shall not be paid separately.

E Engineering: Provide the services of a Professional Engineer to design all stone

connections. Furnish calculations and supporting documentation with Engineer’s
professional seal.

F Efflorescent Testing: The Contractor shall perform efflorescent tests on a sample of

mortar using an independent testing laboratory.

9.4.4 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of stone and other
manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with
specified requirements.

B Samples: Submit the following samples:

Stone samples of specified sizes for each type of stone and finish. Include the full
range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work.

Stainless steel and other anchors and fasteners for stone to concrete and brick, along
with structural design calculations, manufacturer's data and manufacturer's test
certificates in support of proposed anchors, fasteners or cramps.

Colored masonry mortar samples showing full extent of custom color required by the
Architect.

9.4.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.

B. Store and handle masonry units to prevent their deterioration or damage due
to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion or other causes.

C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in dry location.

D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be

maintained.

E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent deterioration by

corrosion and accumulation of dirt

9.4.6 MATERIALS FOR STONE MASONRY WORK

106
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.4.6.1 Stone: The stone shall be of the type specified such as Pink quartzite, granite, trap,
limestone, sand stone, etc. and shall be obtained from the quarries, approved by the
Project Manager. Stone shall be hard, sound, durable and free from weathering
decay and defects like cavities, cracks, flaws, sand holes, injurious veins, patches of
loose or soft materials and other similar defects that may adversely affect its strength
and appearance. As far as possible stones shall be of uniform color, quality or
texture. Generally stone shall not contain crypts crystalline silica or chart, mica and
other deleterious materials like iron-oxide organic impurities etc.

Stones with round surface shall not be used.

The compressive strength of common types of stones shall be as per Table 1 and the
percentage of water absorption shall generally not exceed 5% for stones other than
specified in Table. For laterite this percentage is 12%.

Type of Stone Max. Water absorption % Minimum. Compressive

age by weight strength
kg/sq.cm.
Granite 0.5 100
Basalt 0.5 400
Lime Stone ( Slab & Tiles) 0.15 200
Sand Stone ( Slab & Tiles) 2.5 300
Marble 0.40 500
Quartzite 0.40 800
Laterite (Block) 12 35

9.4.6.1.1 Size of Stones: Normally stones used should be small enough to be lifted
and placed by hand. Unless otherwise indicated, the length of stones for stone
masonry shall not exceed three times the height and the breadth or base shall not be
greater than three-fourth the thickness of wall, or not less than 15cm. The height of
stone may be up to 30 cm or as decided by Project Manager.

9.4.6.1.2 Random Rubble Masonry shall be un-coursed or brought to courses as

specified. Un-coursed random rubble masonry shall be constructed with stone
of sizes as referred in above Para and shapes picked up random from the stones
brought from the approved quarry. Stones having sharp corners or round surfaces
shall, however, not be used.

9.4.7. Cladding of vertical walls

Copings

9.4.7.1 Random Rubble Masonry brought to the course is similar to uncoursed random
rubble masonry except that the courses are roughly leveled at intervals varying from
30cm to 90cm in height according to the size of stones used.

9.4.7.2 Dressing: Each stone shall be hammer dressed on the face, the sides and the bed.
Hammer dressing shall enable the stones to be laid close to neighboring stones such
that the bushing in the face shall not project more than 10mm on both the exposed
faces.

9.4.7.3 Mortar: The mortar used for joining shall be as specified.

9.4.7.4 Laying: All stones shall be wetted before use. Each stone shall be placed close to the
stones already laid so that the thickness of the mortar joints at the face is not more
than 20mm. Face stones shall be arranged suitably to stagger the vertical joints and
long vertical joints shall be avoided. Stones for hearting or interior filling shall be
hammered down with wooden mallet into the position firmly bedded in mortar. Chips
or sprawls of stones may be used for filing of interstices between the adjacent stones
in heartening and these shall not exceed 20% of the quantity of stone masonry. To
form a bond between successive courses plum stones projecting vertically by about
15 to 20 cm shall be firmly embedded in the heartening at the interval of about one
meter in every course. No hollow space shall be left anywhere in the masonry.

The masonry work in wall shall be carried up true to plumb or to specified batter.

107
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Random rubble masonry shall be brought to the level courses at plinth, window sills,
lintel and roof levels. Leveling shall be done with concrete comprising of one part of
the mortar as used of masonry and two parts of graded stone aggregate of 20mm
nominal size.

The masonry in structure shall be carried uniformly. Where the masonry of one part
is to be delayed, the work shall be raked back at an angle not steeper than 45 degree.

9.4.7.5 Bond Stones : Bond or through stones running right through the thickness of walls,
shall be provided in walls up to 60cm thick and in case of walls above 60cm
thickness, a set of two or more bond stones overlapping each other by at-least 15cm
shall be provided in a line from face of the wall to the back.

In case of highly absorbent types of stones (porous lime stone and sand stone etc.)
single piece bond stone may give rise to dampness. For all thicknesses of such walls,
a set of two or more bond stones overlapping each other by at least 15cm shall be
provided. Length of each such bond stone shall be less than two-third of the
thickness of the wall.

Where bond stones of suitable length are not available precast cement concrete block
of 1:3:6 mix (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size)
of cross section not less than 225 sq.cm and length equal to the thickness of wall
shall be used in lieu to bond stones. (This shall be applicable only in masonry below
ground level and where masonry above ground level is finally required to be
plastered).

At least one bond stone or a set of bond stones shall be provided for every 0.5 sqm of
the area of wall surface. All bond stones shall be marked suitably with paint as
directed by the Project Manager.

9.4.7.6 Quoin and Jamb Stones : The quoin and jamb stones shall be of selected stones
neatly dressed with hammer or chisel to form the required angle. Quoin stones shall
not be less than 0.01 cum in volume. Height of quoins and jamb stones shall not be
less than 15cm. Quoins shall be laid header and stretcher alternatively.

9.4.7.7 Joints : Stones shall be so laid that all joints are fully packed with mortar and chips.
Face joints shall not be more than 20mm thick.

The joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying when plastering or
pointing is not to be done. For the surfaces to be plastered or pointed, the joints shall
be raked to a minimum depth of 20 mm when the mortar is still green.

9.4.7.8 Scaffolding : Single scaffolding having one set of vertical support shall be allowed.
The supports shall be sound and strong, tied together by horizontal pieces, over
which the scaffolding planks shall be fixed. The inner end of the horizontal
scaffolding member may rest in a hole provided in the masonry. Such holes,
however, shall not be allowed in pillars under one meter in width or near the skew
back of arches. The holes left in masonry work for supporting scaffolding shall be
filled and made good with cement concrete 1:3:6 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size).

9.4.7.9 Curing : Masonry work in cement or composite mortar shall be kept constantly moist
on all faces for a minimum period of seven days. In case of masonry with fat lime
mortar curing shall commence two days after laying of masonry and shall continue
for at least seven days thereafter.

9.4.7.10 Protection :

Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. The work shall also be
suitably protected from damage, mortar dropping and rain during construction.

9.4.7.11 Measurement

9.4.7.12 The length, height and thickness shall be measured correct to a cm. The thickness
of wall shall be measured as per drawing. Only specified dimensions shall be

108
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

allowed; anything extra shall be ignored. The quantity shall be calculated in cubic
meter nearest to two places of decimal.

9.4.7.13 The work under the following categories shall be measured separately.

i) From foundation to plinth level (Level one) :

(a) Work in or under water and or liquid mud.

(b) Work in or under foul positions.

ii) From plinth level (level one) to superstructure level.

iii) Stone masonry in parapet shall be measured together with the corresponding
item in the wall of the storey next below.

9.4.7.14- No deduction shall be made nor extra payment made for the following :

i) Ends of dissimilar materials (that is joists, beams, lintels, posts, girders,

rafters purlins, trusses, corbels, steps etc.) up to 0.1 sqm in section.

ii) Openings each up to 0.1 sqm in area. In calculating the area of openings,
any separate lintels or sills shall be included along with the size of opening
but the end portions of the lintels shall be excluded and the extra width or
rebated reveals, if any, shall also be excluded.

iii) Wall plates and bed plates, and bearing of chajjas and the like, where the
thickness does not exceed 10cm and the bearing does not extend over the full
thickness of the wall.

iv) Drain holes and recesses for cement concrete blocks to embed hold fasts for
doors, windows etc.

v) Building in masonry, iron fixture, pipes up to 300mm dia, hold fasts of doors
and windows etc.

vi) Forming chases in masonry each up to section of 350 sq cm.

Masonry (excluding fixing brick work) in chimney breasts with smoke of air flues not
exceeding 20 sq dm (0.20 sqm) in sectional area shall be measured as solid and not
extra payment shall be made for pargetting and coring such flues. Where flues
exceed 20 sq dm (0.20 sqm) sectional area, deduction shall be made for the same and
pargetting and coring flues shall be measured in running meters stating size of flues
and paid for separately. Aperture for fire place shall not be deducted and no extra
payment made for splaying of jambs and throating.

9.4.7.15 Apertures for fire places shall not be deducted and extra labor shall not be
measured
for splaying of jambs, throating and making arch to support the opening.

9.4.7.16 Square or Rectangular Pillars.

These shall be measured as walls, but extra payment shall be allowed for stone work
in square or rectangular pillars over the rate for stone work in walls. Rectangular
pillar shall mean a detached masonry support rectangular in section, such that its
breadth does not exceed two and a half times the thickness.

9.4.7.17 Circular Pillars (Columns)

These shall be measured as per actual dimensions, but extra payment shall be
allowed for stone work in circular pillars over that rate for stone work in walls. The
diameter as well as length shall be measured correct to a cm.

9.4.7.18 Tapered walls shall be measured net, as per actual dimensions and paid for
as other walls.

109
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.4.7.19 Curved Masonry

Stone masonry curved on plan to a mean radius exceeding 6 meters shall be

measured and included with general stone work. Stone work circular on plan to a
mean radius not exceeding 6 meters shall be measured separately and shall include
all cuttings and waste and templates. It shall be measured as the mean length of the
wall.

110
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - X

STONE CLADDING WORK

10.1 DRY STONE CLADDING

10.1.1 Material

Stone shall be of the type as specified in the item. It shall be hard, sound durable and
tough free from cracks, decay and weathering and defects like cavities cracks, flaws,
holes, veins, patches of soft or loose materials etc. Thickness of stone shall be as
specified

Stone shall be cut with the gang saw to the required size and shape on all beds and
joints so as to free from any waviness and to give truly vertical horizontal surface as
required. The exposed face and sides of stones forming joints shall be such that the
straight edge laid along the face of the stone is in contact with every point on it. All
the visible angle and edges shall be square and free from chipping. The dressed stone
shall be of the thickness specified with permissible tolerance of + 2 mm.

Before starting the work, the contractor shall get the samples of stone approved by
Engineer-Incharge.

Approved sample shall be kept in custody of Engineer-in-Charge and stones supplied

and used on the work shall conform to sample with regard to soundness, colour,
veining and general texture. The stone shall be cut by gang saw into slabs of required
thickness along the places parallel to the natural bed. When necessary double
scaffolding for fixing the stone at greater heights, jib crane or other mechanical
appliances shall be used to hoist the heavy pieces of stone and placed them into
correct positions. Care shall have to be taken that corners of the stone are not
damaged. Stone shall be covered with gunny bags before tying chain or rope is passed
over and it shall be handled carefully. No pieces which has been damaged shall be
used that work

10.1.2 Stacking and Storing

Stone slabs are thin and brittle and should never be stacked flat across timber
supports. They should therefore, be stacked on edge on timber or like runners.

Packing pieces inserted between the slabs may be rope or timber. Slabs shall be well
covered with plastic sheeting to protect them from any possible staining.

10.1.3 Scaffolding

As specified in 3A.1.10.

10.1.4 Fixing

The size & shape of the cramps shall be as per drawing and as per directions of
Engineer-in-charge.

The samples of steel cramps should be approved in advance before starting the stone
cladding work.

The cramp shall be attached to top and bottom of the stone. The cramps shall have
inbuilt adjustment for vertical and horizontal alignment. The cramps used to hold
support and transfer the load of stone unit to the supporting structured steel shall be
designed by the manufacturer and approval of the same shall be obtained from the
Engineer-in-Charge.

The minimum number of clamps required shall be as per requirement of design to

carry the load of individual stone slabs. The cramps shall be spaced not more than 60
cm horizontally and vertically along the stone side for insertion of pins / bolt attached

111
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

with the steel cramps. Adequate cutting in stone shall be made with precision
instrument to hold the cramps pins at the joints.

Stone shall be secured with clamps with high quality workmanship. The walls shall
be carried up truly plumb. All the courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all the
vertical joints truly vertical. The sequence of execution for cladding work shall be
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

Jointing: Joints horizontal and vertical shall be filled with weather sealant of make
as approved by Engineer-in-charge with the help of pouring gun for filling the sealant.
Before filling the joint with sealant, masking tape are required to be fixed on stones
surface on both edges of joints of the stones, so that sealant may not spoil the surface
of the stone. When all the joints are filled and sealant has dried, the masking tape
may be removed.

Protection: Work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. The work shall
also be suitably protected from damage and rain during construction.

Measurement: The length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. The area
shall be calculated in square metre correct to two places of decimal. Any opening of
area 0.01 sqm. or less shall not be deducted.

Rate: The rate includes the cost of materials and labour involved in all operations
described above including cost of support scaffolding staging, sealant, pouring guns
but excluding the cost of steel cramps drilling holes / making recesses in stones
which shall be paid for separately.

10.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAME WORK FOR DRY STONE CLADDING

Specification for structural frame work for dry stone cladding are same specifications as for
steel work in built up sections (welded or bolted).

10.2.1 Fixing of Frame

The properly designed structural frame for withstanding the weight of stone slab are
fixed/supported on wall surface with the help of M.S. brackets/lugs of angle iron/flat
etc. which is welded at each junctions of member of frame and also embedded in
cement concrete block 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20
mm nominal size) of size 300 x 230 x 300 mm. The concrete block can be made by
cutting the hole of size as mentioned in brick wall and filling the hole with cement
concrete including provision of necessary centring/shuttering for holding of concrete.
The frame can also be supported on RCC surface with the help of approved expansion
hold fastener by drilling the holes in RCC surface.

Steel cramps are either welded or bolted to the frame (by making necessary holes in
frame work) for holding of stone.

10.2.2 Measurement

The mode of measurement shall be the same, as specified for steel work in built up
section except that the weight of welding material shall not be added in weight of
members for payment and nothing extra shall be paid for making holes for temporary
fastening of members during erection before welding, which also includes cost of
cement concrete block, centring and shuttering and making holes in walls, but
excluding the cost of expansion fastener, steel clamps which shall be paid for
separately.

10.2.3 Rate

The rate shall include the cost of all labour and material involved in all the operation
described above.

10.3 ADJUSTABLE STAINLESS STEEL CRAMPS

112
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The cramps shall be stainless steel of make approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

10.3.1 The weight of the stainless steel clamp (including weight of nut and washer) shall not
be less than 260 gms.

10.3.2 Necessary holes at suitable locations are to be done on steel frame work for dry stone
cladding to be fixed.

10.3.3 Necessary recessed are required to be done in stone slab which is required to be
supported by clamps.

10.3.4 The one end of steel clamp is fixed on frame with nut and bolt and other end is
inserted into recesses/hole for fixing the dry cladding stone on frame.

10.3.5 The rate includes cost of materials and other operations mentioned as above.

STONE WORK

Cramp for Brick Backing Cramp for R.C.C. Work

Backing

113
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Typical Details of Cramps for R.C.C. Backing

10.4 WET STONE CLADDING WORK

10.4.1 MATERIALS FOR STONE CLADDING WORK

10.4.1.1 STONE: As specified earlier the stone should be cut in to slabs of required
thickness along the planes parallel to the natural bed of stone.

10.4.1.2 Accessories, Ties and Anchors

Stone Anchors: Provide stainless steel ties and anchors as designed by

Contractor’s engineer with length to suit wall conditions. Provide stone
anchors which comply with local building codes. Comply with requirements
of I S : 4101 (Part – 1) – 1967.

Setting Buttons: Provide lead or plastic buttons of thickness necessary to

make joint width indicated.

10.4.1.3 Mortar

Mortar should be as specified.

10.4.1.4 Fabrication

Stone Fabrication: Fabricate work to be truly straight, plumb, level and

square and to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated on approved shop
drawings. Fabricate work with uniform, tight joints.

114
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Stone to be 300mm high (or as required) (center to center of joints), random

widths, with all exposed surfaces fully custom dressed.

Provide minimum 150mm return on all corner stones.

Stone Thickness: Provide ……mm nominal thickness

Joint Widths: Maintain a uniform 10mm wide horizontal joint between

stone units or stone and concrete. Provide 7mm wide vertical joints between
stone units.

10.4.1.5 Erection and Installation

General Installation Requirements: Strictly comply with

quarry/fabricator’s instructions and recommendations of setting materials
manufacturers, except where more restrictive requirements are specified in
this section.

Individually Set Stonework: Set stone in strict compliance with approved

shop drawings and erection drawings, providing anchors, supports, fasteners
and attachments as indicated. Shim and adjust stone in true plane with
accurately aligned joints of uniform width.

Keep cavity behind stones clear and free of mortar and all other obstructions
to the downward and outward flow of water, except for mortar spots at
anchors and ties, and fill space completely with non-staining grout placed in
small lifts or insulation as detailed.

Flashings: Coordinate stonework installation with flashing installation to

ensure completely waterproof and weather tight construction and assembly.
Thoroughly inspect all flashings before concealing and seal all penetrations
through flashings with thick bed of sealant.

Weep Holes: Provide fully open 1” high weep holes as required to allow for a
positive means of drainage.

Stones: Install in bed of mortar as detailed. Assure that surface of pavers

slopes to drain without birdbaths.

10.4.1.6 Repair, Pointing and Cleaning

A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained
or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended.
Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or
grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep
holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints including corners,
openings and adjacent work with white cement added with pigment to
achieve color acceptable to the Architect, to provide a neat, uniform
appearance, prepared for application of sealants. The depth of mortar in
pointing work shall not be less than 20 mm.

C. Final Cleaning (Masonry): After mortar is thoroughly set and cured,

clean masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and

non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel unclean
for comparison purposes. Obtain Project Manager's / Architect's approval of
sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

115
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

10.4.1.7 Protection of Work

A During erection, cover top of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of

each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in
progress.

B. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold

cover securely in place.

C. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of

stone work to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or
mortar in contact with such stone work.

D. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by

means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.

E. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar.

F Protect all external corners ledges, copings, sills etc. by means

acceptable to the Project Manager / Architect or as directed by them.

G. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner

acceptable to Installer, which ensures unit masonry work being without
damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion.

116
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - XI

FENCING WORK WITH BARBED WIRE, CHAIN LINK ETC.

The work shall generally be carried out as per these specifications, relevant drawings and
as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

11.1 M.S. Posts and Struts :

All the M.S. posts / struts shall be free from rust, scale, cracks, twists and other
defects and shall be fabricated to the required shape and size out of the specified
sections. The posts and struts shall be conforming to relevant specifications
stipulated hereinbefore under relevant sections. All the posts an struts shall be of
sizes and lengths as specified in the tender schedule.

The exposed surfaces of the posts and struts shall be painted with two coats of
approved primer.

11.2 R.C.C Posts and Struts :

All the posts and struts shall be of standard size as specified in schedule. These shall
be casted on suitable places/platforms in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse
sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 12.5 mm. nominal size) as per relevant specifications
stipulated hereinbefore. OR it should be a pre-cast post where ever specified.The
reinforcement shall be provided as hereinbefore under relevant sections. To posts and
struts shall be free from honeycombing, cracks and other defects.

After casting, the posts / struts shall be left at the same place and cured for a
minimum period of 7 days. After 7 days curing the same shall be shifted to a leveled
ground and stacked for further curing for 14 days. After 21 days of curing only, the
posts/ struts shall be transported to work site without any damage, for fixing in
position.

11.3 Spacing of the Posts and Struts :

The spacing of posts shall be 3 m. center to center unless other wise specified or as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge, to suit the dimensions of the area to be fenced.
Every 10th posts, last but one end posts, corner posts, and posts where the level of
fencing changes in steps and end post when the fencing changes its direction shall be
strutted on both dies or as directed by the Engineer-in-charges. End posts where
barbed wire fencing is discontinued shall be strutted on one side only.

11.4 Fixing of M.S. / R.C.C. Posts and Struts :

Pits of size 45 X 45 X 45 cm. deep or sizes mentioned in the drawings, shall first be
excavated centrally in the direction of proposed fencing work, true to line and level to
receive the posts. In case of struts, the pits shall be so excavated, as to receive
minimum 15cm.concrete cover at any point of the struts to suit its inclination or as
shown in the drawing.

The pits shall be filled with a layer of 15cm. thick cement concrete of specified mix.
The posts and struts shall then be placed in the pits, the posts projecting to the
specified height above ground level, true to line, plumb and position, by providing
adequate supports temporarily, and cement concrete of specified mix, shall then be
filled in so that the posts are embedded in cement concrete blocks of specified sizes.
The concrete in foundation shall be watered for atleast 7 days to ensure proper
curing.

11.5 Barbed Wire :

The barbed wire shall be of M.S. or G.I. as specified and it shall generally conform to
I.S. 278-1978.

The base metal of the line and point wire shall be of good commercial quality mild
steel.

117
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The line and point wire shall be circular in section, free from scales and other defects
and shall be uniformly galvanized if specified.

The line wire shall be in continuous lengths and shall generally be free from signs of
welds. It shall be able to withstand wrapping and unwrapping 8 turns round its
diameter.

The barbed wire shall consist of two splices per reel. The barbed wire shall be formed
by twisting two lines wires one containing the barbs.

The barbed wire and its weight shall be as given in the table below:

Nominal diameter of wire Nominal

Mass of complete
distance
Type Line wire (in Point wire (in barbed wire(in
between two
mm) mm) gm./m)
barbs in mm
1 2.50 (12G) 2.50 (12G) 75 146 (136-155)
2 2.5 2.5 150 114(108-120)
3 2.5 2.00 (14 G) 75 117(108-125)
4 2.5 2 150 96(89-103)
5 2.24 (13G) 2 75 102(97-106)
6 2.24 2 150 82(78-85)

The barbs shall carry four points and shall be formed by twisting tow point wires,
each two turns, tightly round one line wire, making altogether 4 (four) complete
turns. The barbs shall be so finished that the four points are set and locked at right
angles to each other.

The barbs shall have a length of not less than 13mm and not more than 18mm. The
points shall be sharp and well pointed. Barbed spacing shall be as given in the above
table.

Wherever required for every 50 reels or part thereof, samples of the barbed wire and
the individual line wires shall be put to tensile test and in case of failure to conform
to tensile properties given below, two additional tests of each kind shall be made on
the samples cut from other reels.

Tensile Properties :

Breaking load of line wire Min. breaking load of

Size of lien wire
complete barbed wire
Nominal dia (in mm)
Min. (in Kg.) Max. (in Kg.) (in Kg.)
2.50 (12G) 216 302 444
2.24 (13G) 128 179 263

On the results of these additional tests, the whole or portion of the barbed wire shall
be accepted or discarded as the case may be.

11.6 Fixing of Barbed Wire :

The barbed wire shall be stretched and fixed in number of rows and two diagonals as
specified. The bottom row shall be 140mm above ground and the rest at 125 mm or
at given spacing as per drawing. The diagonals shall be stretched between adjacent
posts from top wire of one post to the bottom wire of the 2nd post. The diagonal wires
will be interwoven with horizontal wires by fixing the odd rows of wires, then the
diagonal cross wires and lastly the even rows of wires. The jointing of the barbed wire
in between the posts shall not be permitted.

Necessary holes should be tapped in the posts and the barbed wire shall be fixed in
position by means of "U" clamps or bolts and nuts as specified in drawings. In case of
fixing with "U" clamps, the legs of the "U" clamps passing through the 10mm dia hole

118
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

in the RCC post to hold barbed wire shall be turned up and down to get an overlap of
25mm on the face of RCC post. Turn buckles and straining bolts shall be used at the
end posts if specified.

11.7 Mode of Measurement :

The work shall be measured in running meter length of fencing correct to a

centimeter for the finished work, from center to center of the posts.

The rate shall include the cost of labor and material involved in all the operations
described above including the cost of barbed wire, turn buckle, straining bolts, bolts
and the nuts / U clamps including excavation and foundation concrete or as specified
in item description for the work.

11.8 Chain Link :

The chain link shall be of approved manufacture and of correct size, gauge etc. It
shall be of M.S. or G.I. as specified of approved manufacture and of required size,
gauge etc. The base materials of the wire shall be of good commercial quality mild
steel. The wire shall be circular in section, free from rust, scale, cuts, welds and
together defects and shall be uniformly galvanized if specified.

11.9 Fixing of the Chain Link Fencing to MS or RCC post:

The chain link of specified height of fencing shall be fixed first to the end post with
necessary G.I. approved type U clamps threaded at both ends and G.I. nut, bolts,
washers etc. and with 6 mm dia full height M.S. /G.I. anchor bar. After fixing the
chain link at the end post, it shall be stretched tightly and fixed to next post one after
the other by the above mentioned clamps and bars etc. leaving 50 mm clearance from
the ground and 20mm clearance in the case of concrete coping at bottom to avoid
rusting. The point at the change in level of the fencing, top/bottom, necessary links
shall be adjusted suitably as per the manufacturers specification or as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge. The entire link fence shall be painted with two coats of synthetic
enamel paint of approved make and shade over a coat of approved primer or as
specified in the item / drawing.

11.10 Measurement :

The work shall be measured in running meter length of fencing correct to a

centimeter for the finished work from centre to center of the posts.

The rate shall include the cost of labor and material involved in all the operation
described above including the cost of barbed wire, turn buckle, straining bolts and
bolts and the nuts / U clamps, 6mm dia M.S. / GI anchor bar etc. including
excavation and foundation concrete or as specified in item description for the work.

119
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - XII

PROVIDING AND LAYING PAVER BLOCKS

12.1 SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of work includes manufacturing, supplying and laying of precast paver blocks of
strength and quality as specified in the BOQ.

The work includes:

12.1.1 Verification of the existing site condition and advising our project-in charge to
lay suitable base course, if required. Contractors are required to satisfy
themselves with quality of sub-grade, sub-base course before the paver
blocks are laid and suggest strengthening if required.

12.1.2 Clearing the site by removing all obstacles such as stones, debris etc. for
laying of paver blocks.

12.1.3 Getting the Pavers manufactured as per requirements in technical

specification enclosed.

12.1.4 Supplying of paver blocks at site, including handling at both ends.

12.1.5 Laying of paver blocks at site on 50mm thick sand bedding as per
requirement in technical specification, within shortest possible time. In case,
site is undergoing execution of other works, care should be taken to ensure
that the other operations are not closed / hampered.

The job of paver blocks laying may be carried out during night hours, if
required and as instructed by EIC.

12.1.6 Testing of paver blocks through reputed Govt. / Non Govt. Test house (Duly
recognized) and submission of test results as per requirements in technical
specifications. CLIENT reserves the right to carryout tests at random. Cost of
such tests shall be borne by CLIENT if the samples pass and by contractor if
it fails.

12.1.7 The contractor shall guarantee that all material and components designed,
fabricated, supplied and laid by him shall be free from any type of defect due
to faulty material, and / or workmanship for a period of One year from the
date of completion of work at individual sites.

In case of any defect e.g. settlement, depression, abrasion, chipping, cracks etc,
the party shall re-lay the pavers in that particular area within 15 days of
intimation as directed without claiming any cost what so ever.

Otherwise, Client reserves the right to get the rectification done by engaging
another agency at contractor’s risk and cost.

12.1.8 The job may be carried out at an operating Retail outlet, hence all necessary
precautions shall be taken by contractor. In addition to this, safety
precautions as per direction of EIC shall also be taken like barricading etc.

12.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

12.2.1 Paver Block Manufacturing facilities

Client, at its discretion shall nominate its representative for inspection of the factory.
Party shall co-ordinate and co-operate with representative of Client. The party shall
inform the address, telephone numbers and other details of the workshop and the
contact person to enable Client depute its representative. The party shall allow entry
to Client representative during all working days and time.

The Paver Block shall be made in factory with following minimum facilities:

120
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

12.2.1.1 Design Mix Concrete:

(a) All pavers designated by strength shall be treated as design

mix concrete. The aggregate and cement shall be
measured by weight in an approved weigh batching
equipment. Mixing water shall be measured in
graduated liter cans. One or more complete bags of
cement shall be used for each batch of concrete.

(b) The contractor shall be responsible for designing mixes of the

specified performance to suit the degree of workability
and characteristic strength. The mix design shall be
finalized before manufacturing of the paver considering
a set of suppliers for cement, sand and aggregates. In
case of any change of suppliers of cement, sand or
aggregates, party should have design mix ready for
alternate suppliers.

(c) The minimum cement content for compacted concrete of

pavers shall not be less than 380 Kg / cum.

(d) The maximum water cement ratio for pavers concrete shall
not be more than 0.40

(e) The design mix proportions for each set of raw material
suppliers shall be finalized and approved by the
authorized lab for the required compressive strength
and the lab report with proportions should be available
with the vendor at all times for scrutiny and verification
purpose.

12.2.1.2 Paver Block Making:

A. Machine:-

The machine should be capable of producing high quality Paver

Blocks by obtaining high level of compaction by application of
hydraulic compaction and also by high intensity vibration to the
PVC moulds. The machine should have automatic control panel
and shall apply a minimum pressure of 3000 psi and then there
shall be automatic cut off of hydraulic circuit without any
manual interference. In no case, pavers mould by manual force
or by machine without auto cut off shall be accepted. All pavers
shall have uniformity in strength.
B. Instructions to make interlocking tiles / Paver Blocks :-

Place your form finisher on a flat surface shape opening.

Spray the mold (in the case of PVC Paver Mould/ PVC Paver
Mold, no need to spray) with a release agent. The agent
prevents the specific binding to the surface of the mold and
remove the finisher of the tool can, not without damage.

Combine quick-setting concrete into a large bucket, add

water according to manufacturer’s instructions. Use a drill
with a small mix concrete mix. Add half the water needed to
half of the mixture followed dump, and combine the mixture
is smooth like brownie batter. The remaining water through
the rest of the mixture follow to the end.

Pour the concrete mixture into the molds (PVC Paver Molds)
in a corner of the form, so spread the mixture in the form, fill
it out.

121
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Press the edges of the mold (PVC Paver Molds) with the
rubber hammer on all air bubbles in concrete, rising to the
surface.

Cure the pavement in a dry place for 48 hours. Once they

healed, Remove from the pan by the mold (PVC Paver Molds)
of the pavement. Put your face on the pavement area.

Brush to dry the surface of the tile with a layer of wet look
concrete sealant and allow the sealant for two hours. Place a
second layer of sealant on the pavement and leave for 24
hours before the finisher dry.

The sealant is dry to a glossy wet look to create even the

sidewalk your coloring
12.2.1.3 Weigh Batching & Mixing Equipment:

(a) The proportioning of ingredients of concrete per batch of

concrete shall be performed by an approved weigh batching
machine. Water shall be fed into the mixer from a tank
provided with means for adjusting the flow of water so as to
supply the quantity determined for concrete as per mix
design .Due allowance shall be made for the weight of water
carried by aggregates so that actual amount added at the
mixer can be reduced as necessary. For this purpose the
moisture content of coarse and fine aggregates shall be
ascertained as and when required and at other times when
alteration of the moisture content may be expected due to
new deliverance of aggregates, inclement weather or other
reasons.

(b) Volumetric batching of concrete may be allowed after the

design mix is approved by lab after testing, by converting the
proportion of concrete from weight to volumetric
measurement subject to facilities being made available by the
contractor for verifying and monitoring this.

(c) All necessary equipment such as measuring boxes, devices

for determination of moisture and bulking in sand, slump
cone, etc. shall be provided by the contractor. Concrete shall
be machine mixed until there is a uniform distribution of
materials and uniform color and consistency is achieved and
under no circumstances for less than two minutes.

The concrete Mix Design should be followed for each batch of

materials.
.
12.2.1.4 Curing :

The factory should have well designed curing area to ensure

adequate (minimum 14 days) curing of paver blocks.

12.2.1.5 Laboratory

The factory should have the following:

(i) Compression testing machine of capacity minimum 200 MT

(ii) Other tools and equipment for testing raw materials and
paver blocks.

(iii) (1) Systematic record of test results of various paver

blocks
manufactured in the factory.

122
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(2) Concrete Mix Design for desired grade of concrete

used for making of paver blocks.

12.2.2 Raw Materials.

12.2.2.1 CEMENT

The cement used in the manufacture of high quality precast concrete

paving blocks shall be conforming to IS 12269 (53 grade ordinary
Portland cement) or IS 8112 (43 grade ordinary Portland cement) or
IS 1489 (Part 1) (Portand-pozzolana cement – fly ash based). The
minimum cement content in concrete used for making paver blocks
should be 380 kg/Cum.

12.2.2.2 AGGREGATES

The fine and coarse aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring

crushed or uncrushed materials, which apart from the grading
requirements comply with IS 383-1970. The fine aggregates used
shall contain a minimum of 25% natural silicon sand. Lime stone
aggregates shall not be used.

Aggregates shall contain no more than 3% by weight of clay & shall

be free from deleterious salts and contaminants. Zone iv sand shall
not be acceptable. Course aggregate shall be 10 mm and below.

12.2.2.3 WATER

The water shall be clean and free from any deleterious matter. It shall
meet the requirements stipulated in IS: 456-2000.

12.2.2.4 OTHER MATERIALS

Any other materials / ingredients used in the concrete shall conform

to I.S. Specifications.

PIGMENT: The pigment shall be used only on wearing and top

surface and through out the paver block. The pigment used shall not
be more than 10% of weight of cement used in the wearing course
layer. However, use of pigment shall in no way alter the required
strength of the paver block.

Pigment used for coloring paver blocks shall have durable color. It
shall not contain matters detrimental to concrete. The pigment shall
not contain Zinc compound. Lead pigment shall not be used.

12.3. Pavers Block Characteristics

The inter locking concrete paver tiles should conform to IS-15658: 2006.

They shall be tested as per the code and have to qualify limits specified by us down
below.

12.3.1 The paver tiles should be made of M-40 design mix concrete in
approved size and shape.

For acceptance the average of compressive strengths of 8 pavers shall

be minimum 47.2 N/mm2 (MPa). Any paver in the tested lot shall not
have compressive strength less than 40.1 MPa. If needed, pavers
shall be designed and manufactured on higher side to concrete grade
M-40 to meet this requirement without extra cost to CLIENT. Testing
shall be done as per relevant clauses of IS-15658:2006.

12.3.2 The concrete pavers should have perpendicularities after release from
the mould and the same should be retained until the laying.

123
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

12.3.3 The surface should be of anti skid and anti glare type.

12.3.4 The paver should have uniform chamfers to facilitate easy drainage of
surface run off.

12.3.5 The concrete mix design should be followed of each batch of

materials separately and weigh batching plant is to be used to
achieve uniformity in strength and quality.

12.3.6 The pavers shall be manufactured in single layer or more to ensure

smooth surface on top and to remove all voids.

12.3.7 The pavers shall be of cement Grey color without any pigment or
colored with pigment or with chemically treated top surface as
specified.

12.3.8 The pavers are to be skirted all round with kerbing or otherwise as
per direction of EIC, using solid concrete blocks made of grade
1:1.5:3 concrete, of size 100mm X 200mm X 400mm. The kerbing
should be embedded for 100mm depth. The concrete used for kerbing
shall be cured properly for 7 days minimum. The payment for laying
kerb blocks will be made separately on running meter basis. CLIENT
may decide for alternate skirting system to suite site requirements.

12.3.9 All paver blocks shall be sound and free of cracks or other visual
defects, which will interfere with the proper paving of the unit or
impair the strength or performance of the pavement constructed with
the paver blocks.

12.3.10 The compressive strength requirement of concrete paver block shall

be minimum 47.2 MPa (N/sqmm) for 28 days (Testing as per IS-
15658) after applying the correction factor as per IS-15658:2006.
(Please refer clause 3.1 also).

12.4 Paver Block Dimensions

Thickness 80mm/60mm

Shape Regular (Uniform shape with no Hollow or Cracks)

Chamfer 5 mm to 7 mm along top edges

Thickness of Wearing Layer Minimum 6 mm (The thickness of the wearing surface

shall be measured at several points along the periphery of paver blocks. The
arithmetic mean of the lowest two values shall be the minimum thickness of the
wearing layer)

Colour Natural cement Grey color without use of any pigment OR color as specified

Dimensional Tolerance Tolerances as per IS-15658:2006

Note: All other visual/physical & dimensional acceptance on parameters like aspect
ratio, squareness etc to be as per IS-15658:2006

12.5 Testing of Paver Blocks

1. FOR 80MM PAVER TILES

SR. NO. TEST SPECIFICATION Average Values

1. 28 day Compressive Strength Minimum 47.2 MPa (N/Sqmm) (for

80mm)

2. Abrasion Resistance Maximum 2 mm [i.e. 10

units of

124
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1000 mm3 per 5000 mm2

reported as per E-5 of Annex
E of IS-15658:2000]
3. Water Absorption Avg. of 3 units - Maximum
6%
by mass (restricted to 7% in
individual test units)

2. FOR 80MM GRASS PAVER TILES

SR. NO. TEST SPECIFICATION Average Values

1. 28 day Compressive strength Minimum 37.1 MPa

(N/Sqmm)
(restricted
to 31.5 MPa in
individual test
units)

2. Abrasion Resistance Maximum 3 mm [i.e.

15
units of 1000 m3
per 5000 mm2
reported as per E-5
of Annex E of IS-
15658:2000]
3. Water Absorption Avg. of 3 units –
Maximum 6% by
mass
(restricted to 7% in
individual test
units)

Sampling and Testing Procedure strictly As Per IS – 15658; 2006.

12.6 Laying of Paver Blocks

12.6.1 PRIMING

The contractor is required to verify the existing WMM driveway surface and ascertain
the CBR value. Accordingly the total subgrade thickness required for achieving the
desired CBR value shall be advised to CLIENT within seven days of receipt of call-up.
CLIENT shall, through regular vendors arrange to carry-out such WMM, wherever
required.

Before taking over the site, the Paver block laying party is required to verify the
stabilization of the surface with CBR values. In case, contractor does not advise the
CBR value within seven days, CLIENT shall carry out WMM as per own design, and
contractor shall have no claim later particularly to the quality of WMM or sub-grade.

It will be the responsibility of the Paver block party to ensure that the Manholes /
Pipeline / Cable trenches / circular drainage system etc. is raised to driveway level
using the requisite materials as per instruction of EIC. The areas of potholes / deep
depressions at the isolated locations shall be filled up and properly compacted before
laying the paver blocks. No extra payment will be made for this purpose. The area of
raised manholes shall be included in the measurement of overall area of paver blocks
for the purpose of payment.

12.6.2 BEDDING SAND COURSE

The bedding sand shall consist of naturally occurring, clean, well graded sand
passing through 4.75mm sieve and suitable to concrete manufacture.

The bedding should be from either a single source or blended to achieve the following
grading.

125
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IS SIEVE SIZE % PASSING

9.52mm 100

4.75mm 95-100

2.36mm 80-100

1.18mm 50-100

600 microns 25-60

300 microns 10-60

150 microns 5-15

75 microns 0-10

Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that single-sized, gap-graded sands or

sands containing an excessive amount of fines or plastic fines are not used. The sand
particles should preferably be sharp, not rounded. The sand used for bedding shall be
free of any deleterious soluble salts or other contaminants likely to cause
efflorescence.

The sand shall be of uniform moisture content, which shall be within 4% - 8%, at the
time of spreading and shall be protected against rain when stockpiled prior to
spreading. Saturated sand shall not be used.

The bedding sand shall be spread loose in a uniform layer as per drawing.

The compacted uniform thickness shall be 50mm and within + 5mm.

Thickness variation shall not be used to correct irregularities in the base course
surface.

The spread sand shall be carefully maintained in a loose dry condition and protected
against pre-compaction both prior to and following spreading.

Any pre-compacted sand left overnight shall be loosened before further laying of paver
blocks takes place.

Sand shall be slightly spread in a loose condition to the predetermined depth only
slightly ahead of the laying of the paver block.

Any depressions in the spread sand exceeding 5mm shall be loosened, raked and re
spread before laying of paver block.

12.6.3 LAYING OF INTERLOCKING PAVER BLOCK:

Paver block shall be laid in pattern as specified under cl. 12.7 throughout the
pavement.

Once the laying pattern has been established, it shall continue without interruption
over the entire pavement surface. Cutting of blocks, the use of infill concrete or
discontinuities in laying pattern is not to be permitted in other than approved
locations.

Paving units shall be placed on the un-compacted sand bed to the nominated laying
pattern, care shall be taken to maintain the specified bond throughout the job. The
first row shall be located next to an edge restraint. Specially manufactured edge
paving units are permitted or edge units may be cut using a power saw, a mechanical
or hydraulic guillotine, bolster or other approved cutting machine. No haphazardly
broken pavers shall be used.

Paver block shall be placed with the help of spacers to achieve gaps nominally 2 to
3mm wide between adjacent paving joints. No joint shall be less than 2mm nor more

126
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

than 4mm. However it is mandatory to use 3.0mm wide spacer while laying
paver tiles so as to ensure uniform 3.0mm gap between adjacent pavers.
Frequent use of string lines shall be used to check alignment. In this regard, the
“laying face” shall be checked at least every two meter as the face proceeds. Should
the face become out of alignment, it must be corrected prior to initial compaction and
before further laying job is proceeded with.

In each row, all full units shall be laid first. Closure units shall be cut and fitted
subsequently. Such closure units shall consist of not less than 25% of a full unit.

To fill spaces between 25mm and 50mm wide, concrete having minimum 1:1:2
cement : sand : coarse aggregate mix and a strength of 40 N/Sqmm shall be used.
Within such mix the nominal aggregate size shall not exceed one third the smallest
dimension of the infill space. For smaller spaces dry packed mortar shall be used.

Except where it is necessary to correct any minor variation occurring in the laying
bond, the paver block shall not be hammered into position. Where adjustment of
position is necessary care shall be taken to avoid premature compaction of the sand
bedding.

12.6.4 INITIAL COMPACTION

After laying the paver block, they shall be compacted to achieve consolidation of the
sand bedding and brought to design levels and profiles by not less than two (2) passes
of a suitable plate compactor.

The compactor shall be a high-frequency, low amplitude mechanical flat plate

vibrator having plate area sufficient to cover a minimum of twelve paving units.

Prior to compaction all debris shall be removed from the surface.

Compaction shall proceed as closely as possible following laying and prior to any
traffic.

Compaction shall not, however, be attempted within one meter of the laying face.
Compaction shall continue until lipping has been eliminated between adjoining units.

Joints shall then be filled and re-compacted as described in Clause 12.6.5.

All work further than one meter from the laying face shall be left fully compacted at
the completion of each day’s laying.

Any blocks that are structurally damaged prior to or during compaction shall be
immediately removed and replaced.

Sufficient plate compactors shall be available at the paving site for both bedding
compaction and joint filling.

12.6.5 JOINT FILLING AND FINAL COMPACTION

As soon as practical after compaction and in any case prior to the termination of work
on that day and prior to the acceptance of any traffic, sand for joint filling shall be
spread over the pavement.

Joint sand shall pass a 2.36mm (No. 8) sieve and shall be free of soluble salts or
contaminants likely to cause efflorescence. The same shall comply with the following
grading limits:

IS SIEVE SIZE % PASSING

2.36mm 100

1.8mm 90-100

600mm 60-90

127
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

300 microns 30-60

150 microns 15-30

75 microns 10-20

The Contractor shall supply a sample of the jointing sand to be used in the contract
prior to delivering any such material to site for incorporation into the works.
Certificates of test results issued by a recognized testing laboratory confirming that
the sand sample conforms to the requirements of this specification shall be submitted
prior to supply of total volume required.

The jointing sand shall be broomed to fill the joints. Excess sand shall then be
removed from the pavement surface and the jointing sand shall be compacted with
not less than one (1) pass of the plate vibrator and joints refilled with sand to full
depth. This procedure shall be repeated until all joints are completely filled with sand.
No traffic shall be permitted to use the pavement until all joints have been completely
filled with sand and compacted.

Both the sand and paver block shall be dry when sand is spread and broomed into
the joints to prevent premature setting of the sand.

The difference in level (lipping) between adjacent units shall not exceed 3mm with not
more than 1% in any 3m X 3m area exceeding 2mm.

Pavement portions which are deformed beyond above limits after final compaction,
shall be taken out and relaid to the satisfaction of the Engineer in charge.

12.6.6 EDGE RESTRAINT USING KERB BLOCK

Edge restraints shall be done using the kerb blocks.They should be fixed properly to
withstand overriding by the anticipated traffic, thermal expansion and to prevent loss
of the laying course material from beneath the surface course. The edge restraint
should present a vertical face down to the level of the underside of the laying course.

The surface course should not be vibrated until the edge restraint, together with any
bedding or concrete haunching, has gained sufficient strength. It is essential that
edge restraints are adequately secured.

12.6.7 UNIFORM INTERLOCKING SPACES

The pavers should have uniform interlocking space of 2mm to 3mm to ensure
compacted sand filling after vibration on the paver surface.

12,6.8 SKILLED LABOUR

Skilled labor should be employed for laying blocks to ensure line and level of pavers,
desired shape of the surface and adequate compaction of the sand in the joints.

12.7 Laying Pattern:

Red and Grey Pavers in Combination of 1 red line and 2 grey lines to be laid at 45
degree to road from the ingress side.

128
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - XIII

STEEL FIBRE REINFORCED CONCRETE (SFRC) FLOORING

A. Terminology:

Steel Fibre Reinforced Concrete:

Steel fibre reinforced concrete is a concrete where the inter-granular mortar (the
origin of all cracking) is controlled by steel fibres. For a concrete with a 20mm
aggregate the distance between adjacent fibres should be kept to between 18 and
20mm when casting.

When the fibre spacing falls below 18mm, the concrete will become difficult to pump
requires modification to the mix design.

To control shrinkage in the concrete, a minimum fibre dosage of 15-20kg/m³ is

required. Fibre dosages of below this will not provide effective control of shrinkage
within the concrete.

Steel fibres act like small pieces of rebar. The fibre therefore needs an anchoring
device such as the Tabix undulated shape or the HE hooked end. A round section has
a higher modulus of rigidity when compared to flat rectangular or half-moon sections.
This will help to stiffen or increase the anchorage of the fibre into the cement paste.

Fibre diameter effects anchorage. A fibre of 1 mm diameter has tensile rupture

strength of 780 N compared to only 500 N for a 0.8 mm diameter fibre. The 1mm fibre
therefore has better anchorage.

Thinner fibres are also harder to use as they tend to reduce slump and make
pumping and finishing more difficult.

The steel fibre length should be generally between 45 and 60 mm to allow it to bridge
the cement paste between two large adjacent pieces of aggregate.

The steel wire should have a minimum tensile strength of 1000 N/mm². The fibre
should be stiff so that it is difficult to bend between two fingers and the thumb.

A stiffer steel fibre of 1 mm diameter is less prone to showing at the surface of the
finished floor as it is pushed back underneath the surface by the leveling and
finishing tools rather than being bent and springing back. Stiffer fibres also tend to
show less at saw cuts. Less flexible fibres have the advantage of not causing concrete
slump loss with the likelihood of increased shrinkage due to the addition of water or
Superplasticizer.

B. Scope of Work

The Scope of work contained in this specifications together with all the drawings
which form part of the contract documents provide the instructions necessary to
carry out that part of the contract which includes providing, laying, protection,
guarantees, testing and, maintaining up to the defects liability period for Steel
Reinforced Concrete Flooring, structures, and associated works and accessories.

C. Steel Fibre Concrete Mix

1. Ready mixed concrete shall be in accordance with Contract requirements and

meeting applicable requirements of IS- 4926 : 2003 / ASTM C 94.

2. The ready mix trucks shall be in good condition, kept clean of hardened
concrete and other foreign materials in injurious amounts. Schedule delivery
of the concrete to avoid delays in placing after mixing or holding dry mixed
materials too long in the mixer prior to adding mix water at location of pour.
The correct quantity of water shall be contained in the mixer and adding
additional water at the pour location shall not be permitted.

129
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3. Ready-mixed concrete shall be supplied having the quality in accordance with

the requirements agreed with the purchaser or Engineer in charge. Not with-
standing this, the concrete supplied shall generally comply with the
requirements of 1S:456.

4. All proportioning is to be carried out by mass except water and admixture,

which may be measured by volume.

5. Ready-mixed concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the point of

placing as rapidly as practicable by methods that will maintain the required
workability and will prevent segregation, loss of any constituents or ingress of
foreign matter or water.

6. The concrete shall be placed as soon as possible after delivery, as close as is

practicable to its final position to avoid rehandling or moving the concrete
horizontally by vibration. If required by the purchaser the producer can utilize
admixtures to slow down the rate of workability , however this does not remove
the need for the purchaser to place the concrete as rapidly as possible. The
purchaser should plan his arrangements so as to enable a full load of concrete
to be discharged within 30 min of arrival on site.

7. The general requirement is that concrete shall be discharged from the truck-
mixer within 2 hours of the time of loading. However, a longer period may be
permitted if retarding admixtures are used or in cool humid weather or when
chilled concrete is produced. The time of loading shall start from adding the
mixing water to the dry mix of cement and aggregate or of adding the cement to
the wet aggregate whichever is applicable.

8. No water from the truck water system or elsewhere shall be added after the
initial introduction of mixing water for the batch except when on arrival at the
job site the slump of the concrete is less than specified. If additional water is
added the drum shall be turned an additional 30 revolutions, minimum.

9. The adding of water reducing agents shall be performed as required and with
the control and record data as specified. Reduction in cement content shall
not be allowed because of higher strengths attained due to admixtures.

10. After checking slump, "Steel Fibers" at equal temperature to mixed concrete,
and/or super-plasticizer must be placed into mix at jobsite, with one additional
adjustment to mix, before any other quality assurance tests are performed.

Concrete mix design should aim to minimize shrinkage in the concrete and to
avoid quick setting and excessive bleeding. These conditions are quite
difficult to deal with and increase the level of risk as they require more work
and more specialized understanding of plastic concrete properties.

Specific mix design will always depend on the local materials available but
must follow the basic guidelines with respect to aggregate grading, cement, a
water/cement ratio of 0.50 -0.55, and super-plasticizer when required.

Generally, the cement content should be between 300 and 350 kg/m³ of
specified grade.

The plain concrete slump before the addition of steel fibres and
superplasticizer should be consistent at 50 mm.

D. Adding Steel Fibres into Ready Mix Concrete

Steel fibres can be added into the ready-mix truck at either the batching plant or on
the job site.

Some ready-mix suppliers have suitable facilities for loading the steel fibres into the
mixer at the batching plant. Where these do not exist, the fibres can be added at the

130
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

batching plant using conveyor belts or ‘blast’ machines similar to those used for
adding the fibres on site.

When using conveyor belts it is important to remember that the fibres land freely in
the concrete and are then mixed throughout the concrete using proper mixing
procedures.

Blast Machines have the advantage of spreading the fibres at a consistent high
velocity into the concrete mix giving an even distribution of the steel fibres into each
load of concrete.

When steel fibres are added at the batching plant or on the job site without the use of
blast machines, fibres may “ball” up in clumps. This is the result of an uneven
distribution of the fibres in the concrete and requires additional mixing time to
correct.

There are two common types of fibre balls that can form in the concrete.

1) Dry balls most often occur when the steel fibres are dumped in
clumps into the ready-mix truck resulting in balling due to the fibres
not being allowed to integrate into the concrete mix properly.

2) Wet balls or clumps of steel fibres often occur when the concrete has
been mixed too long and or too fast. Wet balls can also occur when a
small diameter steel fibre has been used at an excessive dosage rate.

Blast machines and conveyor belts should always be installed and set up for
operation prior to the arrival of the first truck mixer.

E. When adding fibres into the ready-mix trucks the following guidelines should be
used :

1. Adding steel fibres to the concrete will reduce the slump. It is important
therefore to increase the slump of the concrete with superplasticizer to above
the level required for placing the concrete prior to adding the fibres. The
amount by which the slump should be increased will depend up the type of
fibre used and the dosage rate.

2. The steel fibres should be added a rate of 30-40 kg per minute.

3. When a conveyor belt is used, the fibres need to be spread out on the belt
rather than simply heaped in a pile, to prevent clumps of fibres.

4. The maximum drum rotation speed should be 12-15 revolutions per minute.

5. Each truck mixer should be rotated at full speed for 8 – 12 minutes after
adding the fibres.

Prior to introducing the steel fibres into each ready-mix truck all the boxes required
for that load need to be counted and clearly identified so that there is no mistake in
the dosage rate or the fibre type for the load.

The addition of steel fibres into the ready-mix truck is best accomplished by using
designated labor following a laid down procedure.

Based on a concrete delivery rate of four trucks per hour using one skilled person to
load the steel fibres into the trucks, approximately 6000 kg of fibres can be added in
an eight hour day.

Using a team of two men will ensure a smoother transition of loading from one truck
to another. It will also ensure better site recording. This is particularly important on
larger pours. A team of two men should be able to load 12 – 14 tons per shift.

F. Installing a Steel Fibre Reinforced Concrete Floor

1) Prior to arriving at the jobsite the contractor should check:

131
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

a) The concrete floor specification. This should include a summary of

ground conditions, loadings, tolerances, type of floor and the type of
construction joints and joint spacing.

b) The final design document and the floor thickness, fibre type and
dosage rate (kg/m³).

Alpha, omega or delta type joints are preferred to the use of dowels, which
can be out of alignment and cause a contraction movement, restraint
and cracking.

c) All of the latest and approved for construction drawings and

specifications with all the details contained in or referred to in the
construction drawings and the concrete mix design for the floor.

2) On arrival at the jobsite the contractor should make the following

checks to the site:

a) The sub base must be as per specifications.

b) The sub base has no soft spots, puddles or rutting and should be stable
under construction traffic. If during placement of the concrete, ruts
develop from vehicle traffic, these should be repaired if possible to
minimize their effect.

c) The sub base should be damp not soaked or with standing water.

d) If required a polythene sheet can be installed beneath the slab

e) Nothing on the sub base will restrain movement in the slab causing
cracks to form.

f) Installation of all detailing is completed before the pour starts. Door

details, construction joints, detail around manholes, loading dock details
and supplemental rebar must all be in place.

g) If constructing a joint free slab (no saw cuts) the bay size should be a
maximum 2,500m² with a maximum length / width ratio of 1 to 1.5.

h) The floor thickness will be within the specified tolerance.

i) The building in which the floor is to be constructed is weather tight and

has no strong air flows in it as these can cause surface cracking or
crazing as the floors surface dries more quickly than the rest of the
concrete matrix.

3) Pouring the Steel Fibre Concrete

a) The steel fibre concrete should be fresh and no older than 60 minutes
from batch time with a maximum temperature of 25°C.

b) The concrete should be delivered at a constant and consistent rate

throughout the pour. Concrete delays should be avoided where possible
and when they do occur the condition of the previously placed concrete
should be monitored closely.

c) The concrete slump at arrival to the jobsite should be constant and

consistent within a tolerance of +/- 25mm of the specified slump.

d) If an increased slump is required, for example when pumping, the

concrete should be super-plasticized to achieve the proper slump for the
pumping operation.

e) When pumping steel fibre concrete the minimum hose size should be no
less than 125 mm in diameter with no reducers in the pump line.

132
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

f) The installation and set up of the pump must be completed before the
arrival of the first truckload of concrete.

4) Curing Concrete

b) Thoroughly and completely cure and seal as specified. Fully protect

freshly placed concrete from the elements including drying by the sun
and wind, and wash by rain.

c) Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from

concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting;
keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.

d) Slabs-on-grade shall be wet cured by use of water fogging covered by

burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz.
/sq yd dry, white burlap-polyethylene sheet or other type of moisture
retaining blanket approved by the Owner's Representative.

e) Curing methods during hot weather shall be accordance with the

provisions of ACI 305.

f) Curing methods during cold weather, protect concrete from freezing

and cure in accordance with ACI 306 requirements.

g) No curing and sealing compound or method shall be used which will

impair bond or penetration of subsequently applied finishes or
materials. Coordinate with material manufacturers.

h) Prohibit pedestrian traffic from newly placed slabs for a minimum of

24 hours. Prohibit vehicular and other construction traffic from
newly placed slabs for a minimum of 7 days.

5) Finishing the Steel Fibre Concrete

a) Concrete slabs shall be brought to proper lines of level or pitch by

tamping, screeding power floating or minimal toweling; remove humps
and hollows to produce true, even surfaces. Concrete floor slabs to
remain exposed or receive resilient tile or carpeted finish shall have steel
trowel finish.

b) Slabs to receive Polished Concrete Process flooring shall be floated level.

i. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with floats. Level, cut down high
spots, and fill low spots with cream & fines only. Repeat float passes
and leveling until surface is left with a uniform, smooth texture of
cream & fines.

ii. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first toweling and
consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel.

1. Minimize pan trowling to flatten slabs receiving Polished

Concrete process.

2. Do not over trowel surface of slab to receive Polished

Concrete process.

3. Do not smooth edges of slabs with trowel in areas to receive

Polished Concrete Process.

4. Do not allow foot traffic or miscellaneous debris on slabs

receiving Polished Concrete Process.

133
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

c) Tolerance adherence: Final work which is found to exceed tolerance

limits as specified shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to
Owner.

d) Control joints at slab-on-grade shall be sawcut to 1/3 the thickness of

the slab with a "Softcut G2000" saw at locations indicated on the
Drawings, as soon as slab surface will bear the sawcut equipment and
operator without damage (generally within 8 to 10 hours of pour). For
areas to receive Polished Concrete Process coordinate joint cutting and
filling with trades performing polishing, Project Manager and Owners
representative for appropriate timing of this task.

i. After slab has cured for 7 days, fill sawcuts with approved material.
Do not fill saw cuts with sand when slab will receive Polished Concrete
Process.

ii. In areas to receive Polished Concrete Process fill joints with backer
and sealant after polishing process is completed as directed by Project
Manager and Owners representative.

e) Saw cut construction joints to 1/3 the thickness of the slab using wet
diamond blades. Begin saw-cutting prior to time initial shrinkage cracks
develop but not more than 8 hours after placement. Completely remove
concrete and slurry resulting from saw-cutting operations from groove
and from slab surfaces. Repair raveling and spalling along joint as
directed by Architect/Engineer.

f) Place epoxy floor fill in slab voids where indicated. Strike fill area smooth
to adjacent surfaces and steel trowel finish. Protect and cure as
recommend by system manufacturer.
g) Exposed surfaces shall receive a liquid sealer/hardener/densifier applied
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise directed
by the Owner.

i. On surfaces not receiving polish concrete process, apply second coat

after 7 day cure. Do not apply second coat to concrete that is less
than 7 days old.

h) Concrete Polishing:

i. Polished Concrete Process is “cracking the cap” by diamond grinding

the concrete surface, removing imperfections left by concrete installer,
spraying on deep penetrating lithium chemistry densifier per
manufactures instructions as specified, grinding off any densifier
residue from surface of slab, begin diamond polishing to desired gloss
meter reading requirements, spraying on final deep penetrating
lithium poly silicate concrete sealer per manufacturers instructions
and finish cleaning the polished slab with common scrubber, soft
white nylon heads and neutral PH soap specifically designed to clean
Polished Concrete surfaces. The result is a polished concrete floor that
will not dust, is resistant to penetration from oils, provides an
additional 35% or more reflected light and slip coefficients that
surpass standard code requirements/ recommendations.

ii. Process may be either a proprietary system from specialty contractor

or use specified products with acceptable detailed process in
compliance with definition above and approved by Project Manager
and Owners Representative.

iii. Examination: Polishing Trade and Contractor with Representatives of

the Construction Manager and Owner shall inspect the areas to be
polished.

134
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

a. Inspect for voids, holes, gouges or other imperfections that

would be detrimental to achieving a polished finish. Holes and
voids shall be filled with epoxy compound to match (or blend
with) the adjacent surface

iv. Acceptable Diamond Grinding Methods: Equipment and techniques

defined above that .produce documented results of concrete finishes
meeting or exceeding the following: Required FF, FL, Gloss Meter
readings, light reflected percentages as measured with a specular
gloss measurement device and slip coefficient minimums as defined in
this specification. Specifically, a min diamond grind of not less then
1/64 ” or as required, will be removed from the slab surface to
eliminate imperfections left from the concrete finishing process i.e.:
float ridges including swirl patterns and black scorch marks from
concrete finishing.

v. Polishing: Process is intended to begin with polishing using a

100 grit resin bond pad and ending with a 400 grit resin bond pad or
equal to achieve specified gloss; optimal 68 reading on a gloss meter

G. Records and Tests to be made on site:

It is recommended that records of the following be maintained during the

time spent on site:

a) A general description of the site conditions and any relevant details of the sub
base prior to and during the concrete pour.

b) The weather conditions on site.

c) Details of the numbers of men placing and finishing the concrete.

d) The start and finish times for the concrete pour.

e) The start and end times of the trowelling or finish process along with the
curing compound application start and end times.

f) The timing and rate of delivery of the concrete should be monitored and
recorded throughout the concrete pour. This can be noted on the delivery
ticket from each load of concrete but it is recommended that a separate
record be also kept.

g) Any anomalies that occur during the concrete pour should be noted on the
delivery ticket as well as documented in detail elsewhere.

H. The following tests must be made during the concrete pour:

a) Slump test should be performed periodically during a concrete pour

according to the standard specifications. These tests should include the mix
design number or identification along with batch time, delivery time and
delivery ticket.

b) Fibre dosage rate must be checked by taking three samples of ten liters from
a given load of concrete. This should be done by taking ten liters at the first
¼, middle and the last ¼ of the load when discharging the concrete. These
samples should never be taken at the very beginning of discharge or at the
very end of discharge of a load of concrete. Wash away the cement paste,
sand, fines and other aggregates leaving behind the steel fibres. Fibres must
be dried and then weighed. For a ten liter volume, the weight of the extracted
can be multiplied by 100 to obtain the dosage rate per m3. The average
weight can then be compared to the specified dosage rate.

I. The following tests can or should be made during the concrete pour:

a) The condition of the sub-base to include the level and compaction or density
levels.

135
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

b) When yield and weight test are done, the concrete weight should be a
minimum of 23.5kN/m³. It should be noted that the lighter the concrete the
higher the water/cement ratio which produces more shrinkage.

c) A denser concrete mix yields less shrinkage as it has a lower water/cement

ratio.

J. Concrete Shrinkage

Steel fibres do not prevent shrinkage but help control it within acceptable limits,
provided the recommendations included here are respected. Shrinkage is a function
of the components in a given concrete mix that is effected by the density, shape, and
size of the individual components and how much water on or in them is released,
when it is released, along with other pressures brought to bear on a given piece of
concrete during its life including heat of hydration.

All concrete shrinks to some degree. If shrinkage is not desirable, concrete should not
be used.

a. Types of shrinkage

1. Thermal shrinkage.

Due to a high initial concrete temperature aggravated by heat released during

the first steps of hydration followed by a lowering of the temperature soon
after, which causes contraction in the concrete. This promotes wide early age
cracking that is not controlled by reinforcement in the concrete.

Solution: Manage concrete temperature change on site. Make sure there is

not any movement restraint to the slab.

2. Plastic shrinkage

It is caused due to early loss of vapor water from the surface of the fresh
paste of the concrete. Plastic shrinkage produces lots of short, wide cracks
like of a dried puddle in mud.

Solution: Protect the slab from early evaporation especially when there are
high flows of air over the slab.

3. Hydraulic shrinkage

Loss of vapor out of the hardened concrete which produces long term
cracking that can start as early as a few days after pouring the floor. These
cracks can open significantly over time.

Solution: Apply a state of the art curing compound or method according to

the product manufacturer’s specification. Reinforce the slab using steel fibres
high dosage rate.

K. Cracking in Concrete Floors

Industrial floors are designed primarily for practical reasons and not for
aesthetic.

Cracks that are not of a structural nature are often better left without any
remedial work.

Cracks of over 0.8mm opening in the top of slab should be repaired by resin
injection where subjected to traffic.

L. Problems faced in concreting Process:

Following are the reasons for the problems , which arises during the process
and should be checked and rectified:

136
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Problem 1 : Concrete cannot be pumped

a) Incorrect mix design. The quantity of fines smaller than 200 microns is less
than 450kg/m³.

b) Segregation of concrete in mixer truck during transit.

c) Pump line diameter reduction from 125mm down to 100mm.

d) Variations in concrete setting time

e) Inconsistent concrete slump

f) Overdose of superplasticizer.

g) Variations in transit time for the concrete.

Problem 2 : Cold joints

a) Quick setting of the concrete

b) Plant breakdown

c) Poor management of job or unskilled operatives

d) Too wide pour face

Problem 3 : Loss of edges

a) Insufficient number of finishers or inexperienced finishers waiting too long to

catch the edges

b) Incorrect mix design

Problem 4 : Settlement cracks

a) Inadequate base or sub-base.

b) Wet ground

c) Low K-value

d) Poor compaction

e) Expansive soil

Problem 5 : Cracking from construction overloads

a) Using slab for construction storage

b) Early installation of racking.

Problem 6 : Delaminating

a) Trapped bleed water or wrong dose of Superplasticizer

b) Excessive air content

c) Incorrect finishing technique that closes the surface of the concrete too soon

Problem 7 : Breakdown of joints

a) Inadequate joint type without shear transfer device.

137
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

b) Excessive saw cut joint spacing

c) Edge loading.

d) Poor finishing technique at joint edge.

e) Lack of joint filler.

f) Hard wheel traffic.

Problem 8 : Crazing

a) Overworking the surface.

b) Drying and dusting the surface with cement.

c) Drying before strength develops.

d) Thermal shock, and or wetting and drying at early age.

e) Inadequate curing.

Problem 9 : Surface Dusting

a) Excessive bleed water.

b) Poor mix design.

c) Too slow hardening.

d) Exhaust gas.

Problem 10 : Steel fibre showing

a) Mechanical trowelling began too early pulling the fibres out of the freshly
leveled concrete.

b) Too large aggregate size when compared to spacing of the fibres in the mix

c) Too long and/or too flexible fibres.

d) Incorrect mix design.

M. Field Quality Control

a) General Contractor to employ an independent testing agency to perform

tests and to submit test reports.

b) Test each continuous pour with not less than one test per day or not less
than one test for each 150 cubic yards of concrete, except as otherwise
required and approved. Each test shall consist of three specimen
cylinders, with specimen cylinders cured at the laboratory. One of the
cured specimen cylinders shall be tested at seven days and two at 28 days,
and the 28 day test shall show not less than specified strength. Each 28
day cylinder shall show not less than the designed strength and the
average of the cylinders shall show not less than 115% of the design
strength. Provide casual labor and extend full cooperation as required.

c) Sampling, molding, curing and testing of cylinders shall conform to ASTM

C 31.

d) Slump tests shall be made at the jobsite and written results shall be
submitted for approval per ASTM C 143.

138
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

e) Where concrete does not conform to these requirements the Contractor

may be required to provide the following at his own expense:

1) Complete plant inspection by testing agency.

2) Test of hardened concrete.

f) Testing for Flatness & Levelness shall be performed in conformance with

ASTM E 1155 and a written report submitted to the Owner’s
Representative.

1) Testing for Flatness and Levelness in areas to receive Polished

Concrete Process shall be in conformance with ASTM E 1155
and be preformed and applied from edge of pour to edge of pour
with written report submitted to the Owners Representative

g) Non-Compliance Test Reports: Test reports indicating non-compliance

shall be faxed immediately to all parties on the test report distribution list.
Follow with mailed hard copies.

139
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - XIV

FILLING OF JOINTS IN CONCRETE FLOOR

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Provide all labor, products and equipment required to properly install semi-
rigid filler in joints in the concrete floor slabs.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

Fill all contraction (control) and construction (formed) joints in the interior
concrete floor slab where the joints will be exposed to material handling
vehicle wheels.

1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Products and installation shall be in compliance or exceed the joint filling

criteria established in the latest ACI 302 and ACI 360 Committee published
documents.

1.04 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

Installer shall have a minimum of three (2) years experience in the

installation of semi-rigid fillers on industrial floors.

Licensed Applicators meeting state and local regulations for work covered by
this section.

Applicator shall use tools and equipment specifically designed for the
preparation and placement of industrial joint fillers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

Joint Filler Materials: Submit Manufacturer’s data describing joint filler

proposed for use on the project.

Submit Manufacturer’s Approved Applicator Certificate.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 CONTROL JOINT FILLER:

A. Provide semi-rigid, two-part, self-leveling, 100% solids content

polysulphide control and construction joint fillers intended for each
condition listed.

B. Utilize products with physical properties meeting the following minimum

values.

PROPERTY TEST METHOD PROPERTY VALUE

Tensile strength,psi (MPa) 170 (1.2)

ASTM D 412

Elongation at ultimate break, % 500 ASTM D

412

Rheological (sag in vertical displacement), No sag

ASTM C 639
at 120° F (49° C)

140
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hardness, at standard conditions, 40

ASTM C 661
(min Shore A: 15; max Shore A: 50)

Weight loss, after heat aging, % 5

ASTM C 792

Cracking and chalking, None

ASTM C 792
after heat aging

Staining None
ASTM C 510

Bond durability (primed), Passes

ASTM C 719
% movement, on glass, ±25
aluminum, and concrete

Adhesion in peel (primed), pli 20 – 25

ASTM C 794
on aluminum, concrete, and steel

C. Products:

1. Sealant should be Non-staining; colorfast Maintains appearance long

term

2. Sealant should be Easy to gun and tool Applies quickly

3. Sealant should be Capable of ±25% joint movement Expands and

contracts with building movement

4. Sealant should be Waterproof Withstands constant water immersion

Subject to compliance with requirements, utilize products manufactured

by Specguard , Sikaflex OR Equivalent

2.02 ACCESSORIES

Silica sand may be used at contractor’s option to choke-off shrinkage cracks

beneath filler. Silica must be dry.

Caution: silica on the side of the joint could impair adhesion.

The use of compressible foam backer rod is strictly prohibited in ALL saw-cut
control joints.

Compressible foam backer rod may be used in through slab construction

joints only but MUST be placed at a minimum depth of 40mm. No other use
of backer rod will be allowed. Refer to installation section and product
technical data for additional information.

Joint Cleanout and preparation should be done utilizing dust-free, diamond

blade equipments.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 PROJECT CONDITIONS

Work area should be free of obstructions and other trades.

Slab should be visibly dry and all floor scrubbing/washing activities should
be suspended at least 48 hours prior to filler installation.

3.02 TIMING OF INSTALLATION

141
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The American Concrete Institute (ACI) recommends that filling be deferred as

long as possible to allow for maximum slab shrinkage and joint widening.
Deferring filler installation as long as possible will help to minimize the
occurrence of joint filler separation due to excessive joint widening during
concrete cure (and shrinkage).

For ambient temperatures a 90-120 day slab cure is advisable. Deferring the
filling until after facility is under permanent temperature control is best, if
possible.

3.03 EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS

It is the responsibility of the installer to inspect project and joint conditions

and notify on-site management in writing of any deficiencies that might
adversely affect the quality or durability of the work performed or his contract
price.

Start of work by the installer implies acceptance of conditions.

3.04 PRE-INSTALLATION SAMPLE

Before start of actual work the applicator shall install samples to

demonstrate his intended procedures and finished product. Sample shall
include at least 25’ each of both contraction and construction joints and be
performed in the presence of on-site management.

If procedures and finished product are approved they will be considered a

standard for the entire project.

3.05 JOINT PREPARATION

Prior to installation of joint fillers, all saw-cut joints shall be thoroughly

cleaned to their full original depth. Typically the depth of saw cut should be
one third of the slab thickness. Where the original saw-cut depth exceeds
50mm, joint preparation and filling must be performed to a minimum depth
of 50mm.

Construction (formed, through slab) joints that are not saw-cut shall be
cleaned to a minimum depth of 50mm.

Preparation shall be performed using a vacuum-equipped saw that will reach

the base of the saw-cut joint or to a depth of 50mm in the case of through
slab construction joints, and shall be used in a manner that takes both joint
walls back to bare concrete, removing all saw laitance, curing compounds,
sealers, debris, etc. Joint cleaning may be performed using two cleaning
passes, one along each side of the joint. Or, if only one cleaning pass is
performed, the diamond blade width must be slightly wider than the joint to
be cleaned.

Where joints have minor edge chips, said chips shall be “squared off” and
filled along with the joint itself.

Keep prepared joints free of dust, moisture, and jobsite debris prior to filling.

3.06 CHOKING-OFF JOINT BOTTOM

The installer may, at his option, use a maximum of 6mm of silica sand placed
at the bottom of the saw-cut joints to prevent filler run-thru into the
shrinkage crack.

142
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Compressible backer rod is prohibited in saw-cut joints unless they exceed

40mm deep.

Compressible backer rod may be used in through-slab construction joints but

must be recessed at least 40mm below the slab surface.

3.07 JOINT FILLER INSTALLATION

1. Make sure sealant materials meet the design specification for the
application.

2. Check joint width for compatibility.

3. The number of joints and the joint width should be designed for a
maximum of ±25% movement.

4. The maximum width is 1/2" (13 mm) and the minimum is 1/4" (6 mm)
Maximum recommended joint depth is 2" (51mm).

5. In deep joints, the sealant depth must be controlled by Closed-Cell

Backer-Rod or Soft Backer- Rod. Where the joint depth does not permit
the use of backer-rod, use a bond breaker (polyethylene strip) to prevent
three sided adhesion.

6. To maintain the recommended sealant depth, install backer-rod by

compressing and rolling it into the joint channel without stretching it
lengthwise.

Closed-Cell Backer-Rod should be about 1/8" (3 mm) larger in diameter

than the width of the joint to allow for compression. Soft Backer-Rod
should be approximately 25% larger in diameter than the joint width. The
sealant does not adhere to it, and no separate bond breaker is required.
Do not prime or puncture the backer-rod.

7. Make sure the joint width doesn’t vary, especially at points where the saw
reenters the joint.

8. Clean and dry the saw cut reservoir before sealing the joint. Seal joints
only when the joint surfaces appear dry.

9. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for sealant sizing and

installation.

10. Make sure the sealant is lubricated, straight, vertical, and undamaged
before installation.

11. Make sure that the installation device does not stretch the sealant.

PART 4 -QUALITY ASSURANCE

4.01 JOINT FILLER DEFICIENCIES:

A. Installer is advised that significant deficiencies in workmanship,

including:
Less than proper filler depth, inadequate joint cleaning, concave filler
profile,
etc., shall be removed and properly replaced.

B. Joint filler installed to depths less than specified in the specifications

shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the General
Contractor or Owner. As each sector of work is completed the general
contractor/ inspector, using a 1/8” drill bit, shall drill through the filler
to verify filler depth. Inspector shall test drill at an approximate rate of 1
core every 500 lineal feet. Location of core and filler depth found shall be
recorded and provided to the owner prior to project completion.

PART 5 –Risks

143
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. The material contains combustible liquid and vapor.

2. May be absorbed through skin. Repeated or prolonged exposure increases the
risk of absorption.
3. May cause eye, skin or respiratory irritation.
4. Ingestion may cause irritation.
5. Reports associate repeated or prolonged occupational overexposure to solvents
with permanent brain, nervous system, liver and kidney damage.
6. INTENTIONAL MISUSE BY DELIBERATELY INHALING THE CONTENTS MAY BE
HARMFUL OR FATAL.

PART 6 –Precautions

1. KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN.

2. KEEP AWAY FROM HEAT, SPARKS AND FLAME.
3. Keep container closed when not in use.
4. Use only with adequate ventilation.
5. Avoid contact with skin, eyes and clothing.
6. Avoid breathing vapors.
7. Wash thoroughly after handling.
8. DO NOT take internally.
9. Use impervious gloves, eye protection and if the TLV is exceeded or if used in a
poorly ventilated area, use NIOSH/MSHA approved respiratory protection in
accordance with applicable federal, state and local regulations.
10. All label warnings must be observed until container is commercially cleaned or
reconditioned.
11. Empty container may contain explosive vapors or hazardous residues.

PART 7 -First Aid

1. In case of eye contact, flush thoroughly with water for at least 15 minutes.
2. SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
3. In case of skin contact, wash affected areas with soap and water.
4. If irritation persists, SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION.
5. If inhalation causes physical discomfort, remove to fresh air. If discomfort
persists or any breathing difficulty occurs or if swallowed, SEEK IMMEDIATE
MEDICAL ATTENTION.

144
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - XV

SUB GRADE – SUB BASES

15.0 Scope of work :

The work contemplated under these specification refers to:

a) Earth Work in excavation.

b) Sub Grade

c) Sub Bases - W.B.M.

Approximate quantities of materials to be used in the work are listed below for
reference:

i) Soling stone :

a) For 230 mm thick consolidated thickness 2.65 cum / 10sqm.

b) For 150 mm thick consolidated thickness 1.725 cum / 10 sqm.

ii) Stone aggregate 50mm nominal size for 75mm thick consolidated WBM:
0.975cum/ 10 sqm.

iii) Murrum for 75mm thick consolidated WBM : 0.305 cum/ 10 sqm.

15.1 Earth work in excavation :

The specifications for "Excavation, Fill and Back fill" under chapter-I, specified herein
before shall hold good as far as they are applicable.

15.2 Sub - Grade :

Preparation of sub-grade :

The surface of the formation for a width of sub-base, which shall be as per
drawing shall first be cut to and depth equal to the combine depth of sub-
base and surface courses below the proposed finished level (due allowance
being made for consolidation). It shall then be cleaned of all foreign
substances. Any ruts or soft yielding patches that appear due to improper
drainage conditions, traffic hauling or from any other cause, shall be
corrected and the subgrade dressed off parallel to finished profile.

Consolidation :

The sub-grade shall be consolidated with a power road roller of 8 to 12

tonnes. The roller shall run over the sub grade till the soil is evenly and
densely consolidated and behaves as an elastic mass (the roller shall pass a
minimum of 5 runs on the sub grade). All undulations in the surface that
develop due to rolling shall be made good with fresh material or quarry spoils
as the case may be and the sub grade is re-rolled.

Surface Regularity :

The finished surface shall be uniform and conform to the lines, grades and
typical cross sections shown in the drawings. When tested with the template
and straight edge, the variation shall be within the tolerances specified in the
table below:

Permissible Tolerances or Surface Regularity :

145
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
Longitudinal Profile Cross Profile
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---

Maximum Permissible undulation when Maximum permissible variation from

measured with a 3 meter straight edge. specified profile when measured with
a
camber templates
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
24 mm 15mm
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---

Where the surface irregularity of the subgrade falls outside the specified
tolerances, the contractor shall be liable to rectify these with fresh material or
quarry spoils as the case may be and the sub-grade rerolled to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

Measurement and Rate :

The length and width shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be
worked out in square meter, correct to two places of decimal. The rate shall
include the cost of materials and labor required for all the operations
mentioned above, unless specified otherwise.

15.3 Sub-Bases :

Water Bound Macadam sub-base with stone aggregate :

Stone aggregate of size 90mm to 45mm shall be used. This consists of clean
crushed coarse aggregate mechanically interlocked by rolling using power
road roller of 8 to 10 tones and voids thereof file width screening and blinding
materials with the assistance of water, laid on a prepared sub-grade / sub-
base.

Specifications for laying :

Quantities of materials :

Quantities of coarse aggregate, screening and blinding material required to be

stacked for 100 mm approximate compacted thickness of WBM sub base
course for 10 sqm. shall be as per table given below :

Coarse Aggregate Stone Screenings

Grading /
Blinding
Classification Size Range Net Qty. Classification Net Qty.
Material
and size

90mm to 1.2 cum to 0.27 cum to 0.08 cum to 0.10

Grading – I Type A 13.2 mm
45mm 1.28 cum 0.30 cum cum.

Note : Net Quantity = Loose Quantity measure din stack minus 7.5%.

Preparation of Foundation :

In the case of an existing un surfaced road, where new materials is to be laid,

the surface shall be scarified and reshaped to the required grade, camber and
shape as necessary.

146
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Weak places shall be strengthened, corrugations removed and depression

and pot holes made good with suitable materials, before spreading the
aggregate for WBM.

Spreading Aggregate :

The coarse aggregate shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon the prepared
base in required quantities with a twisting motion to avoid segregation. In no
case shall these be dumped in heaps directly on the area where these are to
be laid not shall be spread uniformly to proper profile by using templates
placed across the used to spread the aggregate uniformly. The level along the
longitudinal direction upon which the metal shall be laid shall be first
obtained at site to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge and these shall be
adhered to.

The surface of the aggregate spread shall be carefully trued up and all high or
low remedied by removing or adding aggregate as may be required.

The WBM sub-base shall be normally constructed in layers of 100 mm

compacted thickness. No segregation of large or fine particles shall be allowed
and the coarse aggregate as spread shall be of uniform gradation with no
pockets of fine material.

The coarse aggregate shall normally not be spread in lengths exceeding three
days average work ahead of the rolling and blending of to proceeding section.

Rolling :

Immediately following the spreading of the coarse aggregate, it shall be

compacted to the full width by rolling with wither a three wheel power roller
of 8 to 10 tonnes capacity or an equivalent vibratory roller. Initially, light
rolling is to be done which shall be discontinued when the aggregate is
partially compacted with sufficient void space in them to permit application of
screenings.

The rolling shall begin from the edges with the roller running forward and
backward and adding the screenings simultaneously until the edges have
been firmly compacted. The roller shall then progress gradually from the
edges to the center parallel to the center line of the road and overlapping
uniformly each preceding rear wheel track by one half width and shall
continue until the road metal is thoroughly keyed with no creeping of metal
ahead of the roller, Only slight sprinkling of water may be done during
rolling, if required. On super elevated curves, the rolling shall proceed from
the lower edge and progress gradually continuing towards the upper edge of
the pavement.

Rolling shall not be done when the sub-grade is soft or yielding or when the
rolling causes a wave like motion in the sub-grade. When rolling develops
irregularities that exceed 12mm when tested with a three meter straight edge
the irregular surface shall be loosened and the aggregate added to or removed
from it as required and the area rolled until it gives a uniform surface
conforming to the desired cross-section and grade. The surface shall also be
checked transversely by template for camber and any irregularities corrected
in the manner described above. In no case shall the use of screening to
make up depressions be permitted.

Application of screenings :

After the coarse aggregate has been lightly rolled to the required true surface,
screenings dry rolling shall be continued while the screenings are being
spread so that the jarring effect of the roller causes them to settle into the
voids of the coarse aggregates. The screenings shall not be dumped in piles
on the coarse aggregate but shall be spread uniformly in successive then
layers either by the spreading motion of the hand, shovels or a mechanical
spreader.

147
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The screenings shall be applied at a slow rate (in three or more applications)
so as to ensure filling of all voids. Rolling and booming shall continue with
the spreading of the screenings. Either mechanical brooms or hand brooms
or both may be used. In no case shall the screenings be applied, so fast and
thick as to form cakes, ridges on the surface making the fitting of voids
difficult, or to prevent the difficult, or to prevent the direct bearing of the
roller on the coarse aggregates. The spreading rolling and brooming of
screenings shall be performed on sections which can be completed within one
day's operation and shall continue until no more screenings can be forced
into the voids of the coarse aggregate. Damp and wet screenings shall not be
used any circumstances.

Sprinkling and Grouting :

After spreading the screening and rolling, the surface shall be copiously
sprinkled with water, swept and rolled. Hand brooms shall be used to sweep
the wet screening into the voids and to distribute then evenly. The sprinkling,
sweeping and rolling operations shall be continued and additional screenings
applied where necessary until a grout has been formed of screenings and
water that will fill all voids and form a wave of grout has been formed of
screenings and water that will fill all voids and form a wave of front ahead of
the wheels of the roller. The quantity of water to be used during the
construction shall not be excessive so as to cause damage to the sub-base or
sub-grade.

Application of Blinding Material :

After the application of screenings and rolling, a suitable blinding material

shall be applied at a uniform and slow rate in two or more successive thin
layers. After each application of blinding materials, the surface shall be
copiously sprinkled with water and the resulting slurry swept in with hand
brooms or mechanical brooms or both so as to fill the voids properly. The
surface shall then be rolled by a 8-10 tonne roller, water being applied to the
wheels in order to wash down the blinding materials that may get stuck to
the wheels. The spreading of blinding material, sprinkling of water, sweeping
with brooms and rolling shall continue until the slurry that is formed well,
after filling the voids form a wave ahead of wheels of the moving roller.

Setting and Drying :

After final compaction of the course, the road shall be allowed to cure
overnight.

Next morning, defective spits shall be filled with screenings or blinding

material, lightly sprinkled with water, if necessary and rolled. No traffic shall
be allowed till the macadam sets.

Surface Evenness :

The surface evenness of completed W.B.M. sub-base in the longitudinal and

transverse direction shall be as specified in the table given below:

Size of coarse aggregate Longitudinal profile Cross profile

Max. permissible undulation Max. permissible undulation

45-90 mm when measured with a 3 M when measured with a camber
straight edge template
15 mm 12 mm

The longitudinal profile shall be checked with a 3 m long straight edge at the
middle of each traffic lane along a line parallel to the center line of the road.
The transverse profile shall be checked with a series of three camber boards
at intervals of 10m.

148
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Rectification of Defective Construction :

Where the surface irregularity of the WBM sub-base course exceeds the
tolerances specified in the table given above or where the course is otherwise
defective due to sub-grade soil mixing with the aggregates, the layer to its full
thickness shall be scarified over the affected area, reshaped with added
material or removed and replaced with fresh material as applicable, and
recompacted. The area treated in the aforesaid manner shall not be less than
10 sqm. In no cases shall depressions be filled up with screenings and
blinding material.

Measurements and Rate :

The length and breadth shall be taken to the nearest centimeter and
thickness to the nearest half centimeter. The consolidated cubical contents
shall be calculated in cubic meters correct to two places of decimals. The rate
shall include the cost of all labor and materials involved in all the operations
described above.

Damages to the Department's Property :

Any damage to the Owners property due to negligence of the contractor while
executing the work shall be made good to the original condition at his own
cost.

149
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - XVI

WATER STOP BARS

16.1 General :

The corrugated Rubber / PVC water stops with center bulb of specified width, shall
be of approved manufacture and shall satisfy all the normal tests such as tensile
strength, elongation etc.

16.2 Sample :

A sample of Rubber / PVC water stops shall be got approved from the Engineer-in
charge before procurement of bulk quantity.

16.3 Placing in Position :

The eater stops shall be provided in available maximum length and as far as possible,
jointing shall be avoided. All the joints when unavoidable, shall be field jointed for
water tightness as per manufacturers specifications.

The eater stops shall be positioned with suitable temporary supports so as to render
adequate rigidity to the water stops while concreting. The exposed surfaces of water
stops revealed after first concreting shall be cleaned thoroughly of all the droppings,
mortar splashing, timber scantlings sticking etc. before the next pour of concrete is
taken up in hand. Any damaged caused to water stops shall be made good by the
contractor at his own cost.

16.4 Mode of measurement :

The mode of measurements shall be in running meter, of water stop actually laid
without any allowance for taps, wastage etc. measured correct to one centimeter.

Rate shall include supply, transport, fixing, welding, supporting arrangements,

cleaning etc. all as described above.

150
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - XVII

PREFORMED THERMOPLASTIC RUMBLE BARS

A. USE: A durable material that is preformed for use as a roadway rumble bar audible
and vibratory warning device.

The material must be a resilient thermoplastic product. The material must be

resistant to the detrimental effects of motor fuels, lubricants, hydraulic fluids , UV
Radiations etc. The material must be capable of being affixed to bituminous and/or
Portland cement concrete pavements by the use of the heat of a propane torch. The
material shall be available in black, white, yellow, and orange.

The material must be capable of conforming to pavement contours, breaks and faults
through the action of traffic at normal pavement temperatures. The material shall
have resealing characteristics, such that it is capable of fusing with itself when
heated with a torch.

The material must be able to be applied in temperatures down to 0ºC without any
special storage, preheating or treatment of the material before application.

B. MANUFACTURING CONTROL AND ISO CERTIFICATION: The manufacturer must

be ISO 9001:2008 certified and provide proof of current certification.

1. MATERIAL: Must be composed of an ester-modified rosin resistant to

degradation by motor fuels, lubricants , UV Radiations etc. in conjunction
with aggregates, pigments, and binders that have been factory produced as a
finished product.

2. Heating indicators: The top surface of the base material shall have regularly
spaced indents. These indents shall act as a visual cue during application
that the material has reached a molten state so satisfactory adhesion has
been achieved and a post-application visual cue that the installation
procedures have been followed.

3. Thickness: The base material must be supplied at a minimum thickness of

125 mil (3.2 mm). The rumble bar material as provided by the manufacturer
will provide a minimum pre-applied vertical height of 250 mil (6.4 mm).

4. Dimensions: The base material shall be provided in either 8 in (20 cm) or 4

in (10 cm) wide as requested by the user. The rumble bar material shall be
provided in sections 2 in (5 cm) wide. The materials provided in the rumble
bar kit shall be 3 ft (91 cm) in length.

5. Materials: The base material shall act as an adhesive layer for attaching the
rumble bar to the road surface. Upon following the manufacturer’s
installation instructions, the rumble bar material must be able to fuse to the
base material without the use of additional fasteners or adhesives. The
rumble bar shall be of a sufficient height and width to perform as described
above in section 1. The two material components shall be available from the
manufacturer as needed.

.
6. Environmental Resistance: The material must be resistant to deterioration due
to exposure to sunlight, water, salt or adverse weather conditions and impervious
to oil and gasoline.

151
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

7. Surface Treatment: The black rumble bar material shall have a surface
treatment that minimizes retroreflectivity. Rumble bar materials in white, orange,
and yellow shall be available with a surface treatment of glass beads to enhance
nighttime visibility.

C. APPLICATION:

1. Asphalt: The materials shall be applied using the propane torch method
recommended by the manufacturer. The material must be able to be applied
at ambient and road temperatures down to 0ºC without any preheating of the
pavement to a specific temperature. The material must be able to be applied
without the use of a thermometer. The pavement shall be clean, dry and free
of debris. Supplier must enclose application instructions with each
box/package.

2. Portland Concrete: The same application procedure shall be used as

described as above However, a compatible primer sealer may be applied
before application to assure proper adhesion.

D. PACKAGING: The preformed thermoplastic material shall be placed in protective

plastic film with cardboard stiffeners where necessary to prevent damage in transit.
The cartons in which packed shall be non-returnable and shall not exceed 40 in (101
cm) length and 25 in (63 cm) width, and be labeled for ease of identification. The
weight of the individual carton must not exceed 70 lb (32 kg). A protective film around
the box must be applied in order to protect the material from rain or premature aging.

E. TECHNICAL SERVICES: The successful bidder shall provide technical services as

required.

F. PERFORMANCE: The preformed thermoplastic markings shall meet state

specifications and be approved for use by the appropriate state Authority.

152
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - XVIII

FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS / BITUMINOUS ROAD

1. SCOPE OF WORK

1.01.0 The work contemplated under these specifications refers to earthwork in excavation,
formation of road embankment, Laying of Granular sub base, Wet Mix Macadam (WMM),
laying of Dense Bituminous Macadam, Bituminous concrete etc. for Road and pavement
works.

TYPICAL CROSS SECTION OF FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT

2. EARTH WORK IN EXCAVATION:

2.01.00 The specifications for “Excavation & Back filling” mentioned in civil specifications shall
be generally followed.

153
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.02.00 Forming embankment:

2.02.01 The work shall include preliminaries of clearing site, setting out and preparing the
ground and there after forming embankment for the roads, paths etc. With approved
material available from excavations under this contract (excavation paid separately
under respective items) or elsewhere, spreading in layers, watering and compacting to
the required density and lines, curves, grades, chambered cross section and dimensions
shown in the plan or as directed by the Consultant. When the embankment is to be laid
on hill sides or slopes, the existing slopes are to be ploughed deeply. If the cross slopes
are steeper than 1 in 3, steps with reverse slope shall be cut into the slopes to give
proper hold and seating to the bank as directed by the Consultant. The top 15cm of soil
shall be scarified and watered if directed and compacted to the same density as specified
for the embankment before any material is laid for the embankment work.
2.02.02 Only the approved excavated earth shall be placed in the embankments in successive
horizontal layers not exceeding 200mm, extending to the full width of the embankment
including the slopes at the level of the particular layer and 30 cm, more on both sides to
allow compaction of the full specified section.

The extra loose stuff at the edges shall be trimmed later after completion of the bank
work without extra cost leaving the correct section fully compacted.

2.02.03 Keeping the width of the bank initially less and widening it later by dumping loose earth
on the slopes shall not be permitted as the additional width and slopes will remain loose
and uncompacted. Similar procedure to extend the embankment by dumping the
material longitudinally shall also not be allowed.

Each layer of the embankment shall be watered, levelled and compacted as specified
here-in-after, before the succeeding layers are placed. The surface of the embankment
shall at all times during construction, be maintained in such a manner so as to prevent
ponding. Water to be used shall be free from all harmful elements which may cause
efflorescence etc. and approved by the Consultant.

2.02.04 If the material for embankment contains moisture less than the optimum moisture,
water shall be added in the 100mm, layers of the embankment to bring moisture
uniformly upto requirement. It the excavated material contain more than required
moisture, it shall be allowed to dry until the moisture is reduced to required extent. If
due to the wetness, the moisture content of the soil cannot be reduced to the appropriate
amount by exposure, embankment work shall be suspended till suitable conditions
prevail at no extra claim/compensation.

154
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.02.05 When loose layer is levelled manually or mechanically and moistened or dried to a
uniform moisture content suitable for maximum compaction, it shall be compacted by 8
to 10 tonne power roller (or sheep foot rollers or heavy hauling or dozing equipment) to
give the specified 95% of the proctor density, if on testing, the density is found to be less
than 95% of the proctor density, the contractor shall do additional compaction necessary
to get the specified density after adding water if required. If the density cannot be
improved by such reasonable efforts, the work may be accepted as substandard work by
the Consultant. If he thinks it is not harmful for the purpose and paid for at a reduced
rate. Test shall be made to determine the maximum density of the material to be used by
the proctor method before starting the work. Density test shall be carried out for the
embankment work during the progress of the work. One set of three core samples for
every 1000 sqm. area of each layer of embankment work shall be taken and tested. The
average density shall not be less than 90% of the proctor density, obtained in the
laboratory.

2.02.06 Arrangement for obtaining the samples and transporting the same to laboratory, shall be
made by the contractor at his own cost.

2.02.07 Embankment not accessible to rollers, such as those adjoining bridges, culverts and
other works shall be carried out independently of the main embankments and shall have
the layers placed in 150 mm to 200 mm height and each layer shall to moistened and
thoroughly compacted with mechanical or manual tamper. Before placing the next layer,
the surface of the under layer shall be moistened and scarified so as to provide a
satisfactory bond with the next layer.

2.02.08 The embankment shall be finished and dressed smooth and even, in conformity with the
alignment levels and cross section, and dimensions shown on the drawing. On curves,
section shall be provided with super elevation and increased width, is shown on the
plans as directed by the Consultant.

2.02.09 Joining of old and new embankment shall be done by stepping in an overall slope of
about 1 to 5.

2.02.10 The contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the embankment work in satisfactory
conditions at his own cost till finally accepted including making good any damage.

3. BOX CUTTING AND PREPERATION OF SUB GRADE:

3.01.00 Preparation of Sub-grade: The surface of the formation for a width of subbase which
shall be as per drg. shall first be cut to a depth equal to the combine depth of sub-base
and surface courses below the proposed finished level (due allowance being made for
consolidation). It shall then be cleaned of all foreign substances. Any ruts or soft yielding
patches that appear due to improper drainage conditions, traffic hauling or from any
other cause, shall be corrected and the sub-grade dressed off parallel to finished profile.

155
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3.02.00 Consolidation: The sub grade shall be consolidated with a power road roller of 8 to 12
tonnes. The roller shall run over the sub grade till the soil is evenly and densely
consolidated and behaves as an elastic mass (the roller shall pass a minimum of 5 runs
on the sub grade). All undulations in the surface that develop due to rolling shall be
made good with fresh material or quarry spoils as the case may be and the sub grade is
rerolled.
3.03.00 Surface Regularity: The finished surface shall be uniform and conform to the lines,
grades and typical cross sections shown in the drawings. When tested with the template
and straight edge, the variation shall be within the tolerances specified in the Table
below:

Permissible tolerances of surface regularity

_______________________________________________________________________________________
___
Longitudinal profile Cross profile
_______________________________________________________________________________________
___
Maximum permissible undulation when Maximum permissible variation from
specified
measured with a 3 metre straight edge profile when measured with a camber-
template

24 mm 15 mm
_______________________________________________________________________________________
__

3.04.00 Where the surface irregularity of the sub-grade falls outside the specified tolerances, the
contractor shall be liable to rectify these with fresh material or quarry spoils as the case
may be, and the sub grade rerolled to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

156
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

4. GRANULAR SUB–BASE

4.01.00 This work shall consist of laying and compacting well-graded material on prepared
subgrade in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. The material shall
be laid in one or more layers as sub-base as necessary according to lines, grades and
cross-sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

4.02.00 Materials:

The material to be used for the work shall be crushed aggregate and it shall be free from organic or
other deleterious constituents and conform to Grading I as given in the below Table for
coarse-graded granular sub-base materials.

TABLE: GRADING FOR COARSE GRADED GRANULAR SUB-BASE MATERIALS

_______________________________________________________________________________________
_

157
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IS Sieve Per cent by weight passing the IS Sieve

_______________________________________________________________________________________
_
Designation Grading I Grading II Grading III
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_
75.0 mm 100 - -
53.0 mm 100
26.5 mm 55-75 50-80 100
9.50 mm
4.75 mm 10-30 15-35 25-45
2.36 mm
0.425 mm
0.075 mm <10 <10 <10
_______________________________________________________________________________________
___
CBR Value (Minimum) 30 25 20

4.02.01 Physical requirements: The material shall have a 10 per cent fines value of 50 kN or
more (for sample in soaked condition) when tested in compliance with BS: 812 (Part III) .
The water absorption value of the coarse aggregate shall be determined as per IS: 2386
(Part 3); if this value is greater than 2 per cent, the soundness test shall be carried out
on the material delivered to site as per IS: 383. For Grading II and III materials, the CBR
shall be determined at the density and moisture content likely to be developed in
equilibrium conditions which be taken as being the density relating to a uniform air
voids content of 5 percent.

Note: The material passing 425 micron (0.425 mm) sieve for all the three gradings when
tested according to IS: 2720 (Part 5) shall have liquid limit and plasticity index not more
than 25 and 6 percent respectively.

4.03.00 Construction Operations

158
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Preparation of subgrade: Immediately prior to the laying of sub-base, the subgrade

already finished shall be prepared by removing all vegetation and other extraneous
matter, lightly sprinkled with water if necessary and rolled with two passes of 80-100 kN
smooth wheeled roller.

Spreading and compacting: The sub-base material shall be spread on the prepared
subgrade with the help of a motor grader of adequate capacity, its blade having hydraulic
controls suitable for initial adjustment and for maintaining the required slope and grade
during the operation or other means as approved by the Engineer.

The sub-base material shall be mixed mechanically by the mix-in-place method.

The equipment used for mix-in-place construction shall be a rotavator or similar

approved equipment capable of mixing the material to the desired degree. If so desired by
the Engineer, trial runs with the equipment shall be carried out to establish its
suitability for the work.

Moisture content of the loose material shall be checked in accordance with IS: 2720 (Part
2) and suitably by sprinkling additional water from a truck mounted or trailer mounted
water tank and suitable for applying water uniformly and at controlled quantities to
variable widths of surface or other means approved by the Engineer so that, at the time
of compaction, it is from 1 percent above to 2 percent below the optimum moisture
content corresponding to IS: 2720 (Part 8). While adding water, due allowance shall be
made for evaporation losses. After water has been added, the material shall be processed
by mechanical or other approved means like disc harrows, rotavators until the layer is
uniformly wet.

Immediately thereafter, rolling shall start. If the thickness of the compacted layer does
not exceed 100 mm, a smooth wheeled roller of 80 to 100 kN weight may be used. For a
compacted single layer upto 225 mm the compaction shall be done with the help of a
vibratory roller of minimum 80 to 100 kN static weight with plain drum or pad foot-drum
or heavy pneumatic tyred roller of minimum 200 to 300 kN weight having a minimum
tyre pressure of 0.7 MN/m2 or equivalent capacity roller capable of achieving the
required compaction. Rolling shall commence at the lower edge and proceed towards the
upper edge longitudinally for portions having unidirectional crossfall and super elevation
and shall commence at the edges and progress towards the centre for portions having
crossfall on both sides.

159
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap not less than one third of the track made
in the preceding pass. During rolling, the grade and crossfall (camber) shall be checked
and any high spots or depressions, which become apparent, corrected by removing or
adding fresh material. The speed of the roller shall not exceed 5 km per hour.

Rolling shall be continued till the density achieved is at least 98 percent of the maximum
dry density for the material determined as per IS: 2720 (Part 8). The surface of any layer
of material on completion of compaction shall be well closed, free from movement under
compaction equipment and from compaction planes, ridges, cracks or loose material. All
loose, segregated or otherwise defective areas shall be made good to the full thickness of
layer and re-compacted.

4.04.00 Surface Finish and Quality Control of Work

Control on the quality of materials and surface finishing shall be as per direction of
Engineer.

5. WET MIX MACADAM BASE

160
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

5.01.00 This work shall consist of laying and compacting clean, crushed, graded aggregate and
granular material, premixed with water, to a dense mass on a prepared sub-base as the
case may be in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. The material
shall be laid in one or more layers as necessary to lines, grades and cross-sections
shown on the approved drawings or as direction by the Engineer. The thickness of a
single compacted Wet Mix Macadam layer shall not be less than 75 mm.

5.02.00 Materials

5.02.01 Aggregates

Physical requirements: Coarse aggregates shall be crushed stone. If crushed gravel is

used, not less than 90 percent by weight of the gravel pieces retained on 4.75 mm sieve

shall have at least two fractured faces. The aggregates shall conform to the physical
requirements as given below table.

TABLE: PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF COARSE AGGREGATES FOR WET MIX MACADAM FOR
BASE COURSES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--
Test Test Method Requirements
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--
1.* Los Angeles abrasion value IS : 2386 (Part-4) 1. 40 per cent (Max.)
or
* Aggregate Impact value IS : 2386 (Part-4) 30 per cent (Max.)
or IS : 5640

2. Combined Flakiness and IS : 2386 (Part-1) 30 per cent(Max.)**

Elongation indices (Total)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
* Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of the two tests.

** To determine this combined proportion, the flaky stone from a representative sample
should first be separated out. Flakiness index is weight of flaky stone metal divided by
weight of stone sample. Only the elongated particles be separated out from the remaining
(non-flaky) stone metal. Elongation index is weight of elongated particles divided by total
non-flaky particles. The value of flakiness index and elongation index so found are added
up.

161
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

If the water absorption value of the coarse aggregate is greater than 2 per cent, the
soundness test shall be carried out on the material delivered to site as per IS: 2386 (Part-
5).

Grading requirements: The aggregates shall conform to the grading given in Table
below.

TABLE: GRADING REQUIREMENTS OF AGGREGATES FOR WET MIX MACADAM

_______________________________________________________________________________________
IS Sieve Designation Per cent by weight passing the IS sieve
_______________________________________________________________________________________
53.00 mm 100
45.00 mm 95-100
26.50 mm -
22.40 mm 60-80
11.20 mm 40-60
4.75 mm 25-40
2.36 mm 15-30
600.00 micron 8-22
75.00 micron 0-8
______________________________________________________________________________________
Materials finer than 425 micron shall have Plasticity Index (PI) not exceeding 6.

The final gradation approved within these limits shall be well graded from coarse to fine
and shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the adjacent sieve
or vice versa.

5.03.00 Construction Operations

5.03.01 Preparation of base:

The surface of the sub-base to receive the wet mix macadam course shall be prepared to
the specified lines and crossfall (camber) and made free of dust and other extraneous
material. Any ruts or soft yielding places shall be corrected in an approved manner and
rolled until firm surface is obtained if necessary by sprinkling water. Any sub-base
surface irregularities, where predominant, shall be made good by providing appropriate
type of profile corrective course

(levelling course).

5.03.02 Provision of lateral confinement of aggregates:

While constructing wet mix macadam, arrangement shall be made for the lateral
confinement of wet mix.

162
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

This shall be done by laying materials in adjoining shoulders along with that of wet mix
macadam layer.

5.03.03 Preparation of mix:

Wet Mix Macadam shall be prepared in an approved mixing plant of suitable capacity
having provision for controlled addition of water and forced/positive mixing arrangement
like pugmill or pan type mixer of concrete batching plant.

Optimum moisture for mixing shall be determined in accordance with IS: 2720 (Part-8)
after replacing the aggregate fraction retained on 22.4 mm sieve with material of 4.75
mm to 22.4 mm size. While adding water, due allowance should be made for evaporation
losses. However, at the time of compaction, water in the wet mix should not vary from
the optimum value by more than agreed limits. The mixed material should be uniformly
wet and no segregation should be permitted.

5.03.04 Spreading of mix:

Immediately after mixing, the aggregates shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon the
prepared subgrade/sub-base/base in required quantities. In no case should these be
dumped in heaps directly on the area where these are to be laid nor shall their hauling
over a partly completed stretch be permitted.

The mix may be spread either by a paver finisher or motor grader. For portions where
mechanical means cannot be used, manual means as approved by the Engineer shall be
used. The motor grader shall be capable of spreading the material uniformly all over the
surface. Its blade shall have hydraulic control suitable for initial adjustments and
maintaining the same so as to achieve the specified slope and grade.

The paver finisher shall be self-propelled, having the following features:

(i) Loading hoppers and suitable distribution mechanism

(ii) The screed shall have tamping and vibrating arrangement for initial compaction to the
layer as it is spread without rutting or otherwise marring the surface profile.

(iii) The paver shall be equipped with necessary control mechanism so as to ensure that
the finished surface is free from surface blemishes.

The surface of the aggregate shall be carefully checked with templates and all high or low
spots remedied by removing or adding aggregate as may be required. The layer may be

163
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

tested by depth blocks during construction. No segregation of larger and fine particles
should be allowed. The aggregates as spread should be of uniform gradation with no
pockets of fine materials.

5.03.05 Compaction:

After the mix has been laid to the required thickness, grade and crossfall/camber the
same shall be uniformly compacted, to the full depth with suitable roller. If the thickness
of single compacted layer does not exceed 100 mm, smooth wheel roller of 80 to 100 kN
weight may be used. For a compacted single layer upto 200 mm, the compaction shall be
done with the help of vibratory roller of minimum static weight of 80 to 100 kN or
equivalent capacity roller. The speed of the roller shall not exceed 5 km/h.

In portions having unidirectional cross fall/super elevation, rolling shall commence from
the lower edge and progress gradually towards the upper edge. Thereafter, roller should
progress parallel to the centre line of the road, uniformly over-lapping each preceding
track by at least one third width until the entire surface has been rolled. Alternate trips
of the roller shall be terminated in stops at least 1 m away from any preceding stop.

In portions in camber, rolling should begin at the edge with the roller running forward
and backward until the edges have been firmly compacted. The roller shall then progress
gradually towards the centre parallel to the centre line of the road uniformly overlapping
each of the preceding track by at least one third width until the entire surface has been
rolled.

Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing of the direction of a roller or from

any other cause shall be corrected at once as specified and/or removed and made good.

Along forms, kerbs, walls or other places not accessible to the roller, the mixture shall be
thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers or a plate compactor. Skin patching of
an area without scarifying the surface to permit proper bonding of the added material
shall not be permitted.

Rolling should not be done when the subgrade is soft or yielding or when it causes a
wave-like motion in the sub-base/base course or subgrade. If irregularities develop
during rolling which exceed 12 mm when tested with a 3 metre straight edge, the surface
should be loosened and premixed material added or removed as required before rolling
again so as to achieve a uniform surface conforming to the desired grade and crossfall. In
no case should the use of unmixed material be permitted to make up the depressions.

Rolling shall be continued till the density achieved is at least 98 per cent of the
maximum dry density for the material as determined by the method outlined in IS: 2720
(Part-8).

After completion, the surface of any finished layer shall be well-closed, free from
movement under compaction equipment or any compaction planes, ridges, cracks and
loose material. All loose, segregated or otherwise defective areas shall be made good to
the full thickness of the layer and re-compacted.

5.03.06 Setting and drying:

After final compaction of wet mix macadam course, the road shall be allowed to dry for
24 hours.

5.04.00 Opening to Traffic

Preferably no vehicular traffic of any kind should be allowed on the finished wet mix
macadam surface till it has dried and the wearing course laid.

5.05.00 Surface Finish and Quality Control of Work

Control on the quality of materials and surface finishing shall be as per direction of the
Engineer.

5.06.00 Prime Coat Over Granular Base

164
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

5.06.01 This work shall consist of application of single coat of low viscosity liquid bituminous
material to an absorbent granular surface preparatory to any superimposed bituminous
treatment or construction.

5.06.02 Materials

The choice of a bituminous primer shall depend upon the porosity characteristics of the
surface to be primed as classified in IRC: 16. These are:

(i) Surfaces of low porosity; such as wet mix macadam and water bound macadam,

(ii) Surfaces of medium porosity; such as cement stabilized soil base,

(iii) Surfaces of high porosity; such as a gravel base.

The different ranges of viscosity requirements for the primers to be used for the different
types of surfaces to be primed as classified are given in Table.

VISCOSITY REQUIREMENT AND QUANTITY OF BITUMINOUS PRIMER

___________________________________________________________________________________
Type of surface Kinematic Viscosity of Quantity per
Primer at 600 C 10 sq. m
(Centistokes) (Kg)
___________________________________________________________________________________
Low porosity 30-60 6 to 9
Medium porosity 70-140 9 to 12
High porosity 250-500 12 to 15
___________________________________________________________________________________

The bituminous primer shall be Medium Curing Cutback (MC) produced by fluxing, in an
approved manner, bitumen of 80/100 penetration grade with kerosene. The cutback
shall be free from water and shall not show any signs of separation prior to use. Slow
setting Cationic emulsion as per IS: 8887 may also be used, but the particular grade to
be used for the work shall be got approved by the Engineer.

Sampling and testing of bituminous primer shall be as per IS: 217; IS: 454 and IS: 8887.

5.06.03 Weather and Seasonal Limitations

The bituminous primer shall not be applied on a wet surface or during dust storm or
when the weather is foggy, rainy or windy. The prime coat for surface treatment should
not be applied when the temperature in the shade is less than 100C.

5.06.04 Construction

Equipment: The primer distributor shall be pneumatic tyred self-propelled pressure

distributor equipped for spraying the material uniformly at the specified rates and
temperatures. Spraying by manual methods may be allowed for small areas at the
discretion of the Engineer. Power broom and/or blowers may be supplemented by hand
brooms as directed by the Engineer.

Preparation of road surface: The surface to be primed shall be swept clean, free from
dust and shall be dry. It shall be shaped to the specified grades and section. It shall also
be free from ruts, any other irregularities and segregated materials. Minor depressions
and potholes may be ignored until the surface is primed, after which they shall be
patched with a suitable premix material prior to the surface treatment.

Application of bituminous primer: The bituminous primer shall be sprayed/distributed

uniformly over the prepared dry surface using self-propelled sprayer equipped with self-
heating arrangement, suitable pump, adequate capacity compressor and spraying bar
with nozzles having constant volume or pressure system capable of supplying primer at
specified rates and temperatures so as to provide a uniformly unbroken spread of primer.
If the surface to be primed is so dry or dusty as to cause freckling of bituminous
material, it shall be lightly and uniformly sprinkled with water immediately prior to

165
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

priming; however, the bituminous material shall not be applied till such time as no
surface water is visible. The primer shall be applied at the rate as specified in above
Table.

Temperature of application of a primer need only be high enough to permit the primer to
be effectively sprayed through the jets of the spray bar and to cover the granular base
surface uniformly in the desired quantity.

The desirable range of temperatures at the time application of MC-30, MC-70 and MC-
250 grades shall be 30 to 550 C; 50 to 80 0C and 75 to 100 0C respectively. For a
bituminous emulsion primer, the range of spraying temperature may be 20 to 60 0C.

Following the application of bituminous material, the surface shall be allowed to cure for
at least 24 hours or for any other period so as to allow penetration into the base course
and aeration of volatiles from the primer material. If it is not absorbed within 24 hours
after application, sand shall be spread over the surface to blot the excess primer. Care
shall be taken to prevent over-priming; any pools of excess primer left on any part of the
surface shall be swept out over the adjacent surface before spreading sand.

The primer coat shall be applied only on the topmost water bound macadam or any
granular layer, over which the bituminous base course/wearing course, is to be laid.

Curing of primer and opening to traffic: It shall always be ensured that while opening
to any kind of traffic, the primed surface is fully cured and is not sticky to avoid being
picked up by traffic. Normally, the primed surface shall be allowed to cure for not less
than 24 hours and during this period no traffic of any kind shall be permitted.

Laying of bituminous course over primed surface: Bituminous base course or

wearing course shall be laid over the primed water bound macadam, wet mix macadam
or any other granular base course, in the usual manner as per relevant Specification for
the same including the requirement of tack coat as per Clause 6.04.03.

5.06.05 Quality Control of Work

Control on the quality of materials and work shall be as per directions of the Engineer.

6. DENSE BITUMINOUS MACADAM

D.B.M.

166
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

6.01.00 This work shall consist of construction in a single course of 50 to 100 mm thick
base/binder course to the following Specifications on a previously prepared base.

6.02.00 Materials

6.02.01 Bitumen: The bitumen shall be paving bitumen of Grade VG-10, VG-20, VG- 30, VG-40
as per Indian Standard Specifications for “Paving Bitumen” IS: 73- 2006.

6.02.02 Coarse aggregates: The coarse aggregates shall consist of crushed stone, crushed
gravel/shingle or other stones. They shall be clean, strong, durable, of fairly cubical
shape and free from disintegrated pieces, organic or other deleterious matter and
adherent coating. The aggregates shall preferably be hydrophobic and of low porosity. If
hydrophilic aggregates are to be used, the bitumen shall be treated with antistripping
agents of approved quality in suitable doses. The aggregates shall satisfy the physical
requirements as given below in table.

TABLE: PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF AGGREGATES FOR DENSE BITUMINOUS MACADAM

_________________________________________________________________________________________
S.No Test Test Method Requirement
_________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Los Angeles Abrasion Value * IS: 2386 (Part-4) 40 per cent Maximum

2. Aggregate Impact value * IS: 2386 (Part-4) 30 per cent Maximum

3. Flakiness and Elongation** IS: 2386 (Part-1) 30 per cent Maximum

Indices (Total)

4. Coating and Stripping of Bitumen AASHTO T 182 Minimum retained

Aggregate Mixtures coating 95 per cent
5. Soundness IS: 2386 (Part-5)
(i) Loss with Sodium Sulphate 5 cycles 12 per cent Maximum
(ii) Loss of Magnesium Sulphate 5 cycles 18 per cent Maximum
6. Water absorption IS: 2386 (Part-3) 2 per cent Maximum

* Aggregates may satisfy requirements of either of the two tests.

** To determine this combined proportion, the flaky stone from a representative sample
should first be separated out. Flakiness index is weight of flaky stone metal divided by
weight of stone sample. Only the elongated particles be separated out from the remaining
(non-flaky) stone metal. Elongation index is weight of elongated particles divided by total
non-flaky particles. The value of flakiness index and elongation index so found are added
up.

If crushed gravel/shingle is used, not less than 90 per cent by weight of the
gravel/shingle pieces retained on 4.75 mm sieve shall have at least two fractured faces.
The portion of the total aggregate passing 4.75mm sieve shall have a sand equivalent
value of not less than 50 when tested in accordance with the requirement of IS: 2720
(Part-37).

The plasticity index of the fraction passing the 425 micron sieve shall not exceed 4.

6.02.03 Fine aggregates: Fine aggregates shall be the fraction passing 2.36 mm sieve and
retained on 75 micron sieve, consisting of crusher-run screening, gravel, sand or a
mixture of both. These shall be clean, hard, durable, uncoated, dry and free from any
injurious, soft or flaky pieces and organic or other deleterious substances.

6.02.04 Filler: Filler shall consist of finely divided mineral matter such as rock dust, hydrated
lime or cement as approved by the Engineer.

The filler shall be graded within the following limits:

_____________________________________________________________________________________
IS Sieve Per cent passing by weight
_____________________________________________________________________________________
600 Micron 100

167
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

300 Micron 95 - 100

75 Micron 85 – 100
____________________________________________________________________________________

The filler shall be free from organic impurities and have a Plasticity Index not greater
than 4. The Plasticity Index requirement shall not apply if filler is cement or lime. When
the coarse aggregate is gravel, 2 per cent by mass of total aggregate of portland cement
or hydrated lime shall be added and the percentage of fine aggregate reduced
accordingly. Cement or hydrated lime is not required when the gravel is limestone.

6.02.05 Aggregate gradation: The combined coarse and fine aggregates and filler (when used)
shall produce a mixture to conform to the grading set forth in Table below.

Table: AGGREGATE GRADATION FOR DENSE BITUMINOUS MACADAM

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Sieve Designation Percentage passing the sieve by
weight
_____________________________________________________________________________________
37.5 mm 100
26.5 mm 90-100
13.2 mm 56-80
4.75 mm 29-59
2.36 mm 19-45
300 micron 5-17
75 micron 1-7
_____________________________________________________________________________________

The aggregate mix, as used in work, shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the
high limit on the adjacent sieve but shall be well graded.

6.03.00 Mix Design

6.03.01 Requirement of mix: Apart from conformity with grading and quality requirements of
individual ingredients, the mix shall meet the requirements set out in Table below.

Table: REQUIREMENTS OF DENSE BITUMINOUS MACADAM MIX

_______________________________________________________________________________________
_
S. No. Description Requirements
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_
1. Marshall stability (ASTM Designation-D-1559) 820 kg (1800 lb)
determined on Marshall specimens compacted minimum
by 75 compaction blows on each end

2. Marshall flow (mm) 2-4

3. Per cent Air voids 3-5
4. Minimum voids in mineral aggregates (VMA) 10 percent-
12percent
5. Per cent voids in mineral aggregates filled by bitumen (VFB) 65-75

6. Binder content percent by weight of total mix Not less than 4.0%
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_

6.03.02 Binder content: The binder content shall be so fixed as to achieve the requirements of
the mix set out in the above Table. Marshall method for arriving at the binder content
shall be adopted, replacing the aggregates retained on 26.5 mm sieve by the aggregates
passing 26.5 mm sieve and retained on 22.4 mm sieve.

6.03.03 Job mix formula: The Contractor shall intimate to the Engineer in writing, At least 20
days before the start of the work, the job mix formula proposed to be used by him for the
work and shall give the following details:

i) Source and location of all materials;

168
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ii) Proportions of all materials expressed as follows where each is applicable;

(a) Binder, as percentage by weight of total mix;

(b) Coarse aggregate/Fine aggregate/Mineral filler as percentage by weight of total

aggregate including mineral filler.

iii) A single definite percentage passing each sieve for the mixed aggregate;

iv) The results of tests enumerated in above Table as obtained by the Contractor;

v) Test results of physical characteristics of aggregates to be used;

vi) Mixing temperature and compacting temperature.

While working out the job mix formula, the Contractor shall ensure that it is based on a
correct and truly representative sample of the materials that will actually be used in the
work and that the mix and its different ingredients satisfy the physical and strength
requirements of these Specifications.

Approval of the job mix formula shall be based on independent testing by the Engineer
for which samples of all ingredients of the mix shall be furnished by the Contractor as
required by the former.

The approved job mix formula shall remain effective unless and until modified by the
Engineer. Should a change in the source of materials be proposed, a new job mix formula
shall be established and got approved from the Engineer before actually using the
materials.
6.03.04 Permissible variation from job mix formula: It shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor to produce a uniform mix conforming to the approved job mix
formula subject to the permissible variations of the individual percentages of
the various ingredients in the actual mix from the job mix formula to be used
within the limits as specified in below Table.

TABLE: PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM THE JOB MIX FORMULA

_______________________________________________________________________________________
___
S. No. Description of Ingredients Permissible variation by
weight
of totalmix- in per cent
_______________________________________________________________________________________
___
1. Aggregate passing 13.2 mm sieve and larger sieves +8
2. Aggregate passing 11.2 mm sieve and 5.6 mm sieve +7
3. Aggregate passing 2.80 mm sieve and 1.40 mm sieve +6
4. Aggregate passing 710 micron sieve and 355 micron sieve +5
5. Aggregate passing 180 micron sieve +4
6. Aggregate passing 90 micron sieve +2
7. Binder +
0.3
8. Mixing temperature +
100C
_______________________________________________________________________________________
___

6.04.00 Construction Operations

6.04.01 Weather and seasonal limitations: The work of laying shall not be taken up during
rainy or foggy weather or when the base course is damp or wet, or during dust storm or
when the atmospheric temperature in shade is 100C or less.

6.04.02 Preparation of base: The base on which Dense Bituminous Macadam is to be laid shall
be prepared, shaped and conditioned to the specified lines, grades and cross sections as
indicated in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The surface shall be thoroughly
swept clean free from dust and foreign matter using mechanical broom and dust

169
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

removed or blown off by compressed air. In portions where mechanical means cannot
reach, other approved method shall be used. A priming coat where needed, shall be
applied as per direction of the Engineer.

6.04.03 Tack coat

The surface on which the tack coat is to be applied shall be cleaned of dust and any
extraneous material before the application of the binder, by using a mechanical broom or
any other approved equipment/method as specified by the Engineer.

Binder may be heated to the temperature appropriate to the grade of cutback used and
approved by the Engineer and sprayed on the base at the rate specified in below Table.
The normal range of spraying temperature for a bituminous emulsion shall be 20 0 C - 60
0 C and for a cutback 50 0C – 80 0C if RC-70/MC-70 grade is used. It shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor to carefully handle the inflammable bituminous cutback

material so as to safeguard against any fire mishap. The binder shall be applied
uniformly with the aid of either self-propelled or towed bitumen pressure sprayer with
self– heating arrangement and spraying bar with nozzles having constant volume or
pressure system, capable of spraying bitumen at specified rates and temperature so as to
provide a uniformly unbroken spread of bitumen. Work should be planned so that no
more than the necessary tack coat for the day’s operation is placed on the surface. After
application and prior to succeeding construction allow the tack coat to cure, without
being disturbed, until the water/cutter has completely evaporated, as determined by the
Engineer.

TABLE: RATE OF APPLICATION OF TACK COAT

_______________________________________________________________________________________
___
Type Surface Quantity of liquid
Bituminous material in
kg per 10 sq. m. area
_______________________________________________________________________________________
___
i) Normal bituminous surfaces 2.0 to 2.5
ii) Dry and hungry bituminous surfaces 2.5 to 3.0
iii) Granular surfaces treated with primer 2.5 to 3.0
iv) Non bituminous surfaces

a) Granular base (not primed) 3.5 to 4.0

b) Cement concrete pavement 3.0 to 3.5

_______________________________________________________________________________________
___

170
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Note:

There is no need to apply a tack coat on a freshly laid bituminous course if the
subsequent bituminous course is overlaid the same day without opening it to traffic.

6.04.04 Preparation of mix: Dense Bituminous macadam mix shall be prepared in a hot mix
plant of adequate capacity and capable of yielding a mix of proper and uniform quality
with thoroughly coated aggregates.

Hot mix plant shall be of suitable capacity preferably of batch mix type. Total system for
crushing of stone aggregates and feeding of aggregate fractions in required proportions to
achieve the desired mix, deployed by the Contractor must be capable of meeting the
overall Specification requirements under stringent quality control. The plant shall have
the following essential features:

General

(a) The plant shall have coordinated set of essential units capable of producing uniform
mix as per the job mix formula.

(b) Cold aggregate feed system with minimum 4 bins having belt conveyor arrangement
for initial proportioning of aggregates from each bin in the required quantities. In order to
have free flow of fines from the bin, it is advisable to have vibrator fitted on bin to
intermittently shake it.

(c) Belt conveyers below each bin should have variable speed drive motors.

There should be electronic load sensor on the main conveyer for measuring the flow of
aggregates.

(d) Dryer unit with burner capable of heating the aggregate to the required temperature
without any visible unburnt fuel or carbon residue on the aggregate and reducing the
moisture content of the aggregate to the specified minimum.

(e) The plant shall be fitted with suitable type of thermometric instruments at
appropriate places so as to indicate or record/register the temperature of heated
aggregate, bitumen and mix.

(f) Bitumen supply unit capable of heating, measuring/metering and spraying of bitumen
at specified temperature with automatic synchronisation of bitumen and aggregate feed
in the required proportion.

(g) A filler system suitable to receive bagged or bulk supply of filler material and its
incorporation to the mix in the correct quantity wherever required.

(h) A suitable built-in dust control system for the dryer to contain/recycle permissible
fines into the mix. It should be capable of preventing the exhaust of fine dust into
atmosphere for environmental control wherever so specified by the Engineer.

(i) The plant should have centralised control panel/cabin capable of pre-setting,
controlling/synchronising all operations starting from feeding of cold aggregates to the
discharge of the hot mix to ensure proper quality of mix. It should have indicators for
any malfunctioning in the operation.

(j) Every hot mix plant should be equipped with siren or horn so that the operator may
use the same before starting the plant every time in the interest of safety of staff.

The temperature of binder at the time of mixing shall be in the range of 1500C to 1630C
and that of the aggregate in the range of 1550C-1630C provided that the difference in
temperature between the binder and aggregate at no time exceeds 140C.

Mixing shall be thorough to ensure that a homogeneous mixture is obtained in which all
particles of the aggregates are coated uniformly, and the discharge temperature of mix
shall be between 130 0C to 160 0C.

171
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The mixture shall be transported from the mixing plant to the point of use in suitable
tipper vehicles. The vehicles employed for transport shall be clean and be covered in
transit if so directed by the Engineer. Any tipper causing excessive segregation of
materials by its spring suspension or other contributing factors or that which shows
undue delay shall be removed from the work unit such conditions are corrected.

6.04.05 Spreading:

The mix transported from the hot mix plant to the site shall be spread by means of a self-
propelled paver with suitable screeds capable of spreading, tamping and finishing the
mix to specified grade, lines and crosssection.

However, in restricted locations and in narrow widths where the available equipment
cannot be operated in the opinion of the Engineer, he may permit manual laying of the
mix. Similarly for smaller jobs, mechanical paver may be used with the approval of the
Engineer.

The temperature of mix at the time of laying shall be in the range of 120 0-160 0C.

Mixes with a temperature of less than 120 0 C shall not be put into paver spreader.

Longitudinal joints and edges shall be constructed true to the delineating lines parallel to
the centre line of the road. Longitudinal and transverse joints shall be offset by at least
250 mm from those in the lower courses and the joint on the top most layer shall not be
allowed to fall within the wheel path. All transverse joints shall be cut vertically to the
full thickness of the previously laid mix with asphalt cutter and the surface painted with
hot bitumen before placing fresh material. Longitudinal joints shall be preferably hot
joints. Cold longitudinal joints shall be properly heated with joint heater to attain a
suitable temperature of about 800C laying of adjacent material.

6.04.06 Rolling: After spreading the mix by paver, it shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling
with a set of rollers moving at a speed not more than 5 km/h, immediately following
close to the paver. Generally the initial or breakdown rolling shall be done with 80-100
kN static weight smooth-wheeled roller. The intermediate rolling shall be done with 80-
100 kN static weight vibratory roller or with a pneumatic tyred roller of 150-250 kN
weight having a tyre pressure of at least 0.7 MPa. The finish rolling shall be done with
60-80 kN weight smooth wheeled tandem roller. All the compaction operations, i.e.,
breakdown rolling and intermediate rolling can be accomplished by using vibratory
tandem roller of 80-100 kN static weight. During initial breakdown rolling and finish
rolling, no vibratory compaction shall be resorted to. The exact pattern of rolling shall be

172
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

established after trial compaction as approved by the Engineer. Any displacement

occurring as a result of reversing of the direction of a roller or from any other cause shall
be corrected at once as specified and/or removed and made good. The rollers shall not be
permitted to stand on pavement which has not been fully compacted and where
temperature is still more than 700C. Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent
dropping of oil, grease, petrol or other foreign matter on the pavement either when the
rollers are operating or standing.

The wheels of roller shall be kept moist to prevent the mix from adhering to them. But in
no case shall fuel/lubricating oil be used for this purpose nor excessive water poured on
the wheels. Rolling shall commence longitudinally from edges and proceed towards the
centre, except that on super elevated and unidirectional cambered portions, it shall
progress from the lower to upper edge parallel to the centre line of the pavement. The
roller shall proceed on the fresh material with rear or fixed wheel leading so as to
minimise the pushing of the mix and each pass of the roller shall overlap the preceding
one by half the width of the rear wheel.

Rolling shall be continued till the density achieved is at least 98 per cent of that of
laboratory Marshall specimen (compacted as defined in Table requirements of Dense
Bituminous Macadam mix) and all roller marks are eliminated. Skin patching of an area
that has been rolled will not be permitted.
Rolling operations shall be completed in all respects before the temperature of the mix
falls below 1000C.

6.05.00 Opening to Traffic

Traffic may be allowed after completion of the final rolling when the mix has cooled down
to the surrounding temperature. The Dense Bituminous Macadam shall be provided with
an appropriate wearing course as early as possible prior to regular opening to normal
traffic and/or impending rain.

6.06.00 Surface Finish and Quality Control of Work

Control on the quality of materials & surface finishing shall be as per direction of the
Engineer.

7. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE

7.01.00 This work shall consist of constructing in a single layer, bituminous concrete (asphaltic
concrete) of thickness 25-100 mm on previously prepared bituminous course to the
requirements of these Specifications.

7.02.00 Materials

173
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

7.02.01 Bitumen: The bitumen shall be paving bitumen of Grade VG-10, VG 20, VG- 30, VG-40
as per Indian Standard Specifications for “Paving Bitumen” IS: 73- 2006.

7.02.02 Coarse aggregates: The coarse aggregates shall consist of crushed stone, crushed
gravel/shingle or other stones. They shall be clean, strong, durable, of fairly cubical
shape and free from disintegrated pieces, organic or other deleterious matter and
adherent coating. The aggregates shall preferably be hydrophobic and of low porosity. If
hydrophilic aggregates are to be used, the bitumen shall be treated with antistripping
agents of approved quality in suitable doses. The aggregates shall satisfy the physical
requirements as indicated in clause 6.02.02.

If crushed gravel/shingle is used, not less than 90 per cent by weight of the
gravel/shingle pieces retained on 4.75 mm sieve shall have at least two fractured faces.
The portion of the total aggregate passing 4.75mm sieve shall have a sand equivalent
value of not less than 50 when tested in accordance with the requirement of IS: 2720
(Part-37).

The plasticity index of the fraction passing the 425 micron sieve shall not exceed 4.
7.02.03 Fine aggregates: Fine aggregates shall be the fraction passing 2.36 mm sieve and
retained on 75 micron sieve, consisting of crusher-run screening, gravel, sand or a
mixture of both. These shall be clean, hard, durable, uncoated, dry and free from any
injurious, soft or flaky pieces and organic or other deleterious substances.
7.02.04 Filler: Filler shall consist of finely divided mineral matter such as rock dust, hydrated
lime or cement as approved by the Engineer.

The filler shall be graded within the following limits:

_______________________________________________________________________________________
___
IS Sieve Per cent passing by weight
_______________________________________________________________________________________
___
600 Micron 100
300 Micron 95 - 100
75 Micron 85 – 100
_______________________________________________________________________________________
___

The filler shall be free from organic impurities and have a Plasticity Index not greater
than 4. The Plasticity Index requirement shall not apply if filler is cement or lime. When
the coarse aggregate is gravel, 2 per cent by mass of total aggregate of portland cement
or hydrated lime shall be added and the percentage of fine aggregate reduced
accordingly.

Cement or hydrated lime is not required when the gravel is limestone.

7.02.05 Aggregate gradation: The combined coarse and fine aggregates and filler (when used)
shall produce a mixture to conform to the grading set forth in Table below.

Table: AGGREGATE GRADATION FOR BITUMINOUS CONCRETE

_______________________________________________________________________________________
__
Sieve Designation Percentage passing the sieve by
weight
_______________________________________________________________________________________
__
26.5 mm 100
19 mm 90 - 100
9.5 mm 56 - 80
4.75 mm 35 - 65
2.36 mm 23 - 49
300 micron 5 - 19
75 micron 2–8
_______________________________________________________________________________________
__

174
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The aggregate mix, as used in work, shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the
high limit on the adjacent sieve but shall be well graded.

7.03.00 Mix Design

7.03.01 Requirement of mix: Apart from conformity with the grading and quality requirements of
individual ingredients, the mix shall meet the requirements set forth in Table below.

TABLE: REQUIREMENTS OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE MIX

_______________________________________________________________________________________
__
S. No. Description Requirements
_______________________________________________________________________________________
__
1. Marshall stability (ASTM Designation: D-1559) 820 kg
(1800 lb)
determined on Marshall specimens compacted Minimum
by 75 compaction blows on each end

2. Marshall flow (mm) 2-4

3. Per cent voids in mix 3-5
4. Per cent voids in mineral aggregates (VMA) Minimum 11-13 per
cent

5. Per cent voids in mineral aggregates filled by bitumen 65-75

(VFB)

6. Binder content, per cent by weight of total mix Minimum 4.5

7. Water Sensitivity (ASTM D1075) Loss of stability on Min 75 per
cent
immersion in water at 60o C retained
strength

8. Swell Test (Asphalt Instt. MS-2, No. 2) 1.5 per cent Max
_______________________________________________________________________________________
___

7.03.02 Binder content: The binder content shall be so fixed as to achieve the requirements of
the mix set forth in above Table. Marshall method for arriving at the binder content shall
be adopted.

7.03.03 Job mix formula: Clause 6.03.03 shall apply except that the requirement of Bituminous
Concrete mix shall be as per above table.

7.03.04 Permissible variations from the job mix formula: The Contractor shall have the
responsibility of ensuring proper proportioning of materials in accordance with the
approved job mix formula and producing a uniform mix.

The permissible variations of individual percentages of various ingredients in the actual

mix from the job mix formula may be within the limits as specified in clause 6.03.04.

7.04.00 Construction Operations

7.04.01 Weather and seasonal limitations: The work of laying shall not be taken up during
rainy or foggy weather or when the base course is damp or wet, or during dust storm or
when the atmospheric temperature in shade is 10oC or less.

7.04.02 Preparation of base: The base on which bituminous concrete is to be laid shall be
prepared, shaped and conditioned to the specified levels, grade and cross fall (camber) as
per drawing.

The surface shall be thoroughly swept clean free from dust and foreign matter using
mechanical broom and dust removed by mechanical means or blown off by compressed
air. In portions where mechanical means cannot reach, other approved method shall be
used.

175
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

7.04.03 Tack coat: A tack coat complying with Clause 6.04.03 shall be applied over the base.

7.04.04 Preparation of mix: Clause 6.04.04 shall apply.

7.04.05 Spreading: Clause 6.04.05 shall apply.

7.04.06 Rolling: Clause 6.04.06 shall apply.

7.05.00 Opening to Traffic

Traffic may be allowed immediately after completion of the final rolling when the mix has
cooled down to the surrounding temperature.
7.06.00 Surface Finish and Quality Control of Work

Control on the quality of materials and surface finishing shall be as per direction of the
Engineer.

176
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - XIX

ELECTRO MECHANICAL BOOM BARRIER

To Provide and fix Electromechanical barrier suitable for heavy use, consisting of a 24 V DC
irreversible gear motor with encoder acting as an automatic limit switch and anti-crushing
device which, by means of the learning operation, recognizes the mechanical stops and,
during the following operations it controls speed and deceleration; key-operated release
system; drive linkage; arm balancing springs and electronic microprocessor based control and
monitoring equipment with built in 433 MHz radio receiver, with optional buffer batteries for
emergency power supply, housed in a press bent steel sheet enclosure painted with orange
RAL 2000 epoxy coating with provision for the installation of a rectangular silver anodized
aluminium arm measuring 30x100x4700 mm (usable opening 4.5 m). The arm may be
equipped with accessories such as a fixed ground mounted base (consisting of a painted steel
vertical mounting) or mobile base (fixed directly under the arm); an aluminium skirting to
partly cover the area under the arm and/or a pivot for installations with opening heights
lower than the length of the arm used (such as in underground car parks).

Main system functions should consist of:

- Buffer batteries for emergency power supply

- 24 v power supply for flashing light

- Incomplete gate closing operation warning light

- Courtesy light

- Limit switch provision

- Obstruction detection system which causes the gate to stop or reverses operation when
an obstruction is detected (ods system)

- Speed and braking/slowdown adjustments

- Open, partly open, close, automatically close with timer, inching and hold-to-run
operation controls

- Stop and reverse operation safety devices

- Antifreeze system for maintaining motor efficiency even at low temperatures (NIO system)

Technical features:

Overall dimensions: 270 x 245 x 1000 mm

177
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Max. arm length: 4.7 m

Max. opening width: 4.5 m
Power supply: 230 V AC - 50 Hz
Torque: 45 Nm
Opening time: adjustable from 2 to 6 s/90°
Protection rating: IP 45
Operating temperature: -20°C/+55°C
Duty class: heavy duty

178
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - XX

ACRYLIC BASE EXTERIOR TEXTURED AGGREGATED COATING

I. SCOPE, USE AND CLASSIFICATION

A. SCOPE: This specification covers an acrylic-based texture coating intended for use
on exterior wall and ceiling surfaces such as wallboard, primed wood, primed metal,
plaster, tilt up wall panels, stucco and masonry. It may be applied to previously
primed wood, plaster, tilt up wall panels, masonry or dry wall; surfaces that have
been properly prepared as specified in tender BOQ specifications. The texture
provides excellent abuse-resistance, mold and mildew resistance while covering
unsightly appearance of surface imperfections.

B. USE: Glossy finishes should be dulled either by sanding or abrading prior to

application of the texture. All new surfaces should be primed with a primer with
mildew and algae resistant agents. Containers shall have labels, giving adequate
use instructions, firmly secured to each container.

C. CLASSIFICATION: The texture covered by this specification shall be an aggregated

coating of any of the following types:

Type I – Smooth/Fine
Type II - Medium and/or Medium Coarse
Type III - Coarse

All tinted textures supplied to purchaser must meet all requirements of this specification,
except pigment.

II. REQUIREMENTS

A. MATERIALS The texture shall be formulated from materials as specified herein.

Materials not specified shall be selected by the supplier and shall be subject to all
the provisions of this specification. The texture shall be free from material which is
known to be toxic to personnel under normal conditions.

1. PIGMENT. Suitable light-fast and alkali resistant pigments shall be used.

2. VEHICLE. The vehicle shall be a mechanically stable aqueous dispersion of

acrylic resin with excellent performance characteristics.

3. RESTRICTED METALS: The texture shall comply with the latest

requirements of the Indian Standards for
maximum allowable restricted metals content.

4. VOC COMPLIANCE. The texture shall comply with the latest requirements
of the Indian Standards for maximum allowable VOC content at the time of
purchase.

B. QUANTITATIVE REQUIREMENTS. The paint shall conform to the quantitative

requirements as specified in Table I.

179
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE I. QUANTITATIVE REQUIREMENTS

Tolerance
Requirements
Characteristic Minimum Maximum
1. Dry time: Set-to-Touch, hours 3 4
2. Dry-to-Recoat, hours 12 16
3. Consistency, KU. 110 135 110 135
4. Water Vapor Permeability (Wet Cup Method)* 15 0
5. Resistance to Growth of Mold* - 0 0 0

*In order to confirm compliance with this requirement(s) the vendor shall submit
either a formal report from an independent laboratory or a confidential,
notarized, legally-binding manufacturer’s report indicating the method used
and the laboratory results obtained for the specific brand submitted for
certification.

C. QUALITATIVE REQUIREMENTS:

1. COLOR. The colour of the texture specified in the contract or

purchase order shall match that of the standard colour chip. If a
colour other than white is required, the colour shall match that of the
standard colour chip submitted by the purchaser with the bid.

2. CONDITION IN CONTAINER. The texture, when tested, shall be free

from extraneous material and shall show no more pigment settling or
caking than can be reincorporated into a smooth homogenous state.
In a freshly opened container, there shall be no rusting of the
container.

3. STORAGE STABILITY IN A PARTIALLY FULL CONTAINER. The

texture shall show no skinning after 48 hours when tested. After an
additional 14 days, at 50° C., the same sample shall show no
skinning, livering, curdling, or gummy sediment. It shall mix readily
to a homogenous state.

4. STORAGE STABILITY IN UN-OPENED CONTAINER. All containers

shall have sufficient preservatives to prevent spoilage for one year.

5. ODOR. The odor shall not be putrid during or after application.

6. ALKALI RESISTANCE: The dry texture, tested as in III. A , shall

show no change in hue and no evidence of blistering softening or
cracking.

7. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET (MSDS). An MSDS clearly

identifying the product, filled out completely, MUST BE submitted
with each sample submitted for certification.

III. TEST PROCEDURES FOR LABORATORY ANALYSIS

The failure of any test in this section shall constitute a failure of the product to conform to the
specification. Unless otherwise noted, all test methods cited are the latest published revisions.

A. ALKALI RESISTANCE. Prepare specimens for testing by using a 6-inch by 17-inch

by 1/4 inch plain plate glass with a ground surface which has been cleaned. Apply
texture with suitable applicator obtaining a dry film thickness of 20.0 (±2) mil and a
width of 5 ½ inches. Allow texture to dry in a horizontal position for 120 hours days
at 25(±2)0C and 50(±5)% relative humidity. Place 5 drops of 2% by weight aqueous

180
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

sodium hydroxide solution on the texture and immediately cover the surface with a
50 mm watch-glass. After 2 hours, remove the watch-glass, wash off the solution.
Allow 2 hours for recovery and examine for compliance.

IV. METHODS OF SAMPLING, INSPECTION AND OTHER TESTS

A. SAMPLING: At the option of the Contractor, representative samples shall be taken

from deliveries made under this invitation and submitted for quality control testing. If
the contractor's sample fails, the contractor/manufacturer shall pay for the actual
cost of testing. Failure of any sample so taken to comply with the specification
requirements shall invalidate any purchase contract made under this invitation
unless the contractor/ manufacturer requests a repeat quality control test. This
second sample shall be from the same batch. The contractor/manufacturer shall pay
for the second quality control test should the sample fail, and this invalidates any
purchase contract made under this invalidates. If the second sample passes, the
contractor/manufacturer is not responsible for paying the actual cost of the test, and
results obtained from the second quality control test shall prevail.

B. INSPECTION: Physical inspection of package, condition, quantity, and labeling shall

be made at point of delivery by the purchaser. MSDS shall be submitted with each
shipment, and shall be identical to the MSDS supplied for initial certification.

181
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION - XXI

PITCHED ROOFS

1. DESIGN STANDARDS PITCHED ROOFS

1-A. Design shall meet the Technical Requirements

Design that follows the guidance below will be acceptable for pitched roofs.

STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

1-B. Design shall comply with all relevant statutory requirements

Designs should be in accordance with relevant Building Regulations and other

statutory requirements.

LOADBEARING STRUCTURE

1-C. All pitched roof structures shall be designed to support applied loads and self
weight without undue movement

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) Dead and imposed loads

Dead and imposed loads should be calculated in accordance with IS: 875
PART-4

Dead loads include the self weight of the roof structure and the roof covering.

Imposed loads include snow loadings and the weight of water tanks,
insulation, etc.

Structural timber should be specified according to the strength classes in IS

883 : 1994 (fourth revision) . Timber specifications when using grading rules)
should be in accordance with IS 883 : 1994 or strength class specified and
also include the timber species.

(b) Wind loads

Wind loads appropriate to the site location should be calculated in

accordance with IS 875 part -3. The roof should be designed to resist wind
uplift. This resistance is often provided by the weight of the roof itself but
holding down straps should be provided where the self weight of the roof is
insufficient.

(c) Holding down straps

Holding down straps may be required in certain geographical locations and

with certain types of roof construction.

Where holding down straps are necessary, they should have a minimum
cross section of 30mm x 2.5mm and be fixed at maximum 2m centres. Steel
straps with a galvanized finish will be acceptable.

The design should detail how straps are to be fixed and what materials are to
be used.

The durability of fixings should be compatible with the straps.

(d) Sizing and spacing of members

182
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sizing and spacing of rafters and ceiling joists should be as:

• Clause 1-E for trussed rafter roofs

• Clause 1-F for traditional cut roofs.

Generally, the spacing of rafters and ceiling joists should be not more than
600mm.

The spacing of ceiling joists should suit the thickness and size of the
plasterboard sheets or other ceiling finish. Plasterboard sheets may be fixed
at the following joist centres:

• 9.5mm sheets - up to 450mm spacing

• 12.5mm and 15mm sheets - up to 600mm spacing

(e) Size and spacing of tile battens

The size and spacing of tile battens should be in accordance with the roof
covering manufacturer’s recommendations, but not less than shown in the
table below:

450mmspan 600mmspan
mm mm
Slates (double lap)
Natural: sized or random 25 x 50 25 x
50 25 X 50 25 X 50
Fibre cement or concrete 25 x 38 25 x
50 25 X 38 25 X 50
Clay and concrete tiles
Double lap 25 x 38 25 x 38 25 X 38 25 X 38
Single lap 25 x 38 25 x 50 25 X 38 25 X 50

Nails for fixing battens should be 3.35mm (10 gauge) x 65mm long.
Galvanized smooth round nails are acceptable, except where the maximum
basic wind speed is over 26m/s (from IS 875 ), where ring shank nails should
be specified.

1-D. All pitched roof structures shall be designed so as to transmit loads and give
restraint to the supporting structure without undue movement

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) Wall plates

Normally, trussed rafter roofs and traditional cut roofs should be supported
on timber wall plates.

Wall plates should be as detailed in Clause 1-F (b) with regard to the table
concerning minimum sizes. Fixings to connect the roof structure to the wall
plate should be specified having regard to the roof construction and the
exposure conditions of the site.

For trussed rafter roofs not subject to uplift, the minimum fixing should be
two 4.5mm x 100mm long galvanized round wire nails, skew nailed, one from
each side of the trussed rafter. Alternatively, truss clips can be used, fixed in
accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.

(b) Holding down straps

183
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

In situations where the roof is required to resist uplift, skew nailing is

unlikely to provide sufficient strength. Appropriate metal straps should be
used.

(c) Lateral restraint straps

For dwellings of masonry construction, restraint should be provided at rafter

level for gable walls. Larger gable or separating walls may also require
restraint at ceiling level. See Site work 3-C.

Lateral restraint straps should have a minimum cross section of 30mm x

5mm and a minimum anchorage downturn of 100mm. The level of
galvanizing for straps and their fixings should be in accordance with IS:2629-
1966: Recommended Practice for Hot Dip Galvanizing of Iron and Steel.

Straps should be of sufficient length to be fixed to three trusses and should

be fixed with solid blocking.

In framed roofs, as an alternative, purlins and pole plates can also provide
restraint if the timber abuts a gable construction.

Where purlins are used to provide restraint they should not be spaced at
more than 2m centres, unless the design shows they are adequate at greater
spacing.

In trussed rafter roofs, an alternative is to provide restraint through gable

ladder detailing.

(d) Timber frame construction

For dwellings of timber frame construction, the designer should ensure

stability in accordance with IS 883 : 1994 Code of practice for design of
structural timber in building

TRUSSED RAFTER ROOFS

1-E. Trussed rafters shall be designed to support applied loads and self weight
without undue movement

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) Recognised design standards

Trussed rafters should be designed in accordance with IS 883 : 1994 Code of

practice for design of structural timber in building.

Truss manufacturers may have their own computer programs for calculating
truss designs in accordance with the Indian Standard.

(b) Design information

To ensure that trussed rafters are correctly designed and fabricated, and are
suitable for their intended purpose, an accurate specification is necessary.

List of information to be supplied to the truss manufacturer, includes the:

• height and location of building with reference to unusual wind

conditions

• profile of the trussed rafter, including camber, if required

• span of the trussed rafter

• pitch or pitches of the roof

• method of support and position of supports

184
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

• type and weights of roof tiles or covering, including insulation and

ceiling
materials

• size and approximate position of any water tanks or other equipment

to
be supported on the trussed rafters

• overhang of rafters at eaves and other eaves details

• positions and dimensions of hatches, chimneys and other openings

• use of the building with reference to any unusual environmental conditions

• type of preservative treatment, where required

• spacing of trussed rafters and special timber sizes, where these are
required to match existing construction.

The designer should ensure that the design of the roof as a whole is
satisfactory in achieving the overall stability of the complete structure. This
includes its connection to, and compatibility with, the supporting structure
and adjacent elements of the building.

(c) Bracing

The building designer should specify all bracing. Trussed rafter roofs should
be braced in accordance with Table in 3-F , unless the roof is designed and
braced in accordance with IS 3201 : 1988 Criteria for design and
construction of precast-trusses and purlins

All timber bracing to trussed rafters should be at least 100mm x 25mm in

section and twice nailed to each trussed rafter and to the wallplate. Nailing
should be 3.35mm (10 gauge) x 65mm long galvanized round wire nails.

(d) Spacing

Trussed rafters should not be spaced at

centres greater than 600mm. Where this
cannot be achieved, eg to accommodate
hatch openings or chimneys, the spacing
of trussed rafters may be increased as
shown in figure and below, provided that
the spacing between centres of trimming
trussed rafters does not exceed 2 times
the design spacing of trussed rafters and
that b is smaller than or equal to 2a - c,
where:

a = design spacing of trussed

rafters

b = distance between centres of trimming trussed rafter and adjacent

trussed rafter

c = nominal width of required opening.

(e) Mono-pitch trusses and girder trusses

Hipped roofs constructed with trussed rafters will generally require a series of
diminishing mono-pitched trusses supported by a girder truss.

The bearing of mono-pitched trusses into shoes should be as follows:

185
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________
____
Span Minimum bearing length Minimum thickness of truss member

____________________________________________________________________________________________
____
Less than 4m 50mm 35mm

4m or more 75mm 35mm

____________________________________________________________________________________________
____

(f) Water tank support

Where water tanks are supported by roof trusses, their load should be
transferred to the node points of the trussed rafter and spread over at least
three trussed rafters.

A correct method of water tank support is shown in 3-I.

(g) Multiple trussed rafters

All multiple and reinforcing timbers to simple or multiple trussed rafters

should be designed to be permanently fastened together. The timber
members should be either fixed together during manufacture or,
alternatively, fully detailed drawings and specifications showing the fixing
method should be supplied to the site to enable the components to be
assembled correctly.

(h) Roofs incorporating valleys or other special features

Roofs with hips, valleys or other special features should be designed by an

Engineer in accordance with Indian Standards.

(i) combined trussed rafter and cut roofs

Particular care is needed where trussed rafters and a cut roof are combined
in a roof design. The designer should provide details of the complete roof.
Trussed rafters supporting traditional cut roof members should be designed
in accordance with Indian Standards.

(j) Strutting to attic trusses

The part of an attic truss which forms a floor should have strutting in
accordance with “Strutting for attic trusses and cut roofs that have a
floor”– 3-F.

TRADITIONAL CUT ROOFS

1-F. Cut roofs shall be designed to support applied loads and self weight without
undue movement

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) Member sizes

Nominal sizes of roof members would be as follows:

________________________________________________________________________
Member Minimum size
(mm)

186
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

________________________________________________________________________
Struts and braces 100 x 50
Wall plates 75 x 50
Hips rafter cut + 25
Valleys 32 thick
Ridges rafter cut + 25
________________________________________________________________________

(b) Triangulation

In the design of a cut roof, timber members should be triangulated or

otherwise arranged to form a coherent structure. All forces inherent in the
design should be resolved. The method of fixing or jointing members should
be specified.

Particular care should be taken to ensure adequate triangulation when

designs incorporate hips and valleys, and when cut roofs are used in
conjunction with trussed rafters.

Details of all structural members should be provided.

(c) strutting to cut roofs

Any part of a cut roof which forms a floor should have strutting in accordance
with “Strutting for attic trusses and cut roofs that have a floor”– 3-F.

TIMBER TREATMENT

1-G Measures shall be taken to ensure durability of timber

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) Seasoning and preserving of Timber

It should be in accordance with IS 1141 : 1993 Code of practice for seasoning

of timber

IS 2753 : Part 1 : 1991 Methods for estimation of preservatives in treated

timber and in solutions Part 1 Deterrmination of copper, arsenic, chromium,
zinc, boron creosote and fuel oil

IS 2753 : Part 2 : 1991 Methods for estimation of preservatives in treated

timber and in treating solutions: Part 2 Determination of copper (in copper
organic salt) and pentachlorophenol

IS 11215 : 1991 Methods for determination of moisture content of timber and

timber products

IS 287 : 1993 Permissible Moisture Content for Timber Used for Different
Purposes - Recommendations

(b) timber requiring treatment

The following timber members should be either naturally durable or suitably

treated:

• fascias

• bargeboards

• soffits

• tiling battens

• other trim.

187
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

These timber members should, where appropriate, also be painted or stained.

In pitched roofs with a fully supported weatherproofing membrane, the

following timber members should be either naturally durable or suitably
treated:

• rafters

• purlins

• ceiling joists

• bracing

• sarking

• wall plates

• battens for fixing vertical cladding.

The level of durability of all the above members can be achieved by natural
durability or treatment with preservative.

WEATHERTIGHTNESS

1-H Roofs shall be designed to satisfactorily resist the passage of rain and snow to
the inside of the building

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) Weather tightness of roof coverings

Roofs with a tile or slate covering should be designed in accordance with IS

13317 : 1992 Clay Roofing Country Tiles, Half Round and Flat Tiles -
Specification

(b) Tiles

For tiled roofs, the pitch, gauge and lap should be within the limits given in
Table below, unless the manufacturer specifies otherwise.

Roof tile fixings

Table 1 - Recommended limits of pitch, gauge and lap for roof tiles

Minimum head-lap Minimum

Type of tile Gauge
(mm) permissible pitch (°)

not more than ⅓ 65 normally for clay

35 (clay)
length-lap tiles
Plain (double-lap)
75 in severe exposure
35 (plain concrete)
conditions

determined by design 75 or to 30 (Note: For pitches

Concrete (single-lap to comply with manufacturer’s below 30, evidence
interlocking) manufacturers’ specific shall be provided as to
recommendations recommendations suitable performance)

188
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

54 minimum, increase
not more than ⅓ with lower pitch and
Slates (double-lap) 20 subject to head lap
length-lap severe exposure
conditions

Tables below contain minimum fixings for tiles. The tile manufacturer will be able to
advise on any additional nails or clips required for a particular location. A fixing
schedule produced by the tile manufacturer, based on The Zonal Method, is
acceptable.

Minimum fixings for single lap interlocking clay and concrete tiles

Location Fixings
Verges, abutments and each side of valleys The end tile in each course should be fixed (nail and/or clip)
and hips
Each tile in the first course at the eaves and last course at the ridge/top
Eaves and top edges edge should be fixed (nail and/or clip)
For rafter pitches below 45° - tiles should be fixed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.

General roof area For rafter pitches between 45° and 55° - all tiles should be nailed or
nailed and clipped.
For rafters pitches of 55° and above - all tiles should be nailed and the tail
of each tile should be mechanically fixed.

Notes

1 Additional nails or clips may be required depending on pitch and degree of

exposure. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations. A fixing schedule produced
by the tile manufacturer, based on The Zonal Method, is acceptable.

2 Nails should be in accordance with IS 2366 : 1983 Code of practice for nail-jointed
timber construction and be not less than 3.35mm diameter and should penetrate at
least 15mm into battens.

Minimum fixings for double lap clay and concrete plain tiles

Location Fixings
Verges, abutments and each side of valleys
and hips The end tile in each course should be twice nailed
Each tile in the first two courses at the eaves and last two courses at the
Eaves and top edges ridge should be twice nailed or otherwise mechanically fixed.

Nibbed tiles
For rafter pitches below 60° - each tile in every fifth course should be
General roof area twice nailed.
For rafter pitches 60° and above - all tiles should be twice nailed.
Nibless tiles
All tiles should be twice nailed.

Notes

189
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1 Additional nails or clips may be required depending on pitch and degree of

exposure. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations. A fixing schedule produced
by the tile manufacturer, based on The Zonal Method, is acceptable.

2 Nails should be in accordance with IS 2366 : 1983 Code of practice for nail-jointed
timber construction and be not less than 2.65mm diameter and should penetrate at
least 15mm into battens.

To avoid the use of small sections of cut tiles, which are difficult to fix, double tiles,
tile-and-a-half or half tiles should be used where available from the manufacturer.

(c) Slates

Natural slates should be fixed.

Each slate should be nailed twice when centre nailed.

(d) Roof coverings other than tiles or slates

Galvanized steel sheet roofing should be in accordance with IS 12093 : 1987

Code of practice for laying and fixing of sloped roof coverings using plain and
corrugated galvanized steel sheets.

Corrugated bitumen sheet roofing should be in accordance with IS 12583 :

1988 Specification for corrugated bitumen roofing sheets.

Clay roofing country tiles roofing should be in accordance with IS 13317 :

1992 Clay Roofing Country Tiles, Half Round and Flat Tiles - Specification

Asbestos cement sheet roofing should be in accordance with IS 2096 : 1992

Specification for asbestos cement flat sheets

IS 3007 : Part 1 : 1999 Laying of Asbestos Cement Sheets - Code of Practice -

Part 1 : Corrugated Sheets

Roofs with the following traditional coverings should be designed in

accordance with satisfactory custom and practice:

• natural stone

• shingles

Shingles should be in accordance with IS 2700 : 1987 Code

of practice for roofing with wooden shingles

• thatch.

Thatching should be in accordance with IS 12506 : 1988

Code of Practice for Improved Thatching of Roof with Rot and
Fire Retardant Treatment

(e) Roof underlays

An
underlay
should be
provided for
all tiled roofs.

190
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The underlay may be felt to BS EN 13707 or a proprietary sarking membrane

complying with Technical Requirement R3. Where the underlay is exposed at
eaves level it should be UV resistant or type 5U felt.

Alternatively, proprietary eaves guards may be used. A type 1F felt may be

used for the remainder of the roof.

To prevent the underlay sagging at the eaves and forming a water trap behind
the fascia, the underlay should be supported by a continuous fillet or
proprietary eaves support tray.

(f) Rigid sarking

In areas of severe exposure, a rigid sarking with underlay is recommended.

The choice of rigid sarking should take account of the type and fixing of the
roof covering. The following materials are acceptable:

• tongued and grooved or square edged boarding

• bitumen impregnated insulating board

• exterior grade plywood

To avoid damage from condensation, proprietary insulation boards

should be used strictly in accordance with the recommendations
given in the independent assessment.

(g) flashings and other weathering details where a pitched roof abuts a
vertical surface

Where a roof abuts a vertical surface, cover flashings, stepped cover

flashings, soakers, secret gutters and back or parapet gutters should be
provided as necessary. Where the roof is over an enclosed area the wall
construction should include cavity trays linked to the flashings.

Reference should be made to Sitework clause 3-L (f) for details.

Cover flashings should be tucked 25mm into a brick joint or chase not less
than 75mm above the intersection with the roof.

Flashings and soakers should be of non-ferrous metal and of the same

material to avoid electrolytic action.

Where lead is used, soakers should be at least Code 3 and flashings, gutters,
saddles, etc should be Code 4 or better.

In the case of gutters behind parapet walls, provision should be made for an
overflow in case the outlet becomes blocked.

(h) weathering details where a pitched roof intersects with a continuous

waterproof membrane

191
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

For information on intersections with flat roofs, gutters or valleys, reference

should be made to Sitework clause 3-L (e).

(i) pipes

Where soil pipes, vent pipes or other pipes penetrate roof tiling, a lead slate
flashing, or a purpose-made accessory to form a weathertight joint, should be
used.

If lead slates are used, they should be supported (eg using exterior grade
plywood) to prevent the lead sagging.

(j) chimneys

Flashings should connect with the chimney dpcs. The normal flashing
components are shown in Sitework clause 3-L (g).

Components will vary depending on whether the chimney intersects the roof
at eaves or ridge level and the type of roof covering. Reference should be
made to roof covering manufacturers’ information sheets.

(k) ridges and hips

All ridge and hip tiles should be mechanically fixed with self sealing non-
ferrous fixings into timber battens.

Where proprietary systems are used they should be fixed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.

Where ridge and hip tiles are bedded on mortar to rolled tiles, concealed or
decorative dentil tiles should be fully bedded into all joints in excess of 25mm
thick.

(l) valleys

Valleys should be formed with purposemade valley tiles or as an open valley

lined with glass reinforced plastic (GRP)

Where slates or plain tiles are used, a laced valley, swept valley or mitred tiles
with soakers may also be used. Valley tiles should be fixed in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations and small cut tiles should be
avoided.

(m) verges

192
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Where slates or plain tiles are used, the verge should project 38mm to 50mm
beyond the gable wall or bargeboard.

Interlocking tiles can project 30mm to 60mm.

Unless a proprietary dry verge system or cloaked verge is used, tiles should
be bedded into a minimum 100mm wide bed of mortar on an undercloak of
cementbased board, plain tile or slate which in turn should be bedded onto
the gable wall with mortar or suitable bedding sealant.

Plain tiles should not be used as an undercloak below 30° pitch or on a

bargeboard.

Where verge clips are specified, these should be twice nailed to battens and
sized to ensure that they are in direct contact with the top surface of the
verge tile.

At verges:

• cut plain tiles are not acceptable and purpose made plain tile-and-a
half or half tile should be used

• cut single lapped interlocking tiles should not be used

• natural slate verges should be formed with full slates and either
slate-and-a half or half slates that are a minimum 150mm wide.

Consider using an overhanging verge (by means of a gable ladder) to provide

better weather protection to the gable wall, especially in exposed positions or
where cavity insulation is used.

(n) proprietary roof coverings

Proprietary roof coverings should comply with Indian standards

1-I Vertical tiling and slating shall adequately resist the passage of rain and snow to
the inside of the building

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) moisture barrier

A moisture barrier should be provided behind all vertical tiling and slating.

Moisture barriers should be:

• underfelt or equivalent where the wall structure is solid brickwork or

blockwork. See Design clause 1-N (c)

• a breather membrane where the supporting structure is of timber

construction.

(b) batten size

Batten sizes should comply with Design clause 1-C (e).

(c) fixing

Every tile or slate should be nailed twice

(d) weathering details

193
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Bottom edges should be finished with an under-course tile. At dormer

cheeks, the tiles or slates should be specified to be cut close to the slope of
the roof, over a flashing fixed to the side of the dormer.

At internal or external angles, purpose made corner tiles or soakers should

be used to form a weathertight joint.

Where pitched roofs abut masonry walls, a stepped flashing should be

specified, turned behind the tiles. Details are shown in Sitework clause 3-L .

INSULATION AND CONTROL OF CONDENSATION

1-J Roofs directly above habitable rooms shall be adequately insulated

Insulation should be of sufficient thickness to meet the requirements of Building

Regulations.

To reduce the risk of freezing, and condensation on pipework, the guidance in

Sitework clause 3-N should be followed.

1-K Measures shall be taken to control condensation

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) ventilation of main roof spaces

Pitched roofs with insulation at ceiling level should always be ventilated to

the outside air to minimize the risk of condensation.

For roofs that incorporate a high water vapour resistance (type HR) underlay

• eaves ventilation should be provided on opposite sides of the roof to

permit cross ventilation.

Reference should be made to Sitework clause 3-K (a) for illustrations

showing where ventilation should be provided

• where the roof pitch is 15° or more, cross ventilation should be

provided to the roof void equivalent to a 10mm slot running the full length of
the eaves

• where the ceiling follows the slope of a ‘cold roof’ regardless of pitch
or where a cold roof has a pitch less than 15°, cross ventilation should be
provided to the roof void equivalent to a 25mm slot running the full length of
the eaves. A nominal 50mm clearance should be maintained between the
insulation and the roof underlay

• where the roof pitch exceeds 35° or when the span exceeds 10m, high
level ventilation, equivalent to a continuous 5mm opening, should be used in
addition to eaves ventilation

• the means of providing cross ventilation to mono-pitched roofs

should be such that eaves ventilation together with the equivalent of a
continuous 5mm slot at high level.

For unventilated cold roofs that incorporate a low water vapour resistance
(type LR) underlay (eg a vapour permeable underlay):

• ridge or high level ventilation equivalent to a continuous opening of

5mm should be provided

Where vapour permeable underlays are used on sloping roofs, with areas over
covered by non-permeable materials (eg flat roofed areas of mansard roofs),
ventilation equivalent to a continuous opening of 5mm should be provided at
the highest point of each roof slope.

194
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(b) position of vapour checks

Vapour control layers should be used in roof constructions where the ceiling
board is fixed to the rafters.

In normal pitched roofs where insulation is placed over a horizontal ceiling

and the void above is ventilated, a vapour control layer is not recommended.
Moisture from the dwelling will be diffused through the ceiling and removed
by roof space ventilation.

Vapour control layers, where required, should be placed on the warm side of
insulation.

(c) ventilation of dormers

Pitched dormers should be ventilated from eaves to eaves or, where

necessary, from eaves to ridge.

Flat roofed dormers of cold deck construction should be ventilated. The

ventilation path should not be blocked by the timber structure, strutting, etc

(d) methods of ensuring unobstructed ventilation

Ventilation openings where the least dimension exceeds 10mm should be

protected to prevent the entry of birds, etc.

Acceptable protection of openings can be provided by using materials

complying with Materials clause 2-E (j).

A spacer in the eaves should be used so that ceiling insulation can be

installed over and beyond the wall plate. This minimizes the cold bridge
without blocking the ventilation. The spacer should be of sufficient length to
maintain the ventilation above the insulation.

(e) other methods of reducing condensation

Methods of reducing condensation, such as draughtstripping loft hatches and

sealing holes for services, are given in Sitework clause 3-N .

FIRE SPREAD

1-L Roofs shall adequately resist fire spread

Items to be taken into account include:

195
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(a) roof coverings

Slates and concrete or clay tiles are designated AA when tested to BS 476 :
Part 3 and therefore can be used without limitation on any pitched roof. The
use of some other materials is restricted by statutory requirements,
particularly in relation to their distance from site boundaries (reference
should be made to Building Regulations). These include:

• bitumen felt slates

• wood shingles

• thatch.

(b) chimneys and flue pipes

Combustible material, such as roof timbers and sarking felt, should be kept
away from heat sources

1-M Junctions between roofs and compartment or separating walls shall adequately
resist fire spread

The junction between a separating or compartment wall and a roof should be

firestopped. If there are gaps, fire, smoke and flame can spread from one
compartment to the next across the wall.

Mineral wool fire-stopping should be used to allow for movement in the roof timber,
and avoid ‘hogging’ of the roof which is often associated with mortar fire-stopping.

Where a wall separates an integral garage from the rest of a dwelling, other
arrangements are possible provided the principle of half-hour fire separation is
maintained.

ACCESS

1-N Roof voids shall be provided with suitable access

Access should be provided to:

• the main roof space, and

196
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

• roof voids that contain cisterns, tanks and the like.

Access is not required to other roof voids containing only water pipes.

SIZE OF OPENINGS

Access openings should be not less than 520mm in any direction.

Where equipment (eg heating and ventilation equipment) is located in a roof space the
size of the opening should permit its removal.

Access openings should not be located directly over stairs or in other hazardous
locations.

PROVISION OF WALKWAYS

Boarded walkways should be provided:

• between the access opening and any cistern or other permanent equipment
located in the roof space, and

• at each cistern or other permanent equipment suitably located for

maintenance purposes and at least 1m2 in area.

Boarding should be securely fixed without compressing the loft insulation.

ROOF DRAINAGE

1-O Roof drainage shall adequately carry rainwater to an outfall

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) provision of gutters and downpipes

Roofs greater than 6m2 in area should be provided with rainwater gutters
and downpipes. Consideration should also be given to the provision of
rainwater drainage to roof areas less than 6m2 for example dormer and porch
roofs.

Rainwater pipes passing through dwellings should be insulated in accordance

with Sitework clause 3H (c).

(b) sizes

Gutters and downpipes should be of sufficient size to accommodate normal

rainfall.

Care is needed in sizing gutters where dormer roofs interrupt the run-off from
a pitched roof. The gutter should be sized to cope with the concentrated
flows.

(c) discharge from one roof to another

Where water from a large roof surface discharges onto another surface,
precautions should be taken to prevent erosion of the lower surface.

(d) discharge into drainage system

Unless designed otherwise, shoes should be provided to rainwater downpipes.

PROVISION OF INFORMATION

1-P Designs and specifications shall be produced in a clearly understandable format

and include all relevant information

197
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Full details of trussed rafter roofs should be available on site, including the following:

• layout drawing of trusses and associated items

• bracing requirements

• trimming around chimneys, access hatches, etc

• mono-pitch and lean-to roofs

• girder trusses, multiple trusses and diminishing trusses and how they are
fixed together and supported on truss shoes, layboards or similar

• roof intersections (ie hips and valleys).

Assembly drawings are also important where there are complicated roof shapes or
where trussed rafter and framed roofs are used in combination.

The drawings should show:

• the number and type of fixings for roof coverings

• means of providing eaves ventilation

• fire-stopping at separating wall and boxed eaves

• flashing details at abutments, chimneys, etc

• supports for water cisterns in the roof space

• restraint strapping

• position, thickness and limits of insulation.

1-Q All relevant information shall be distributed to appropriate personnel

Ensure that design and specification information is issued to site supervisors and
relevant specialist subcontractors and/ or suppliers.

2. MATERIALS STANDARDS

2-A All materials shall:

(a) meet the Technical Requirements

(b) take account of the design

Materials that comply with the design and the guidance below will be acceptable for
pitched roofs.

STRUCTURAL TIMBER

2-B Structural timber shall be of the appropriate grades and sizes to support the
imposed loads

Structural timber should be specified according to the strength classes in IS 883 :

1994 Code of practice for design of structural timber in building

2-C Structural timber shall be of suitable durability

Structural timber should be pre-treated with preservative where specified by the

designer.

198
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RESTRAINT STRAPS AND HOLDING DOWN STRAPS

2-D Strapping shall be of adequate strength and durability

Lateral restraint straps should have minimum cross section dimensions of 30mm x
5mm. Vertical holding down straps should have minimum cross section dimensions
of 30mm x 2.5mm.

Mild steel straps and fixings should be protected against corrosion .Fixings and
straps should be compatible.

Straps should be ordered to the correct length and with the correct number of bends
and/or twists required by the design.

ROOFING MATERIALS

2-E Roofing materials shall be of the quality, type and dimensions required by the
design

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) roof coverings

The following roof coverings are acceptable:

• clay tiles and fittings

• concrete tiles and fittings

• fibre cement slates and fittings

• natural slates

• shingles should be of Western Red Cedar, suitably treated and be

Grade 1 to the Canadian Standards Association.

Natural stone should be used in accordance with established custom and

practice.

(b) fixings

Clout or slate nails for fixing slates and tiles should be one of the following
and at least 38mm long:

• aluminium

• copper

• silicon bronze.

Galvanized steel nails are not suitable for fixing slates and tiles because of
the risk of damaging the galvanizing but may be used to fix battens and
underlay. Nails for fixing battens should be at least 30mm longer than the
batten thickness. Ring shank nails should be used when specified by the
designer.

Tile clips should be of aluminium or stainless steel.

(c) flashings

The following are acceptable:

• milled lead sheet.

199
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

• aluminium and aluminium alloys

• zinc alloy 0.6mm thick

• copper, 0.7mm thick is suitable for gutters, 0.55mm thick fully

annealed is suitable for flashing, soakers and saddles.

To prevent electrolytic action where metal items may be in contact, eg

flashings and soakers, these should not be of different metals.

(d) underlays

Underlay may be felt.

Where the underlay is exposed at eaves level it should be UV

resistant or type 5U felt. Alternatively, proprietary eaves guards can be used.

To minimise the risk of condensation in the case of a fully supported

underlay above rigid sarking, underlays should have a low vapour resistance,
preferably less than 0.25MNs/g. Underlays with a higher vapour resistance
may need increased ventilation to the roof space and between the underlay
and sarking. Manufacturers’ recommendations should be followed.

(e) rigid sarking

The following materials are acceptable:

• tongued and grooved or square edged boarding

• bitumen impregnated insulating board (sarking and sheathing grade)

• exterior grade plywood

• type P5 chipboard

• oriented strand board

(f) battens and counter battens

Battens and counter battens should be to the sizes specified in the design.
Timber used for battens and counter battens should be as listed in 1-E (e)

Battens should be preservative treated unless the timber is naturally durable.

Cut ends of tile battens that are in contact with mortar should be treated
with a liberal brush coating of preservative.

(g) insulation

Thermal insulation should be to the design specification.

The following materials are acceptable:

• mineral fibre mats

• blown mineral fibre

• blown cellulose fibre

Insulation of water pipes should be done.

(h) fascias, bargeboards and soffits

200
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Timber used for fascias, bargeboards, soffits, etc should be pre-treated with
preservative.

The following materials are also acceptable:

• exterior grade plywood

• high density fibre reinforced calcium silicate board

• glass fibre reinforced cement (GRC) board

(i) fire-stopping and cavity barriers

Cavity barriers in boxed eaves should be wire reinforced mineral wool

blanket, at least 50mm thick. Ordinary mineral wool quilt is acceptable as
fire-stopping above separating walls.

(j) protection to ventilation openings

Ventilation openings where the least dimension exceeds 10mm should be

protected to prevent the entry of birds, etc.

Acceptable protection of openings can be provided by:

• rigid fabrications with width of opening greater than 3mm and less
than 10mm (no restriction on length)

• rigid fabrications with round holes greater than 3mm and less than
10mm in diameter

• square or rectangular mesh where the clear opening size is greater

than 3mm and less than 10mm.

(k) roof mortar

Roofing mortar should be 1:3 cement:sand with plasticiser. The mix should
be based on sharp sand with soft sand added to achieve workability. The
proportion of sharp sand should not be less than ⅓ of the total sand content.

Alternatively, proprietary mortar mixes may be accepted as per IS if they are

shown to have similar strength, durability and workability.

RECLAIMED MATERIALS

2-F Reclaimed materials shall be:

(a) of the type, size and quality required in the design

(b) suitable for re-use

Materials recovered from older buildings, such as timber, slate or tile, may be re-used
only with the prior agreement of the Client. Independent certification of suitability
may be required.

SITEWORK STANDARDS

3-A All sitework shall:

(a) meet the Technical Requirements

(b) take account of the design

(c) follow established good practice and workmanship

201
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sitework that complies with the design and the guidance below will be
acceptable for pitched roofs.

WALL PLATES

3-B Wall plates shall be bedded to distribute roof loads and fixed to prevent wind
uplift

Roof construction details should be available on site, particularly for

combination and specialist roofs.

Wall plates should be bedded to line and level using nails or straps to hold
them down in accordance with the design requirements.

Wall plates should generally be in lengths of not less than 3m but shorter
lengths should extend over at least 3 joists/rafters or trusses. Wall plates
should be joined using half-lapped joints at corners and in running lengths.
In Scotland, where 100mm x 25mm wall plates are used, they should be in
long lengths and butt jointed.

Where required, holding down straps should be fixed to the wall plate at
maximum 2m centres. If the strap is not turned into a bed joint, it should be
fixed to the wall with at least four screw fixings.
7.2
STRAPPING

3-C Straps shall be used, where necessary, to restrain gable and separating walls and
hold down the roof against wind uplift

RESTRAINT STRAPS

Restraint straps, or a
restraining form of gable
ladder, are required to
provide stability to walls.
They should be installed as
shown in the design and at
not more than 2m centres
for buildings up to three
storeys (two storeys in
Scotland). Higher buildings
straps should be spaced at
not more than 1.25m
centres.

Restraint straps should be

fixed to solid noggings with
a minimum of four fixings
of which one should be in
the third rafter. The fixings
should be four steel screws
or four 75mm x 4mm (8 SWG) round nails.

Rafters should not be notched to make the straps flush with the rafter. Straps should
go under rafters and over ceiling joists.

The turn-down should be on a substantial piece of blockwork, preferably the centre of

an uncut block.

HOLDING DOWN STRAPS

202
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

If the design specifies holding down

straps to prevent the roof being lifted
off the supporting structure, they
should be at 2m centres (maximum).

Where straps are fixed to masonry,

hardened nails 4mm in diameter x
75mm long or No 12 wood screws x
50mm long into plugs should be
used.

The number of fixings should be in

accordance with design
requirements and the lowest fixing
should be within 150mm of the
bottom of the vertical strap.

TRUSSED RAFTERS

3-D Trussed rafters shall be protected from damage before and during construction
Items to be taken into account include:

(a) storage

To avoid distortion and prevent damage, trussed rafters should be stored

clear of the ground, either flat on level bearers placed under joints (for short
term storage) or vertically and propped (for long term storage).

Trusses should be protected against weather to prevent corrosion of truss

plates and deterioration of the timber.

Ventilation should be provided. Any damaged trussed rafters or trussed

rafters with loose plates should be rejected, not repaired.

(b) handling

To prevent distortion during construction, trussed rafters should be carried

upright (if carried flat, bending can loosen the fasteners).

3-E Trussed rafters shall be erected in

accordance with fabricators’
instructions

Detailed guidance on the use and

handling of trussed rafters is given
in the International Trussed Rafter
Association Technical Handbook
available from trussed rafter
suppliers.

Detailed drawings should be

available on site to show the layout
of the trussed rafters, especially at

203
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

hips, valleys and trimmings to chimneys, etc.

Trussed rafters should be supported only at the junction between the ceiling tie and
rafter, unless specifically designed otherwise, eg as a cantilever.

Trussed rafters should be evenly spaced and vertical. Temporary bracing should be
provided to control the spacing and keep trusses vertical.

Trussed rafters should be

fixed to the wall plates
either:

• in accordance
with the design, or

• using double
skew nailing or truss
clips.

Avoid damaging the metal

truss plates, trussed
rafters or wall plates.

The spacing or structure

of trusses should not be
altered without the
designer’s approval.

Where the width of gable ladders exceeds that of the trussed rafter centres, noggins
should be provided to reduce the span of the roofing tile battens.

The gable ladder can be used to provide restraint to the external wall if:

• there is blocking between the last trussed rafter and the inner leaf (at a
maximum of 2m spacing), and

• the soffit board is cut carefully and then fixed securely so as to restrain the
outer leaf.

3-F Trussed rafters shall be braced to prevent distortion

The roof should be braced using at least 100mm x 25mm timber. All bracing should
be twice nailed with 3.35mm (10 gauge) x 65mm long galvanized round wire nails to
every trussed rafter it crosses and to the wallplate.

The minimum bracing requirements are shown below. Additional bracing may be
needed in exposed areas.

Type of bracing Position of bracing Where applicable

204
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

All trussed rafter roofs

A unless rigid
Diagonal rafter sarking such as
bracing (at OSB, timber
approx. 45° on boarding or
plan) plywood is
used.

B All trussed rafter roofs

Longitudinal unless rigid
bracing sarking such as
member at OSB, timber
ridge node boarding or
point plywood is used
All ceiling node points,
C but may be
Longitudinal omitted where
binders at spacing
ceiling node between braced
points nodes does not
exceed 3.7m
All rafter node points,
but may be
omitted where
D spacing
Longitudinal between braced
bracing nodes does not
member at exceed 4.2m or
rafter node unless rigid
point sarking such as
OSB, timber
boarding or
plywood is used
Where the span exceeds
8m. For
E monopitch
Chevron roofs of any
bracing span and
between webs duopitch roofs
over 11m span,
bracing should

205
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

be designed by
an Engineer

Where not restrained by

F masonry wall,
Diagonal or cladding in
bracing to end plywood or
vertical of similar rigid
monopitch sheet material
trusses

Check the design drawings for special requirements.

All bracing should be completed before starting to lay the roof covering.

Longitudinal binders should

butt solidly against the wall
at each end. This is most
easily achieved by fixing the
binder in two lap-jointed
lengths.

Braces and binders, where

not continuous, should have
lapped joints and be nailed to at least two trusses.

The part of an attic truss which forms a floor should have strutting in accordance as
mentioned below:

Strutting for attic trusses and cut roofs that have a floor

If the distance D exceeds 2.5m between

- the node points which form the width of the floor of the attic truss or

- the supports to a floor within a cut roof, then additional strutting should be
provided as follows;

Distance D Rows of strutting

Under 2.5 none needed
2.5 to 4.5 1 (at centre of span)
Over 4.5 2 (at equal spacing)

Either herringbone strutting (38mm x 38mm timber) or solid strutting not less than
three-quarters the depth of the floor and at least 38mm thick should be used.

TRADITIONAL CUT ROOFS

3-G Roof timbers shall be of the grades and sizes shown on the drawings

Structural timber should be marked to show its strength class. Alternatively, evidence
of species and grade should be available to determine the equivalent strength class.

206
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The correct size of timber should be used for each member, as shown on the design
drawings.

3-H Construction of traditional cut roofs shall ensure adequate structural stability

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) location of members

All members should be accurately located. Purlins and binders should be

built in, where necessary. In a typical traditional roof, the basic timber
members are:

• RAFTER: carries the weight of the roof finish, eg tiles, tile battens and
underfelt

• CEILING JOIST or TIE: triangulates the rafters, stopping the walls

and roof spreading outwards; supports the ceiling finish and any walkways,
etc

• RIDGE: provides fixing and spacing for the tops of rafters

• PURLIN: supports long span rafters to prevent deflection and

increase stiffness

• STRUTS: give support to purlins to prevent deflection and transmit

roof loading to loadbearing structure below.

• The following are extra members which may be used on large roofs:

• COLLAR: ties the roof together at purlin level

• CEILING BINDERS and HANGERS: support long span ceiling joists

• POLE PLATES: similar to purlins but used where ceiling joists are
above wall plate level.

Positions of standard structural members are shown in the diagrammatic

representation below:

207
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(b) prevention of distortion and overloading

The design details for sizes of timber members should be followed.

All framing should be completed before roof coverings are laid.

If a roof is not a simple triangle, all members should be fully supported and
tied together. If necessary, temporary support to long span members should
be used until the framing is complete.

(c) valley and hip construction

Particular care is needed in the construction of valleys and hips:

• Valley rafters carry load from both sections of the roof. Valley rafters
will need to be larger than ordinary rafters to take the extra load and to
provide full bearing for the splay cut of Jack rafters. (Long valley rafters may
need intermediate support.)

• Hip rafters provide spacing and fixing for jack rafters. They need to be a deeper section than
other rafters to take the top cut of the jack rafters.

Purlins should be mitred at hips, and lip cut to accept the bottom of the hip rafter.

(d)

dormer construction

On most dormers, the dormer cheek studs should be supported either by a

double rafter or by a double floor joist.

208
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Where cheek framing does not extend to floor level, a double rafter will give
necessary support to the cheek. The two rafters must be fixed together.

Trimming members around dormers should be large enough to take the extra
load from the cut main roof members and dormer framing and cladding, as
detailed in the design.

Dormers should be framed up so they are independent of the window frame,

using a suitable lintel over the opening.

(e) jointing of members

All joints should be cut accurately to fit tightly. When they are nailed, care
should be taken not to split members.

The following should be used at main connections:

• RAFTERS to ceiling joists: nailed lapped joint. The rafter should be

birdsmouthed over and skew nailed to the wall plate

209
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

• RAFTERS to purlin: a birdsmouth joint should be used if the purlin

is fixed vertically

• PURLIN connections: support should be provided directly under joint

or use a scarf joint. Any scarf joint should be made near a strut so that the
joint supports the longer span.

Angle ties should be used on hipped roof corners to prevent the wall plates
spreading. For heavily loaded hip rafters, eg where they are carrying purlins,
dragon ties or similar bracing should be used to prevent hip rafter spread.

210
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(f) strutting to cut roofs

Any part of a cut roof which forms a floor should have strutting in accordance
with “Strutting for attic trusses and cut roofs that have a floor” of 3-F

WATER TANK SUPPORTS

3-I Loads from water cisterns shall be transferred to:

(a) the node points of trussed rafters

In trussed rafter roofs, tank stands should be supported at the node points of
the trussed rafters and the load spread over at least three trusses.

Correct supports are illustrated below:

TANK SUPPORT DETAILS

211
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SIZES FOR SUPPORT MEMBERS

Max. trussed
Max. bay size
Total tank capacity to rafter
Min. member sizes for
marked waterline span for
other
Fink
configu
configur
a&c b rations
ation
mm m m
47 x 72 2/35 x 97 or

Detail A 1/47 x 120 6.50 2.20

Not more than 300 L 47 x 72 2/35 x 120 or
supported on four
trussed rafters 1/47 x 145 9.00 2.80

47 x 72 2/35 x 145 12.00 3.80

47 x 72 1/47 x 97 6.50 2.20

Detail B 2/35 x 97 or
Not more than 230 L
supported on three 47 x 72 1/47 x 120 9.00 2.80
trussed rafters
2/35 x 120 or

47 x 72 1/47 x 145 12.00 3.80

NOTE: Support members may be of any species with a permissible bending stress not less than that of
European redwood/whitewood of GS stress grade

(b) suitable bearers in traditional cut roofs

In traditional cut roofs, tank stands should be supported as shown in the

design.

FASCIAS, BARGE BOARDS AND SOFFITS

212
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3-J Fascias, bargeboards and soffits shall be selected, fixed and treated against
decay in accordance with the design

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) timber quality

Timber for external feature work should be free from waney edges, large
knots and resinous pockets, splits and other unsightly defects.

(b) fixing

All joints should be cut and fixed neatly.

Mitred angles and splay joints should be used to prevent exposure of

endgrain.

Butt joints to fascias should be splayed. Fascia boards should have two
fixings into each rafter and be fixed at a height that maintains the correct
pitch in accordance with the tile manufacturer’s recommendations.

(c) treatment against decay

Where preservative treated timber is cut or planed, a liberal brush coating of

preservative should be applied.

All untreated timber that is to be painted should be knotted and primed all
round before fixing. When timber requires a stained finish, one coat of stain
should be applied before fixing.

ROOFING MATERIALS

3-K Roofing materials shall be installed in accordance with the design

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) ventilation

All roof voids should be ventilated to prevent condensation problems.

Ventilation openings where the least dimension exceeds 10mm should be

protected with mesh to prevent entry of birds, etc.

Where proprietary eaves ventilators are used, they should be fixed in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

For roofs that incorporate a high water vapour resistance (type HR) underlay
ventilation should be provided on opposite sides of the roof space, equivalent
to a continuous gap of the width shown in the following drawings:

213
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

214
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

For unventilated cold roofs that incorporate a low water vapour resistance
(type LR) underlay, (eg a vapour permeable underlay) and insulation over a
horizontal ceiling ridge or high level ventilation equivalent to a continuous
opening of 5mm should be provided in accordance with the design.

(b) underlays

Horizontal laps should be as follows:

_______________________________________________________________________________________
Pitch Minimum horizontal lap (underlay not fully supported)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Less than 15° 225mm
15° to 34° 150mm
35° and above 100mm
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Vertical laps in the underlay should occur only over rafters and be securely
fixed.

Horizontal laps should be securely fixed by regular roofing battens.

Underlay should be supported at eaves level by a tilting fillet or proprietary

eaves support tray. Where the underlay is exposed at eaves level it should be
UV resistant or type 5U felt. Alternatively, proprietary eaves guards can be
used. A type 1F felt may be used for the remainder of the roof.

Underlay or eaves guards should be dressed into the gutter.

215
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Where traditional mortar pointing is used to bed ridge tiles, the underlay
should extend over the ridge. Underlay should continue over hips to form a
150mm minimum lap parallel with the hip rafter.

At valleys, a strip of underlay should be laid under the main roof underlay
and held down by the valley battens, where used.

The main roof underlay should be cut to the valley batten line.

The underlay should be supported and turned up at least 100mm at all

abutments to prevent rain and snow being blown into the roof space.

Particular care is needed where pipes project through the underlay. Torn
underlay around pipes can lead to the ceiling becoming wet and stained. To
avoid water penetration the underlay should be cut neatly to fit tightly
around service penetrations.

(c) battens and counter battens

Battens should be set out in straight lines, parallel to the ridge and to the
gauge required by the tile or slate. The lap should not be decreased because
this would reduce weathertightness. The lowest batten should be fixed so
that the tile projects not less than 50mm over the gutter.

Battens should be:

• at least 1.2m long

• supported by at least three rafters

• butt jointed on a rafter, and

• nailed to every rafter.

Batten ends should be cut square and nails skew driven on each side of the
joint.

Where battens are spaced at more than 200mm, not more than one batten in
any group of four should be joined over any one truss or rafter. Not more
than three joints should be made together in twelve consecutive battens when
the gauge is 200mm or less.

Battens on rigid sarking boards should be supported on counter battens to

allow free drainage of any water that may reach the underlay. Counter
battens should be fixed through to the rafters and not to the sarking boards
alone. Battens should be fixed through counter battens to rafters.

Battens should be fixed with cut or wire nails. The nail shank can be smooth,
annular ringed or helically threaded. Nails can be steel or aluminium. In
coastal areas, steel nails should be hot dip galvanized.

(d) slates and tiles

Slates should be fully nailed over the whole roof.

The design should specify the number of fixings for clay and concrete tiles.
Tables of roof tile fixing contain minimum fixings for tiles. Additional nails
and clips may be necessary in accordance with the design.

Careful setting out will improve the finished appearance of the roof and helps
to avoid problems such as unequal overhangs at verges and often makes it
possible to avoid excessive tile cutting at abutments, chimneys and similar
obstructions. Small sections of cut tiles are difficult to fix and should be
avoided. This can be achieved by incorporating tile sizes such as double size
tiles, tile and a half or half tiles where these are available.

216
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single lap Interlocking tiles have a tolerance of approximately 3mm in the

joint. For double lapped plain tiles and slates, joints should be slightly open.
This allows some flexibility in setting out and should avoid tile cutting.

Bottom edges of double lapped slate and plain tile roofs should be finished
with an under-eaves course.

Where verge clips are specified by the manufacturer, these should be twice
nailed to the tile batten and be in full contact with the upper tile surface to
prevent tile lift.

Tiles to be bedded on mortar should be wetted first on their contact surface.

Surface water should be allowed to drain before fixing. Substantial

thicknesses of mortar bedding may be needed, eg beneath rolled tiles. To
prevent shrinkage of large mortar joints, concealed or decorative dentil tiles
should be fully bedded into all joints in excess of 25mm thick.

(e) roof mortar

Roofing mortar should be 1:3 cement:sand with plasticiser. The mix should
be based on sharp sand with soft sand added to achieve workability. The
proportion of sharp sand should not be less than ⅓ of the total sand content.

Mortar bedding and jointing should be completed in one operation.

(f) other roof coverings

When using the following materials, the detailing and workmanship should
follow the design and recognised good building practice:

• sheet metal roofing including lead, copper and zinc

• thatch

• cedar shingles.

FLASHINGS AND WEATHERINGS

3-L Flashings and weatherings shall be constructed to prevent damp entering the
dwelling

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) eaves

217
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tiles, slates and hip tiles should overhang to the centre of the gutter. For
slates or plain tiles, an under-eaves course should be used. Fascia boards
should be fixed at a height that maintains the correct pitch in accordance
with the tile manufacturer’s recommendations.

To prevent the underlay sagging at the eaves and forming a water trap behind
the fascia, the underlay should be supported by a continuous fillet or
proprietary eaves support tray.

(b) verges

All verge tiles and slates should be bedded on an undercloak. Alternatively,

proprietary dry verge systems should be fixed in accordance with
manufacturers’ recommendations.

The undercloak should be installed to a true line and bedded on roofing

mortar struck off flush with the external surface of the wall. Alternatively, a
suitable exterior grade bedding sealant could be used in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations. Where a bargeboard is used, the
undercloak should be securely nailed to a true line.

The undercloak should be installed at the correct level to ensure that the line
of the tiling is maintained where it passes over the wall.
Where slates or plain tiles are used the verge should project 38mm to 50mm
beyond the gable wall or bargeboard.

Interlocking tiles can project 30mm to 60mm.

Tile battens should finish 25mm to 50mm from the face of the protecting
undercloak.

Cut ends of tile battens that are in contact with mortar should be treated
with a liberal brush coating of preservative.

At verges:

• cut plain tiles are not acceptable and purpose made plain tile and a
half or half tile should be used

• cut single lapped interlocking tiles should not be used

• natural slate verges should be formed with full slates and either slate
and a half or half slates that are a minimum 150mm wide.

218
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The undercloak should lap the roof underlay but not tilt inwards. Wet bedded
verge tiles or slates should be fully bedded on roofing mortar having a
minimum width of 100mm. Verge slates or tiles should be bedded on the
undercloak and completed in one operation.

Where required by the design interlocking single lap tiles should be secured
with clips and twice nailed in position at the tile lap, as well as bedded in
mortar. Verge clips should be in full contact with the tile to resist uplift.

(c) ridges and hips

Where ridge and hip tiles are bedded on mortar they should be mechanically
fixed with self sealing non-ferrous fixings into timber battens. Where
proprietary systems are used they should be fixed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.

Mortar bedding and pointing should be completed in one operation and

achieve a nominal joint thickness of 10mm. To prevent shrinkage of large
mortar joints, concealed or decorative dentil tiles should be fully bedded into
all joints in excess of 25mm thick. See Design clause 1-H (k).

Where wet bedded tiles are used at hips, they should be supported at the
base of the hip by a galvanized hip iron and project to the centre line of the
gutter.

(d) valleys and hidden gutters

Construction should be adequate in relation to:

• depth

• width

• undercloaking

219
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

• pointing

• adequate support

• pitch.

Valleys should be formed with one of the following:

• pre-formed GRP

• valley coursing tiles (plain tiles)

• valley trough tiles (interlocking tiles)

• non-ferrous metal

• a proprietary system.

Where roof coverings are of plain tiles or slates, laced and swept valleys may
be used or, alternatively, a mitred valley with soakers. The true pitch of the
valley should not be less than the minimum allowed pitch and GRP or other
materials should be lapped in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations. Minimum Code 4 lead or other suitable saddle flashing is
required at the head of all valleys.

PROPRIETARY SYSTEMS

Proprietary gutter or valley systems should be securely fixed on to suitable

supports and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Where ply is used for support it should be exterior grade.

Non-ferrous metal saddle flashings or other approved proprietary flashings

should be used at intersections and abutments.

VALLEY USING VALLEY TILES

In roofs with plain tiles, purpose-made valley coursing tiles should be used.

Adjacent roof tiles should be cut neatly to form a smooth junction, preferably
cutting from tile-and-a-half tiles.

220
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A laced valley, swept valley or mitred tiles with soakers may also be used. All
valley tiles should be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and small cut tiles should be avoided.

For single lap interlocking tiles, purposemade valley trough tiles should be
supported by gutter boards. Roof tiles should be cut to the correct rake.

Mechanical cutting gives a neater appearance than hand cutting. The tiles
should be bedded in mortar, leaving a minimum 100mm wide channel
(125mm minimum for pitches below 30°).

LEAD-LINED VALLEY

Lead-lined valleys should be supported on gutter boards of 19mm thick

exterior grade ply or as specified.

Lead in valleys should be laid in lengths not exceeding 1.5m and be lapped
150mm at each length. Tiles should be cut and bedded as for valley trough
tiles except that the mortar should be bedded on an undercloak (for example
slate) to prevent direct contact between the lead and the mortar. Mortar
should not bridge the welt detail.

(e) flat roof intersection

Where a flat roof adjoins a pitched roof, or where valleys or gutters occur, the
waterproof membrane should be carried up under the tiling to a height of
150mm above the flat roof, valley or gutter and lapped by the roofing
underlay.

The lowest course of tiles/slates should not touch the roof membrane.

Note

Where the flat roof is over a dormer, it is recommended that the flat roof
should be designed and constructed with a fall to the front or sides.

(f) abutments

All abutments should be weatherproofed using non-ferrous metal flashings.

Normally, lead flashings should not exceed 1.5m in length, with laps of not
less than 100mm.

Flashing should be tucked into a mortar joint or chase 25mm deep and at
least 75mm above the tiling level and lead wedged in place. The joint should

221
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

be pointed in cement mortar or using suitable exterior grade sealant in

accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Cavity trays should be linked to the flashing to prevent water penetrating into
an enclosed area where a:

• flat or pitched roof over an enclosed area abuts a wall

• balcony abuts a wall.

Where a pitched roof abuts the wall at an angle, a stepped cavity tray linked
to a stepped flashing should be used. Stepped flashings should be cut from a
strip at least 150mm wide. Soakers or a secret gutter should be installed at
abutments where slates, flat interlocking tiles or plain tiles are used.

222
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(g) projections through the roof

A purpose-made one-piece flashing and upstand should be used around pipes

projecting through the tiling.

Chimney flashings should link with the chimney dpc trays. An example is shown below.

223
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(h) changes in roof slope

Flashings or soakers should be used where there is a change in roof slope of 5° or

more, eg at mansards and sprockets.

A saddle flashing should be used where a ridge meets the main roof.

FIRE STOPPING

3-M Pitched roofs shall be constructed to offer adequate resistance to the spread of
fire

Firestopping and cavity barriers should be provided:

• at junctions between cavities

• above separating walls

• within boxed eaves of separating walls.

The separating wall should stop

about 25mm below the top of
adjacent roof trusses.

A soft fire-resistant packing, such

as mineral wool, should be used to
allow for movement in roof timbers
and prevent ‘hogging’ of the tiles.

A cavity barrier should be provided

within boxed eaves. The cavity
barrier should be wire reinforced
mineral wool blanket, at least
50mm thick, nailed to the rafter

224
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

and carefully cut to shape to fully seal the boxed eaves.

THERMAL INSULATION

3-N Thermal insulation and ventilation of roofs shall prevent the adverse effects of
condensation

To avoid condensation forming in the roof space ensure that:

• ventilation of the roof is provided in accordance with the design

• insulation does not block any ventilation paths

• insulation is laid over the whole loft area, including the wall plate

• there are no gaps in the insulation.

The amount of moist air entering the loft space from the dwelling should be controlled
by:

• draughtstripping the loft hatch or using a proprietary loft hatch

• ensuring that the hatch is heavy enough (or suitably fixed) to compress the
draught seal

• the use of appropriate down lighters that limit air leakage

• sealing gaps where services pass through the ceiling.

The guidance above will assist in reducing the risk of condensation occurring but is not acceptable

225
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

To reduce the risk of freezing and condensation on pipework, the following

precautions should be taken:

• place roof insulation above and around water tanks but not below them

• locate water pipes below the main roof insulation whenever possible

• insulate all water services above the main roof insulation, including cisterns
and vent pipes.

It is recommended that the cold rising main be insulated above ceiling level
even if it is below the main roof insulation (condensation that forms on
uninsulated cold water pipes located below the main roof insulation can
result in damage to ceilings and decorations).

ROOF DRAINAGE

3-O Roof drainage shall adequately carry rainwater to an outfall

Items to be taken into account include:

(a) fixing and jointing gutters and downpipes

Rainwater gutters and downpipes should be fixed in the positions indicated

by the design using the correct type of fittings for internal and external
angles, outlets, etc to ensure efficient drainage of the roof.

Gutters and downpipes should be supported and jointed in accordance with

the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Rainwater pipes passing through dwellings should be insulated.

(b) falls

Gutters should be laid with sufficient fall towards the outlet, unless designed
to be flat, and be provided with stop ends.

(c) satisfactory outfall

If a downpipe discharges above ground level or above a drainage gully, a shoe

should be fixed to the end of the pipe to prevent walls becoming saturated.
Appendix 7.2-A

226
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

THEORETICAL, STANDARD REQUIREMENT OF CEMENT FOR VARIOUS ITEMS

OF WORK FOR GUIDANCE OF CONTRACTOR.

Qty. of
Sl. No. Brief description of item Unit cement
in bags
1 Cement Concrete 1:5:10 Cum 2.6
2 Cement Concrete 1:4:8 Cum 3.4
3 Cement Concrete 1:3:6 Cum. 4.40 *
4 Cement Concrete 1:2:4 Cum 6.40 *
5 Reinforced Cement Concrete 1:2:4 Cum. 6.40 *
6 Reinforced Cement Concrete: 1:1 1/2 :3 Cum. 8.00 *
7 Reinforced Cement Concrete 1:1:2 Cum. 12.20 *

Note : For controlled concrete items like M-10, M-15, M-20, M-25 etc. the Consumption of
cement will have to be assessed by the Engineer-in-charge on the basis of design mixes
approved for individual work.

8 Brick Masonry in C.M. 1:4 Cum. 1.9

9 Brick Masonry in C.M. 1:6 Cum. 1.25

10 Half brick masonry in C.M. 1:4 with RCC 1:2:4 stiffeners Sqm. 0.27

11 Half brick masonry in 1:4 Sqm. 1.21

12a. R.R. Masonry in C.M. 1:6 Cum. 1.65
b. C.R. Masonry in C.M. 1:6 Cum. 1.56
13 IPS Flooring (C.C. 1:2:4, Finished smooth)
a. 30 mm thick Sqm. 0.23
b. 40 mm thick (smooth / broom finish) Sqm. 0.3
c. 50 mm thick Sqm. 0.36
(+) 20 mm thick skirting /dado in cm. 1:3 Sqm. 0.3
Hardonate flooring – 50 mm thick (C.C. 1:2:4, finished
14 Sqm. 0.41
smooth)
15 Kota Stone :
Flooring ( with lime mortar bedding pointed with matching
a. Sqm. 0.13
cement slurry)
b. Skirting with 20mm thick C.M. 1:3 backing Sqm. 0.27
c. Coping Sqm. 0.13
16 Terrazzo Tile :
Flooring (with lime mortar bedding and pointed with cement
a. Sqm. 0.18
slurry)
b. Skirting with 20 mm thick C.M. 1:3 Sqm. 0.28

c. Treads, hydraulically pressed with bedding C.M. 1:3 Sqm 0.37

d. Treads in one piece Sqm. 0.28

e. Risers, hydraulically pressed with C.M. 1:3 backing Sqm. 0.28

f. Risers in one piece Sqm. 0.23

227
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

17 Cast in situ terrazzo :

Flooring 40 mm thick (28 mm C.C. 1:2:4 + 12mm with marble
a. Sqm. 0.26
chips & powder)
Skirting, 20mm thick (12mm C.M. 1:3 + 8 mm marble chips
b. Sqm. 0.25
with cement & marble powder)
White glazed tile flooring and dado over 20mm C.M. 1:3
18 Sqm. 0.31
bedding
19 Cement tile :
a. Flooring (Lime mortar bedding) Sqm. 0.18
b. Skirting with 20 mm thick C.M. 1:3 Sqm. 0.28
20 Plaster skirting, 20 mm thick in C.M. 1:3 Sqm. 0.3

21 Cuddapah stone kitchen platform over 20mm thick C.M. 1:4 Sqm 0.3

22 Cuddapah stone window sill over 20mm thick C.M. 1:4 Sqm. 0.27

Fixing hold fasts in cement concrete 1:3:6 of size 300 X 100 X 100
23 2.2
150mm for door & windows nos.

24 Cement plaster in C.M. 1:4 / 1:5 with neeru finish

A. Cement mortar 1:4

a. 12 mm thick Sqm. 0.11
b. 15 mm thick Sqm. 0.13
c. 20 mm thick Sqm. 0.17
B. Cement mortar 1:5
a. 12 mm thick Sqm. 0.09
b. 15 mm thick Sqm. 0.11
c. 20 mm thick Sqm. 0.14
Cement plaster in C.M. 1:4 in two coats with neat cement
25
punning
a. 12 mm thick 10 mm + 5 mm ( for ceiling) Sqm. 0.18

b. 15 mm thick 15 mm + 5 mm (for internal walls) Sqm. 0.22

Cement plaster in C.M. 1:4, 20 mm thick rough finish (for

26 Sqm. 0.17
external brick /concrete surfaces

Sand faced plaster, 20 mm thick ( 12 mm C.M. 1:4 + 8mm

27 Sqm. 0.21
C.M.1:3)
Rough cast plaster, 25mm thick (12 mm C.M. 1:4 + 13mm
28 Sqm. 0.27
C.M. 1:3)
(+) (+) 10 mm wide & 18 mm thick plain or moulded cement 100
0.152
mortar band in CM 1:4 RM
Cement plaster in C.M. 1:3 with waterproofing compound
29
finished smooth with neat cement
a. 12 mm thick Sqm. 0.19
b. 20 mm thick Sqm. 0.27
30 Cement pointing in C.M. 1:3
a. Ruled pointing (groove pointing) Sqm. 0.02
b. Raised & cut pointing Sqm. 0.04
Cement based waterproofing works (M/s India water-proofing
31
or equivalent :

228
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

a. Terrace type average 115mm thick Sqm. 0.45

b. Basement type (Box type) 0.7
c. Basement type (surface) Sqm. 0.6
d. In sunken floor of toilets, chajjas, parapets Sqm. 0.3
e. Brickbat coba in toilets, extra in roof terrace Cum. 3
f. O.H. water tanks Sqm. 0.5
g. Expansion joints RM 0.5
32 Damp proof course in CC 1:2:4
a. 25 mm thick Sqm. 0.16
b. 38 mm thick Sqm. 0.24
33 Laying R.C.C. spun pipes in C.M. 1:1 / 1:2
A. 100 mm dia 10 m 0.1
B. 150 mm dia 10 m 0.12
C. 250 mm dia 10 m 0.18
D. 300 mm dia 10 m 0.22
E. 450 mm dia 10 m 0.48
F. 600 mm dia 10 m 0.64
Chain link fencing / barbed wire fencing C.C. 1:3:4 pockets of
34
45 X 450 X 600 mm
a. Angle iron posts m 0.21
b. Cement concrete 1:2:4 posts m 0.37
35 Kerb stone in CC 1:3:6 of size 125 X 375 mm m 0.21
Shahabad stone paving, pointed in groove C.M. 1:3 15 X 10
36 Sqm. 0.02
mm

37 Pointing & grouting stone pitching in CM 1:3 Sqm. 0.14

229
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PREAMBLE

GENERAL PREAMBLE

1 The B.O.Q's shall be read together with the specifications and drawings to fully
understand the requirements. All the requirements of the specifications and
drawings shall be deemed to be a part of every item in the B.O.Q's whether or not
specifically stated. The rates quoted for any item shall be all inclusive, i.e., shall
include for provisions and requirements of the specifications and drawings and shall
comply with the requirements of Contract Documents.

2 Should the drawings, specifications or schedules disagree in them or with either or

both of the others, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials, as
determined by the Architect/PM shall be performed and provided unless otherwise
directed in writing by the Architect/PM. The discrepancies shall first be brought to
the notice of the Architect/PM and work shall be performed as per his instructions.

3 The classification of various items of works for purposes of measurements and

payments shall be as per bills of quantities (BOQ). Except where distinguished by
BOQ the rates apply to all heights, depths, sizes, shapes and locations. They also
cater for all cuts and wastes. No floor-wise separation shall be made for the rates.
Likewise all heights of centering, shuttering, staging, formwork and scaffolding are
covered by the rates including multi stage propping for heights greater than one floor
as per drawings, unless otherwise specified.

4. Generally mode of measurement shall be in accordance with IS 1200 for all items
except those for which it has been mentioned elsewhere.

5. Work shall be executed strictly in accordance with the Technical Specifications, and
the rates quoted shall be all inclusive including compliance with their stipulations.

6. For items not covered by the specifications, the work shall be executed in accordance
with relevant BIS specifications.

7. In the event BIS specifications do not cover an item, the work for that item shall be
executed in accordance with the best Engineering Practice acceptable to the
Architect/PM.

8. Specific preambles for each section of work are given along with the respective
sections.

9. Makes of approved products, manufacturers etc. are listed in order of preference.

Prices shall be quoted based on the first preference. If during construction, the first
preference is not available, or a decision is taken to opt for the second or any other
preference, the benefit of cost differential shall accrue to the owner. If, however, the
selected option is more expensive than the first preference, the work shall be carried
out at the rates quoted in the Bill of Quantities, without any additional cost to the
Owner.

10. For all Civil works curved on plan to a mean radius exceeding 6 mtrs. shall be
measure and included with general civil works. For civil works curved on plan to a
mean radius not exceeding 6 mtrs. shall be measured separately and shall included
in all cutting works, templates etc. It shall be measured as the mean length of the
wall.

11. Contractors shall include in their quoted rates for pumping out the water collected
due to run off or otherwise during construction.

12. The rates quoted by contractors shall be inclusive of all tools & plants, labour,
material, all accessories required for intended performance of the item of work unless
otherwise specified.

Preamble to Site Development and Earth work

1.0 Earthwork

230
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 Measurement for excavation shall be recorded only for the plan dimensions of the
excavation plan provided by the Architects.

In case dismantling of any underground existing structures / foundations is required

during excavation, it shall be duly classified and paid for separately.

Any excavations beyond the specified lines and levels shall not be paid unless felt
appropriate by the PMC in the event that the same is deemed unavoidable.

1.2 For measurement of rocks stacks shall be made as directed. The net quantity of the
rock shall be arrived at by applying deduction of 50% to allow for void in stacks.

1.3 For main building excavation over area " good for construction drawings " shall be
issued and measurement shall be made as per the same.

1.4 The rates quoted for Earthwork shall include for :-

1.4.1 Royalty and other taxes payable.

1.4.2 Necessary measures taken for protection and all Services.

1.4.3 Removal of all foreign matter, stores, brick bats if met during excavation.

1.4.4 Removal of rubbish arising from uprooting rank vegetation and weeds.

1.4.5. Maintenance of all required levels.

1.4.6 Watering

1.4.7 Compliance with all stipulation of Technical Specification.

1.5 The anti-termite treatment shall be carried out by an approved agency and shall carry
at least 10 years guarantee duly counter signed by main contractor on an approved
Performa on Rs. 50/- stamp paper.

2.0 Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete

A. The rates quoted shall include for :-

Use of batching plant for ALL concrete (mandatory)

2 Works at all height and depths, unless otherwise specified.

3. Admixtures for normal concrete as well as concrete required to be water proofed

4. Use of greater than minimum specified quantities of cement to achieve specified or

required mix design.

5. Making all drips, grooves, moulds, curved surfaces and edges etc. in concrete and/or
plasterwork as directed.

6. Forming all expansion and/or construction joints as directed.

7. All projections and ornamental works and finishing to shape as specified.

8. Making cutouts in RCC surfaces etc.

9. Hydro testing of the liquid retaining structure including all arrangement for filling
with water, emptying after testing, including providing pipe lines, pumping systems
etc.

10. Embedding all electric pipes, boxes, fan hooks, false ceiling suspensions and inserts
of any other description etc., in RCC slab beam or column as directed.

231
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

11. Installing a calibrated electrically operated cube testing machine at site, getting it
calibrated every month and resubmitting a test report to Project Manager.

12. Preparing test cubes and testing them at site or in an approved laboratory.

13. Working up or hacking of concrete surface for providing keys for further concrete
work including applying thick cement slurry or mortar as directed.

14. Centering, shuttering and formwork, shuttering boxing propping etc. except wherever
specified to be excluded in the item. Shuttering to be made watertight if necessary
including cost of nails, screws, etc. shall be included.

15. Special precautions for tall formwork upto 20 m. height or more, as required or
directed.

16. Formwork required or as directed to distribute the dead and live loads of slabs to
minimum of two floors below.

17. Use of shuttering oil as specified.

18. Use of cement slurry over shuttering before commencing concreting or on conc. slabs
to create bond between Plain / RCC surface and subsequent applied Finishes, such
as Flooring, Plaster, dado, skirting etc.

19. Machine mixing, consolidating by rodding mechanically, vibrating and tamping,

hoisting to all lifts and leads and curing as specified.

20. Sinking of floors in specified areas.

21. Providing authorized laps, chairs, spacers etc. wherever necessary.

22. Forming cutouts, openings and re-concreting at a later stage as necessary unless
otherwise specified.

23 Maintaining of POUR CARDS showing approval of Project Manager to concrete

various components of RCC frame.

24 Work in narrow widths, small quantities and curved alignment.

25 Removing rust, mill scales, oil grease, paint etc. from reinforcing bars.

26 Wastage due to cutting bars to required lengths.

27 Cost of 18 gauge annealed binding wire.

28 Providing cover to steel with cement concrete briquette spacers.

29 Payment of steel shall be made for weight actually placed in position as per design
and drawing or as directed, as per B.I.S. No allowance shall be made for rolling
margins or difference from standard weights.

30 Providing additional water bars as directed in construction joints other than those
specified and shown in the drawings.

31. Wherever cement is mentioned in the contract document, it shall mean grey ordinary
portland cement of grade 43 unless otherwise specified.
3.0 Brick Work/Stone Masonry

A. The rates quoted shall include for :-

1. All scaffolding, ladders, platforms, staging and plant required in the execution of work
to any height or depth.
2. Hacking and roughening of concrete or other surfaces in contact with masonry for
bondage.
3. Leaving out dowels from concrete members for anchorage.
4. Extra labour in beam filling.

232
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

5. Rough cutting and waste.

6. Raking out joints to specified depth either for plaster or finishing the joint flush as
the work proceeds, or as directed.
7. Setting anchor plates, lintels, cills etc. in or on walls, setting door frames, window
frames, and the like in cement mortar or through other means specified.
8. Holes (cut and formed or left) for fixing pipes, bolts and other inserts and making
good including grouting if necessary.
9. Forming chases for edges of concrete floors or other units, for sealing in waterproofing
layers etc.
10. Providing pre-cast cement concrete (1:2:4) at door jambs where required to receive
expansions bolts/holdfasts.
11. Building in holdfasts and such other inserts.
12. Work in pillars square & rounded.
13. Work at all heights, depths and locations unless otherwise mentioned.
14. Work in curve, circle or cut work to shape as shown.
15. Cavity wall construction, including providing necessary cramps ties.
Treatment and testing of surfaces for efflorescence.
Making provisions for anchoring Stone to Concrete or Brick Surfaces
Dressing of stone surfaces to required finish and providing grooves, rebates etc. to
receive anchors.
Making provisions for insulation / waterproofing as the work progresses.

4.0 Waterproofing

A. The rates quoted shall include for :-

1 Executions of water-proofing treatment through approved specialists in the

field
and under their direct supervision and strictly as per specifications.

2 Minimum 10 years warranty.

3. Testing of treated areas, as directed.

4 Treatment of down take pipes and other obstructions.

5 All cutting, dressing, trimming and waste.

6. Providing concrete fillet at the junction horizontal and vertical surfaces as per
drawings.

7. Preparation of surface for water-proofing work, insulation and other related

treatments.

8. Work in narrow widths, bands, strips and at all locations.

5.0 WOOD WORK

A The rates quoted shall include for :-

1. Seasoning as per specification of all wood members incorporated in the work.

2. All fiber or plastic plugs, screws, nails, pins, key and such other fixing accessories.

3. Hold fasts/cleats welded or screwed to frame, including embedding/anchoring to

concrete members.

4. Expansion bolts/rawl plugs and machine screws for fixing to supports where called
for.

5. Filling and finishing neat, gaps around frames of doors, windows, etc. with approved
sealant.

6. Providing required coating of wood preservative and fire-retardant paint to all

unexposed wooden surfaces including framing plywood, ply boards etc. and backs of

233
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

exposed wood surfaces.

7. All items as included in the individual items in Bill Of Quantities

6.0 Floor Finishes

A The rates quoted shall include for :-

1 Use and waste of all temporary fillets, forms, templates, moulds, straight
edges
etc.

2 Washing of coarse aggregate in approved manner.

3 Final preparation of the base sub-grade or sub-floor.

4 Cleaning and watering the surface immediately before laying the floor if so
directed.

5 Cutting, rubbing and polishing surfaces and edges where applicable.

6 Rounding of corners, edges and junction of floors with skirting or Dado and
also
cutting recesses where required to accommodate recessed skirting.

7 Forming rounded recesses in floor.

8 Providing grooves.

9 Work in narrow width strips and to profiles shown and at all heights and
locations unless otherwise mentioned.

10 Curing, protecting and cleaning all finished surfaces as specified.

11 All relevant points specified in preamble for "Concrete work-plain and

reinforced"
shall be applicable to all cement concrete work occurring under "Flooring and
Paving".

12 Cost of finishing and polishing the exposed edges of stone work.

7.0 Finishes

A Plaster and other Finishes

The rates quoted shall include for :-

1 Work in narrow widths, cornices and small quantities unless otherwise mentioned.

2 Work on any surfaces such as bricks, concrete, stone etc.

3 Preparation of surface by hacking, racking out joints, wetting the surface etc.
hacking of concrete surfaces to receive complete plaster.

4 The thickness of plaster key in joints etc. and extra thickness of plaster over
undulations etc.

5 Arises, drips, grooves, chamfers of any width and depth, internal rounded angles,
external rounded angles, rounding of corners etc.

6 Providing chicken wire mesh below plaster at junction of differing base materials.

7 Providing grooves at the junction of plaster with other finishes and grooves

234
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

between different plaster surfaces.

8 Providing edge / corner beads as required or directed.

9 Scoring surface of plaster for key where the surface is not required to be finished
fair.

10 Keeping the work well wetted for at least 10 days.

11 Work at all heights depth and locations and use of scaffolding, ladders etc.
necessary for execution of work.

B Painting and Other Finishes

A The rates quoted shall include for :-

1 Work at all heights and use of all scaffolding trestles, ladders, cradles, etc.
necessary for execution of work and for inspection.

2 Preparation of surface such as brushing, sand paper, scrapping, washing and

rubbing etc. to receive finishing coats.

3 Puttying, sand-papering and dusting of surface in between coats where

applicable.

4 Work on cornices, narrow width, bands etc.

5 Providing additional coats of paint (in addition to the number, specified) in order to
obtain the result desired by the Architect. Nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.

6 Spreading and removing covering to doors, window, floors, fitting etc. to protect
them from splashes.

7 Washing floors, cleaning glass, joinery, electric fittings etc. of drops and splashes and
leaving premises clean and tidy.

235
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIALS

Description

This section covers the List of approved material for the items required for this
project.

1. Ordinary Portland Cement 43/53 grade - ACC, L & T , JK

2. TMT steel - Tata, Sail

3. White Cement - Birla , JK

4. Choloropyrophos - Dhanwan 20% EC, Trishool 20% EC.

5. Shuttering ply - Century, Duro, Green

6. Structural Steel - Tata, Sail

7. Anchor fasteners - HILTI, FISCHER-BOSCH

8. Water proofing compound - Cico, Struco N , STP

9. Flush Door - Green ply , Century , Archid

10. Mirror - Modi , Asahi,Saint Gobain

11. Laminate - Greenlam, Marino, Formica

12. Veneer - Sun , Durian , Century, Green

13. Glass - Asahi , Modi , Saint Gobain

14. Ply / board - Century , Duro , Green, Archid

15. Floor Spring - Everite , Dorking , Ozone

16. Drawer Channel - Haffle (full extension telescopic),

Hettich

17. Locks in cabinets - Godrej

18. Door Closer - Everite , Dorking , Ozone

19. Door Locks - Door Set , Godrej, Inox

20. Hard Wood - 1st Quality Deodar Wood, Hollock

Wood

21. Teak Wood - Best quality African teak wood

22. Fire Retardant paint - Navair

23. Adhesive for wood - Fevicol/VAM/Jeevanjod

24. Pressed steel frame - As per approved sample

25. Precast Terrazzo Tile - Nitco or approved equivalent

26. PVC Strips - As per approved sample

27. Kota Stone - As per approved sample

28. PVC Water bar - Fixopan or approved equivalent

29. Marble/ Stone - As per approved sample

236
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

30. Paints - ICI, Asian , Berger,Shalimar,

Nerolac,

31. Water Proof Cement Paint - Snowcem, Supersnowcem

32. Textured Paint - Spectrum, Unitile

33. Silicon Sealant - GE, Wacker

34. Polysulphide Sealents - Pidilite /VAM

35. Expansion Joint Sealers - Master Builders Technologies.,

Supreme

36. Aluminum - Jindal / Hindalco / Bhoruka

/Mahavir

37. Masking Tapes - Suncontrol / Wonder Polymer

38. PVC sleeves for fixing of windows - Kundan / Puja / Atul.

39. Stainless Steel friction stay - Ebco/Hettich/Haffle

40. EPDM Gaskets - Anand / Rooo / Hanu

41. Galvanium Sheet - Everest, Lloyd

42 Epoxy floor - Edison coating Product

237
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

238
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount

A EARTHWORK

Earthwork excavation in all type of soil, murrum, after clearing of vegetation and debris (to be
segregated and kept separate from the reusable earth) including loading, carting away from
the site, unloading and dozing at disposal yard etc. complete as directed by EIC.
Rate shall include for excavation and disposal of earth within the campus as and where
required and as directed by EIC either by manual or by mechanical means, including
loading & unloading, necessary equipments, tools & plants, dressing to proper level and
Cum 2,215.00 -
grade as required, dumping the soil within the campus on the ground , taking necessary
1 precautions to prevent any spillages or spoiling of the campus roads during removal &
transporting the soil, all consumables including removal of soil excavated extra by the
contractor for providing shoring & strutting, extra working space as required for any kind of
works etc complete, as directed.( UP TO A LEAD OF 1KM)

Rate shall includes To prevent sliding of sides of foundation , the contractor shall provide
effective and sufficient protection such as but not limited to shoring or any other method . -
The rate shall includes providing Staging, timbering, struttingetc.
-
Backfilling with available Earth
Backfilling in plinth, in embankments, around footings, pits, trenches, foundations etc in
layers not exceeding 200mm thickness ,including watering, compacting by ramming/ rolling/
hand ramming , leveling to specified slopes, dressing and consolidation etc at optimum
2 moisture content with mechanical rollers/rammers etc.(compacted to 90% modified proctor Cum 1,814.00 -
density) complete as per specification and as directed (payment shall be made based on
certified excavation quantity less volume occupied by structures and theoretical completed qty.
As measured from drawings. backfilling with available earth in and around excavated area.

-
Back filling with Granular Sub-Base (GSB)
Supplying from approved source and Laying graded Granular Sub base of specified and
approved geotechnical parameters in embankment or depression in specified layer thickness of
maximum 250mm, watering and compacting each layer with specified and approved
3 machinery, tools and tackles etc including 10T rollers., to achieve Optimum Moisture Content
Cum 318.00 -
so as to give specified compaction density not less than 98% Maximum Modified Dry Density
at Optimum Moisture Content determined in accordance with IS 2720 part VIII etc complete
as per MoRTH Specification and approved design drawings including Quality Control testing,
maintenance and protection as directed by and to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.

B CEMENT CONCRETE WORKS

Providing and laying plain cement concrete M7.5 (1:4:8) at plinth level & upto 5m below plinth
level in foundations, drains, fillings, non-suspended floors, pavements, ramps, etc including
shuttering, tamping, ramming, vibrating, curing, shuttering, etc all as specified in any shape,
1 Cum 258.00 -
position, thickness and finishing the top surface rough or smooth or as specified and directed
with 40mm and down size graded crushed stone aggregates with minimum cement content
and maximum water cement ratio as per IS:456-latest revision.

Providing and laying in position ready mix concrete M-20 (1:1.5:3) in RCC for all types of
structures including proper vibration and curing including broom finish if required but
excluding cost of formwork and reinforcement etc all complete as per drawing, specification
2 Cum 653.00 -
and direction of EIC. With contractor's RMC plant (including transit mixers, concrete pump /
crane).for concreting below FGL (including cost on account of cube tests and quality control)

-
Providing and laying in position ready mix concrete M-20 (1:1.5:3) in RCC including proper
vibration and curing including broom finish if required but excluding cost of formwork and
reinforcement etc all complete as per drawing, specification and direction of EIC. With
3 Cum 670.00 -
contractor's RMC plant (including transit mixers, concrete pump /crane). For concreting
above FGL upto Desired Height (including cost on account of cube tests and quality control)

-
Providing and laying in position ready mix concrete M-30 in RCC for all types of structures
including proper vibration and curing but excluding cost of formwork and reinforcement etc all
4 complete as per drawing, specification and direction of EIC. With contractor's common Cum 164.00 -
Batching/RMC plant. For concreting below FGL (including cost on account of cube tests and
quality control)

Providing and laying in position ready mix concrete M-30 in RCC for all types of structures
5 including proper vibration and curing required but excluding cost of formwork and Cum 16.00 -
reinforcement etc all complete as per drawing, specification and direction of EIC. With
contractor's common Batching/RMC plant. For concreting above FGL upto Desired Height .

C FORMWORK

Page 1 of 14
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount

Providing and fixing to correct level, line plumb, vertical, plain formwork with contractor's
own material in all shapes made of plywood/ms sheets for RCC/PCC works including
1 necessary strutting, scaffolding, bracing etc. Leaving necessary recesses, opening chamfers Sqm 1,857.00 -
etc. Keeping the same in position during concreting and removing after the specified period, all
complete as per specification and direction of EIC. for work below FGL

2 Same as item No-1 but for work above FGL Sqm 4,387.00 -

Providing and fixing to correct level, line plumb, vertical, plain formwork for Retaining walls,
return walls, walls (any thickness) including attached pilasters, buttresses, plinth andstring
courses fillets etc with contractor's own material in all shapes made of plywood/ms sheets for
3 RCC/PCC works including necessary strutting, scaffolding, bracing etc. Leaving necessary Sqm 1,316.00 -
recesses, opening chamfers etc. Keeping the same in position during concreting and removing
after the specified period, all complete as per specification and direction of EIC. for work at all
levels.

D REINFORCEMENT

Supplying, cutting, bending to shape, fabricating, fixing and tying in position TMT
Reinforcement Steel of  Fe 500 grade at all levels and location as shown in the structural
drawing.
* The reinforcement shall be of an approved brand viz TATA / SAIL / VIZAG or equivalent and
1 the rate shall include cost of supply & tying reinforcement with 18 gauge GI binding wire in MT 149.50 -
the reinforcement rate. The unit rate shall also include cost of all related operations viz inputs
of labour, materials, tools and tackle, equipment, machinery etc complete.
* For measurement purpose actual quantity for reinforcement bars provided and authentic
laps OR couplers provided shall be considered.

E MASONRY WORK

Brick work of thickness 230 mm and above using selected quality burnt clay FPS bricks of
class designation 75 (Crushing strength not less than 75 kg/sqcm) in Super structure laid in
1 cement mortar 1:6 (1 cement :6 coarse sand) mix, joints finished, flush raked to 6mm depth CUM 78.00 -
including jointing with concrete where required and as per specification and drawing or as
directed by EIC., up to desired height.

Half Brick work using selected quality burnt clay FPS bricks of class designation 75
(Crushing strength not less than 75 kg/sqcm) in foundation laid in cement mortar 1:4 (1
2 SQM 202.00 -
cement :4 coarse sand) mix, joints finished, flush raked to 6mm depth including jointing with
concrete where required and as per specification and drawing or as directed by EIC.,

Providing and constructing hollow block masonry work (internal / external walls) at all levels,
using approved quality blocks in cement mortar 1:4 in joints using standard size of 150 x 300
x 150 mm of hollow blocks of variable thickness as indicated herein below including providing
RCC beam of 100 mm thickness spaced @ 1.20 m c/c with 2 nos. 8 mm dia. bars in cement
concrete of Mix M15. The blocks shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3.0 N/Sqmm.
The dry density shall be @ 850 - 900 kg / Cum and water absorption not exceeding 3% at
equilibrium. The scope shall include erection of necessary scaffolding, working platform,
3 staging, curing etc. complete and as directed. The cost of R.C.C Patli beam (tied with column)
including centering / shuttering  and Reinforcement shall form part of this item and shall not
be paid separately. The measurement shall be taken on the basis of actually constructed block
work including the intermediate RCC beam . Any wastage shall be to contractors
account.                                                                      
Note:- No construction of block work over RCC beam shall be allowed immediately.
For hollow block 150 x 300 x 150 mm OR as required at site.up to desired height. CUM 354.00 -

Same as above ----------For hollow block 400 x 200 x 100 mm OR as required at site.up to
4 CUM 133.00 -
desired height.

Providing and laying Coarse /Random Rubble Masonary /polygonal rubble masonary (
uncoursed/ brought to courses) with hard stone of approved quality in foundation and plinth
5 CUM 8.00 -
including leveling up with cement concrete 1:6:12 ( 1Cement :6 sand :12 graded stone graded
20mm nominal size ) at plinth level in :- Cement Mortar 1:6( 1Cement:6Sand)

F STEEL WORK

Structural Steel
Providing, cutting, fabricating, drilling, erecting, riveted, bolted, welding connections, hoisting
& placing in position MS structural steel composed of channels, beams, tubular hollow
sections, joists, angles, plates, braces, foundation bolt, anchor bolts for supporting system
1 MT 53.00 -
including cost of all materials, consumables, labour, applying one coat of red oxide primer, one
coat of anti corrosive paint. Complete in all lead and lifts as per drawings and specifications
and/or as directed by EIC. up to desired height. in trusses, purlins, rafters, stair cases
wherever required, details as per structural drawing for any span)

Page 2 of 14
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount
Wooden Handrail
Providing and fixing in position wooden hand rail as per architectural design, drawings
includes 50mmx75mm approximate size OR as required at site grooved on both sides. first
2 class deodar wooden handrail fixed on railing finished with french sprit polish, including CUM 0.20 -
necessary fasteners, fittings and as per drawing with all lead and lift of all levels ,loading and
unloading, transportation,curing etc. and all other incidental charges etc. complete and as
directed by Engineer-in-charge. (Only Hand rail with Bracket support)

MS Grills/Railing
Providing and fixing MS Grills made out of flats ,square solid bars,pipes inclusive of forming
to required shapes,cutting, welding, grinding, fixing with necessary screws and holdfasts for
windows/ventilators or any other openings , and sizes as per standard railing drawing and
3 MT 1.21 -
embedded in the floor adequately inclusive of hold fasts, concreting as required as per
structural details/ornamental design and drawings inclusive of providing and applying one
coat of anti-corrosive primer and two coats of approved quality enamel paint as directed.

G FLOORING/CLADDING WORKS

Vitrified Tiles
Providing & LAYING OF VITRIFIED TILE (600x600) WITH 3mm SPACERS Laying
VitrifiedTiles for flooring over 20 mm thk cement mortar in approved pattern as per drawings
or as directed by EIC, including cleaning and preparing the surface for bedding, spreading
1 neat cement slurry by using minimum cement of about 2Kg/SQM prior to bedding and 4.5 SQM 310.00 -
Kg/SQM over bedding. Joints shall be well cleaned and grouted with matching colour
approved quality ready made polymer ( Bal Grout ) based grout, including curing, cleaning, etc
complete. Base rate of tile Rs.70 per sft of Kajaria , Asian , Nitco or equivalent make.

Skirting
Providing and Fixing of 100mm high Vitrified Tile Skirting ( Tiles sameas flooring Tiles ) ,
projecting not more than 8mm from the wallplaster line fixed in CM 1:3. The tiles shall be fully
2 RMT 28.00 -
buttered withcement paste on the back. The work shall include cleaning of joints, curing,
cleaning as per detailed specification etc. complete.(Kajaria , Asian , Nitco or equivalent
make).

Ceramic Tile Dado (Base rate of tile Rs.35 per Sft)

Providing and fixing Tiles in Cladding / Dado of approved shade,sizeand pattern on masonry
walls including border fixed in pattern asapproved by EIC and fixed with rich cement slurry
3 over abacking coatplaster of 12mm thk.Cement mortar 1:3 and grouted with app.shade grout SQM 213.00 -
(Bal Grout ) Rate to include, Tile cutting , cleaning ofjoints, finishingjunction of plaster ,curing
etc. complete and asper drawing.(Kajaria , Asian , Nitco or equivalent make).

Ceramic Tile Floor (Base rate of tile Rs.45 per Sft)

Providing and laying homogenous 300x300 mm ceramic tiles of approved make, colour and
size 6mm to 8mm thick, including 20mm thick backing coat plaster in 1:6 cement mortar,
4 fixed with neat cement paste including providing sealing the joints with approved quality
white cement mixed with approved colour to match the tiles colour or approved grouting
materials including scaffolding, curing, cleaning etc. complete as directed by EIC. (Kajaria ,
Asian , Nitco or equivalent make).
Glazed ceramic tiles sqm 139.00 -

Precast Pre polished Concrete Tile Floor

Providing and laying homogenous pre cast - pre polished cement concrete tiles of approved
make, colour and size , including 25mm thick backing coat plaster in 1:6 cement mortar, fixed
5 sqm 35.00 -
with neat cement paste including providing sealing the joints with approved quality white
cement mixed with approved colour to match the tiles colour or approved grouting materials
including scaffolding, curing, cleaning etc. complete as directed by EIC.

Treads
Providing and fixing on Stair Case Treads of average width up to 300 mm using 22mm thick
pre cast , pre polished concrete tiles including antiskid grooves 3 nos or inlay, providing of
holes etc. complete. over cement mortar bedding 20 to 30 mm thick in 1:4 ratio with white
6 cement slurry / paste spread on the top of mortar using white cement as per standard SQM 40.00 -
specification, cleaning joints of tiles and grouting them in neat white cement paste with
pigmented additives to match shade of the stone. The sand to be used shall be coarse, well
graded, clean & free from dust & dirt. (NOTE: MOULDING POLISHING, GROOVE MAKING
SHALL BE INCLUDED)

Page 3 of 14
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount
Risers
Providing and fixing on Stair Case Riser of average height up to 150 mm using 12mm thick
pre cast pre polished concrete tiles complete. over cement mortar bedding 15 to 18 mm
7 thick in 1:4 ratio with cement slurry / paste spread on the top of mortar using cement as per SQM 24.00 -
standard specification, cleaning joints of tiles and grouting them in neat white cement paste
with pigmented additives to match shade of the stone. The sand to be used shall be coarse,
well graded, clean & free from dust & dirt.
-
Flamed/Shot Blasted Granite in flooring (Base rate of Granite Rs.210 per Sft) :-
Providing and Laying Flamed/Shot blasted Granite Stone For flooring,Landings of staircase,
etc. using granite of minimum thickness 20 mmmachine-cut slabs of approved quality, type
& colour as per the approved sample, including cutting to required sizes, shapes and pattern
as per drawing, and laying to the required level / slope including all surface preparation,
8 providing and laying cement mortar (1:4) bed of average thickness 25 mm with cement slurry SQM 26.00 -
/ pastespread on the top of mortar using grey cement, filling and finishing the joints with neat
cement slurry/ white cement with matching colour pigment, curing, mirror polishing of joints
if required, cleaning etc. complete at all floors and levels as per the instructions ofthe EIC.
The Contractor shall arrange for storage of all related materials at site, handling, shifting and
lifting at work location.

Indian Marble Stone (Base rate of Stone Rs.75 per Sft)

Providing, Cutting and Laying (machine cut), mirror polished 19mm thick approved Indian
Marble stone of any colour in pattern and sizes as per drawing, bedded in cement sand
mortar mix ratio 1:6 (1 cement : 6sand) including cleaning the surface for bedding, spreading
9 neat cement slurry by using minimum cement about 2 kg/sqm prior to bedding and spreading SQM 27.00 -
cement paste using minimum cement about 4.5 kg/sqm over bedding, joints to be cleaned
and grouted with matching colour approved readymade grout,curing, machine mirror
polishing, cleaning, etc. to required line, level, etc. all complete at all heights and leads to the
satisfaction of the EIC.Rate to include cost of mirror polishing.

Granite Tile Flooring (Base rate of Granite Tile Rs.85 per Sft)
Providing and laying flooring using 19mm thick Granite of approved size, pattern laid over
20mmthick bed CM 1:4 with tile grouting for flooring, using cement slurry below slabs for
packing,asper architectural design, drawing and specifications, including joint filling with
10 SQM 1,016.00 -
approved qualityand colour cement to match the shade of Granite.The work shall include cost
of materials,wastage, labour, all lead and lift at all levels, loading and unloading,
transportation,cutting, curingetc. and all other incidental charges etc.complete and as directed
by EIC.

Granite Tile skirting (Base rate of Granite Tile Rs.85 per Sft)
Providing and laying skirting using 19mm thick Granite of 100mm high, laid over
20mmthick CM 1:4 with tile grouting for skirting, using cement slurry,asper architectural
11 design, drawing and specifications, including joint filling with approved qualityand colour RMT 775.00 -
cement to match the shade of Granite.The work shall include cost of materials,wastage,
labour, all lead and lift at all levels, loading and unloading, transportation,cutting, curingetc.
and all other incidental charges etc.complete and as directed by EIC.

Cement concrete flooring 1:2:4 (1Cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate) finished
12 with a floating coat of neat cement including cement slurry but excluding cost of nosing of
steps etc. complete.
a) 40 mm thick 20mm nominal size stone aggregate (crushed) SQM 75.00 -
b) 50 mm thick 20mm nominal size stone aggregate (crushed) SQM 16.00 -

Chequered Tiles (Basic rate of tile Rs 50 per sft)

Providing & laying minimum 20 mm thk. cement chequered tiles of approved make & colour
laid in approved pattern and to the required slope in cement/sand C M 1:3 bedding on floor,
13 SQM 16.00 -
includingfilling joints with cement, compacting etc., complete as per specifications, drawings
& asdirected by owner/consultant. (contractor shall state the basic rate & type of tile
assumed at time of quoting)

Brick Bat Cushioning

Providing and laying brick bat cushioning over existing RCC slab with average thickness of
14 75mm thick and a overlay of 25mm thick PCC with 10mm nominal size aggregate of M 7.5 SQM 1,029.00 -
grade.

H WATER PROOFING

Page 4 of 14
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount
Toilet Sunken Slab Water Proofing
Treatment to bottom and sides of toilet sunken slab covering the following sequence of
operations :
* a). Providing, supplying, mixing, laying cement plaster 12 mm thick with cement sand
mortar 1:3 mixed with approved water proofing compound like CICO No.1 or approved
equivalent conforming to IS 2645 at the rate specified by the manufacturer over coated surface
of operation (a) above including preparation of surface, dewatering, finishing, curing, etc. all
complete as per manufacturer's specifications and as directed.
1 SQM 98.00 -
* b) Providing, supplying, mixing, applying two coats of ready to use two component
TAPECRETE - RTU Polymer Based Elastomeric Coating , flexible water proofing to a thickness
of 2 mm over the surface of bottom and sides of toilet sunken slab including preparation of
surface, finishing, curing etc. all complete at all levels as per manufacturer's specifications and
as directed.
* c) Final coat of plaster 15-20mm thick, CM 1:4 plaster admixed with Integral Waterproofing
Compound of approved make as per manufacturer's specification (a) above over the coated
surface of operation (b) above all complete as directed.

Liftpit W.P
(i) Cleaning the surface thoroughly, providing and applying Vandex BB 75 waterproofing
system in two coats by trowelling as per manufacturer’s specifications. The 1st coat of BB 75
shall be applied to the prepared surface at coverage of 1.5 kg/sqmt. Whilst the 1st coat is still
2 “green” a second coat comprising of Vandex BB75 at a coverage of 1.5 kg/Sqmt. The slurry SQM R/O
coatings shall be applied with a stiff masonary brush or stiff broom and worked into every
irregularity on the surface shall be done by means of trowelling or by spray only. Treatment to
floor slabs shall be carried out by trowel application in 3.0 kg/Sqmt coverage of Vandex BB75
using a steel trowel into hardenced concrete slab surface including curing, cleaning etc
complete.
- -
Extra over above 2 (i) for Flooring :- Providing and laying screeding appx. 50mm thick over
3 the surface in CM 1:4 and with proper vatas at junction with false squares, curing testing SQM R/O
complete.

Extra over above 2 (i) for Walls :- Providing and laying avg. 15-20mm thick, CM1:4 plaster
4 admixed with Integral Waterproofing Compound of approved make as per manufacturer's SQM R/O
specification.

Terrace Water Proofing

Providing and laying of 200mm avg. Thick brick bat coba water proofing treatment on the
cleaned & prepared RCC surface, a layer of 20mm avg. Thick cement sand mortar of ratio 1:4
(1 cement : 4 coarse sand) admixed with integral water proofing compound of Fosroc
(Conplast X 421 IC)/ Sika / BASF/ Sunanda or equivalent (dosage 150 ml- 200 ml per50
kg of cement) shall laid over the cement slurry. A layer of broken brick / brick bat laid on
afore mentioned mortar bed. After proper curing of 2 days. The joints including all voids
varying from 15mm to 30mm thick shall be grouted with 1:4 cement mortar admixed with
integral water proofing compound of Fosroc (Conplast X 421 IC)/ Sika / BASF / Sunanda
or equivalent (dosage 150 ml per50 kg of cement). The top surface shall then be finished
smoothly with cement mortar (1:3) admixed with integral water proofing compound of
Fosroc (Conplast X 421 IC)/ Sika / BASF / Sunanda or equivalent (dosage 150 ml per 50
kg of cement) & such topping shall not be less than 20 mm thick and finishing coba with
china mosaic tile pieces laid in to cm 1:4 and joints finished neat with cement. Complete
5 Sqm 28.00 -
the work as per specification below:
Surface Preparation
Cleaning the surface from dust, mortar splashes loose materials etc to get a sound concrete
surface. Clean the prepared surface with fresh clean water. All inter-sections between roof slab
and vertical walls should be provided with minimum 3 inches concave coving. The coving shall
be made of 1:2:4 PCC admixed with integral waterproofing compound of Fosroc (Conplast X
421 IC)/ Sika / BASF/ Sunanda or equivalent .
Cement slurry admixed with bonding compound Nitobond AR shall be used as a bonding agent
to ensure effective bonding of coving with roof slab and vertical wall.
Bonding Coat
Applying one full bonding coat of 1:2:1 (Nitobond AR: cement: water) on the cleaned surface.
Brick - Bat - Coba
Providing and laying a bed mortar of 1:4 (cement: Sand) mortar of 20 mm thickness admixed
with water proofing compond of Fosroc (Conplast X 421 IC)/ Sika / BASF/ Sunanda or
-
I PAVEMENTS

Plinth Protection
Providing & Making plinth protection 100 mm thick of gravels, free from all type of dust and
1 CUM 316.00 -
small graded stones , well rammed and consolidated including finishing the top smooth as per
drawings , specifications and as directed by EIC

Page 5 of 14
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount
Interlocking Paver
Providing & laying 50 mm thick reflective type interlocking paver block of minimum
compressive strength of 400 kg/sq.cm in unipaver shape of approved make to be laid in
2 Herring bone pattern. The rates are inclusive of providing & laying/spreading approved quality SQM R/O
average 50mm thick sand bedding including compaction & filling joints with sand at site. The
edges are to be neatly trimmed to fit within kerbs along the periphery of the paved area all
complete as per specification, drawing & as per direction of Engineer-in-Charge.

Grass Paver
Providing & laying 80 mm thick reflective type open jointed (grass) paver block of minimum
compressive strength of 400 kg/sq.cm in unipaver shape of approved make. The rates are
inclusive of providing & laying/spreading approved quality average 50mm thick sand bedding
including compaction & filling joints with sand at site. The edges are to be neatly trimmed to fit
within kerbs along the periphery of the paved area all complete as per specification, drawing &
3 as per direction of Engineer-in-Charge. SQM R/O

Sand Stone Paving

Providing & laying 25 mm thick Chisel dressed Sand Stone of machine-cut slabs of approved
quality, type & colour as per the approved sample, including cutting to required sizes, shapes
and pattern as per drawing, and laying to the required level / slope including all surface
preparation, providing and laying cement mortar (1:4) bed of average thickness 25 mm with
4 cement slurry / pastespread on the top of mortar using grey cement, filling and finishing the Sqm 17.00 -
joints with neat cement slurry/ white cement with matching colour pigment, curing, mirror
polishing of joints if required, cleaning etc. complete as per the instructions ofthe EIC. The
Contractor shall arrange for storage of all related materials at site, handling, shifting and
lifting at work location.

Providing , Laying and testing RCC hume pipe. in position, alignment, jointing etc RCC hume
pipes 250mm dia of NP2 class for culverts, road crossing, including cutting, collars jointing etc
5 RM 8.00 -
all complete as per specifications, drawing and direction of EIC. Excavation, backfilling, PCC if
any to be paid separately,

Providing , Laying and testing RCC hume pipe. in position, alignment, jointing etc RCC hume
pipes 300mm dia of NP2 class for culverts, road crossing, including cutting, collars jointing etc
6 RM 8.00 -
all complete as per specifications, drawing and direction of EIC. Excavation, backfilling, PCC if
any to be paid separately,

Rubble Soling
Providing and laying 300mm rubble soling hand packed and interstices filled with stone
7 metal/murrum including rolling leveling and compaction as per specifications & as directed by Cum 315.00 -
EIC.
Boulder size will be 150mm or below, measurement will be in cum after compaction.

J GLAZING / FACADE WORKS

uPVC Window
Providing and Fixing factory made standard quality uPVC casement/sliding window / door,
made of extruded profiles. Profiles of frames and sash will be mitered cut and fusion welded at
all corners, including drilling of holes for fixing hardware and drainage of water etc., making
1 arrangement for fixing of hardware, EPDM gasket, 1.2 ± 0.2 mm thick galvanised steel profile
to be inserted in required profile, frame will be fixed to the wall with 8 mm x 100 mm long
fasteners, all complete as per direction of Engineer-in-charge. (Glazing, hardware hinges and
fitting etc. to be paid separately.) of Fenstersol , Fensta or equivalent make

Casement Window (Outward/Inward opening) with hinge System including:

Frame (50 mm x 50 mm)
Sash (Style and Rail) (62 mm x 34 mm)
A SQM 8.00 -
Mullion (intermediate Section) (66 mm x 50 mm)
'T' Profile (one vertical length in between two shutters) (24 mm x 34.5 mm)
Glazing bead (12 mm x 18 mm)

Casement Window (With friction hinge & outward opening) including :

Casement Frame (67 mm x 62 mm)
B SQM 375.00 -
Casement Window Sash / Mullion (67 mm x 75 mm ) (style, rail and intermediate section)
Casement Glazing bead (35 mm x 18 mm)

Page 6 of 14
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount
Sliding Window (Two Track, 2/4 Shutters) including:
Two Track Sliding Frame (67 mm x 52 mm)
C Sliding window Sash (60 mm x 44 mm) SQM 24.00 -
Sliding Interlock for Window (one vertical length in each shutter)( 45.5 mm x 28 mm)
Sliding Glazing bead (35 mm x 18 mm)

DGU
Providing & fixing factory cut/processed mechanically sealed composite glass (configuration 6
mm thick outer glass + 12 mm thick air gap + 6 mm thick inner glass) with performance
parameters of the composite that meet the given acceptable value ranges as follows: Visual
Light transmission % (VLT) 15 - 50; External reflectance 5 - 25; Solar factor (SF) or Solar Heat
2 Gain Coefficient (SHGC) 0.2 - 0.38; U value .5 - 1.5 W/sqm.K. R Value 2.86, Colour of glass to SQM 398.00 -
be clear/neutral/grey/blue as approved. Make Asahi/Saint Gobain or equivalent.
(Vendor to specify the make and name of products considered for quotation. The price should
include the cost of wastage, obtaining correct measurement, preparing the glass assembly
including cutting, toughening, sealing, mastic, dessicant treatment, etc.)

Providing and fixing anodised aluminium (anodised transparent or dyed to required shade
according to IS: 1868. Minimum anodic coating of grade AC 15) frame work for windows and
ventilators with extruded built up standard tubular sections of approved make conforming to
3 KG 165.00 -
IS: 733 and IS: 1285, fixed with dash fastener of required dia and size (Dash fastener to be
paid for separately).

Providing and fixing float glass panes 8 mm (weight not less than 13.50 kg/sqm) thick in
doors, windows and clerestory window shutters. (Area of opening for glass panes excluding
4 SQM 21.00 -
portion inside rebate shall be measured).

Providing and fixing float glass panes 5.5 mm (weight not less than 13.50 kg/sqm) thick in
doors, windows and clerestory window shutters. (Area of opening for glass panes excluding
5 SQM 16.00 -
portion inside rebate shall be measured).

ACP
Providing & Fixing Cladding with 4mmthick (0.25+3.5+0.25) with LDPE core coloured, matt
finish aluminium composite panels (total thickness of the panel shall be 4mm) of approved
make inclusive of anodising the aluminium sections a minimum of 20 micron thickness fixed
over non anodised aluminum section of average 25 x 50 or as may be required with joints
appropriately placed as per approved shop drawing and coverd with silicon sealant of approved
colour as per detailed shop drawing. Shop drawing to be provided by vendor and approved by
architect prior to work commencement on sitecladding with 3 mm thick aluminum composite
6 panel sheet fixed over non anodised aluminum section of average 25 x 50 or as may be Sq M 16.00 -
required with joints appropriately placed as per approved shop drawing and coverd with silicon
sealant of approved colour as per detailed shop drawing. shop drawing to be provided by
vendor and approved by architect prior to work commencement on sitecladding with 3 mm
thick aluminum composite panel sheet fixed over non anodised aluminum section of average
25 x 50 or as may be required with joints appropriately placed as per approved shop drawing
and coverd with silicon sealant of approved colour as per detailed shop drawing. shop drawing
to be provided by vendor and approved by architect prior to work commencement on site.

K INTERIOR ITEMS

Page 7 of 14
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount
Solid Bison Board Partition
Providing , Fabricating and fixing of 75mm Thick Gypsteel stud full height Bison Board
partitions.
* To have cold rolled GI studs of size 48mm x 0.55mm thick, placed at 610mm centre to centre
installed onto the boxing at the floor and ceiling channels.
* One layer each of tapered edge 10mm thick Bison board Plain , screw fixed with drywall
screws of 25mm at 300mm centres to both sides of 48mm Gypsteel studs (0.55mm thick
having one flange of 34mm andanother flange of 36mm made of GI Steel)
* To be placed at 610mm centre tocentre in 50mm Gypsteel floor and ceiling channel (0.55mm
thick have equal flanges of 32mm made of GI steel) with joints staggered.
* A fixing channel of 99mm width (0.9mm thick having two flanges of 9.5mm each) has to be
provided at the horizontal joints of the two boards and as directed by engineer in charge.
1 * Finally square and tapered edges of the boards are to be jointed and finished so as to have a SQM 40.00 -
flush look.
The floor channel is placed on a clean finished floor on which two line-beads of chalking
compound/Silicon sealant have been laid. The floor channel must have two lines of staggered
screw fasteners. Care must be taken that the plasterboards are raised 3mm from the floor and
in this gap, chauking compound is injected, for successive layers and similarly for the true
ceiling channel.
** Rates also to include 12mm groove with adjoining wall , ceiling or partition made with
12mm thick water proof plywood.
Both sides of the frame work to be cladded with single layer of 12mm thick Bison board as per
details. The Bison board on the exposed sides to be finished by filling and finishing with
Jointing compound, Joint Paper tape and to make surface ready to recieve paint.
* All Bison board edges to have metal `L' angles for all free corners.

-
GYPSUM FALSE CEILING : - Providing & fixing suspended false ceiling using 12.5mm thick
Indian gypsum boards confirming to IS 2095-1982 and GI framework of Gyp steel or approved
equivalent comprising of following. 1. GI perimeter channel of 0.55mm thick having one flange
of 20mm, another of 30mm and web of 27mm fixed to brick wall partition along periphery of
ceiling with the help of nylon sleeves and screws at 610mm c/c 2. GI intermediate channel (
size, 45mm web, two flanges each of 15mm & thickness 0.9mm ) suspended from the soffit /
ceiling at 1200mm c/ c spacing. 3. GI ceiling sections of 0.55mm thick having knurled web of
51.5mm and two flanges each of 26mm with leaves of 10.5mm fixed to intermediate channel
with the help of connecting clip at direction perpendicular to the intermediate channel at
spacing of 600 mm c/c, . GI suspender angle of 25mmx10mm and thk.0.55mm at spacing of
2 SQM 1,044.00 -
600mm c/c, fixed to the ceiling / soffit using GI cleat angle 25mm x 25mm, 0.55mm thk.
Cleat angle to be fixed to the ceiling / soffit using 6mm dia anchor fastener.
Gypsum board to Be finished with Jointing tape and Jointing compound including application
of One coat primer as Per Gypsum board Manufactuerer specification. The rate quoted shall
include making cut outs for fixing light fittings, grills, diffusers, speakers, smoke detectors,
sprinklers etc.Cut outs have to be made with provision of the frame along perimeter of the cut
outs/ opening with channels/ ply to support the ceiling adequately. No extra payment shall be
made for making cut outs.

- -
GRID CEILING :
Providing and fixing Mineral Fibre Board moduler Ceiling manufactuered by USG /
Armstrong / Saint Gobain India Ltd or equivalent make as approved by Architect in Tegular
edge Mineral textured tiles with approved surface pattern of size 600mm X 600mm x 15 mm
having Noise reduction Co-efficient 0.6 light reflection over 75%, Relative Humidity 95%,
Suspension system of Silhouette reveal profile grid system with 15mm wide flanges
incorporating a 3 or 6 mm central recess of colour all white or all black or white with black as
directed, Silhouette main runners and cross tees to have mitred ends and "birdsmouth"
notches to provide mitred cruciform junction, fixed to the structural soffit by Butterfly clip
3 SQM 104.00 -
hangers, suspension wires & anchor fasteners as per the manufacturer's specification,
Suspension wires to be provided at every 600mmm c/c with two nos of ties on each anchor
fastener, Perimeter trim of Trulok wall angle in white colour secured to wall at 450mm
maximum centres.
The rate quoted shall include making cut outs for fixing light fittings, grills, diffusers,
speakers, smoke detectors, sprinklers etc.Cut outs have to be made with provision of the
frame along perimeter of the cut outs/ opening with channels/ ply to support the ceiling
adequately. No extra payment shall be made for making cut outs.

Page 8 of 14
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount
Providing, Fabricating & fixing of Storage/ Cabintes in various lengths & different heights,
made of 19mm thk termite resistant block board for structure, doors & shelves, 6mm water
proof ply for the back. All the surfaces side and top to be finished with approved 1mm thick
laminate on the exposed surfaces. Inside surfaces shall be enamel painted. Cut edges to be
covered with 6mm thk matching wooden lipping. Storage shutter to have lamination with
4 -
grooves as per design and shall be fixed with heavy duty hinges & provided with all accessories
like multipurpose locks, wooden handles, tower bolts, ball catchers etc. complete as per
engineer in charge and drawings (The measurement of storage will be done as per the front
area of storage in length and height only)

a) 60cm deep. SQM 8.00 -

b) 45cm deep. SQM 59.00 -

Providing and fabrication of ward robes (ornamental) of approved quality 19mm Ply board in
sides, shelves and wherever required including 6mm water proof ply wood on back and 25mm
thick plywood shutter laminated with 1mm thick Dulmica or equivalent laminate of approved
quality and color on exposed face and 0.8mm thick balancing white laminate on internal
surface of shutter of approved design and drawings including wooden lipping on cut edges of
5
the shutter, painting two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and
color inside and cost of following aluminum fittings, locks of Godrej/Link make.
15mm dia. M.S. pipe chromium plated with necessary brackets of required length, including
fixed with heavy duty hinges & provided with all accessories like multipurpose locks, wooden
handles, tower bolts, ball catchers etc.. (For payments front face to be measured).

a) 60cm deep. SQM 4.00 -

b) 45cm deep. SQM 4.00 -

L SHUTTERS / DOORS

Perforated Rolling Shutters

Providing and fixing Perforated Steel Rolling Shutter confirming to IS:6248 fabricated out
of 18 gauge CRC Strips confirming to IS: 4030,with bottom rail, brackets, door suspension
shaft incl. approved quality bearings, housing box fixed at top having manually operated push
1 SQM 8.00 -
and pull type arrangement, 25mm x 65mm MS Guide Channels on both sides,handles,
springs, sliding lock arrangement, cover hood top. The Rolling shutter and guide channels
shall be painted with one coat of anti-corrosive primer and approved quality synthetic enamel
paint as directed.

Grilled Rolling Shutters

Providing and fixing rolling shutter with following specs :
Rolling shutter : 2 / 3 area including top and bottom made of 20 gauge galvenised sheet.
Rolling Grill : 1 / 3 middle area made of 8 Round iron bars and flats,Top cover : made out of
2 20 gaugegalvanised sheet side rail : Ball bearing min. 2 no balls. measurment will be given SQM R/O
6""extra in width 18"" extra in height from clear opening of channel all including one coat of
red oxide primer on grill complete with other fittings and accessories as side plate , locking
arrangement ,spring shaft etc. complete.

Pressed Steel Door

Providing and installing in position of 38mm Single Leaf HMPS - Hollow Metal Pressed Steel
Door Shutters with off white colour powder coated of shaktimet or equivalent make with
following features:
* Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet, inside honeycomb
* Thickness of Door leaf: 38mm
* Thickness of Door surface steel: 0.5mm
3 * Thickness of Door frame: 1.2mm SQM 14.00 -
* Opening direction: Inward/outward
* Lock handle position: On left/on right
* Door Closer
* Stainless steel hinge
* Vision panel with 6mm toughened glass of approx size - 300mm x 600mm
* Dimension: as per drawings

Page 9 of 14
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount
uPVC Doors (internal doors)
Providing and fixing 30mm thick factory made standard quality uPVC rigid foam panelled
door shutters manufactured by M/s. Rajshri or equivalent made from M.S. tube of 19x19mm,
19 gauge for styles and 15x15mm for top and bottom rails, covered with heat moulded
prelaminated PVC "C" channel of 5mm thick sheet and 30x50mm wide to form styles and
5mm thick and 75mm wide prelaminiated PVC sheets for top rail, lock rail and bottom rail on
4 either side and 5mm thick, 20mm wide cross PVC sheet as gap insert for top rail and bottom SQM 98.00 -
rail, panelling of 5mm thick PVC sheet prelaminiated on both sides fitted in the M.S. frame
welded/sealed to the styles and rails with 5x30mm prelaminated PVC sheet beading on either
side and joined together with solvent cement adhesive etc., complete as per manufacturers
specification and direction of Engineer-in-Charge fixed to frames with 4 Nos. M.S. powder
coated butt hinges ( For Internal Shutters)

Providing and fixing factory made uP.V.C. door frame manufactured by M/s Rajshri or
equivalent of size 50x47mm with a wall thickness of 5mm, made out of extruded 5mm rigid
PVC foam sheet mitred at corners and joined with 2 Nos. of 150mm long brackets of 15x15mm
5 M.S. square tube, the vertical door profiles to be reinforced with 19x19mm M.S. square tube of RNM 98.00 -
19 gauge, EPDM rubber gasket weather seal to be provided through out the frame. The door
frame to be fixed to the wall using M.S. screws of 65/100mm size complete as per
manufacturers speci fication and direction of Engineer-in-Charge.-

uPVC Doors (W.C. Doors)

Providing and fixing 30mm thick factory made uPVC rigid foam panelled door shutters
manufactured by M/s. Rajshri or equivalent made from M.S. tube of 19 gauge thickness, size
19x19mm for styles and 15x15mm for top and bottom rails, covered with heat moulded PVC
"C" channel of 5mm thick sheet and 30x50mm wide to form styles and 5mm thick and 75mm
wide PVC sheets for top rail, lock rail and bottom rail on either side and 5mm thick, 20mm
6 wide cross PVC sheet as gap insert for top rail and bottom rail, panelling of 5mm thick PVC SQM 41.00 -
sheet fitted in the M.S. frame welded/sealed to the styles and rails with 5x30mm PVC sheet
beading on either side and joined together with solvent cement adhesive etc., complete as per
manufacturers specification and direction of Engineer-in-Charge fixed to frames with 4 Nos.
M.S. powder coated butt hinges ( For W.C. and bathroom shutters)

Providing and fixing factory made PVC door frame made of PVC extruded section having
overall dimension of 48x40 mm (tolerance + 1 mm) with wall thickness 2.0 mm + 0.2 mm,
corners of the door frame to be mitred and joined by means of plastic/M.S. galvanished
7 brackets and stainless steel screws. The hinge side vertical of the frames reinforced by
galvanised M.S. tube of size 19x19 mm and 1 mm + 0.1 mm wall thickness and 3 Nos.
stainless steel hinges fixed to the frame complete as per manufacturers specification and
direction of Engineer-in-charge. (Sintex or Plasopan)
 48x40x2.0 mm thick PVC door frame RNM 221.00 -

Wooden door
Providing and fixing modular doors of hard wood.
* Stiles and rails shall be constructed of first class hard wood.
* Cope and stick joinery of stiles and rails using ½" x 4" dowels.
* Joints to have a minimum of 1 dowel.
* Panels shall be manufactured using a double panel construction of solid wood.
8 * Flat panels shall have a minimum thickness of 5/8"
* Raised panels shall have a minimum thickness of 11/2".
* Panel raise shall be constructed of solid deodar wood and rim banded with mitered corners
* including malamine polish
including ISI marked black enamelled M.S butt hinges with necessary screws.
Complete as per instruction of engineer in charge.( Godrej or equavelent )

First class hard wood

a 35 mm thick shutters SQM R/O
b 30 mm thick shutter SQM R/O

Mortice Lock
Providing and fixing bright finished brushed steel 100mm mortice latch and lock with 6 levers
9 and a pair of lever handles with necessary screws etc. complete (Dorset , Ozone or equivalent EACH 4.00 -
approved quality).

Page 10 of 14
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount
Lockable Sliding Door Bolt
Providing and fixing lockable aldrops capable of smooth sliding action. MS powder coated
sliding door bolt (aldrop) shall be made from rolled steel . The hasp shall be of MS and screwed
to the bolt in a workmen like manner. Alternatively the hasp and bolt should be in one piece.
Bolts shall be finished to shape and threaded with worth standardand provided with round
10 brass washers and nuts of sqare or hexagonal shape.All components should be smooth and EACH 66.00 -
powder coated.The leading dimensions of aldrop shall be as the length of the bolt and specified
diameter.
350mm x 20mm

Hydraulic Door Closer

Providing and fixing IS 3564 marked aluminium extruded section body tubular type universal
11 Each 4.00 -
hydraulic door closer with double speed adjustment with necessary accessories and screws
etc. complete

Tower Bolt
Providing and fixing Brushed steel hardwares
12 EACH 66.00 -
Providing and fixing tower bolt (barrel type) with necessary screws etc. complete.
100 x 10 mm size.

Tower Bolt
Providing and fixing Brushed steel hardwares
13 EACH 66.00 -
Providing and fixing tower bolt (barrel type) with necessary screws etc. complete.
150 x 10 mm size

Tower Bolt
Providing and fixing Brushed steel hardwares
14 EACH 22.00 -
Providing and fixing tower bolt (barrel type) with necessary screws etc. complete.
200 x 10 mm size.

Pull Handle
Providing and fixing Brushed steel hardwares
15 EACH 132.00 -
Providing and fixing Pull Handle (D type) with necessary screws etc. complete.
150 mm size.

M EXPANSION JOINTS

Expansion Joint
Providing & fixing Horizontal & Vertical Internal expansion joints in RCC framed structure at
all level with 50 mm Mechanical Expansion Joint made up of Aluminum extruded sections
with a detail arrangement below enabling fastening by stainless steel clips spaced at regular
1 intervals as recommended by the manufacturer, including all the necessary accessories, as per Rmt R/O
the manufacturer's specifications and drawings, Etc. complete as per instruction of EIC. The
fixing of the expansion joints shall be carried out either by the main contractor under the
supervision of their supplier or by the supplier directly. a) 90mm wide flat.

Supply and applying of polyurethane sealant (Sikaflex Pro 3WF / Sikaflex Pro 2 HP) in
expansion joints of 50mm/20mm sizes at all locations and elevations. Job includes
providing and fixing of masking tape on either sides of the groove and over the Backing rod,
2 placing of sealant, peeling off the masking tapes sticked on either sides of the expansion grove, Rmt R/O
cleaning etc job complete as per the vendor's specification, drawings and directions of Sika
representative and EIC. Sikaflex Pro 3WF / Sikaflex Pro 2HP (50mm x 25 mm, for 50 mm
joint)

Providing and filling expansion joints by using non-staining, non-deteriorating, Alkali

resistant, a High performance, non absorbent, Crosslinked closed cell polymer based
expansion joint filler boards of Supreme make or apprved equivalent make , having minimum
3 density of 100 +/-10% Kg /cm3 (ASTM D 3575). & Compression strength of at 25% deflection
Min 0.80 Kg/Cm2(ASTM D 3575) , Non Staining with less than 1% water Absorption for 48
Hours (ASTM D 3575) & compression recovery of 93% minimum as per specifications when
tested as per ASTM D-3575,
Same as above - For 50 mm thick joint Sqm R/O

N ROOFING WORKS

Page 11 of 14
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount
Galvalume Sheeting
Providing & Fixing Colored powder coated Galvalume standing seam sheets roofing (thickness
of sheet in mm: 0.55 TCT) curved as per sections /architectural drawings including Eave
gutters, downspouts, Gable trims, corner flashing, drip trims, foam closures (inside and
1 outside) and all necessary flashings 0.5mm prepainted (Color to be established during detail SQM 1,307.00 -
engineering stage).and fixing with polymer coated bolts, and nuts, GI plain and bitumen
washers or with self drilling fastener and EPDM washers and necessary waterproofing sealants
etc. complete as directed by Engineer in Charge.

Providing and fixing J Ridge/ valley 600mm wide, side made up of same specifications as
2 RNM 56.00 -
item No N-1

Providing and fixing Box gutters size 300 x 300 mm as per drawing and instructions of EIC
3 RNM 112.00 -
side made up of same specifications as item No N-1

Providing & Fixing of Sky Lights with 8mm thick reinforced double layer Poly Carbonate
4 SQM 104.00 -
sheets including all necessary fittings complete as directed by Engineer in Charge.

G.S.Sheeting
Providing and fixing pre powder-coated corrugated G.S. sheet roofing fixed with polymer
coated J or L hooks, bolts and nuts 8 mm diameter with bitumen and G.I. limpet washers or
5 SQM 80.00 -
with G.I. limpet washers filled with white lead and including a coat of approved steel primer
and two coats of approved paint on overlapping of sheets complete (upto a pitch of 60 degrees)
excluding the cost of purlins, rafters and trusses. (0.50mm thick)

Ridges / Hips / Valleys

6 Providing and fixing ridges or hips / valleys of width 60cm over all width plain G.I sheet fixed RNM 20.00 -
with nails G.I limpet washers complete 0.50 mm thick powder coated.

Eaves Boarding
Providing and fixing 2mm thick 250mm wide eaves boarding of mild steel including hoisting,
7 fixing and welded complete. Including providing and applying priming coat of red oxide as per RNM 20.00 -
specifications with two coates synthetic enamel paint of approved shade as per instructions of
EIC.

Soffits
Providing and fixing 2mm thick 600mm to 900mm wide soffits of mild steel excluding frame
8 work complete. Including providing and applying priming coat of red oxide as per SQM 20.00 -
specifications with two coates synthetic enamel paint of approved shade as per instructions of
EIC.

Polysterene Insulation
Thermal Insulation with Expanded polystyrene fixed with suitable adhesive to the walls as per
9
the directions of the Engineer-in-charge :

With Type N - Normal 50 mm thick

a SQM 1,070.00 -
With Type SE - Self Extinguishing type 50 mm thick
b SQM 1,132.00 -

Fibre Glass Wool Insulation

Providing fixing thermal insulation of ceiling with Resin Bonded Fibre glass wool conforming
10 to IS : 8183, density 24kg / m3, 50mm thick, wrapped in non imflammable , non woven fabric SQM 988.00 -
, fixed to ceiling with metallic cleats (50x50x3 mm) @ 60 cm and wire mesh of 12.5 mm x 24
gauge wire mesh, for top most ceiling of building.

O FINISHING WORKS

15 MM THICK PLASTER IN 1:4 CM Providing and applying average 15 mm thk cement

plaster in single coat incement sand mortar 1:4 to all internal surfaces at all levels including
1 surfacepreparation, staging, scaffolding and providing & fixing 20 Gauge 150mm widechicken SQM 1,284.00 -
wire mesh at all concrete & brickwork joints and roughening the surfaceas directed.

12 MM THICK PLASTER IN 1:4 CM Providing and applying average 12 mm thk cement

plaster in single coat incement sand mortar 1:4 to all internal surfaces at all levels including
2 surfacepreparation, staging, scaffolding and providing & fixing 20 Gauge 150mm widechicken SQM 3,451.00 -
wire mesh at all concrete & brickwork joints and roughening the surfaceas directed.

Page 12 of 14
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount
6 MM THICK PLASTER IN 1:3 CM Providing and applying average 6 mm thk cement plaster
in single coat incement sand mortar 1:3 to all ceiling surfaces at all levels including surface
3 preparation, staging, scaffolding and providing & fixing 20 Gauge 150mm wide chicken wire SQM 1,221.00 -
mesh at all concrete & brickwork joints and roughening the surface as directed.

APEX PAINT
Providing and applying Acrylic based (Apex) paint of approved make and colour over the
external surfaces at all levels inclusive ofsurfacepreparation by scrapping the surface and
applying withacralycreadymade putty of approved brand as per
4 SQM 1,284.00 -
manufacturer'srecommendations,filling cracks with approved crack fill material suchas
Sunfilla orequivalent, applying sealer or primer coat as recommendedby manufacturerand
applying two finishing coats, cleaning the floorsurface aftercompletion of work, etc. complete
as directed.

Texture Paint
a) Providing and application of Frienze coarse fine trowel finish texture paint of approved
brand and make having a thickness of 1.25mm on smooth plastered surface including
5 SQM 40.00 -
prepration of base with required number of coats of wall care putty and base coat of approved
shade and pattern upto floor-v level (allcarriages, lifts and scafolding included)
b) Extra for sprinkling with mechanically operated spray gun.

ACRYLC EMULSION PAINT

Painting, two or more coats with Dulux paint of Spectrum / Nerolac or Equivalent make and
6 approved shade on internal walls and ceilings as required to give an even shade including SQM 4,673.00 -
preparing the surface,applying primer coats, etc. complete all to the satisfaction of EIC.

SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINT

Providing and applying three coats of Synthetic Enamel paint of Asian/ICI/ Berger/ equivalent
make to all surfaces, in approved colourover a coat of primer including preparation of surface
7 SQM 160.00 -
by thoroughcleaning, sand papering and as per manufacturer specification to give asmooth
and even surface, necessary scaffolding etc., complete and asdirected by Engineer-in-charge.

ANTI FUNGUS PAINT

Painting, two or more coats with Anti Fungal Paint of approved make and shade on internal
8 SQM 32.00 -
walls and ceilings as required to give an evenshade including preparing the surface, applying
primer coats,etc.complete all to the satisfaction of the architect.

EPOXY PAINT
Painting,with 150 micron Epoxy Paint of approved make and shade on different areas of MS ,
9 SQM 16.00 -
walls as required to give an even shade including preparing the surface, applying primer
coats,etc.complete all to the satisfaction of the Engineer in charge.

Providing and applying POP punning to walls of avg. 2mm thickness to line level and plumb
10 including surface preparation; required punning to be undertaken and completed in workman- SQM 3,452 -
like manner, to ensure desired finishing standards, as directed by EIC.

Providing and fixing POP decorative moulding / cornice as per the drawing complete of 50 x 50
mm size including surface preparation; required punning to be undertaken and completed in
11 R.M. 80.00 -
workman-like manner, to ensure desired finishing standards, as directed by EIC..

PVC WATER STOPS

Providing and placing in position suitable PVC water stops conforming to IS:12200 of Deep-
12 Jyoti or equivalent for construction joints / expansion joints between two RCC members RM 241.00 -
and fixed to the reinforcement with binding wire before pouring concrete etc all complete:

a) Serrated with central bulb (225 mm wide, 8-11 mm thick)

RUNGS
Supplying and fixing poly-propylene rungs of 20 mm square bar of size 263 x 165 mm for
13 Nos 80.00 -
access way including anchorage in walls to a minimum depth of 100 mm with C.C 1:2:4 etc.
complete and as directed.( Duct & Over Head Tank)

SLEEVES
14 Providing & fixing sleeves (upto 400mm length) in undergroound tank making of pipes with
MS plate including one site of flange of :

a 32mm dia Each 4.00 -

b 50mm dia Each 4.00 -

Page 13 of 14
 LEH ARTS BLOCK STRUCTURAL CIVIL WORKS ( G+1)
-
S.No. Description of Work Unit Quantity Unit Rate Amount

c 80mm dia Each 4.00 -

d 100mm dia Each 4.00 -

e 150mm dia Each 2.00 -

f 200mm dia Each 2.00 -

g 80mm dia vent pipe Each 4.00 -

P MISCELLANEOUS WORKS

Rain Water Pipes

Providing and fixing on wall face unplasticised rigid pvc rain water pipes conforming to IS
13592 type a including jointing with seal ring conforming to IS 5382 leaving 10mm gap for
thermal expansion (i) single socketed pipes including unplasticised PVC moulded fittings/
1 accessories ike couplers,single tee with door ,single tee with out dooor ,Bend 87.5 deg , Shoe
(plain ) ...etc for unplasticised rigid PVC rain water pipes conforming to IS 13592 type A
including jointing with seal ring conforming to IS 5382 leving 10mm gap for thermal
expansionall accessories .etc complet as per drawings , specifications and as directed by EIC

a For 110mm diameter RMT 40.00 -

b For 150mm diameter RMT 40.00 -
c For 200mm diameter RMT 40.00 -

Fabrication and erection of MS (mild steel) Inserts:

Providing , fabricating, cutting & erection of shop coated MS inserts of any thickness with all
fixtures & accessories, rehandling and erecting in walkways, platforms, stair treads, any other
place as directed etc.at all levels and locations bolted,screwed and/or welded including if
2 necessary cutting to required size and shape making holes,notches, openings of required size MT 0.20 -
and shape making the edges smooth, , fixing, welding and preparing the surfaces for painting,
surface cleaning ( both faces), wire brushing, removal of mill scales, dust rust, oil or grease
and surface preparation, shop primer etc. all complete as per specification as specified & as
per drawings & as directed by EIC.

Providing ,Drilling, cleaning and inserting reinforcement (horizontally / vertically) with

HILTI HY 150 or approved equivalent in concrete including injecting chemical and allowing for
3 EACH 16.00 -
curing all as permanufacturer's specification including scaffolding etc. complete.8mm dia upto
100 mm depth.Using owners supply water & Electricity.

Providing ,Drilling, cleaning and inserting reinforcement (horizontally / vertically) with

HILTI HY 150 or approved equivalent in concrete including injecting chemical and allowing for
4 EACH 14.00 -
curing all as permanufacturer's specification including scaffolding etc. complete.10mm dia
upto 100mm depth.Using owners supply water & Electricity.

Providing ,Drilling, cleaning and inserting reinforcement (horizontally / vertically) with

HILTI HY 150 or approved equivalent in concrete including injecting chemical and allowing for
5 EACH 20.00 -
curing all as permanufacturer's specification including scaffolding etc. complete.12mm dia
upto 250mm depth.Using owners supply water & Electricity.

Providing ,Drilling, cleaning and inserting reinforcement (horizontally / vertically) with

HILTI HY 150 orapproved equivalent in concrete including injecting chemical and allowing for
6 EACH 2.00 -
curing all as permanufacturer's specification including scaffolding etc. complete.16mm dia
upto 270mm depth.Using owners supply water & Electricity.

Providing , Drilling, cleaning and inserting reinforcement (horizontally / vertically) with

HILTI HY 150 orapproved equivalent in concrete including injecting chemical and allowing for
7 EACH 4.00 -
curing all as permanufacturer's specification including scaffolding etc. complete.20mm dia
upto 400mm depth.Using owners supply water & Electricity.

Providing , Drilling, cleaning and inserting reinforcement (horizontally / vertically) with

HILTI HY 150 orapproved equivalent in concrete including injecting chemical and allowing for
8 EACH 1.00 -
curing all as permanufacturer's specification including scaffolding etc. complete.25mm dia
upto 400mm depth.Using owners supply water & Electricity.

TOTAL -

Page 14 of 14